2018 KICKS
OWNER’S MANUAL
and MAINTENANCE INFORMATION
For your safety, read carefully and keep in this vehicle.
2018 NISSAN KICKS Owner’s Manual and Maintenance Information
P15-D
P15-D
Printing : April 2018
Publication No.:
Printed in the U.S.A.
OM18EM 0P15U0
‘18
CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65 WARNING
WARNING
Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger
vehicle or off-highway motor vehicle can expose you to
chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,
phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid
breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as
necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area
and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when
servicing your vehicle. For more information go to
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
This manual was prepared to help you un-
derstand the operation and maintenance
of your vehicle so that you may enjoy many
miles (kilometers) of driving pleasure.
Please read through this manual before
operating your vehicle.
A separate Warranty Information Book-
let explains details about the warranties
covering your vehicle. The “Maintenance
and schedules” section of this manual
explains details about maintaining and
servicing your vehicle. Additionally, a
separate Customer Care/Lemon Law
Booklet (U.S. only) will explain how to re-
solve any concerns you may have with
your vehicle, and clarify your rights un-
der your state’s lemon law.
When you require any service or have any
questions, a NISSAN dealer will be glad to
assist you with the extensive resources
available to them.
In addition to factory-installed options,
your vehicle may also be equipped with
additional accessories installed prior to de-
livery. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for details concerning the
particular accessories with which your ve-
hicle is equipped. It is important that you
familiarize yourself with all disclosures,
warnings, cautions and instructions con-
cerning proper use of such accessories
prior to operating the vehicle and/or ac-
cessory. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for details concerning the
particular accessories with which your ve-
hicle is equipped.
Before driving your vehicle, please read this
Owner’s Manual carefully. This will ensure
familiarity with controls and maintenance
requirements assisting you in the safe op-
eration of your vehicle.
WARNING
IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION
REMINDERS!
Follow these important driving rules to
help ensure a safe and comfortable trip
for you and your passengers!
∙ NEVER drive under the influence of al-
cohol or drugs.
∙
ALWAYS observe posted speed limits
and never drive too fast for conditions.
∙ ALWAYS give your full attention to
driving and avoid using vehicle fea-
tures or taking other actions that
could distract you.
∙ ALWAYS use your seat belts and ap-
propriate child restraint systems. Pre-
teen children should be seated in the
rear seat.
∙ ALWAYS provide information about
the proper use of vehicle safety fea-
tures to all occupants of the vehicle.
FOREWORD READ FIRST—THEN DRIVE SAFELY
∙ ALWAYS review this Owner’s Manual
for important safety information.
MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE
This vehicle should not be modified.
Modification could affect its
performance, safety, emissions or du-
rability and may even violate govern-
mental regulations. In addition, dam-
age or performance problems
resulting from modifications may not
be covered under NISSAN warranties.
WARNING
Installing an aftermarket On-Board Di-
agnostic (OBD) plug-in device that uses
the port during normal driving, for ex-
ample remote insurance company
monitoring, remote vehicle diagnostics,
telematics or engine reprogramming,
may cause interference or damage to
vehicle systems. We do not recommend
or endorse the use of any aftermarket
OBD plug-in devices, unless specifically
approved by NISSAN. The vehicle war-
ranty may not cover damage caused by
any aftermarket plug-in device.
This manual includes information for all
features and equipment available on this
model. Features and equipment in your ve-
hicle may vary depending on model, trim
level, options selected, order, date of pro-
duction, region or availability. Therefore,
you may find information about features or
equipment that are not included or in-
stalled on your vehicle.
All information, specifications and illustra-
tions in this manual are those in effect at
the time of printing. NISSAN reserves the
right to change specifications, perfor-
mance, design or component suppliers
without notice and without obligation.
From time to time, NISSAN may update or
revise this manual to provide Owners with
the most accurate information currently
available. Please carefully read and retain
with this manual all revision updates sent
to you by NISSAN to ensure you have ac-
cess to accurate and up-to-date informa-
tion regarding your vehicle. Current ver-
sions of vehicle Owner’s Manuals and any
updates can also be found in the Owner
section of the NISSAN website at
https://owners.nissanusa.com/nowners/
navigation/manualsGuide
. If you have
questions concerning any information in
your Owner’s Manual, contact NISSAN Con-
sumer Affairs. For contact information, re-
fer to the NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PRO-
GRAM page in this Owner’s Manual.
IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT
THIS MANUAL
You will see various symbols in this manual.
They are used in the following ways:
WARNING
This is used to indicate the presence of
a hazard that could cause death or seri-
ous personal injury. To avoid or reduce
the risk, the procedures must be fol-
lowed precisely.
CAUTION
This is used to indicate the presence of
a hazard that could cause minor or
moderate personal injury or damage to
your vehicle. To avoid or reduce the risk,
the procedures must be followed
carefully.
WHEN READING THE MANUAL
If you see this symbol, it means “Do not do
this” or “Do not let this happen.”
If you see a symbol similar to these in an
illustration, it means the arrow points to
the front of the vehicle.
Arrows in an illustration that are similar to
these indicate movement or action.
Arrows in an illustration that are similar to
these call attention to an item in the illus-
tration.
CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATE
ADVISORY
Some vehicle parts, such as lithium bat-
teries, may contain perchlorate material.
The following advisory is provided: “Per-
chlorate Material – special handling may
apply. For additional information, refer
to www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/
perchlorate/”.
© Nissan Mexicana, S. A. de C. V.
All rights reserved. No part of this Owner’s
Manual may be reproduced or stored in a
retrieval system, or transmitted in any
form, or by any means, electronic, me-
chanical, photocopying, recording or oth-
erwise, without the prior written permis-
sion of Nissan Mexicana, S. A. de C. V.
APD1005
NISSAN CARES . . .
Both NISSAN and your NISSAN dealer are dedicated to serving all your automotive needs. Your satisfaction with your vehicle and your
NISSAN dealer are our primary concerns. Your NISSAN dealer is always available to assist you with all your automobile sales and service
needs.
However, if there is something that your
NISSAN dealer cannot assist you with or
you would like to provide NISSAN directly
with comments or questions, please con-
tact the NISSAN Consumer Affairs Depart-
ment using our toll-free number:
For U.S. customers
1-800-NISSAN-1
(1-800-647-7261)
For Canadian customers
1-800-387-0122
The Consumer Affairs Department will ask
for the following information:
– Your name, address, and telephone
number
– Vehicle identification number (attached
to the top of the instrument panel on the
driver’s side)
– Date of purchase
– Current odometer reading
– Your NISSAN dealer’s name
– Your comments or questions
OR
You can write to NISSAN with the informa-
tion at:
For U.S. customers
Nissan North America, Inc.
Consumer Affairs Department
P.O. Box 685003
Franklin, TN 37068-5003
or via e-mail at:
nnaconsumer[email protected]om
For Canadian customers
Nissan Canada Inc.
5290 Orbitor Drive
Mississauga, Ontario L4W 4Z5
or via e-mail at:
information.c[email protected]om
If you prefer, visit us at:
www.nissanusa.com (for U.S. customers)
or
www.nissan.ca (for Canadian customers)
We appreciate your interest in NISSAN and thank you for buying a quality NISSAN vehicle.
NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM
Table of
Contents
Illustrated table of contents
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Instruments and controls
Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Starting and driving
In case of emergency
Appearance and care
Do-it-yourself
Maintenance and schedules
Technical and consumer information
Index
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
0 Illustrated table of contents
Air bags, seat belts and child restraints ..........0-2
Exterior front ....................................0-3
Exterior rear .....................................0-4
Passenger compartment........................0-5
Instrument panel ................................0-6
Engine compartment check locations ...........0-8
Warning and indicator lights .....................0-9
1. Supplemental air bags (P. 1-42)
2. Occupant classification sensor
(weight sensor) (P. 1-42)
3. Head restraints/headrests (P. 1-5)
4. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact
and rollover supplemental air bag
(P. 1-42)
5. Front seat belt with pretensioner(s)
and shoulder height adjuster
(P. 1-10, 1-42)
6. Top tether anchor (located on
seatback) (P. 1-21)
7. LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers
for CHildren) (P. 1-21)
8. Rear seats (P. 1-2)
9. Front seat side-mounted side-
impact supplemental air bags
(P. 1-42)
10. Front seats (P. 1-2)
11. Driver supplemental knee air bag
(P. 1-42)
Refer to the page number indicated in
parentheses for operating details.
LIC3960
AIR BAGS, SEAT BELTS AND CHILD
RESTRAINTS
0-2 Illustrated table of contents
1. Engine hood (P. 3-21)
2. Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-37)
3. Windshield (P. 8-16)
4. Power windows (P. 2-58)
5. Door locks (P. 3-4)
NISSAN Intelligent Key® (P. 3-2)
Keys (P. 3-2)
6. Mirrors (P. 3-28)
Side camera (if so equipped)
(P. 4-15)
7. Tire pressure (P. 8-27)
Flat tire (P. 6-3)
Tire chains (P. 8-27)
8. Headlight and turn signal switch
(P. 2-41)
Replacing bulbs (P. 8-23)
9. Fog light switch (if so equipped)
(P. 2-41)
Daytime Running Lights (DRL)
system (if so equipped) (P. 2-41)
10. Front view camera (if so equipped)
(P. 4-15)
Refer to the page number indicated in
parentheses for operating details.
LIC3972
EXTERIOR FRONT
Illustrated table of contents 0-3
1. Antenna (P. 4-64)
2. Rear window defroster switch
(P. 2-40)
3. High mount stop light (P. 8-23)
4. Rear wiper and washer switch
(P. 2-37)
5. Liftgate release (P. 3-21)
Rearview camera (P. 4-9, 4-15)
6. Replacing bulbs (P. 8-23)
7. Fuel-filler door (P. 3-24)
Fuel-filler cap (P. 3-24)
Fuel recommendation (P. 10-2)
8. Child safety rear door lock (P. 3-4)
Refer to the page number indicated in
parentheses for operating details.
LIC3961
EXTERIOR REAR
0-4 Illustrated table of contents
1. Glove box (P. 2-49)
2. Rearview mirror (P. 3-28)
3. Map lights (P. 2-61)
4. Sun visors (P. 3-26)
5. Luggage hooks (P. 2-49)
6. Center console storage (P. 2-49)
Refer to the page number indicated in
parentheses for operating details.
LII2455
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
Illustrated table of contents 0-5
1. Vents (P. 4-30)
2. Headlight/fog light (if so
equipped)/turn signal switch
(P. 2-41)
3. Driver’s supplemental air bag
(P. 1-42)
Horn (P. 2-45)
4. Meters and gauges (P. 2-4)
Warning and indicator lights
(P. 2-10)
Trip computer (if so equipped)
(P. 2-9)
Vehicle information display
(if so equipped) (P. 2-21)
5. Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-37)
6. Front passenger airbag status
light (P. 1-42)
7. Center display controls (if so
equipped) (P. 4-2, 4-3, 4-42)
Audio controls (P. 4-2, 4-3, 4-42)
8. Hazard warning flasher switch
(P. 6-2)
9. Center display (P. 4-2, 4-3, 4-42)
10. Passenger’s supplemental air bag
(P. 1-42)
11. Glove box (P. 2-49)
LIC3974
INSTRUMENT PANEL
0-6 Illustrated table of contents
12. Climate controls (P. 4-31, 4-39)
Heated seat switches (if so
equipped) (P. 2-45)
13. Shift lever (P. 5-15)
14. Push-button ignition switch (P. 5-9)
15. Power outlet (P. 2-47)
USB connection port (P. 4-2, 4-42)
AUX jack (P. 4-2, 4-42)
16. Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone
System (P. 4-2, 4-68)
Cruise control switches (P. 5-39)
17. Tilt and telescopic steering wheel
lock lever (P. 3-26)
18. Hood release (P. 3-21)
Fuel-filler door release (P. 3-24)
Automatic Emergency Braking
(AEB) switch (if so equipped)
(P 2-46)
19. Steering wheel switches for audio
control (P. 4-2, 4-63)
Control panel and vehicle informa-
tion display switches
(if so equipped) (P. 2-21)
20. Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF
switch (P. 2-47)
Enter/select switch for trip com-
puter (if so equipped) (P. 2-9)
* Refer to the separate NissanConnect®
Owner’s Manual (if so equipped).
Refer to the page number indicated in
parentheses for operating details.
Illustrated table of contents 0-7
HR16DE engine
1. Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-4)
2. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir
(P. 8-10)
3. Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-5)
4. Engine dipstick (P. 8-5)
5. Brake fluid reservoir (P. 8-9)
6. Fuse box (P. 8-18)
7. Battery (P. 8-11)
8. Air cleaner (P. 8-15)
9. Engine drive belt location (P. 8-13)
LDI3247
ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK
LOCATIONS
0-8 Illustrated table of contents
Warning
light
Name Page
or
Anti-lock Braking
System (ABS)
warning light
2-11
Automatic Emer-
gency Braking
(AEB) system
warning light (if so
equipped)
2-11
or
Brake warning
light
2-11
Charge warning
light
2-12
Door open warn-
ing light (if so
equipped)
2-13
Warning
light
Name Page
Engine oil pres-
sure warning light
2-13
High temperature
warning light (red)
(if so equipped)
2-13
Low fuel warning
light (if so
equipped)
2-13
Low tire pressure
warning light
2-13
Low windshield-
washer fluid
warning light (if so
equipped)
2-15
Master warning
light (if so
equipped)
2-15
NISSAN Intelligent
Key® warning light
(if so equipped)
2-16
Warning
light
Name Page
Power steering
warning light
2-16
Seat belt warning
light
2-16
Shift P (Park)
warning light (if so
equipped)
2-17
Supplemental air
bag warning light
2-17
Indicator
light
Name Page
CRUISE indicator
light (if so
equipped)
2-17
Engine start op-
eration indicator
light (if so
equipped)
2-17
WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS
Illustrated table of contents 0-9
Indicator
light
Name Page
Front fog light in-
dicator light
(green) (if so
equipped)
2-18
Front passenger
air bag status
light
2-18
High beam indi-
cator light (blue)
2-18
Malfunction Indi-
cator Light (MIL)
2-18
Overdrive OFF
indicator light (if
so equipped)
2-19
Security indicator
light (if so
equipped)
2-19
SET indicator light
(if so equipped)
2-19
Indicator
light
Name Page
Side light and
headlight indica-
tor light (green)
2-19
Slip indicator light 2-19
SPORT mode indi-
cator light (if so
equipped)
2-19
Turn signal/
hazard indicator
lights
2-20
Vehicle Dynamic
Control (VDC) OFF
indicator light
2-20
0-10 Illustrated table of contents
1 Safety—Seats, seat belts and
supplemental restraint system
Seats............................................ 1-2
Front manual seat adjustment ................1-3
Armrest (driver’s side only).................... 1-4
Folding rear seat ............................. 1-4
Head restraints/headrests ...................... 1-5
Adjustable head restraint/headrest
components ................................. 1-6
Non-adjustable head restraint/
headrest components........................ 1-6
Remove.......................................1-7
Removable (without Bose head
restraint/headrest speaker system
only)...........................................1-7
Install.........................................1-8
Adjust ........................................ 1-8
Seatbelts.......................................1-10
Precautions on seat belt usage ...............1-10
Seat belt warning light........................1-13
Pregnant women.............................1-13
Injured persons...............................1-13
Three-point type seat belt with
retractor .....................................1-13
Seat belt extenders...........................1-17
Seat belt maintenance .......................1-17
Child safety......................................1-18
Infants .......................................1-19
Small children ................................1-19
Larger children ...............................1-19
Child restraints ..................................1-21
Precautions on child restraints ...............1-21
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren) system ............................1-23
Rear-facing child restraint installation
using LATCH.................................1-26
Rear-facing child restraint installation
using the seat belts .........................1-28
Forward-facing child restraint
installation using LATCH .....................1-30
Forward-facing child restraint
installation using the seat belts..............1-34
Booster seats ...............................1-39
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)...........1-42
Precautions on SRS..........................1-42
Supplemental air bag warning labels ........1-63
Supplemental air bag warning light..........1-63
WARNING
∙ Do not ride in a moving vehicle when
the seatback is reclined. This can be
dangerous. The shoulder belt will not
be against your body. In an accident,
you could be thrown into it and re-
ceive neck or other serious injuries.
You could also slide under the lap belt
and receive serious internal injuries.
∙ For the most effective protection
when the vehicle is in motion, the seat
should be upright. Always sit well
back and upright in the seat with both
feet on the floor and adjust the seat
properly. For additional information,
refer to “Precautions on seat belt us-
age” in this section.
∙ After adjustment, gently rock in the
seat to make sure it is securely locked.
∙ Do not leave children unattended in-
side the vehicle. They could unknow-
ingly activate switches or controls or
make the vehicle move. Unattended
children could become involved in se-
rious accidents.
∙ To help avoid risk of injury or death
through unintended operation of the
vehicle and/or its systems, do not
leave children, people who require the
assistance of others or pets unat-
tended in your vehicle. Additionally,
the temperature inside a closed ve-
hicle on a warm day can quickly be-
come high enough to cause a signifi-
cant risk of injury or death to people
and pets.
∙ Do not adjust the driver’s seat while
driving so full attention may be given
to vehicle operation. The seat may
move suddenly and could cause loss
of control of the vehicle.
∙ The seatback should not be reclined
any more than needed for comfort.
Seat belts are most effective when the
passenger sits well back and straight
up in the seat. If the seatback is re-
clined, the risk of sliding under the lap
belt and being injured is increased.
ARS1152
SEATS
1-2 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
CAUTION
When adjusting the seat positions, be
sure not to contact any moving parts to
avoid possible injuries and/or damage.
FRONT MANUAL SEAT
ADJUSTMENT
Your vehicle seats can be adjusted manu-
ally. For additional information about ad-
justing the seats, refer to the steps outlined
in this section.
Forward and backward
Pull the center of the bar up and hold it
while you slide the seat forward or back-
ward to the desired position. Release the
bar to lock the seat in position.
Reclining
To recline the seatback, pull the lever up
and lean back. To bring the seatback for-
ward, pull the lever up and lean your body
forward. Release the lever to lock the seat-
back in position.
The reclining feature allows adjustment of
the seatback for occupants of different sizes
for added comfort and to help obtain proper
seat belt fit. For additional information, refer
to “Precautions on seat belt usage” in this
section. Also, the seatback can be reclined to
allow occupants to rest when the vehicle is
stopped and the shift lever is in P (Park).
LRS2795 LRS2814
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-3
Seat lifter (driver’s seat)
Pull up or push down the adjusting lever to
adjust the seat height until the desired po-
sition is achieved.
ARMREST (driver’s side only)
To use the armrest, pull it down to the rest-
ing position.
䊊
A
Stowed position
䊊
B
Resting position
FOLDING REAR SEAT
Pull the knob
䊊
A
to fold each seatback
down.
WARNING
∙ Never allow anyone to ride in the
cargo area or on the rear seat when it
is in the fold-down position. Use of
these areas by passengers without
proper restraints could result in seri-
ous injury or death in an accident or
sudden stop.
LRS2797 LRS2339 LRS3072
1-4 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
∙ Properly secure all cargo with ropes or
straps to help prevent it from sliding
or shifting. Do not place cargo higher
than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop
or collision, unsecured cargo could
cause personal injury.
∙ When returning the seatbacks to the
upright position, be certain they are
completely secured in the latched po-
sition. If they are not completely se-
cured, passengers may be injured in
an accident or sudden stop.
WARNING
Head restraints/headrests supplement
the other vehicle safety systems. They
may provide additional protection
against injury in certain rear end colli-
sions. Adjustable head
restraints/headrests must be adjusted
properly, as specified in this section.
Check the adjustment after someone
else uses the seat. Do not attach any-
thing to the head restraint/headrest
stalks or remove the head
restraint/headrest. Do not use the seat
if the head restraint/headrest has been
removed. If the head restraint/headrest
was removed, reinstall and properly ad-
just the head restraint/headrest before
an occupant uses the seating position.
Failure to follow these instructions can
reduce the effectiveness of the head
restraints/headrests. This may in-
crease the risk of serious injury or death
in a collision.
The illustration shows the seating posi-
tions equipped with head
restraints/headrests.
䉱 Indicates the seating position is
equipped with a head restraint.
䡲 Indicates the seating position is equipped
with a headrest.
+ Indicates the seating position is not
equipped with a head restraint or headrest
(if applicable).
∙ Your vehicle is equipped with a head
restraint/headrest that may be inte-
grated, adjustable or non-adjustable.
LRS2695
HEAD RESTRAINTS/HEADRESTS
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-5
∙ Adjustable head restraints/headrests
have multiple notches along the stalk(s)
to lock them in a desired adjustment
position.
∙ The non-adjustable head restraints/
headrests have a single locking notch
to secure them to the seat frame.
∙ Proper Adjustment:
– For the adjustable type, align the
head restraint/headrest so the cen-
ter of your ear is approximately level
with the center of the head
restraint/headrest.
– If your ear position is still higher than
the recommended alignment, place
the head restraint/headrest at the
highest position.
∙ If the head restraint/headrest has been
removed, ensure that it is reinstalled
and locked in place before riding in that
designated seating position.
ADJUSTABLE HEAD RESTRAINT/
HEADREST COMPONENTS
1. Removable head restraint/headrest
2. Multiple notches
3. Lock knob
4. Stalks
NON-ADJUSTABLE HEAD
RESTRAINT/HEADREST
COMPONENTS
1. Removable head restraint/headrest
2. Single notch
3. Lock knob
4. Stalks
LRS2300 LRS2299
1-6 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
REMOVE
Use the following procedure to remove the
head restraint/headrest:
1. Pull the head restraint/headrest up to
the highest position.
2. Push and hold the lock knob.
3. Remove the head restraint/headrest
from the seat.
4. Store the head restraint/headrest
properly in a secure place so it is not
loose in the vehicle.
5. Reinstall and properly adjust the head
restraint/headrest before an occupant
uses the seating position.
REMOVABLE (without Bose head
restraint/headrest speaker
system only)
CAUTION
Do not remove head restraint/headrest
from vehicles equipped with Bose head
restraint/headrest speaker system. Re-
moval may damage the system wiring.
LRS2302 LRS2302
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-7
INSTALL
1. Align the head restraint/headrest
stalks with the holes in the seat. Make
sure that the head restraint/headrest is
facing the correct direction. The stalk
with the notch (notches)
䊊
1
must be
installed in the hole with the lock knob
䊊
2
.
2. Push and hold the lock knob and push
the head restraint/headrest down.
3. Properly adjust the head restraint/
headrest before an occupant uses the
seating position.
ADJUST
For adjustable head restraint/headrest
Adjust the head restraint/headrest so the
center is level with the center of your ears. If
your ear position is still higher than the
recommended alignment, place the head
restraint/headrest at the highest position.
For non-adjustable head restraint/
headrest
Make sure the head restraint/headrest is
positioned so the lock knob is engaged in
the notch before riding in that designated
seating position.
LRS2303 WRS0134 LRS2351
1-8 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Raise
To raise the head restraint/headrest, pull it
up.
Make sure the head restraint/headrest is
positioned so the lock knob is engaged in
the notch before riding in that designated
seating position.
Lower
To lower, push and hold the lock knob and
push the head restraint/headrest down.
Make sure the head restraint/headrest is
positioned so the lock knob is engaged in
the notch before riding in that designated
seating position.
LRS2305 LRS2306
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-9
PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT
USAGE
If you are wearing your seat belt properly
adjusted and you are sitting upright and
well back in your seat with both feet on the
floor, your chances of being injured or killed
in a collision and/or the severity of injury
may be greatly reduced. NISSAN strongly
encourages you and all of your passengers
to buckle up every time you drive, even if
your seating position includes a supple-
mental air bag.
Most U.S. states and Canadian provinces
or territories specify that seat belts be
worn at all times when a vehicle is being
driven.
SSS0136
SEAT BELTS
1-10 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
WARNING
∙ Every person who drives or rides in
this vehicle should use a seat belt at
all times. Children should be in the
rear seats and in an appropriate
restraint.
WARNING
∙ The seat belt should be properly ad-
justed to a snug fit. Failure to do so
may reduce the effectiveness of the
entire restraint system and increase
the chance or severity of injury in an
accident. Serious injury or death can
occur if the seat belt is not worn
properly.
SSS0134 SSS0016
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-11
WARNING
∙ Always route the shoulder belt over
your shoulder and across your chest.
Never put the belt behind your back,
under your arm or across your neck.
The belt should be away from your
face and neck, but not falling off your
shoulder.
∙ Position the lap belt as low and snug
as possible AROUND THE HIPS, NOT
THE WAIST. A lap belt worn too high
could increase the risk of internal inju-
ries in an accident.
∙ Be sure the seat belt tongue is se-
curely fastened to the proper buckle.
∙ Do not wear the seat belt inside out or
twisted. Doing so may reduce its
effectiveness.
∙ Do not allow more than one person to
use the same seat belt.
∙ Never carry more people in the vehicle
than there are seat belts.
∙ If the seat belt warning light glows
continuously while the ignition is
turned ON with all doors closed and all
seat belts fastened, it may indicate a
malfunction in the system. Have the
system checked. It is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this
service.
∙ No changes should be made to the
seat belt system. For example, do not
modify the seat belt, add material, or
install devices that may change the
seat belt routing or tension. Doing so
may affect the operation of the seat
belt system. Modifying or tampering
with the seat belt system may result
in serious personal injury.
∙ Once seat belt pretensioner(s) have
activated, they cannot be reused and
must be replaced together with the
retractor. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
∙ All seat belt assemblies, including re-
tractors and attaching hardware,
should be inspected after any colli-
sion. It is recommended that you visit
a NISSAN dealer for this service.
NISSAN recommends that all seat belt
assemblies in use during a collision be
replaced unless the collision was mi-
nor and the belts show no damage
and continue to operate properly.
Seat belt assemblies not in use during
a collision should also be inspected
and replaced if either damage or im-
proper operation is noted.
∙ All child restraints and attaching
hardware should be inspected after
any collision. Always follow the re-
straint manufacturer’s inspection in-
structions and replacement recom-
mendations. The child restraints
should be replaced if they are
damaged.
SSS0014
1-12 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
SEAT BELT WARNING LIGHT
Both the driver’s and passenger’s front
seats are equipped with a seat belt warn-
ing light. The warning light, located on the
instrument panel, will show the status of
the driver and passenger seat belt.
NOTE:
The front passenger seat belt warning
light will not light up if the seat is not
occupied.
For additional information, refer to “Warn-
ing lights, indicator lights and audible re-
minders” in the “Instruments and controls”
section of this manual.
PREGNANT WOMEN
NISSAN recommends that pregnant
women use seat belts. The seat belt should
be worn snug and always position the lap
belt as low as possible around the hips, not
the waist. Place the shoulder belt over your
shoulder and across your chest. Never run
the lap/shoulder belt over your abdominal
area. Contact your doctor for specific rec-
ommendations.
INJURED PERSONS
NISSAN recommends that injured persons
use seat belts. Check with your doctor for
specific recommendations.
THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELT
WITH RETRACTOR
WARNING
∙ Every person who drives or rides in
this vehicle should use a seat belt at
all times.
∙ Do not ride in a moving vehicle when
the seatback is reclined. This can be
dangerous. The shoulder belt will not
be against your body. In an accident,
you could be thrown into it and re-
ceive neck or other serious injuries.
You could also slide under the lap belt
and receive serious internal injuries.
∙ For the most effective protection
when the vehicle is in motion, the seat
should be upright. Always sit well
back and upright in the seat with both
feet on the floor and adjust the seat
belt properly.
LRS0786
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-13
∙ Do not allow children to play with the
seat belts. Most seating positions are
equipped with Automatic Locking Re-
tractor (ALR) mode seat belts. If the
seat belt becomes wrapped around a
child’s neck with the ALR mode acti-
vated, the child can be seriously in-
jured or killed if the seat belt retracts
and becomes tight. This can occur
even if the vehicle is parked. Unbuckle
the seat belt to release the child. If the
seat belt cannot be unbuckled or is
already unbuckled, release the child
by cutting the seat belt with a suitable
tool (such as a knife or scissors) to
release the seat belt.
Fastening the seat belts
1. Adjust the seat. For additional informa-
tion, refer to “Seats” in this section.
2. Slowly pull the seat belt out of the re-
tractor and insert the tongue into the
buckle
䊊
A
until you hear and feel the
latch engage.
∙ The retractor is designed to lock
during a sudden stop or on impact.
A slow pulling motion permits the
seat belt to move, and allows you
some freedom of movement in the
seat.
∙ If the seat belt cannot be pulled
from its fully retracted position,
firmly pull the belt and release it.
Then smoothly pull the belt out of
the retractor.
LRS2795 LRS3087
1-14 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
3. Position the lap belt portion low and
snug on the hips
䊊
B
as shown.
4. Pull the shoulder belt portion toward
the retractor to take up extra slack
䊊
C
.
Be sure the shoulder belt is routed over
your shoulder and across your chest.
The front passenger seat and the rear
seating positions’ three-point seat belts
have two modes of operation:
∙ Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)
∙ Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
The ELR mode allows the seat belt to ex-
tend and retract to allow the driver and
passengers some freedom of movement
in the seat. The ELR locks the seat belt
when the vehicle slows down rapidly or
during certain impacts.
The ALR mode (child restraint mode) locks
the seat belt for child restraint installation.
When the ALR mode is activated, the seat
belt cannot be extended again until the
seat belt tongue is detached from the
buckle and fully retracted. The seat belt re-
turns to the ELR mode after the seat belt
fully retracts. For additional information, re-
fer to “Child restraints” in this section.
The ALR mode should be used only for
child restraint installation. During nor-
mal seat belt use by an occupant, the ALR
mode should not be activated. If it is ac-
tivated, it may cause uncomfortable seat
belt tension. It can also change the op-
eration of the front passenger air bag.
For additional information, refer to
“Supplemental air bag warning light” in
this section.
WARNING
When fastening the seat belts, be cer-
tain that the seatbacks are completely
secured in the latched position. If they
are not completely secured, passengers
may be injured in an accident or sudden
stop.
LRS2675
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-15
Unfastening the seat belts
To unfasten the seat belt, press the button
on the buckle
䊊
1
. The seat belt automati-
cally retracts.
Checking seat belt operation
Seat belt retractors are designed to lock
seat belt movement by two separate
methods:
∙ When the seat belt is pulled quickly from
the retractor
∙ When the vehicle slows down rapidly
To increase your confidence in the seat
belts, check the operation as follows:
∙ Grasp the shoulder belt and pull for-
ward quickly. The retractor should lock
and restrict further belt movement.
If the retractor does not lock during this
check, get the system checked. It is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service, or to learn more about seat
belt operation.
Shoulder belt height adjustment
(front seats)
The shoulder belt anchor height should be
adjusted to the position best for you. For
additional information, refer to “Precau-
tions on seat belt usage” in this section. To
adjust, pull out the adjustment button
䊊
1
and move the shoulder belt anchor to the
desired position
䊊
2
, so the belt passes over
the center of the shoulder. The belt should
be away from your face and neck, but not
falling off your shoulder. Release the ad-
justment button to lock the shoulder belt
anchor into position.
WRS0139 LRS0242
1-16 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
WARNING
∙ After adjustment, release the adjust-
ment button and try to move the
shoulder belt anchor up and down to
make sure it is securely fixed in
position.
∙ The shoulder belt anchor height
should be adjusted to the position
best for you. Failure to do so may re-
duce the effectiveness of the entire
restraint system and increase the
chance or severity of injury in an
accident.
Seat belt hook
When the seat belt is not in use and when
folding down the rear seats, hook the rear
seat belts on the seat belt hooks.
SEAT BELT EXTENDERS
If, because of body size or driving position, it
is not possible to properly fit the
lap/shoulder belt and fasten it, an extender
that is compatible with the installed seat
belts is available for purchase. The ex-
tender adds approximately 8 in (200 mm)
of length and may be used for either the
driver or front passenger seating position.
It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for assistance with purchasing an
extender if an extender is required.
WARNING
∙ Only NISSAN seat belt extenders,
made by the same company which
made the original equipment seat
belts, should be used with NISSAN
seat belts.
∙ Adults and children who can use the
standard seat belt should not use an
extender. Such unnecessary use
could result in serious personal injury
in the event of an accident.
∙ Never use seat belt extenders to in-
stall child restraints. If the child re-
straint is not secured properly, the
child could be seriously injured or
killed in a collision or a sudden stop.
SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE
∙ To clean the seat belt webbing, apply
a mild soap solution or any solution rec-
ommended for cleaning upholstery or
carpet. Then wipe with a cloth and allow
the seat belts to dry in the shade. Do not
allow the seat belts to retract until they
are completely dry.
LRS3082
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-17
∙ If dirt builds up in the shoulder belt
guide of the seat belt anchors, the
seat belts may retract slowly. Wipe the
shoulder belt guide with a clean, dry
cloth.
∙ Periodically check to see that the seat
belt and the metal components, such
as buckles, tongues, retractors, flexible
wires and anchors, work properly. If
loose parts, deterioration, cuts or other
damage on the webbing is found, the
entire seat belt assembly should be re-
placed.
WARNING
Do not allow children to play with the
seat belts. Most seating positions are
equipped with Automatic Locking Re-
tractor (ALR) mode seat belts. If the seat
belt becomes wrapped around a child’s
neck with the ALR mode activated, the
child can be seriously injured or killed if
the seat belt retracts and becomes
tight. This can occur even if the vehicle
is parked. Unbuckle the seat belt to re-
lease the child. If the seat belt cannot be
unbuckled or is already unbuckled, re-
lease the child by cutting the seat belt
with a suitable tool (such as a knife or
scissors) to release the seat belt.
Children need adults to help protect
them. They need to be properly re-
strained.
In addition to the general information in
this manual, child safety information is
available from many other sources, includ-
ing doctors, teachers, government traffic
safety offices, and community organiza-
tions. Every child is different, so be sure to
learn the best way to transport your child.
There are three basic types of child re-
straint systems:
∙ Rear-facing child restraints
∙ Forward-facing child restraints
∙ Booster seats
The proper restraint depends on the child’s
size. Generally, infants up to about 1 year
and less than 20 lbs. (9 kg) should be placed
in rear-facing child restraints. Forward-
facing child restraints are available for chil-
dren who outgrow rear-facing child re-
straints and are at least 1 year old. Booster
seats are used to help position a vehicle
lap/shoulder belt on a child who can no
longer use a forward-facing child restraint.
WARNING
Infants and children need special pro-
tection. The vehicle’s seat belts may not
fit them properly. The shoulder belt may
come too close to the face or neck. The
lap belt may not fit over their small hip
bones. In an accident, an improperly fit-
ting seat belt could cause serious or fa-
tal injury. Always use appropriate child
restraints.
CHILD SAFETY
1-18 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or
territories require the use of approved child
restraints for infants and small children. For
additional information, refer to “Child re-
straints” in this section.
A child restraint may be secured in the ve-
hicle by using either the LATCH (Lower An-
chors and Tethers for CHildren) system or
with the vehicle seat belt. For additional
information, refer to “Child restraints” in this
section.
NISSAN recommends that all pre-teens
and children be restrained in the rear
seat. Studies show that children are
safer when properly restrained in the
rear seat than in the front seat.
This is especially important because
your vehicle has a supplemental re-
straint system (air bag system) for the
front passenger. For additional informa-
tion, refer to “Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS)” in this section.
INFANTS
Infants up to at least 1 year old should be
placed in a rear-facing child restraint.
NISSAN recommends that infants be
placed in child restraints that comply with
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or
Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
You should choose a child restraint that fits
your vehicle and always follow the manu-
facturer’s instructions for installation and
use.
SMALL CHILDREN
Children that are over 1 year old and weigh
at least 20 lbs. (9 kg) should remain in a
rear-facing child restraint as long as pos-
sible up to the height or weight limit of the
child restraint. Children who outgrow the
height or weight limit of the rear-facing
child restraint and are at least 1 year old
should be secured in a forward-facing child
restraint with a harness. Refer to the manu-
facturer’s instructions for minimum and
maximum weight and height recommen-
dations. NISSAN recommends that small
children be placed in child restraints that
comply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards. You should choose a
child restraint that fits your vehicle and al-
ways follow the manufacturer’s instruc-
tions for installation and use.
LARGER CHILDREN
Children should remain in a forward-facing
child restraint with a harness until they
reach the maximum height or weight limit
allowed by the child restraint manufac-
turer.
Once a child outgrows the height or weight
limit of the harness-equipped forward-
facing child restraint, NISSAN recommends
that the child be placed in a commercially
available booster seat to obtain proper
seat belt fit. For a seat belt to fit properly, the
booster seat should raise the child so that
the shoulder belt is properly positioned
across the chest and the top, middle por-
tion of the shoulder. The shoulder belt
should not cross the neck or face and
should not fall off the shoulder. The lap belt
should lie snugly across the lower hips or
upper thighs, not the abdomen. A booster
seat can only be used in seating positions
that have a three-point type seat belt. The
booster seat should fit the vehicle seat and
have a label certifying that it complies with
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or
Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-19
A booster seat should be used until the
child can pass the seat belt fit test below:
∙ Are the child’s back and hips against the
vehicle seatback?
∙ Is the child able to sit without slouch-
ing?
∙ Do the child’s knees bend easily over
the front edge of the seat with feet flat
on the floor?
∙ Can the child safely wear the seat belt
(lap belt low and snug across the hips
and shoulder belt across mid-chest
and shoulder)?
∙ Is the child able to use the properly ad-
justed head restraint/headrest?
∙ Will the child be able to stay in position
for the entire ride?
If you answered no to any of these ques-
tions, the child should remain in a booster
seat using a three-point type seat belt.
NOTE:
Laws in some communities may follow
different guidelines. Check local and
state regulations to confirm your child is
using the correct restraint system before
traveling.
WARNING
Never let a child stand or kneel on any
seat and do not allow a child in the
cargo area. The child could be seriously
injured or killed in a sudden stop or
collision.
LRS2690
1-20 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
PRECAUTIONS ON CHILD
RESTRAINTS
WARNING
∙ Failure to follow the warnings and in-
structions for proper use and installa-
tion of child restraints could result in
serious injury or death of a child or
other passengers in a sudden stop or
collision:
– The child restraint must be used
and installed properly. Always fol-
low all of the child restraint manu-
facturer’s instructions for installa-
tion and use.
– Infants and children should never
be held on anyone’s lap. Even the
strongest adult cannot resist the
forces of a collision.
– Do not put a seat belt around both
a child and another passenger.
– NISSAN recommends that all child
restraints be installed in the rear
seat. Studies show that children
are safer when properly restrained
in the rear seat than in the front
seat. If you must install a forward-
facing child restraint in the front
seat, refer to “Forward-facing child
restraint installation using the seat
belts” in this section.
– Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air
Bag System, never install a rear-
facing child restraint in the front
seat. An inflating air bag could se-
riously injure or kill a child. A rear-
facing child restraint must only be
used in the rear seat.
ARS1098 WRS0256
CHILD RESTRAINTS
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-21
– Be sure to purchase a child re-
straint that will fit the child and ve-
hicle. Some child restraints may
not fit properly in your vehicle.
– Child restraint anchorages are de-
signed to withstand only loads im-
posed by correctly fitted child re-
straints. Under no circumstances
are they to be used to attach adult
seat belts, or other items or equip-
ment to the vehicle. Doing so could
damage the child restraint anchor-
ages. The child restraint will not be
properly installed using the dam-
aged anchorage, and a child could
be seriously injured or killed in a
collision.
– Never use the anchor points for
adult seat belts or other items.
– A child restraint with a top tether
strap should not be used in the
front passenger seat.
– Keep seatbacks as upright as pos-
sible after fitting the child
restraint.
– Infants and children should always
be placed in an appropriate child
restraint while in the vehicle.
∙ When the child restraint is not in use,
keep it secured with the LATCH system
or a seat belt. In a sudden stop or col-
lision, loose objects can injure occu-
pants or damage the vehicle.
CAUTION
A child restraint in a closed vehicle can
become very hot. Check the seating
surface and buckles before placing a
child in the child restraint.
This vehicle is equipped with a universal
child restraint anchor system, referred to
as the LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers
for CHildren) system. Some child restraints
include rigid or webbing-mounted attach-
ments that can be connected to these an-
chors. For additional information, refer to
“LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren) system” in this section.
If you do not have a LATCH compatible
child restraint, the vehicle seat belts can be
used.
Several manufacturers offer child re-
straints for infants and children of various
sizes. When selecting any child restraint,
keep the following points in mind:
∙ Choose only a restraint with a label cer-
tifying that it complies with Federal Mo-
tor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Cana-
dian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.
∙ Check the child restraint in your vehicle
to be sure it is compatible with the vehi-
cle’s seat and seat belt system.
∙ If the child restraint is compatible with
your vehicle, place your child in the child
restraint and check the various adjust-
ments to be sure the child restraint is
compatible with your child. Choose a
child restraint that is designed for your
child’s height and weight. Always follow
all recommended procedures.
∙ If the combined weight of the child and
child restraint is less than 65 lbs.
(29.5 kg), you may use the LATCH an-
chors to install the child restraint (not
both at the same time).
∙ If the combined weight of the child and
child restraint is greater than 65 lbs.
(29.5 kg), use the vehicle’s seat belt (not
the lower anchors) to install the child
restraint.
∙ Be sure to follow the child restraint
manufacturer’s instructions for installa-
tion.
1-22 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or
territories require that infants and small
children be restrained in an approved
child restraint at all times while the ve-
hicle is being operated. Canadian law re-
quires the top tether strap on forward-
facing child restraints be secured to the
designated anchor point on the vehicle.
LATCH (Lower Anchors and
Tethers for CHildren) SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with special an-
chor points that are used with LATCH sys-
tem compatible child restraints. This sys-
tem may also be referred to as the ISOFIX
or ISOFIX compatible system. With this sys-
tem, you do not have to use a vehicle seat
belt to secure the child restraint unless the
combined weight of the child and child re-
straint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the com-
bined weight of the child and child restraint
is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use the ve-
hicle’s seat belt (not the lower anchors) to
install the child restraint. Be sure to follow
the child restraint manufacturer’s instruc-
tions for installation.
The LATCH anchor points are provided to
install child restraints in the rear outboard
seating positions only. Do not attempt to
install a child restraint in the center position
using the LATCH anchors.
LATCH lower anchor
WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and in-
structions for proper use and installa-
tion of child restraints could result in
serious injury or death of a child or
other passengers in a sudden stop or
collision:
– Attach LATCH system compatible
child restraints only at the loca-
tions shown in the illustration.
– Do not secure a child restraint in
the center rear seating position us-
ing the LATCH lower anchors. The
child restraint will not be secured
properly.
LATCH system lower anchor locations
LRS3073
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-23
– Inspect the lower anchors by in-
serting your fingers into the lower
anchor area. Feel to make sure
there are no obstructions over the
anchors such as seat belt webbing
or seat cushion material. The child
restraint will not be secured prop-
erly if the lower anchors are
obstructed.
Child restraint anchorages are de-
signed to withstand only those loads
imposed by correctly fitted child re-
straints. Under no circumstances are
they to be used to attach adult seat
belts, or other items or equipment to
the vehicle. Doing so could damage the
child restraint anchorages. The child re-
straint will not be properly installed us-
ing the damaged anchorage, and a
child could be seriously injured or killed
in a collision.
LATCH lower anchor location
The LATCH lower anchors are located as
shown. A label is attached to the seatback
to help you locate the LATCH lower an-
chors.
Installing child restraint LATCH
lower anchor attachments
LATCH compatible child restraints include
two rigid or webbing-mounted attach-
ments that can be connected to two an-
chors located at certain seating positions
in your vehicle. With this system, you do not
have to use a vehicle seat belt to secure the
child restraint. Check your child restraint for
a label stating that it is compatible with
LATCH. This information may also be in the
instructions provided by the child restraint
manufacturer.
LATCH lower anchor location
LRS3036
LATCH webbing-mounted attachment
LRS0661
1-24 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
When installing a child restraint, carefully
read and follow the instructions in this
manual and those supplied with the child
restraint.
Top tether anchor
WARNING
If the cargo cover (if so equipped) con-
tacts the top tether strap when it is at-
tached to the top tether anchor, remove
the cargo cover from the vehicle or se-
cure it on the cargo floor below its at-
tachment location. If the cargo cover is
not removed, it may damage the top
tether strap during a collision. A child
could be seriously injured or killed in a
collision if the child restraint top tether
strap is damaged.
Top tether anchor point locations
Anchor points are located on the back of
the rear seats.
LATCH rigid-mounted attachment
LRS0662
LRS3063
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-25
WARNING
Child restraint anchorages are de-
signed to withstand only those loads
imposed by correctly fitted child re-
straints. Under no circumstances are
they to be used to attach adult seat
belts, or other items or equipment to
the vehicle. Doing so could damage the
child restraint anchorages. The child re-
straint will not be properly installed us-
ing the damaged anchorage, and a
child could be seriously injured or killed
in a collision.
REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT
INSTALLATION USING LATCH
For additional information, refer to all Warn-
ings and Cautions in the “Child safety” and
“Child restraints” sections of this manual
before installing a child restraint.
Do not use the lower anchors if the com-
bined weight of the child and the child re-
straint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the com-
bined weight of the child and the child
restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use
the vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower an-
chors) to install the child restraint. Be sure
to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions for installation.
Follow these steps to install a rear-facing
child restraint using the LATCH system:
1. Position the child restraint on the seat.
Always follow the child restraint manu-
facturer’s instructions.
2. Secure the child restraint anchor at-
tachments to the LATCH lower an-
chors. Check to make sure the LATCH
attachment is properly attached to the
lower anchors.
Rear-facing webbing-mounted – step 2
LRS2997
1-26 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
3. For child restraints that are equipped
with webbing-mounted attachments,
remove any additional slack from the
anchor attachments. Press downward
and rearward firmly in the center of the
child restraint with your hand to com-
press the vehicle seat cushion and
seatback while tightening the webbing
of the anchor attachments.
4.
After attaching the child restraint, test it
before you place the child in it. Push it
from side to side while holding the child
restraint near the LATCH attachment
path. The child restraint should not
move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from
side to side. Try to tug it forward and
check to see if the LATCH attachment
holds the restraint in place. If the re-
straint is not secure, tighten the LATCH
attachment as necessary, or put the re-
straint in another seat and test it again.
You may need to try a different child
restraint or try installing by using the
Rear-facing rigid-mounted – step 2
LRS2996
Rear-facing – step 3
LRS0673
Rear-facing – step 4
LRS0674
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-27
vehicle seat belt (if applicable). Not all
child restraints fit in all types of vehicles.
5. Check to make sure the child restraint
is properly secured prior to each use. If
the child restraint is loose, repeat
steps 1 through 4.
REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT
INSTALLATION USING THE SEAT
BELTS
WARNING
The three-point seat belt with Auto-
matic Locking Retractor (ALR) must be
used when installing a child restraint.
Failure to use the ALR mode will result in
the child restraint not being properly
secured. The restraint could tip over or
be loose and cause injury to a child in a
sudden stop or collision. Also, it can
change the operation of the front pas-
senger air bag. For additional informa-
tion, refer to “Front passenger air bag
and status light” in this section.
For additional information, refer to all Warn-
ings and Cautions in the “Child safety” and
“Child restraints” sections of this manual
before installing a child restraint.
Do not use the lower anchors if the com-
bined weight of the child and the child re-
straint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the com-
bined weight of the child and the child
restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use
the vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower an-
chors) to install the child restraint. Be sure
to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions for installation.
Follow these steps to install a rear-facing
child restraint using the vehicle seat belts in
the rear seats:
1. Child restraints for infants must be
used in the rear-facing direction and
therefore must not be used in the
front seat. Position the child restraint
on the seat. Always follow the child re-
straint manufacturer’s instructions.
Rear-facing – step 1
WRS0256
1-28 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
2. Route the seat belt tongue through the
child restraint and insert it into the
buckle until you hear and feel the latch
engage. Be sure to follow the child re-
straint manufacturer’s instructions for
belt routing.
3. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is
fully extended. At this time, the seat belt
retractor is in the ALR mode (child re-
straint mode). It reverts to the ELR
mode when the seat belt is fully re-
tracted.
4. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on
the shoulder belt to remove any slack
in the belt.
Rear-facing – step 2
WRS0761
Rear-facing – step 3
LRS0669
Rear-facing – step 4
LRS0670
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-29
5. Remove any additional slack from the
seat belt; press downward and rear-
ward firmly in the center of the child
restraint to compress the vehicle seat
cushion and seatback while pulling up
on the seat belt.
6. After attaching the child restraint, test
it before you place the child in it. Push it
from side to side while holding the child
restraint near the seat belt path. The
child restraint should not move more
than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to side.
Try to tug it forward and check to see if
the belt holds the restraint in place. If
the restraint is not secure, tighten the
seat belt as necessary, or put the re-
straint in another seat and test it again.
You may need to try a different child
restraint. Not all child restraints fit in all
types of vehicles.
7. Check to make sure that the child re-
straint is properly secured prior to each
use. If the seat belt is not locked, repeat
steps 2 through 6.
After the child restraint is removed and the
seat belt fully retracted, the ALR mode
(child restraint mode) is canceled.
FORWARD-FACING CHILD
RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING
LATCH
For additional information, refer to all Warn-
ings and Cautions in the “Child safety” and
“Child restraints” sections of this manual
before installing a child restraint.
Do not use the lower anchors if the com-
bined weight of the child and the child re-
straint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the com-
bined weight of the child and the child
restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg) use
the vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower an-
chors) to install the child restraint. Be sure
to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions for installation.
Rear-facing – step 5
WRS0762
Rear-facing – step 6
WRS0763
1-30 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Follow these steps to install a forward-
facing child restraint using the LATCH sys-
tem:
1. Position the child restraint on the seat.
Always follow the child restraint manu-
facturer’s instructions.
2. Secure the child restraint anchor at-
tachments to the LATCH lower an-
chors. Check to make sure the LATCH
attachment is properly attached to the
lower anchors.
If the child restraint is equipped with a
top tether strap, route the top tether
strap and secure the tether strap to
the tether anchor point. For additional
information, refer to “Installing top
tether strap” in this section. Do not in-
stall child restraints that require the
use of a top tether strap in seating po-
sitions that do not have a top tether
anchor.
3. The back of the child restraint should
be secured against the vehicle seat-
back.
If necessary, adjust or remove the head
restraint/headrest to obtain the cor-
rect child restraint fit. If the head
restraint/headrest is removed, store it
in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall
the head restraint/headrest when
the child restraint is removed. For ad-
ditional information, refer to “Head
restraints/headrests” in this section for
Forward-facing webbing-mounted –
step 2
LRS2995
Forward-facing rigid-mounted – step 2
LRS2994
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-31
head restraint/headrest adjustment
information.
If the seating position does not have
an adjustable head restraint/headrest
and it is interfering with the proper
child restraint fit, try another seating
position or a different child restraint.
4. For child restraints that are equipped
with webbing-mounted attachments,
remove any additional slack from the
anchor attachments. Press downward
and rearward firmly in the center of the
child restraint with your knee to com-
press the vehicle seat cushion and
seatback while tightening the webbing
of the anchor attachments.
5. Tighten the tether strap according to
the manufacturer’s instructions to re-
move any slack.
6. After attaching the child restraint, test
it before you place the child in it. Push it
from side to side while holding the child
restraint near the LATCH attachment
path. The child restraint should not
move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from
side to side. Try to tug it forward and
check to see if the LATCH attachment
holds the restraint in place. If the re-
straint is not secure, tighten the LATCH
attachment as necessary, or put the
restraint in another seat and test it
again. You may need to try a different
child restraint. Not all child restraints fit
in all types of vehicles.
Forward-facing – step 4
LRS0671
Forward-facing – step 6
WRS0697
1-32 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
7. Check to make sure the child restraint
is properly secured prior to each use. If
the child restraint is loose, repeat
steps 1 through 6.
䊊
1
Top tether strap
䊊
2
Anchor point
Installing top tether strap
The child restraint top tether strap must be
used when installing the child restraint with
the LATCH lower anchor attachments.
First, secure the child restraint with the
LATCH lower anchors (rear outboard posi-
tions only).
Rear bench seat
OUTBOARD SEATING POSITIONS
1. Remove the head restraint/headrest
and store it in a secure place. Be sure to
reinstall the head restraint/headrest
when the child restraint is removed. For
additional information, refer to “Head
restraints/headrests” in this section.
2. Position the top tether strap as shown.
3. Secure the tether strap to the tether
anchor point as shown.
4. Tighten the tether strap according to
the manufacturer’s instructions to re-
move any slack.
If you have any questions when install-
ing a top tether strap, it is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this
service.
Rear seats
LRS2803
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-33
WARNING
Child restraint anchorages are de-
signed to withstand only those loads
imposed by correctly fitted child re-
straints. Under no circumstances are
they to be used to attach adult seat
belts, or other items or equipment to
the vehicle. Doing so could damage the
child restraint anchorages. The child re-
straint will not be properly installed us-
ing the damaged anchorage, and a
child could be seriously injured or killed
in a collision.
FORWARD-FACING CHILD
RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING
THE SEAT BELTS
WARNING
The three-point seat belt with Auto-
matic Locking Retractor (ALR) must be
used when installing a child restraint.
Failure to use the ALR mode will result in
the child restraint not being properly
secured. The restraint could tip over or
be loose and cause injury to a child in a
sudden stop or collision. Also, it can
change the operation of the front pas-
senger air bag. For additional informa-
tion, refer to “Front passenger air bag
and status light” in this section.
Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the
“Child safety” and “Child restraints” sections
before installing a child restraint.
Do not use the lower anchors if the com-
bined weight of the child and the child re-
straint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the com-
bined weight of the child and the child
restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg) use
the vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower an-
chors) to install the child restraint. Be sure
to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions for installation.
Forward-facing (front passenger seat) –
step 1
WRS0699
1-34 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Follow these steps to install a forward-
facing child restraint using the vehicle seat
belt in the rear seats or in the front passen-
ger seat:
1. If you must install a child restraint in
the front seat, it should be placed in a
forward-facing direction only. Move
the seat to the rearmost position.
Child restraints for infants must be
used in the rear-facing direction and,
therefore, must not be used in the
front seat.
2. Position the child restraint on the seat.
Always follow the child restraint manu-
facturer’s instructions.
The back of the child restraint should
be secured against the vehicle seat-
back.
If necessary, adjust or remove the head
restraint/headrest to obtain the cor-
rect child restraint fit. If the head
restraint/headrest is removed, store it
in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall
the head restraint/headrest when
the child restraint is removed. For ad-
ditional information, refer to “Head
restraints/headrests” in this section for
head restraint/headrest adjustment,
removal and installation information.
If the seating position does not have
an adjustable head restraint/headrest
and it is interfering with the proper
child restraint fit, try another seating
position or a different child restraint.
3. Route the seat belt tongue through the
child restraint and insert it into the
buckle until you hear and feel the latch
engage. Be sure to follow the child re-
straint manufacturer’s instructions for
belt routing.
If the child restraint is equipped with a
top tether strap, route the top tether
strap and secure the tether strap to
the tether anchor point (rear seat in-
stallation only). For additional informa-
tion, refer to “Installing top tether strap”
in this section.
Forward-facing – step 3
WRS0680
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-35
Do not install child restraints that re-
quire the use of a top tether strap in
seating positions that do not have a
top tether anchor.
4. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is
fully extended. At this time, the seat belt
retractor is in the Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR) mode (child restraint
mode). It reverts to Emergency Locking
Retractor (ELR) mode when the seat
belt is fully retracted.
5. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on
the shoulder belt to remove any slack
in the belt.
Forward-facing – step 4
LRS0667
Forward-facing – step 5
LRS0668
1-36 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
6. Remove any additional slack from the
seat belt; press downward and rear-
ward firmly in the center of the child
restraint with your knee to compress
the vehicle seat cushion and seatback
while pulling up on the seat belt.
7. Tighten the tether strap according to
the manufacturer’s instructions to re-
move any slack.
8. After attaching the child restraint, test
it before you place the child in it. Push it
from side to side while holding the child
restraint near the seat belt path. The
child restraint should not move more
than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to side.
Try to tug it forward and check to see if
the belt holds the restraint in place. If
the restraint is not secure, tighten the
seat belt as necessary, or put the re-
straint in another seat and test it again.
You may need to try a different child
restraint. Not all child restraints fit in all
types of vehicles.
9. Check to make sure the child restraint
is properly secured prior to each use. If
the seat belt is not locked, repeat
steps 2 through 8.
Forward-facing – step 6
WRS0681
Forward-facing – step 8
WRS0698
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-37
10. If the child restraint is installed in the
front passenger seat, place the ignition
switch in the ON position. The front
passenger air bag status light
should illuminate. If this light is not illu-
minated, refer to "Front passenger air
bag and status light" in this section.
Move the child restraint to another
seating position. Have the system
checked. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
After the child restraint is removed and the
seat belt is fully retracted, the ALR mode
(child restraint mode) is canceled.
䊊
1
Top tether strap
䊊
2
Anchor point
Installing top tether strap
The child restraint top tether strap must be
used when installing the child restraint with
seat belts.
First, secure the child restraint with the seat
belt.
Rear bench seat
OUTBOARD SEATING POSITIONS
1. Remove the head restraint/headrest
and store it in a secure place. Be sure to
reinstall the head restraint/headrest
when the child restraint is removed. For
additional information, refer to “Head
restraints/headrests” in this section.
2. Position the top tether strap as shown.
3. Secure the tether strap to the tether
anchor point as shown.
4. Tighten the tether strap according to
the manufacturer’s instructions to re-
move any slack.
CENTER SEATING POSITION
1. Position the top tether strap as shown.
2. Secure the tether strap to the tether
anchor point as shown.
3. Tighten the tether strap according to
the manufacturer’s instructions to re-
move any slack.
If you have any questions when install-
ing a top tether strap, it is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this
service.
Forward-facing – step 10
LRS0865
Rear seats
LRS3060
1-38 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
WARNING
Child restraint anchorages are de-
signed to withstand only those loads
imposed by correctly fitted child re-
straints. Under no circumstances are
they to be used to attach adult seat
belts, or other items or equipment to
the vehicle. Doing so could damage the
child restraint anchorages. The child re-
straint will not be properly installed us-
ing the damaged anchorage, and a
child could be seriously injured or killed
in a collision.
BOOSTER SEATS
For additional information on installing a
booster seat in your vehicle, follow the in-
structions outlined in this section.
Precautions on booster seats
WARNING
If a booster seat and seat belt are not
used properly, the risk of a child being
injured or killed in a sudden stop or col-
lision greatly increases:
– Make sure the shoulder portion of
the belt is away from the child’s
face and neck and the lap portion
of the belt does not cross the
stomach.
– Make sure the shoulder belt is not
behind the child or under the
child’s arm.
– A booster seat must only be in-
stalled in a seating position that
has a lap/shoulder belt.
A. Low back booster seat
B. High back booster seat
LRS2479
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-39
Booster seats of various sizes are offered
by several manufacturers. When selecting
any booster seat, keep the following points
in mind:
∙ Choose only a booster seat with a label
certifying that it complies with Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or
Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-
dard 213.
∙ Check the booster seat in your vehicle
to be sure it is compatible with the vehi-
cle’s seat and seat belt system.
∙ Make sure the child’s head will be prop-
erly supported by the booster seat or
vehicle seat. The seatback must be at
or above the center of the child’s ears.
For example, if a low back booster seat
is chosen, the vehicle seatback must be
at or above the center of the child’s ears.
If the seatback is lower than the center
of the child’s ears, a high back booster
seat should be used.
∙ If the booster seat is compatible with
your vehicle, place the child in the
booster seat and check the various ad-
justments to be sure the booster seat is
compatible with the child. Always follow
all recommended procedures.
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or
territories require that infants and small
children be restrained in an approved
child restraint at all times while the ve-
hicle is being operated.
The instructions in this section apply to
booster seat installation in the rear seats
or the front passenger seat.
Booster seat installation
WARNING
To avoid injury to child, do not use the
lap/shoulder belt in the Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) mode when us-
ing a booster seat with the seat belts.
LRS0453 LRS0464
1-40 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
For additional information, refer to all Warn-
ings and Cautions in the “Child safety”,
“Child restraints” and “Booster seats” sec-
tions of this manual before installing a child
restraint.
Follow these steps to install a booster seat
in the rear seat or in the front passenger
seat:
1. If you must install a booster seat in
the front seat, move the seat to the
rearmost position.
2. Position the booster seat on the seat.
Only place it in a front-facing direction.
Always follow the booster seat manu-
facturer’s instructions.
3. The booster seat should be positioned
on the vehicle seat so that it is stable.
If necessary, adjust or remove the head
restraint/headrest to obtain the cor-
rect booster seat fit. If the head
restraint/headrest is removed, store it
in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall
the head restraint/headrest when
the booster seat is removed. For ad-
ditional information, refer to “Head
restraints/headrests” in this section.
WRS0699
Front passenger position
LRS0454
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-41
If the seating position does not have
an adjustable head restraint/headrest
and it is interfering with the proper
booster seat fit, try another seating
position or a different booster seat.
4. Position the lap portion of the seat belt
low and snug on the child’s hips. Be
sure to follow the booster seat manu-
facturer’s instructions for adjusting the
seat belt routing.
5. Pull the shoulder belt portion of the
seat belt toward the retractor to take
up extra slack. Be sure the shoulder
belt is positioned across the top,
middle portion of the child’s shoulder.
Be sure to follow the booster seat
manufacturer’s instructions for adjust-
ing the seat belt routing.
6. Follow the warnings, cautions and in-
structions for properly fastening a seat
belt shown in “Three-point type seat
belt with retractor” in this section.
7. If the booster seat is installed in the
front passenger seat, place the ignition
switch in the ON position. The front pas-
senger air bag status light
may or
may not illuminate, depending on the
size of the child and the type of booster
seat being used. For additional infor-
mation, refer to “Front passenger air
bag and status light” in this section.
PRECAUTIONS ON SRS
This SRS section contains important infor-
mation concerning the following systems:
∙ Driver and front passenger supplemen-
tal front-impact air bag (NISSAN Ad-
vanced Air Bag System)
∙ Front seat-mounted side-impact
supplemental air bag
∙ Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and
rollover supplemental air bag
∙ Driver supplemental knee air bag
∙ Seat belt with pretensioner(s) (front
seats)
Supplemental front-impact air bag sys-
tem
The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System can
help cushion the impact force to the head
and chest of the driver and front passenger
in certain frontal collisions.
LRS0865
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
(SRS)
1-42 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Front seat-mounted side-impact
supplemental air bag system
This system can help cushion the impact
force to the chest area of the driver and
front passenger in certain side-impact col-
lisions. The side air bags are designed to
inflate on the side where the vehicle is im-
pacted.
Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and
rollover supplemental air bag system
This system can help cushion the impact
force to the head of occupants in the out-
board seating positions in certain side-
impact or rollover collisions. In a side im-
pact, the curtain air bags are designed to
inflate on the side where the vehicle is im-
pacted. In a rollover, curtain air bags are
designed to inflate and remain inflated for
a short time.
These supplemental restraint systems are
designed to supplement the crash protec-
tion provided by the driver and front pas-
senger seat belts and are not a substitute
for them. Seat belts should always be cor-
rectly worn and the occupant seated a
suitable distance away from the steering
wheel, instrument panel and door finishers.
For additional information, refer to “Seat
belts” in this section.
Driver supplemental knee air bag
This system can help cushion the impact
force to the driver’s knees in certain colli-
sions.
The SRS is designed to supplement the
crash protection provided by the driver and
front passenger seat belts and is not a
substitute for them. Seat belts should al-
ways be correctly worn and the occupant
seated a suitable distance away from the
steering wheel, instrument panel and door
finishers. For additional information, refer
to “Seat belts” in this section.
The supplemental air bags operate only
when the ignition switch is placed in the
ON position.
After placing the ignition switch in the
ON position, the supplemental air bag
warning light illuminates. The supple-
mental air bag warning light will turn off
after about 7 seconds if the system is
operational.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-43
WARNING
∙ The front air bags ordinarily will not
inflate in the event of a side impact,
rear impact, rollover, or lower severity
frontal collision. Always wear your
seat belts to help reduce the risk or
severity of injury in various kinds of
accidents
∙ The front passenger air bag will not
inflate if the passenger air bag status
light is lit or if the front passenger seat
is unoccupied. For additional infor-
mation, refer to “Front passenger air
bag and status light” in this section.
∙ The seat belts and the front air bags
are most effective when you are sit-
ting well back and upright in the seat.
The front air bags inflate with great
force. Even with the NISSAN Advanced
Air Bag System, if you are unre-
strained,leaning forward, sitting side-
ways or out of position in any way, you
are at greater risk of injury or death in
a crash. You may also receive serious
or fatal injuries from the front air bag
if you are up against it when it inflates.
Always sit back against the seatback
and as far away as practical from the
steering wheel or instrument panel.
Always properly use the seat belts.
∙ The driver and front passenger seat
belt buckles are equipped with sen-
sors that detect if the seat belts are
fastened. The NISSAN Advanced Air
Bag System monitors the severity of a
collision and seat belt usage, then in-
flates the air bags as needed. Failure
to properly wear seat belts can in-
crease the risk or severity of injury in
an accident.
∙ The front passenger seat is equipped
with an occupant classification sen-
sor (weight sensor) that turns the
front passenger air bag OFF under
some conditions. This sensor is only
used in this seat. Failure to be properly
seated and wearing the seat belt can
increase the risk or severity of injury in
an accident. For additional informa-
tion, refer to “Front passenger air bag
and status light” in this section.
∙ Keep hands on the outside of the
steering wheel. Placing them inside
the steering wheel rim could increase
the risk that they are injured when the
front air bag inflates.
WRS0031
1-44 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
WARNING
∙ Never let children ride unrestrained or
extend their hands or face out of the
window. Do not attempt to hold them
in your lap or arms. Some examples of
dangerous riding positions are shown
in the illustrations.
ARS1133 ARS1041
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-45
ARS1042 ARS1043 ARS1044
1-46 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
WARNING
∙ Children may be severely injured or
killed when the front air bags, side air
bags or curtain air bags inflate if they
are not properly restrained. Pre-teens
and children should be properly re-
strained in the rear seat, if possible.
∙ Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air
Bag System, never install a rear-
facing child restraint in the front seat.
An inflating front air bag could seri-
ously injure or kill your child. For addi-
tional information, refer to “Child re-
straints” in this section.
WARNING
Front seat-mounted side-impact
supplemental air bags and roof-
mounted curtain side-impact and roll-
over supplemental air bags:
∙ The side air bags and curtain air bags
ordinarily will not inflate in the event
of a frontal impact, rear impact, or
lower severity side collision. Always
wear your seat belts to help reduce
the risk or severity of injury in various
kinds of accidents.
ARS1045 ARS1046 SSS0101
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-47
WARNING
∙ The seat belts, the side air bags and
curtain air bags are most effective
when you are sitting well back and
upright in the seat with both feet on
the floor. The side air bag and curtain
air bag inflate with great force. Do not
allow anyone to place their hand, leg
or face near the side air bag on the
side of the seatback of the front seat
or near the side roof rails. Do not allow
anyone sitting in the front seats or
rear outboard seats to extend their
hand out of the window or lean
against the door. Some examples of
dangerous riding positions are shown
in the previous illustrations.
SSS0162 SSS0159
1-48 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
WARNING
∙ When sitting in the rear seat, do not
hold onto the seatback of the front
seat. If the side air bag inflates, you
may be seriously injured. Be espe-
cially careful with children, who
should always be properly restrained.
Some examples of dangerous riding
positions are shown in the
illustrations.
∙ Do not use seat covers on the front
seatbacks. They may interfere with
side air bag inflation.
WRS0032
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-49
NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System
(front seats)
1. Supplemental front-impact air bag
modules
2. Air bag Control Unit (ACU)
3. Front seat-mounted side-impact
supplemental air bags
4. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact
and rollover supplemental air bags
5. Side satellite sensors
6. Seat belt with pretensioner(s) (front
seats)
7. Front door satellite sensor (driver’s side
shown; front passenger side similar)
8. Occupant classification sensor (weight
sensor — located in front passenger
cushion frame)
9. Driver supplemental knee air bag
10. Crash zone sensor
LRS3064
1-50 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
WARNING
To ensure proper operation of the pas-
senger’s NISSAN Advanced Air Bag Sys-
tem, please observe the following
items.
∙ Do not allow a passenger in the rear
seat to push or pull on the seatback
pocket.
∙ Do not place heavy loads heavier than
9.1 lbs. (4 kg) on the seatback, head
restraint/headrest or in the seatback
pocket.
∙ Make sure that there is nothing press-
ing against the rear of the seatback,
such as a child restraint installed in
the rear seat or an object stored on
the floor.
∙ Make sure that there is no object
placed under the front passenger
seat.
∙ Make sure that there is no object
placed between the seat cushion and
center console or between the seat
cushion and the door.
∙ If a forward-facing child restraint is
installed in the front passenger seat,
do not position the front passenger
seat so the child restraint contacts the
instrument panel. If the child restraint
does contact the instrument panel,
the system may determine the seat is
occupied and the passenger air bag
may deploy in a collision. Also the
front passenger air bag status light
may not illuminate. For additional in-
formation, refer to “Child restraints” in
this section.
∙ Confirm the operating condition with
the front passenger air bag status
light.
∙ If you notice that the front passenger
air bag status light is not operating as
described later in this section, get the
occupant classification system
checked. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
∙ Until you have confirmed with a
dealer that your front passenger seat
occupant classification system is
working properly, position the occu-
pants in the rear seating positions.
∙ Do not position the front passenger
seat so it contacts the rear seat. If the
front seat does contact the rear seat,
the air bag system may determine a
sensor malfunction has occurred and
the front passenger air bag status
light may illuminate and the supple-
mental air bag warning light may
flash.
This vehicle is equipped with the NISSAN
Advanced Air Bag System for the driver and
front passenger seats. This system is de-
signed to meet certification requirements
under U.S. regulations. It is also permitted in
Canada. All of the information, cautions
and warnings in this manual still apply
and must be followed.
The driver supplemental front-impact air
bag is located in the center of the steering
wheel. The front passenger supplemental
front-impact air bag is mounted in the
dashboard above the glove box. The front
air bags are designed to inflate in higher
severity frontal collisions, although they
may inflate if the forces in another type of
collision are similar to those of a higher
severity frontal impact. They may not in-
flate in certain frontal collisions. Vehicle
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-51
damage (or lack of it) is not always an indi-
cation of proper front air bag system op-
eration.
The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System
monitors information from the crash zone
sensor, the Air bag Control Unit (ACU), seat
belt buckle sensors and occupant classifi-
cation sensor (weight sensor). Inflator op-
eration is based on the severity of a colli-
sion and seat belt usage for the driver. For
the front passenger, the occupant classifi-
cation sensors are also monitored. Based
on information from the sensors, only one
front air bag may inflate in a crash, depend-
ing on the crash severity and whether the
front occupants are belted or unbelted. Ad-
ditionally, the front passenger air bag may
be automatically turned OFF under some
conditions, depending on the weight de-
tected on the front passenger seat and
how the seat belt is used. If the front pas-
senger air bag is OFF, the front passenger
air bag status light will be illuminated. For
additional information, refer to “Front pas-
senger air bag and status light” in this sec-
tion. One front air bag inflating does not
indicate improper performance of the sys-
tem.
If you have any questions about your air
bag system, it is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer. If you are considering
modification of your vehicle due to a dis-
ability, you may also contact NISSAN. Con-
tact information is contained in the front of
this Owner’s Manual.
When a front air bag inflates, a fairly loud
noise may be heard, followed by the re-
lease of smoke. This smoke is not harmful
and does not indicate a fire. Care should be
taken to not inhale it, as it may cause irrita-
tion and choking. Those with a history of a
breathing condition should get fresh air
promptly.
Front air bags, along with the use of seat
belts, help to cushion the impact force on
the face and chest of the front occupants.
They can help save lives and reduce seri-
ous injuries. However, an inflating front air
bag may cause facial abrasions or other
injuries. Front air bags, other than the driv-
er’s knee air bag, do not provide restraint to
the lower body.
Even with NISSAN Advanced Air Bags, seat
belts should be correctly worn and the
driver and front passenger seated upright
as far as practical away from the steering
wheel or instrument panel. The front air
bags inflate quickly in order to help protect
the front occupants. Because of this, the
force of the front air bag inflating can in-
crease the risk of injury if the occupant is
too close to, or is against, the front air bag
module during inflation.
The front air bags deflate quickly after a
collision.
The front air bags operate only when the
ignition switch is placed in the ON posi-
tion.
After placing the ignition switch in the
ON position, the supplemental air bag
warning light illuminates. The supple-
mental air bag warning light will turn off
after about 7 seconds if the system is
operational.
1-52 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Front passenger air bag and status light
WARNING
The front passenger air bag is designed
to automatically turn OFF under some
conditions. Read this section carefully
to learn how it operates. Proper use of
the seat, seat belt and child restraints is
necessary for most effective protec-
tion. Failure to follow all instructions in
this manual concerning the use of
seats, seat belts and child restraints can
increase the risk or severity of injury in
an accident.
Status light
The front passenger seat is equipped with
an occupant classification sensor (weight
sensor) that turns the front passenger air
bag on or off depending on the weight ap-
plied to the front passenger seat. The sta-
tus of the front passenger air bag (ON or
OFF) is indicated by the front passenger air
bag status light
which is located on
the instrument panel.
After the ignition switch is placed in the
"ON" position, the front passenger air bag
status light on the instrument panel illumi-
nates for about 7 seconds and then turns
off or remains illuminated depending on
the front passenger seat occupied status.
The light operates as follows:
CONDITION DESCRIPTION
PASSENGER AIR BAG
STATUS LIGHT (
)
FRONT PASSENGER AIR BAG STATUS
Empty Empty front passenger seat ON (illuminated) INHIBITED
Nobody/Somebody
Bag or Child or Child Restraint or
Small Adult in front passenger seat
ON (illuminated) INHIBITED
Adult Adult in the front passenger seat OFF (dark) ACTIVATED
In addition to the above, certain objects
placed on the front passenger seat may
also cause the light to operate as de-
scribed above depending on their weight.
For additional information related to the
normal operation and troubleshooting of
this occupant classification sensor system,
please refer to “Normal operation” and
“Troubleshooting” in this section.
LRS0865
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-53
Front passenger air bag
The front passenger air bag is designed to
automatically turn OFF when the vehicle is
operated under some conditions as de-
scribed below in accordance with U.S. regu-
lations. If the front passenger air bag is OFF,
it will not inflate in a crash.The driver air bag
and other air bags in your vehicle are not
part of this system.
The purpose of the regulation is to help
reduce the risk of injury or death from an
inflating air bag to certain front passenger
seat occupants, such as children, by requir-
ing the air bag to be automatically turned
OFF. Certain sensors are used to meet the
requirements.
The occupant classification sensor in this
vehicle is a weight sensor. It is designed to
detect an occupant and objects on the
seat by weight. For example, if a child is in
the front passenger seat, the NISSAN Ad-
vanced Air Bag System is designed to turn
the front passenger air bag OFF in accor-
dance with the regulations. Also, if a child
restraint of the type specified in the regula-
tions is on the seat, its weight and the
child’s weight can be detected and cause
the air bag to turn OFF.
Front passenger seat adult occupants who
are properly seated and using the seat belt
as outlined in this manual should not
cause the front passenger air bag to be
automatically turned OFF. For small adults
it may be turned OFF, however if the occu-
pant takes his/her weight off the seat
cushion (for example, by not sitting upright,
by sitting on an edge of the seat, or by
otherwise being out of position), this could
cause the sensor to turn the air bag OFF.
Always be sure to be seated and wearing
the seat belt properly for the most effective
protection by the seat belt and supple-
mental air bag.
NISSAN recommends that pre-teens and
children be properly restrained in a rear
seat. NISSAN also recommends that ap-
propriate child restraints and booster
seats be properly installed in a rear seat. If
this is not possible, the occupant classifica-
tion sensor is designed to operate as de-
scribed above to turn the front passenger
air bag OFF for specified child restraints as
required by the regulations. Failing to prop-
erly secure child restraints and to use the
ALR mode may allow the restraint to tip or
move in a collision or sudden stop. This can
also result in the passenger air bag inflat-
ing in a crash instead of being OFF. For
additional information, refer to “Child re-
straints” in this section.
If the front passenger seat is not occupied,
the front passenger air bag is designed not
to inflate in a crash. However, heavy objects
placed on the seat could result in air bag
inflation, because of the object’s weight de-
tected by the occupant classification sen-
sor. Other conditions could also result in air
bag inflation, such as if a child is standing
on the seat, or if two children are on the
seat, contrary to the instructions in this
manual. Always be sure that you and all
vehicle occupants are seated and re-
strained properly.
Using the front passenger air bag status
light, you can monitor when the front pas-
senger air bag is automatically turned OFF.
If an adult occupant is in the seat but the
front passenger air bag status light is illu-
minated (indicating that the air bag is OFF),
it could be that the person is a small adult,
or is not sitting on the seat properly or not
using the seat belt properly.
If a child restraint must be used in the front
seat, the front passenger air bag status
light may or may not be illuminated, de-
pending on the size of the child and the
type of child restraint being used. If the air
1-54 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
bag status light is not illuminated (indicat-
ing that the air bag might inflate in a crash),
it could be that the child restraint or seat
belt is not being used properly. Make sure
that the child restraint is installed properly,
the seat belt is used properly and the occu-
pant is positioned properly. If the air bag
status light is still not illuminated, reposi-
tion the occupant or child restraint in a rear
seat.
If the front passenger air bag status light
will not illuminate even though you believe
that the child restraint, the seat belts and
the occupant are properly positioned, it is
recommended that you take your vehicle
to a NISSAN dealer. A NISSAN dealer can
check system status by using a special
tool. However, until you have confirmed
with a dealer that your air bag is working
properly, reposition the occupant or child
restraint in a rear seat.
The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System and
front passenger air bag status light will
take a few seconds to register a change in
the front passenger seat status. This is nor-
mal system operation and does not indi-
cate a malfunction.
If a malfunction occurs in the front passen-
ger air bag system, the supplemental air
bag warning light
, located in the me-
ter and gauges area of the instrument
panel, will be illuminated (blinking or
steadily lit). Have the system checked. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
Normal operation
In order for the occupant classification
sensor system to classify the front passen-
ger based on weight, please follow the pre-
cautions and steps outlined below:
Precautions
∙ Make sure that there are no objects
weighing over 9.1 lbs. (4 kg) hanging on
the seat or placed in the seatback
pocket.
∙ Make sure that a child restraint or other
object is not pressing against the rear
of the seatback.
∙ Make sure that a rear passenger is not
pushing or pulling on the back of the
front passenger seat.
∙ Make sure that the front passenger
seat or seatback is not forced back
against an object on the seat or floor
behind it.
∙ Make sure that there is no object placed
under the front passenger seat.
Steps
1. Adjust the seat as outlined in the “Seats”
section of this manual. Sit upright, lean-
ing against the seatback, and centered
on the seat cushion with your feet com-
fortably extended to the floor.
2. Make sure there are no objects on your
lap.
3. Fasten the seat belt as outlined in the
“Seat belts” section of this manual.
Front passenger seat belt buckle sta-
tus is monitored by the occupant clas-
sification system, and is used as an in-
put to determine occupancy status. So,
it is highly recommended that the front
passenger fasten their seat belt.
4. Remain in this position for 30 seconds
allowing the system to classify the
front passenger before the vehicle is
put into motion.
5. Ensure proper classification by check-
ing the front passenger air bag status
light.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-55
NOTE:
This vehicle’s occupant classification
sensor system generally keeps the clas-
sification locked during driving, so it is
important that you confirm that the
front passenger is properly classified
prior to driving. However, the occupant
classification sensor may recalculate the
weight of the occupant under some con-
ditions (both while driving and when
stopped), so front passenger seat occu-
pants should continue to remain seated
as outlined above.
Troubleshooting
If you think the front passenger air bag
status light is incorrect:
1. If the light is ON with an adult occupying
the front passenger seat:
∙ Occupant is a small adult — the air bag
light is functioning as intended. The
front passenger air bag is suppressed.
However, if the occupant is not a small
adult, then this may be due to the following
conditions that may be interfering with the
weight sensors:
∙ Occupant is not sitting upright, leaning
against the seatback, and centered on
the seat cushion with his/her feet com-
fortably extended to the floor.
∙ A child restraint or other object pressing
against the rear of the seatback.
∙ A rear passenger pushing or pulling on
the back of the front passenger seat.
∙ Forcing the front seat or seatback
against an object on the seat or floor
behind it.
∙ An object placed under the front pas-
senger seat.
∙ An object placed between the seat
cushion and center console or between
the seat cushion and the door.
If the vehicle is moving, please come to a
stop when it is safe to do so. Check and
correct any of the above conditions. Re-
start the vehicle and wait 1 minute.
NOTE:
A system check will be performed during
which the front passenger air bag status
light will remain lit for about 7 seconds
initially.
If the light is still ON after this, the person
should be advised not to ride in the front
passenger seat and the vehicle should be
checked as soon as possible. It is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.
2. If the light is OFF with a small adult,
child or child restraint occupying the
front passenger seat.
This may be due to the following con-
ditions that may be interfering with the
weight sensors:
∙ Small adult or child is not sitting upright,
leaning against the seatback, and cen-
tered on the seat cushion with his/her
feet comfortably extended to the floor.
∙ The child restraint is not properly in-
stalled, as outlined in the “Child re-
straints” section of this manual.
∙ An object weighing over 9.1 lbs. (4 kg)
hanging on the seat or placed in the
seatback pocket.
∙ A child restraint or other object pressing
against the rear of the seatback.
∙ A rear passenger pushing or pulling on
the back of the front passenger seat.
1-56 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
∙ Forcing the front seat or seatback
against an object on the seat or floor
behind it.
∙ An object placed under the front pas-
senger seat.
∙ An object placed between the seat
cushion and center console.
If the vehicle is moving, please come to a
stop when it is safe to do so. Check and
correct any of the above conditions. Re-
start the vehicle and wait 1 minute.
NOTE:
A system check will be performed during
which the front passenger air bag status
light will remain lit for about 7 seconds
initially.
If the light is still OFF after this, the small
adult, child or child restraint should be re-
positioned in the rear seat and the vehicle
should be checked as soon as possible. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
3. If the light is OFF with no front passen-
ger and no objects on the front pas-
senger seat, the vehicle should be
checked. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer as soon as pos-
sible.
Other supplemental front-impact air
bag precautions
WARNING
∙ Do not place any objects on the steer-
ing wheel pad or on the instrument
panel. Also, do not place any objects
between any occupant and the steer-
ing wheel or instrument panel. Such
objects may become dangerous pro-
jectiles and cause injury if the front air
bags inflate.
∙ Do not place objects with sharp edges
on the seat. Also, do not place heavy
objects on the seat that will leave per-
manent impressions in the seat. Such
objects can damage the seat or occu-
pant classification sensor (weight
sensor). This can affect the operation
of the air bag system and result in se-
rious personal injury.
∙ Do not use water or acidic cleaners
(hot steam cleaners) on the seat. This
can damage the seat or occupant
classification sensor. This can also af-
fect the operation of the air bag sys-
tem and result in serious personal
injury.
∙ Immediately after inflation, several
front air bag system components will
be hot. Do not touch them; you may
severely burn yourself.
∙ No unauthorized changes should be
made to any components or wiring of
the supplemental air bag system. This
is to prevent accidental inflation of
the supplemental air bag or damage
to the supplemental air bag system.
∙ Do not make unauthorized changes
to your vehicle’s electrical system,
suspension system or front end struc-
ture. This could affect proper opera-
tion of the front air bag system.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-57
∙ Tampering with the front air bag sys-
tem may result in serious personal in-
jury. Tampering includes changes to
the steering wheel and the instru-
ment panel assembly by placing ma-
terial over the steering wheel pad and
above the instrument panel or by in-
stalling additional trim material
around the air bag system.
∙ Removing or modifying the front pas-
senger seat may affect the function of
the air bag system and result in seri-
ous personal injury.
∙ Modifying or tampering with the front
passenger seat may result in serious
personal injury. For example, do not
change the front seats by placing ma-
terial on the seat cushion or by install-
ing additional trim material, such as
seat covers, on the seat that are not
specifically designed to assure proper
air bag operation. Additionally, do not
stow any objects under the front pas-
senger seat or the seat cushion and
seatback. Such objects may interfere
with the proper operation of the occu-
pant classification sensor (weight
sensor).
∙ No unauthorized changes should be
made to any components or wiring of
the seat belt system. This may affect
the front air bag system. Tampering
with the seat belt system may result
in serious personal injury.
∙ It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for work on and around
the front air bag. It is also recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
for installation of electrical equip-
ment. The Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) wiring harnesses*
should not be modified or discon-
nected. Unauthorized electrical test
equipment and probing devices
should not be used on the air bag
system.
∙ A cracked windshield should be re-
placed immediately by a qualified re-
pair facility. A cracked windshield
could affect the function of the
supplemental air bag system.
*The SRS wiring harness connectors are
yellow and orange for easy identifica-
tion.
When selling your vehicle, we request that
you inform the buyer about the front air
bag system and guide the buyer to the
appropriate sections in this Owner’s
Manual.
1-58 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Front seat-mounted side-impact
supplemental air bag and
roof-mounted curtain side-
impact and rollover supplemental
air bag systems
The side air bags are located in the outside
of the seatback of the front seats. The cur-
tain air bags are located in the side roof
rails. All of the information, cautions, and
warnings in this manual apply and must
be followed. The side air bags and curtain
air bags are designed to inflate in higher
severity side collisions, although they may
inflate if the forces in another type of colli-
sion are similar to those of a higher severity
side impact. They are designed to inflate on
the side where the vehicle is impacted.
They may not inflate in certain side colli-
sions.
Curtain air bags are also designed to inflate
in certain types of rollover collisions or near
rollovers. As a result, certain vehicle move-
ments (for example, during severe off-
roading) may cause the curtain air bags to
inflate.
Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always
an indication of proper side air bag and
curtain air bag operation.
When the side air bags and curtain air bags
inflate, a fairly loud noise may be heard,
followed by release of smoke. This smoke is
not harmful and does not indicate a fire.
Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it
may cause irritation and choking. Those
with a history of a breathing condition
should get fresh air promptly.
Side air bags, along with the use of seat
belts, help to cushion the impact force on
the chest of the front occupants. Curtain
air bags help to cushion the impact force to
the head of occupants in the front and rear
outboard seating positions. They can help
save lives and reduce serious injuries. How-
ever, an inflating side air bag or curtain air
bag may cause abrasions or other injuries.
Side air bags and curtain air bags do not
provide restraint to the lower body.
The seat belts should be correctly worn
and the driver and passenger seated up-
right as far as practical away from the side
air bag. Rear seat passengers should be
seated as far away as practical from the
door finishers and side roof rails. The side
air bags and curtain air bags inflate quickly
in order to help protect the occupants. Be-
cause of this, the force of the side air bags
and curtain air bags inflating can increase
the risk of injury if the occupant is too close
to, or is against, these air bag modules dur-
ing inflation. The side air bag will deflate
quickly after the collision is over.
The curtain air bags will remain inflated for
a short time.
The side air bags and curtain air bags
operate only when the ignition switch is
in the ON or START position.
After placing the ignition switch in the
ON position, the supplemental air bag
warning light illuminates. The supple-
mental air bag warning light will turn off
after about 7 seconds if the system is
operational.
LRS0259
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-59
WARNING
∙ Do not place any objects near the
seatback of the front seats. Also, do
not place any objects (an umbrella,
bag, etc.) between the front door fin-
isher and the front seat. Such objects
may become dangerous projectiles
and cause injury if a side air bag
inflates.
∙ Right after inflation, several side air
bag and curtain air bag system com-
ponents will be hot. Do not touch
them; you may severely burn yourself.
∙ No unauthorized changes should be
made to any components or wiring of
the side air bag and curtain air bag
systems. This is to prevent damage to
or accidental inflation of the side air
bag and curtain air bag systems.
∙ Do not make unauthorized changes
to your vehicle’s electrical system,
suspension system or side panel. This
could affect proper operation of the
curtain air bag systems.
∙ Tampering with the side air bag sys-
tem may result in serious personal in-
jury. For example, do not change the
front seats by placing material near
the seatbacks or by installing addi-
tional trim material, such as seat cov-
ers, around the side air bag.
∙ It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for work around and on
the side air bag and curtain air bag
system. It is also recommended that
you visit a NISSAN dealer for installa-
tion of electrical equipment. The SRS
wiring harnesses* should not be
modified or disconnected. Unauthor-
ized electrical test equipment and
probing devices should not be used
on the side air bag or curtain air bag
systems.
* The SRS wiring harness or connectors
are yellow or orange for easy identifica-
tion.
When selling your vehicle, we request that
you inform the buyer about the side air bag
and curtain air bag systems and guide the
buyer to the appropriate sections in this
Owner’s Manual.
Driver supplemental knee air bag
The knee air bag is located in the knee
bolster, on the driver’s side. The knee air
bag is located on the driver’s side of the
vehicle only. All of the information, cau-
tions and warnings in this manual apply
and must be followed. The knee air bag is
designed to inflate in higher severity frontal
collisions, although it may inflate if the
forces in another type of collision are simi-
lar to those of a higher severity frontal im-
pact. It may not inflate in certain collisions.
LRS3080
1-60 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always
an indication of proper knee air bag opera-
tion.
When the knee air bag inflates, a fairly loud
noise may be heard, followed by release of
smoke. This smoke is not harmful and
does not indicate a fire. Care should be
taken not to inhale it, as it may cause irrita-
tion and choking. Those with a history of a
breathing condition should get fresh air
promptly.
The knee air bag helps to cushion the im-
pact force on the knees of the driver. It can
help reduce serious injuries. However, an
inflating knee air bag may cause abrasions
or other injuries. The knee air bag provides
restraint to the lower body.
The knee air bag inflates quickly in order to
help protect the occupants. Because of
this, the force of the knee air bag inflating
can increase the risk of injury if the occu-
pant is too close to, or is against, this air bag
module during inflation. The knee air bag
will deflate quickly after the collision is over
OR the knee air bag will remain inflated for
a short time.
The knee air bag operates only when the
ignition switch is placed in the ON posi-
tion.
After placing the ignition switch in the
ON position, the supplemental air bag
warning light illuminates. The supple-
mental air bag warning light will turn off
after about 7 seconds if the system is
operational.
WARNING
∙ Do not place any objects between the
knee bolster and the driver’s seat.
Such objects may become dangerous
projectiles and cause injury if a knee
air bag inflates.
∙ Right after inflation, the knee air bag
system components will be hot. Do
not touch them; you may severely
burn yourself.
∙ No unauthorized changes should be
made to any components or wiring of
the knee air bag system. This is to pre-
vent damage to or accidental inflation
of the knee air bag system.
∙ Do not make unauthorized changes
to your vehicle’s electrical system or
suspension system. This could affect
proper operation of the knee air bag
system.
∙ Tampering with the knee air bag sys-
tem may result in serious personal in-
jury. For example, do not change the
driver knee bolster or install addi-
tional trim material around the knee
air bag.
∙ It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for work on and around
the knee air bag. It is also recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
for installation of electrical equip-
ment. The SRS wiring harnesses*
should not be modified or discon-
nected. Unauthorized electrical test
equipment and probing devices
should not be used on the knee air
bag system.
*The SRS wiring harness or connectors
are yellow or orange for easy identifica-
tion.
When selling your vehicle, we request that
you inform the buyer about the knee air
bag system and guide the buyer to the
appropriate sections in this manual.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-61
Seat belt with pretensioner(s)
(front seats)
WARNING
∙ The pretensioner(s) cannot be reused
after activation. They must be re-
placed together with the retractor
and buckle as a unit.
∙ If the vehicle becomes involved in a
collision but pretensioner(s) are not
activated, be sure to have the preten-
sioner system checked and, if neces-
sary, replaced. It is recommended that
you visit a NISSAN dealer for this
service.
∙ No unauthorized changes should be
made to any components or wiring of
the pretensioner system. This is to
prevent damage to or accidental acti-
vation of the pretensioner(s). Tamper-
ing with the pretensioner system may
result in serious personal injury.
∙ It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for work around and on
the pretensioner system. It is also rec-
ommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for installation of electrical
equipment. Unauthorized electrical
test equipment and probing devices
should not be used on the preten-
sioner system.
∙ If you need to dispose of the preten-
sioner(s) or scrap the vehicle, it is rec-
ommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service. Incorrect dis-
posal procedures could cause per-
sonal injury.
The pretensioner system may activate
with the supplemental air bag system in
certain types of collisions. Working with the
seat belt retractor, the pretensioner(s) help
tighten the seat belt when the vehicle be-
comes involved in certain types of colli-
sions, helping to restrain front seat occu-
pants.
The pretensioner(s) are encased with the
seat belt retractor. These seat belts are
used the same way as conventional seat
belts.
When pretensioner(s) activate, smoke is re-
leased and a loud noise may be heard. This
smoke is not harmful and does not indi-
cate a fire. Care should be taken not to
inhale it, as it may cause irritation and
choking. Those with a history of a breath-
ing condition should get fresh air promptly.
After the pretensioner(s’) activation, load
limiters allow the seat belt to release web-
bing (if necessary) to reduce forces against
the chest.
The supplemental air bag warning
light
is used to indicate malfunctions
in the pretensioner(s) system. For addi-
tional information, refer to “Supplemental
air bag warning light” in this section. If the
operation of the supplemental air bag
warning light indicates there is a malfunc-
tion, have the system checked. It is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.
When selling your vehicle, we request that
you inform the buyer about the preten-
sioner system and guide the buyer to the
appropriate sections in this Owner’s
Manual.
1-62 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
1. SRS Air Bag Warning Labels (lo-
cated on the sun visors)
SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING
LABELS
Warning labels about the supplemental
front-impact air bag system are placed in
the vehicle as shown in the illustration.
WARNING
Do not use a rear-facing child restraint
on a seat protected by an air bag in
front of it. If the air bag deploys, it may
cause serious injury or death.
SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING
LIGHT
The supplemental air bag warning light,
displaying
in the instrument panel,
monitors the circuits for the Air bag Control
Unit (ACU), satellite sensors, crash zone
sensor, occupant classification sensor, the
supplemental front-impact air bag, front
seat-mounted side-impact supplemental
air bag, roof-mounted curtain side-impact
supplemental air bag and seat belt preten-
sioner systems. The monitored circuits in-
clude air bag systems, pretensioner(s) and
all related wiring.
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, the supplemental air bag warning
light illuminates for about 7 seconds and
then turns off. This means the system is
operational.
If any of the following conditions occur, the
front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag,
knee air bag and pretensioner systems
need servicing:
∙ The supplemental air bag warning light
remains on after approximately 7 sec-
onds.
∙ The supplemental air bag warning light
flashes intermittently.
∙ The supplemental air bag warning light
does not come on at all.
Under these conditions, the front air bag,
side air bag, curtain air bag, knee air bag or
pretensioner systems may not operate
properly. They must be checked and re-
paired. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.
LRS2617 LRS0100
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-63
WARNING
If the supplemental air bag warning
light is on, it could mean that the front
air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag,
knee air bag and/or pretensioner sys-
tems will not operate in an accident. To
help avoid injury to yourself or others,
have your vehicle checked as soon as
possible. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Repair and replacement
procedure
The front air bags, side air bags, curtain air
bags, knee air bag and pretensioner(s) are
designed to inflate on a one-time-only ba-
sis. As a reminder, unless it is damaged, the
supplemental air bag warning light re-
mains illuminated after inflation has oc-
curred. These systems should be repaired
and/or replaced as soon as possible. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
When maintenance work is required on the
vehicle, the front air bags, side air bags,
curtain air bags, knee air bag, pretension-
er(s) and related parts should be pointed
out to the person performing the mainte-
nance. The ignition switch should always
be in the LOCK position when working un-
der the hood or inside the vehicle.
WARNING
∙ Once a front air bag, side air bag, cur-
tain air bag, or knee air bag has in-
flated, the air bag module will not
function again and must be replaced.
Additionally, the activated preten-
sioner(s) must also be replaced. The
air bag module and pretensioner(s)
should be replaced. It is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
for this service. However, the air bag
module and pretensioner(s) cannot
be repaired.
∙ The front air bag, side air bag, curtain
air bag, knee air bag systems and the
pretensioner system should be in-
spected if there is any damage to the
front end or side portion of the ve-
hicle. It is recommended that you visit
a NISSAN dealer for this service.
∙ If you need to dispose of a supple-
mental air bag or pretensioner sys-
tems or scrap the vehicle, it is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer. Incorrect disposal procedures
could cause personal injury.
∙ If there is an impact to your vehicle
from any direction, your Occupant
Classification Sensor (OCS) should be
checked to verify it is still functioning
correctly. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
The OCS should be checked even if no
air bags deploy as a result of the im-
pact. Failure to verify proper OCS
function may result in an improper air
bag deployment resulting in injury or
death.
1-64 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
MEMO
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-65
2 Instruments and controls
Instrument panel ................................2-2
Meters and gauges..............................2-4
Speedometer and odometer .................2-5
Tachometer ..................................2-7
Fuel gauge ...................................2-8
Trip computer (if so equipped) ................2-9
Warning lights, indicator lights and audible
reminders ......................................2-10
Checking lights ...............................2-11
Warning lights ................................2-11
Indicator lights .............................. 2-17
Audible reminders...........................2-20
Vehicle information display (if so equipped) .....2-21
How to use the vehicle information
display ......................................2-21
Startup display ..............................2-22
Settings .....................................2-22
Vehicle information display warnings
and indicators...............................2-30
Security systems (if so equipped) ...............2-34
Vehicle security system .....................2-34
NISSAN Anti-Theft System (NATS)
(if so equipped) ..............................2-35
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System
(if so equipped) ..............................2-36
Wiper and washer switch .......................2-37
Switch operation ............................2-37
Rear switch operation .......................2-39
Rear window and/or outside mirror defroster
switch (if so equipped)..........................2-40
Headlight and turn signal switch ...............2-41
Headlight control switch.....................2-41
Daytime Running Lights (DRL) system
(if so equipped) ..............................2-43
Instrument brightness control...............2-44
Turn signal switch ...........................2-44
Fog light switch (if so equipped) .............2-45
Horn ...........................................2-45
Heated seat switches (if so equipped) ..........2-45
Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) switch
(if so equipped) .................................2-46
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF switch......
2-47
Power outlets ..................................2-47
12v outlets...................................2-47
Extended storage switch .......................2-48
Storage ........................................2-49
Seatback pockets ...........................2-49
Storagetrays................................2-50
Glovebox....................................2-51
Cup holders .................................2-51
Luggage hooks..............................2-52
Grocery hooks...............................2-53
Cargo cover (if so equipped) .................2-53
Roof rack (if so equipped)....................2-54
Windows .......................................2-58
Power windows .............................2-58
Interior lights ...................................2-61
Map lights ...................................2-62
Personal Light ...............................2-62
Luggage compartment light ................2-63
1. Vents (P. 4-30)
2. Headlight/fog light (if so
equipped)/turn signal switch
(P. 2-41)
3. Driver’s supplemental air bag
(P. 1-42)
Horn (P. 2-45)
4. Meters and gauges (P. 2-4)
Warning and indicator lights
(P. 2-10)
Trip computer (if so equipped)
(P. 2-9)
Vehicle information display
(if so equipped) (P. 2-21)
5. Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-37)
6. Front passenger airbag status
light (P. 1-42)
7. Center display controls (if so
equipped) (P. 4-2, 4-3, 4-42)
Audio controls (P. 4-2, 4-3, 4-42)
8. Hazard warning flasher switch
(P. 6-2)
9. Center display (P. 4-2, 4-3, 4-42)
10. Passenger’s supplemental air bag
(P. 1-42)
11. Glove box (P. 2-49)
LIC3974
INSTRUMENT PANEL
2-2 Instruments and controls
12. Climate controls (P. 4-31, 4-39)
Heated seat switches (if so
equipped) (P. 2-45)
13. Shift lever (P. 5-15)
14. Push-button ignition switch (P. 5-9)
15. Power outlet (P. 2-47)
USB connection port (P. 4-2, 4-42)
AUX jack (P. 4-2, 4-42)
16. Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone
System (P. 4-2, 4-68)
Cruise control switches (P. 5-39)
17. Tilt and telescopic steering wheel
lock lever (P. 3-26)
18. Hood release (P. 3-21)
Fuel-filler door release (P. 3-24)
Automatic Emergency Braking
(AEB) switch (if so equipped)
(P 2-46)
19. Steering wheel switches for audio
control (P. 4-2, 4-63)
Control panel and vehicle informa-
tion display switches
(if so equipped) (P. 2-21)
20. Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF
switch (P. 2-47)
Enter/select switch for trip com-
puter (if so equipped) (P. 2-9)
* Refer to the separate NissanConnect®
Owner’s Manual (if so equipped).
Refer to the page number indicated in
parentheses for operating details.
Instruments and controls 2-3
1. Tachometer
Vehicle information display
Odometer
Twin trip odometer
Fuel gauge
Engine coolant temperature gauge
2. Warning and indicator lights
3. Speedometer
4. Trip reset switch
Instrument brightness control
knob
Type A (if so equipped)
LIC3561
METERS AND GAUGES
2-4 Instruments and controls
1. Tachometer
2. Trip computer
Odometer
Twin trip odometer
3. Speedometer
4. Trip reset switch
Instrument brightness control
knob
5. Warning and indicator lights
SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER
This vehicle is equipped with a speedom-
eter and odometer. The speedometer is
located on the right side the meter cluster.
The odometer is located within the vehicle
information display (TypeA—ifso
equipped) or the trip computer (Type B —
if so equipped) to the left of the speedom-
eter.
Type B (if so equipped)
LIC3592
Instruments and controls 2-5
Speedometer
The speedometer indicates vehicle speed.
Odometer/Twin trip odometer
The odometer and the twin trip odometer
䊊
1
are displayed in the vehicle information
display (Type A) (if so equipped) or the trip
computer (Type B) (if so equipped) when
the ignition switch is placed in the ON po-
sition.
The odometer records the total distance
the vehicle has been driven.
The twin trip odometer records the dis-
tance of individual trips.
Changing the display
Push the TRIP RESET switch
䊊
2
on the right
side of the instrument panel to change the
display as follows:
Trip
→ Trip → Odometer Mile-
age → Trip
LIC2255
Type A (if so equipped)
LIC3584
Type B (if so equipped)
LIC3595
2-6 Instruments and controls
Resetting the trip odometer
Pushing the TRIP RESET switch
䊊
2
for more
than 1 second resets the currently dis-
played trip odometer to zero.
Average fuel economy information is also
available. For additional information, refer
to “Trip computer” in this section.
TACHOMETER
The tachometer indicates engine speed in
revolutions per minute (rpm). Do not rev
engine into the red zone
䊊
1
.
Type A (if so equipped): To access the ta-
chometer, use the
and on the
steering wheel to navigate to the “Gauges”
display. For additional information, refer to
“How to use the vehicle information dis-
play” in this section.
Type B (if so equipped): The tachometer is
located on the left side of the meter cluster.
CAUTION
When engine speed approaches the red
zone, shift to a higher gear or reduce
engine speed. Operating the engine in
the red zone may cause serious engine
damage.
Type A (if so equipped)
LIC3562
Type B (if so equipped)
LIC3536
Instruments and controls 2-7
FUEL GAUGE
The gauge indicates the approximate fuel
level in the tank.
The gauge may move slightly during brak-
ing, turning, acceleration, or going up or
down hills.
Type A (if so equipped): The low fuel warn-
ing message shows in the vehicle informa-
tion display when the amount of fuel in the
tank is getting low.
Type B (if so equipped): The low fuel warn-
ing light illuminates when the amount of
fuel in the tank is getting low.
Refill the fuel tank before the gauge reg-
isters 0 (Empty).
The
indicates that the fuel-filler
door is located on the driver’s side of the
vehicle.
CAUTION
∙ If the vehicle runs out of fuel, the
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may
come on. Refuel as soon as possible.
After a few driving trips, the
light
should turn off. If the light remains on
after a few driving trips, have the ve-
hicle inspected. It is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this
service
∙ For additional information, refer to
“Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” in
this section.
Type A (if so equipped)
LIC3564
Type B (if so equipped)
LIC3593
2-8 Instruments and controls
TRIP COMPUTER (if so equipped)
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, modes of the trip computer can
be selected by pushing the TRIP RESET
switch
䊊
A
.
Each time the TRIP RESET switch is pushed,
the display changes as follows:
Trip A → Trip B → Odometer
The
switch for the trip computer is
located on the lower left side of the instru-
ment panel.
Each time the
switch is pushed, the
display will change as follows:
Average fuel economy → Average speed →
Trip time → Trip Distance
Average fuel economy (mpg or
km/l)
The average fuel economy mode shows
the average fuel economy since the last
reset. Resetting is done by pressing the
change/reset switch for more than ap-
proximately 1 second. The display is up-
dated every 30 seconds. At about the first
1/3 mi (500 m) after a reset, the display
shows (----).
Average speed (mph or km/h)
The average speed mode shows the aver-
age vehicle speed since last reset. Reset-
ting is done by pressing the change/reset
switch for more than approximately 1 sec-
ond. The display is updated every 30 sec-
onds. The first 30 seconds after a reset, the
display shows (----).
Trip time
The trip time mode shows the time since
the last reset. The displayed time can be
reset by pressing the change/trip switch
for more than approximately 1 second.
Trip distance
The trip distance mode shows the distance
traveled since the last reset. The trip dis-
tance can be reset by pressing the
change/trip switch for more than approxi-
mately 1 second.
Shipping mode
This message may appear if the extended
storage switch is not pushed in. When this
message appears, push in the extended
storage switch to turn off the warning. For
additional information, refer to “Extended
storage switch” in this section.
LIC3594
Instruments and controls 2-9
or Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)
warning light
Master warning light (if so equipped) High beam indicator light (blue)
Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) system
warning light (if so equipped)
NISSAN Intelligent Key® warning light (if
so equipped)
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
or Brake warning light
Power steering warning light Overdrive OFF indicator light (if so
equipped)
Charge warning light Seat belt warning light Security indicator light (if so equipped)
Door open warning light (if so equipped) Shift P (Park) warning light (if so
equipped)
SET indicator light (if so equipped)
Engine oil pressure warning light Supplemental air bag warning light Side light and headlight indicator light
(green)
High temperature warning light (red) (if so
equipped)
CRUISE indicator light (if so equipped) Slip indicator light
Low fuel warning light (if so equipped) Engine start operation indicator light (if
so equipped)
SPORT mode indicator light (if so
equipped)
Low tire pressure warning light Front fog light indicator light (green) (if
so equipped)
Turn signal/hazard indicator lights
Low windshield-washer fluid warning light (if
so equipped)
Front passenger air bag status light Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF indi-
cator light
WARNING LIGHTS, INDICATOR LIGHTS
AND AUDIBLE REMINDERS
2-10 Instruments and controls
CHECKING LIGHTS
With all doors closed, apply the parking
brake, fasten the seat belts and place the
ignition switch in the ON position without
starting the engine. The following lights (if
so equipped) will come on:
or , , , , ,
The following lights (if so equipped) will
come on briefly and then go off:
, or , , ,
, ,
If any light does not come on or operate in
a way other than described, it may indicate
a burned-out bulb and/or a system mal-
function. Have the system checked. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
WARNING LIGHTS
For additional information on warnings
and indicators, refer to “Vehicle information
display” in this section.
or Anti-lock Braking
System (ABS)
warning light
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, the ABS warning light illuminates
and then turns off. This indicates the ABS is
operational.
If the ABS warning light illuminates while
the engine is running or while driving, it
may indicate the ABS is not functioning
properly. Have the system checked. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
If an ABS malfunction occurs, the anti-lock
function is turned off. The brake system
then operates normally but without anti-
lock assistance. For additional information,
refer to “Brake system” in the “Starting and
driving” section of this manual.
Automatic Emergency
Braking (AEB) system
warning light (if so
equipped)
This light comes on when the ignition
switch is placed in the ON position. It turns
off after the engine is started.
This light illuminates when the AEB system
is set to OFF on the vehicle information
display.
If the light illuminates when the AEB sys-
tem is on, it may indicate that the system is
unavailable. For additional information, re-
fer to “Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB)”
in the “Starting and driving” section of this
manual.
or Brake warning
light
This light functions for both the parking
brake and the foot brake systems.
Parking brake indicator
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, this light comes on when the
parking brake is applied.
Instruments and controls 2-11
Low brake fluid warning light
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, the light warns of a low brake fluid
level. If the light comes on while the engine
is running with the parking brake not ap-
plied, stop the vehicle and perform the fol-
lowing:
1. Check the brake fluid level. Add brake
fluid as necessary. For additional infor-
mation, refer to “Brake fluid” in the “Do-
it-yourself” section of this manual.
2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have
the warning system checked. It is rec-
ommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
WARNING
∙ Your brake system may not be work-
ing properly if the warning light is on.
Driving could be dangerous. If you
judge it to be safe, drive carefully to
the nearest service station for repairs.
Otherwise, have your vehicle towed
because driving it could be
dangerous.
∙ Pressing the brake pedal with the en-
gine stopped and/or a low brake fluid
level may increase your stopping dis-
tance and braking will require greater
pedal effort as well as pedal travel.
∙ If the brake fluid level is below the
MINIMUM or MIN mark on the brake
fluid reservoir, do not drive until the
brake system has been checked. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning
indicator
When the parking brake is released and the
brake fluid level is sufficient, if both the
brake warning light and the ABS warning
light illuminate, it may indicate the ABS is
not functioning properly. Have the brake
system checked and, if necessary, repaired.
It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service. For additional infor-
mation, refer to “Anti-lock Braking System
(ABS) warning light” in this section.
Charge warning light
If this light comes on while the engine is
running, it may indicate the charging sys-
tem is not functioning properly. Turn the
engine off and check the generator belt. If
the belt is loose, broken, missing, or if the
light remains on, have the system checked.
It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
CAUTION
∙ Do not ground electrical accessories
directly to the battery terminal. Doing
so will bypass the variable voltage
control system and the vehicle bat-
tery may not charge completely. For
additional information, refer to “Vari-
able voltage control system” in the
“Do-it-yourself” section of this
manual.
∙ Do not continue driving if the genera-
tor belt is loose, broken or missing.
2-12 Instruments and controls
Door open warning light (if
so equipped)
This light comes on when any of the doors
are not closed securely while the ignition
switch is in the ON position.
Engine oil pressure
warning light
This light warns of low engine oil pressure. If
the light flickers or comes on during nor-
mal driving, pull off the road in a safe area,
stop the engine immediately and call a
NISSAN dealer or other authorized repair
shop.
The engine oil pressure warning light is
not designed to indicate a low oil level.
Use the dipstick to check the oil level. For
additional information, refer to “Engine oil”
in the “Do-it-yourself” section of this
manual.
CAUTION
Running the engine with the engine oil
pressure warning light on could cause
serious damage to the engine almost
immediately. Such damage is not cov-
ered by the NISSAN New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. Turn off the engine as soon as
it is safe to do so.
High temperature warning
light (red) (if so equipped)
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, the high temperature warning
light illuminates and then turns off. This in-
dicates that the high temperature sensor
in the engine coolant system is opera-
tional.
When driving, the high temperature warn-
ing light may turn off. This indicates that the
engine coolant temperature is within the
normal range.
CAUTION
If the high temperature warning light
illuminates while the engine is running,
it may indicate the engine temperature
is extremely high. Stop the vehicle
safely as soon as possible. If the vehicle
is overheated, continuing vehicle op-
eration may seriously damage the en-
gine. For additional information, refer
to “If your vehicle overheats” in the “In
case of emergency” section of this
manual.
Low fuel warning light (if so
equipped)
This light comes on when the fuel level in
the fuel tank is getting low. Refuel as soon
as it is convenient, preferably before the
fuel gauge reaches 0 (Empty). There will be
a small reserve of fuel in the tank when
the fuel gauge reaches 0 (Empty).
Low tire pressure warning
light
Your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pres-
sure Monitoring System (TPMS) that moni-
tors the tire pressure of all tires except the
spare.
Instruments and controls 2-13
The low tire pressure warning light warns
of low tire pressure or indicates that the
TPMS is not functioning properly.
After the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, this light illuminates for about
1 second and turns off.
Low tire pressure warning
If the vehicle is being driven with low tire
pressure, the warning light will illumi-
nate. A “Tire Pressure Low - Add Air”
warning also appears in the vehicle in-
formation display (if so equipped).
When the low tire pressure warning light
illuminates, you should stop and adjust
the tire pressure of all four tires to the
recommended COLD tire pressure shown
on the Tire and Loading Information la-
bel located in the driver’s door opening.
The low tire pressure warning light does
not automatically turn off when the tire
pressure is adjusted. After the tire is in-
flated to the recommended pressure,
the vehicle must be driven at speeds
above 16 mph (25 km/h) to activate the
TPMS and turn off the low tire pressure
warning light. Use a tire pressure gauge
to check the tire pressure.
For vehicles with a vehicle information dis-
play, the “Tire Pressure Low - Add Air” warn-
ing appears each time the ignition switch is
placed in the ON position as long as the low
tire pressure warning light remains illumi-
nated.
For additional information, refer to “Vehicle
information display” in this section, “Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the
“Starting and driving” and “In case of emer-
gency” sections of this manual.
TPMS malfunction
If the TPMS is not functioning properly, the
low tire pressure warning light will flash for
approximately 1 minute when the ignition
switch is placed in the ON position. The
light will remain on after 1 minute. Have the
system checked. It is recommended that
you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
The "Tire Pressure Low — Add Air" warning
does not appear if the low tire pressure
warning light illuminates to indicate a
TPMS malfunction.
For additional information, refer to “Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the
“Starting and driving” section and “Tire
pressure” in the “Do-it-yourself” section of
this manual.
WARNING
∙ Radio waves could adversely affect
electric medical equipment. Those
who use a pacemaker should contact
the electric medical equipment
manufacturer for the possible influ-
ences before use.
∙ If the light does not illuminate with
the ignition switch placed in the ON
position, have the vehicle checked as
soon as possible. It is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this
service.
2-14 Instruments and controls
∙ If the light illuminates while driving,
avoid sudden steering maneuvers or
abrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed,
pull off the road to a safe location and
stop the vehicle as soon as possible.
Driving with under-inflated tires may
permanently damage the tires and in-
crease the likelihood of tire failure. Se-
rious vehicle damage could occur and
may lead to an accident and could re-
sult in serious personal injury or
death. Check the tire pressure for all
four tires. Adjust the tire pressure to
the recommended COLD tire pressure
show on the Tire and Loading Infor-
mation label located in the driver’s
door opening to turn the low tire pres-
sure warning light off. If the light still
illuminates while driving after adjust-
ing the tire pressure, a tire may be flat
or the TPMS may be malfunctioning. If
you have a flat tire, replace it with a
spare tire as soon as possible. If no tire
is flat and all tires are properly in-
flated, have the vehicle checked. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
∙ When replacing a wheel without the
TPMS such as the spare tire, the TPMS
will not function and the low tire pres-
sure warning light will flash for ap-
proximately 1 minute. The light will re-
main on after 1 minute. Have your
tires replaced and/or TPMS system
reset as soon as possible. It is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
for these services.
∙ Replacing tires with those not origi-
nally specified by NISSAN could affect
the proper operation of the TPMS.
CAUTION
∙ The TPMS is not a substitute for the
regular tire pressure check. Be sure to
check the tire pressure regularly.
∙ If the vehicle is being driven at speeds
of less than 16 mph (25 km/h), the
TPMS may not operate correctly.
∙ Be sure to install the specified size of
tires to the four wheels correctly.
Low windshield-washer
fluid warning light (if so
equipped)
This light comes on when the windshield-
washer fluid is at a low level. Add
windshield-washer fluid as necessary. For
additional information, refer to “Windshield-
washer fluid” in the “Do-it-yourself” section
of this manual.
Master warning light (if so
equipped)
This light illuminates when various vehicle
information display warnings appear.
∙Nokey
∙ I-Key system warning
∙ Low washer fluid
∙ Door open
∙ Parking brake release
For additional information, refer to “Vehicle
information display” in this section.
Instruments and controls 2-15
NISSAN Intelligent Key®
warning light (if so
equipped)
After the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, this light comes on for about
2 seconds and then turns off. This light illu-
minates or blinks as follows:
∙ The light blinks in yellow when the door
is closed with the Intelligent Key left out-
side the vehicle and the ignition switch
in the ON position. Make sure that the
Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle.
∙ The light blinks in green when the Intel-
ligent Key battery is running out of
power. Replace the battery with a new
one. For additional information, refer to
“Battery” in the “Do-it-yourself” section
of this manual.
∙ The light illuminates in yellow when it
warns of a malfunction with the electri-
cal steering lock system or the Intelli-
gent Key system.
If the warning light illuminates in yellow
while the engine is stopped, it may be im-
possible to free the steering lock or to start
the engine. If the light comes on while the
engine is running, you can drive the vehicle.
However, in these cases, have the vehicle
checked and repaired as soon as possible.
It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
For additional information, refer to “NISSAN
Intelligent Key®” in the “Pre-driving checks
and adjustments” section of this manual.
Power steering warning
light
WARNING
∙ If the engine is not running or is
turned off while driving, the power as-
sist for the steering will not work.
Steering will be harder to operate.
∙ When the power steering warning
light illuminates with the engine run-
ning, there will be no power assist for
the steering. You will still have control
of the vehicle, but the steering will be
harder to operate. Have the power
steering system checked. It is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
for this service.
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, the power steering warning light
illuminates. After starting the engine, the
power steering warning light turns off. This
indicates the power steering is operational.
If the power steering warning light illumi-
nates while the engine is running, it may
indicate the power steering is not function-
ing properly and may need servicing. Have
the power steering checked. It is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.
When the power steering warning light illu-
minates with the engine running, there will
be no power assist for the steering, but you
will still have control of the vehicle. At this
time, greater steering effort is required to
operate the steering wheel, especially in
sharp turns and at low speeds.
For additional information, refer to “Power
steering” in the “Starting and driving” sec-
tion of this manual.
Seat belt warning light
The light reminds you to fasten your seat
belts. The light illuminates whenever the
ignition switch is placed in the ON or START
position and remains illuminated until the
driver’s seat belt is fastened.
The seat belt warning light may also illumi-
nate if the front passenger’s seat belt is not
fastened when the front passenger’s seat
is occupied.
2-16 Instruments and controls
For additional information, refer to “Seat
belts” in the “Safety—Seats, seat belts and
supplemental restraint system” section of
this manual.
Shift P (Park) warning light
(if so equipped)
This light blinks red and the key reminder
chime sounds if the shift lever is in any
position other than P (Park) and the ignition
switch is in the OFF position. Return the
shift lever to P (Park) with the ignition
switch in the OFF position and the light will
turn off. Place the ignition switch in the
LOCK position and the chime will turn off.
For additional information, refer to “NISSAN
Intelligent Key®” in the “Pre-driving checks
and adjustments” section of this manual.
Supplemental air bag
warning light
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
or START position, the supplemental air
bag warning light illuminates for about
7 seconds and then turns off. This means
the system is operational.
If any of the following conditions occur, the
front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag,
and pretensioner seat belt systems need
servicing:
∙ The supplemental air bag warning light
remains on after approximately 7 sec-
onds.
∙ The supplemental air bag warning light
flashes intermittently.
∙ The supplemental air bag warning light
does not come on at all.
It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for these services.
Unless checked and repaired, the supple-
mental restraint system (air bag system)
and/or the pretensioner(s) may not func-
tion properly. For additional information, re-
fer to “Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS)” in the “Safety—Seats, seat belts and
supplemental restraint system” section of
this manual.
WARNING
If the supplemental air bag warning
light is on, it could mean that the front
air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag
and/or pretensioner systems will not
operate in an accident. To help avoid
injury to yourself or others, have your
vehicle checked as soon as possible. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
INDICATOR LIGHTS
For additional information, refer to “Vehicle
information display” in this section.
CRUISE indicator light (if so
equipped)
The light comes on when the cruise control
switch is pushed. The light goes out when
the switch is pushed again. When the
cruise indicator light comes on, the cruise
control system is operational. For addi-
tional information, refer to “Cruise control”
in the “Starting and driving” section of this
manual.
Engine start operation
indicator light (if so
equipped)
For vehicles equipped with push-button ig-
nition this indicator illuminates when the
ignition switch is in the LOCK, OFF or ON
position with the shift lever in the P (Park)
position.
This indicator means that the engine will
start by pushing the push-button ignition
switch with the brake pedal depressed.
Instruments and controls 2-17
Front fog light indicator
light (green) (if so
equipped)
The front fog light indicator light illumi-
nates when the front fog lights are on. For
additional information, refer to “Fog light
switch” in this section.
Front passenger air bag
status light
The front passenger air bag status light will
be lit and the passenger front air bag will be
off depending on how the front passenger
seat is being used.
For additional information, refer to “Front
passenger air bag and status light” in the
“Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemen-
tal restraint system” section of this manual.
High beam indicator light
(blue)
This blue light comes on when the head-
light high beams are on and goes out when
the low beams are selected.
The high beam indicator light also comes
on when the passing signal is activated.
Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL)
If this indicator light comes on steady or
blinks while the engine is running, it may
indicate a potential emission control mal-
function.
The MIL may also come on steady if the
fuel-filler cap is loose or missing, or if the
vehicle runs out of fuel. Check to make sure
the fuel-filler cap is installed and closed
tightly, and that the vehicle has at least
3 gallons (11.4 liters) of fuel in the fuel tank.
After a few driving trips, the
light
should turn off if no other potential emis-
sion control system malfunction exists.
If this indicator light comes on steady for
20 seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds
when the engine is not running, it indicates
that the vehicle is not ready for an emission
control system inspection/maintenance
test. For additional information, refer to
“Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance
(I/M) test” in the “Technical and consumer
information” section of this manual.
Operation
The MIL will come on in one of two ways:
∙ MIL on steady — An emission control
system malfunction has been de-
tected. Check the fuel-filler cap if the
Loose Fuel Cap warning appears in the
vehicle information display (if so
equipped) or the trip computer (if so
equipped). If the fuel-filler cap is loose or
missing, tighten or install the cap and
continue to drive the vehicle. The
light should turn off after a few driving
trips. If the
light does not turn off
after a few driving trips, have the vehicle
inspected. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. You
do not need to have your vehicle towed
to the dealer.
∙ MIL blinking — An engine misfire has
been detected which may damage the
emission control system. To reduce or
avoid emission control system dam-
age:
– do not drive at speeds above
45 mph (72 km/h).
– avoid hard acceleration or decelera-
tion.
– avoid steep uphill grades.
2-18 Instruments and controls
– if possible, reduce the amount of
cargo being hauled or towed.
The MIL may stop blinking and come on
steady. Have the vehicle inspected. It is rec-
ommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
for this service. You do not need to have
your vehicle towed to the dealer.
CAUTION
Continued vehicle operation without
having the emission control system
checked and repaired as necessary
could lead to poor driveability, reduced
fuel economy, and possible damage to
the emission control system.
Overdrive OFF indicator
light (if so equipped)
The overdrive OFF indicator light illumi-
nates when the overdrive OFF mode is se-
lected.
For additional information, refer to “Driving
the vehicle” in the “Starting and driving” sec-
tion of this manual.
Security indicator light (if
so equipped)
This light blinks when the ignition switch is
placed in the OFF or LOCK position.
The blinking security indicator light indi-
cates that the security systems equipped
on the vehicle are operational.
For additional information, refer to “Security
systems” in this section.
SET indicator light (if so
equipped)
This light comes on while the vehicle speed
is controlled by the cruise control system. If
the light blinks while the engine is running,
it may indicate the cruise control system is
not functioning properly. Have the system
checked. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.
For additional information, refer to “Cruise
control” in the “Starting and driving” section
of this manual.
Side light and headlight
indicator light (green)
The side light and headlight indicator light
illuminates when the side light or head-
lights are on. If the headlight switch is in the
AUTO position, the side light and headlight
indicator light will illuminate when the
headlights turn on. For additional informa-
tion, refer to “Headlight and turn signal
switch” in this section.
Slip indicator light
This indicator will blink when the VDC sys-
tem is operating, thus alerting the driver to
the fact that the road surface is slippery
and the vehicle is nearing its traction limits.
You may feel or hear the system working;
this is normal.
The light will blink for a few seconds after
the VDC system stops limiting wheel spin.
The
indicator light also comes on
when you place the ignition switch in the
ON position. The light will turn off after ap-
proximately 2 seconds if the system is op-
erational. If the light does not come on
have the system checked. It is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.
SPORT mode indicator
light (if so equipped)
This light illuminates and then turns off
when the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, and when the SPORT mode is se-
lected.
Instruments and controls 2-19
For additional information, refer to “Con-
tinuously Variable Transmission (CVT)” in
the “Starting and driving” section of this
manual.
Turn signal/hazard
indicator lights
The appropriate light flashes when the turn
signal switch is activated.
NOTE:
In case of a turn signal light bulb mal-
function, the turn signal will flash at a
higher frequency when the turn signal
switch is activated.
Both lights flash when the hazard switch is
turned on.
For additional information, refer to “Lights”
in the “Do-it-yourself” section of this
manual.
Vehicle Dynamic Control
(VDC) OFF indicator light
When the ignition switch is in the ON posi-
tion, the VDC OFF indicator light illuminates
and the turns off.
The VDC OFF indicator light illuminates
when the VDC OFF switch is pushed to the
OFF position.
When the VDC OFF switch is pushed to the
OFF position, the VDC system is turned off.
For additional information, refer to “Vehicle
Dynamic Control (VDC) system” in the
“Starting and driving” section of this
manual.
AUDIBLE REMINDERS
Brake pad wear warning
The disc brake pads have audible wear
warnings. When a disc brake pad requires
replacement, it makes a high pitched
scraping sound when the vehicle is in mo-
tion, whether or not the brake pedal is de-
pressed. Have the brakes checked as soon
as possible if the warning sound is heard. It
is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
Light reminder chime
With the ignition switch placed in the OFF
position, a chime sounds when the driver’s
door is opened if the headlights or parking
lights are on.
Turn the headlight control switch off or to
AUTO before leaving the vehicle.
NISSAN Intelligent Key® Lock-in
Prevention (if so equipped)
The Intelligent Key buzzer sounds if the In-
telligent Key is left inside the vehicle when
the doors are closed and locked. When the
buzzer sounds, be sure to take the Intelli-
gent Key with you when leaving the vehicle.
For additional information, refer to “NISSAN
Intelligent Key®” in the “Pre-driving checks
and adjustments” section of this manual.
Parking brake reminder chime
A chime sounds if the parking brake is set
and the vehicle is driven. The chime will
stop if the parking brake is released or the
vehicle speed returns to zero.
2-20 Instruments and controls
The vehicle information display is located
to the left of the speedometer. It displays
such items as:
∙ Audio Information
∙ Navigation Information
∙ Drive Computer Information
∙ Fuel Economy Information
∙ Indicators and Warnings
∙ Vehicle and Meter Display Settings
∙ Odometer/twin trip odometer
∙ Gear Position Indicator (P, R, N, D, L)
∙ Distance To Empty and Fuel Indicator
HOW TO USE THE VEHICLE
INFORMATION DISPLAY
The vehicle information display can be
changed using the
, , and OK buttons located on the
steering wheel.
䊊
1
- Use these
buttons to navigate the vehicle infor-
mation display.
䊊
2
OK - Change or select an item in the
vehicle information display.
LIC3565 LIC3566
VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY (if
so equipped)
Instruments and controls 2-21
䊊
3
— Returns to the previous menu.
The OK,
and buttons also
control audio and control panel functions
in some conditions. Most screens and
menus offer instruction prompts of the
steering switch buttons to indicate how to
control the vehicle information display.
Dots on the left side of the vehicle informa-
tion display will appear if there is more than
one page of menu items. The OK button
changes the audio source and
the
buttons also control voice
recognition manual mode. For additional
information, refer to the separate
NissanConnect® Owner’s Manual.
STARTUP DISPLAY
When the vehicle in placed in the ON posi-
tion the screens that display in the vehicle
information display include:
∙ Gauges
∙ Audio
∙ Navigation
∙ Fuel Economy
∙ Drive Computer
∙ Warning Review
∙ Settings
For additional information on warnings
and indicators, refer to “Vehicle information
display warnings and indicators” in this
section.
To control what items display in the vehicle
information display, refer to “Customize
display” in this section.
SETTINGS
The setting mode allows you to change the
information displayed in the vehicle infor-
mation display as well as the model for
several vehicle functions:
∙ Driver Assistance
∙ Customize Display
∙ Vehicle Settings
∙ TPMS Settings
∙ Maintenance
∙ Clock
∙ Unit/Language
∙ Factory Reset
2-22 Instruments and controls
Driver Assistance
The driver assistance menu allows the user
to change the various driving aids and as-
sistance options.
Menu item Result
Blind Spot (if so equipped) Displays the available Blind Spot options.
Blind Spot Warning Allows user to turn the emergency brake on or off. For additional information, refer to “Automatic Emergency
Braking (AEB)” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual.
Emergency Brake Displays the available emergency brake options.
System Allows user to turn the emergency brake on or off. For additional information, refer to “Automatic Emergency
Braking (AEB)” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual.
Parking Aids (if so equipped) Displays the available parking aids options.
Moving Object (if so equipped) Allows user to turn moving object detection on or off. For additional information, refer to “Moving Object Detection
(MOD)” in the “Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems” section of this manual.
Rear Cross Traffic Alert (if so
equipped)
Allows user to turn rear cross traffic alert on or off. For additional information, refer to “Rear Cross Traffic Alert
(RCTA)” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual.
Timer Alert Allows user to set or reset an alert at a specific time interval.
Low Temperature Alert Allows user to turn the low temperature alert on or off.
Chassis Control (if so equipped) Displays the available chassis control options.
Active Trace Control Allows the user to turn the Intelligent Trace Control (I-TC) feature on or off. For additional information, refer to
“Chassis Control” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual.
Active Engine Brake Allows the user to turn the Intelligent Engine Brake (I-EB) feature on or off. For additional information, refer to
“Chassis Control” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual.
Instruments and controls 2-23
Customize Display
The customize display menu allows the
user to customize the information that ap-
pears in the vehicle information display.
Menu item Result
Main Menu Selection Displays available screens that can be shown in the vehicle information display.
Status Allows user to turn the status screen on or off in the vehicle information display.
Drive Computer Allows user to turn the drive computer screen on or off in the vehicle information display.
Driving Aids Allows user to turn the driving aids screen on or off in the vehicle information display.
Tire Pressures Allows user to turn the tire pressures screen on or off in the vehicle information display.
Coolant Temp. Allows user to turn the coolant temp. screen on or off in the vehicle information display.
Chassis Control (if so equipped) Allows user to turn the chassis control screen on or off in the vehicle information display.
ECO Info Settings Displays the available ECO info settings.
ECO Drive Report (if so equipped) Select to display this report when the ignition in switch is placed in the ON position.
View History Select to view the vehicle’s history.
Navigation Settings (if so equipped) Displays the available navigation settings.
Alerts Allows user to set available navigation alerts.
Welcome Effect (if so equipped) Displays the available welcome effect settings.
2-24 Instruments and controls
Vehicle Settings
The vehicle settings allow the user to
change the settings for lights, wipers, lock-
ing, keys, and other vehicle settings.
Menu item Result
Lighting Displays the available lighting settings.
Welcome Headlight Displays the available welcome headlight options.
Welcome & Farewell Allows user to set the headlights to turn on when they approach and leave the vehicle.
Welcome Allows user to set the headlights to turn on when they approach the vehicle.
Farewell Allows user to set the headlights to turn on when they leave the vehicle.
OFF Allows user to set the headlights to turn off when not driving.
Auto Room Lamp Allows user to turn the auto room lamp on or off.
Light Sensitivity Allows user to change when the lights illuminate based on the brightness outside the vehicle.
Auto Light (if so equipped) Allows user to turn the auto light feature on or off.
Light Off Delay Allows user to change the duration of time, from 0 to 180 seconds, that the automatic headlights stay on af-
ter the vehicle is shut off.
Turn Indicator Displays the available turn indicator settings.
3 Flash Pass Allows user to turn the 3 flash pass feature on or off. For additional information, refer to “Headlight and turn
signal switch” in this section.
Locking Displays the available locking settings.
Ext. Door Switch Allows user to turn the exterior door switch on or off. When turned on, the request switch on the door is
activated.
Selective Unlock Allows user to turn the selective unlock feature on or off. When turned on, only the driver’s door is unlocked
after the door unlock operation. When the door handle request switch on the driver’s or front passenger’s
side door is pushed to be unlocked, only the corresponding door is unlocked first. All the doors can be un-
locked if the door unlock operation is performed again within 30 seconds. When this item is turned off, all the
doors will be unlocked after the door unlock operation is performed once.
Instruments and controls 2-25
Menu item Result
Auto Door Unlock Displays the available auto door unlock options.
Shift to P Doors will unlock when the vehicle is shifted into P (Park).
IGN OFF Doors will unlock when the ignition is turned off.
OFF Doors will have to be manually unlocked.
Answer Back Horn Allows user to turn the answer back horn feature on or off. When turned on, the horn will chirp and the haz-
ard indicators will flash twice when locking the vehicle with the Intelligent Key.
Wipers Displays the available wipers settings.
Reverse Link Allows user to turn the reverse link feature on or off.
Speed Dependent (if so equipped) Allows user to turn the wiper with speed feature on or off.
Wiper with Speed (if so equipped) Allows user to turn the wiper with speed feature on or off.
Remote Engine Start (if so equipped) Allows user to turn the Remote Engine Start feature on or off. When turned off, the vehicle cannot be started
remotely.
TPMS Settings
The TPMS settings menu allows the user to
change the tire pressure units displayed in
the vehicle information display.
Menu item Result
TPMS Settings Displays available TPMS Settings.
Tire Pressure Unit Allows user to select the tire pressure units that will display in the vehicle information display.
2-26 Instruments and controls
Maintenance
The maintenance menu allows the user to
set reminders for various vehicle mainte-
nance items.
WARNING
The tire replacement indicator is not a
substitute for regular tire checks, in-
cluding tire pressure checks. For addi-
tional information, refer to “Changing
wheels and tires” in the “Do-it-yourself”
section of this manual. Many factors in-
cluding tire inflation, alignment, driving
habits and road conditions affect tire
wear and when tires should be re-
placed. Setting the tire replacement in-
dicator for a certain driving distance
does not mean your tires will last that
long. Use the tire replacement indicator
as a guide only and always perform
regular tire checks. Failure to perform
regular tire checks, including tire pres-
sure checks could result in tire failure.
Serious vehicle damage could occur
and may lead to a collision, which could
result in serious personal injury or
death.
Menu item Result
Oil and Filter Allows user to set a reminder at a specific interval or reset the current one.
Tire Allows user to set a reminder at a specific interval or reset the current one.
Other Allows user to set a reminder at a specific interval or reset the current one.
Clock
Menu item Result
Clock Allows user to adjust the clock settings and time within the vehicle information display. Adjustments that
can be made include manually setting the time, and 12H/24H format.
If these options do not appear, the clock must be set within the center display. For additional information,
refer to the separate NissanConnect® Owner’s Manual (if so equipped).
Instruments and controls 2-27
Unit/Language
The unit/language menu allows the user to
change the units shown in the vehicle in-
formation display.
Menu item Result
Mileage/Fuel Displays the available mileage/fuel display units and allows user to select preferred unit for display.
Tire Pressures Allows user to select the tire pressure display units.
Temperature Allows user to select the temperature display units.
Language Displays the available language options and allows user to select preferred language for display.
Factory Reset
The factory reset menu allows the user to
restore the vehicle information display set-
tings to factory status.
Menu item Result
Factory Reset Allows user to reset the vehicle information display settings to the original factory settings. Once selected,
the user can confirm or cancel the reset.
2-28 Instruments and controls
LIC3962
Instruments and controls 2-29
VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY
WARNINGS AND INDICATORS
1. No Key Detected
2. Key Battery Low
3. I-Key System Error: See Owner’s
Manual
4. Shift to Park
5. Engine start operation (for Continu-
ously Variable Transmission (CVT)
models) (if so equipped)
6. Engine start operation for Intelligent
Key system (if I-Key battery level is low)
7. Release Parking Brake
8. Low Fuel
9. Door/liftgate Open
10. Tire Pressure Low — Add Air (if so
equipped)
11. TPMS Error: See Owner’s Manual (if so
equipped)
12. Alarm - Time for a break? (if so
equipped)
13. Power will turn off to save the battery
14. Power turned off to save the battery
15. Reminder: Turn OFF Headlights
16. Headlight System Error: See Owner’s
Manual
17. Cruise control indicator (if so equipped)
18. Blind Spot Warning (BSW) indicator (if so
equipped)
19. Malfunction (if so equipped)
20. Shipping Mode On Push Storage Fuse
21. CVT Error: See Owner’s Manual (if so
equipped)
22. Steering lock release malfunction indi-
cator (if so equipped)
23. Illumination indicator
24. Transmission Shift Position indicator (if
so equipped)
25. High Coolant Temp: See Owner’s
Manual
26. Outside Temperature Display
27. Low Outside Temperature
28. Oil and Filter
29. Tire
30. Other
31. Front Radar Obstruction (if so
equipped)
32. Side Radar Obstruction (if so equipped)
33. Sport mode indicator (if so equipped)
No Key Detected
This warning appears when the Intelligent
Key is left outside the vehicle with the igni-
tion switch in the ON position. Make sure
the Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle.
For additional information, refer to “NISSAN
Intelligent Key®” in the “Pre-driving checks
and adjustments” section of this manual.
Key Battery Low
This indicator illuminates when the Intelli-
gent Key battery is running out of power.
If this indicator illuminates, replace the bat-
tery with a new one. For additional infor-
mation, refer to “Battery replacement” in
the “Do-it-yourself” section of this manual.
I-Key System Error: See Owner’s Manual
After the ignition switch is pushed to the
ON position, this light comes on for a period
of time and then turns off.
2-30 Instruments and controls
The I-Key System Error message warns of
a malfunction with the Intelligent Key sys-
tem. If the light comes on while the engine
is stopped, it may be impossible to start
the engine.
If the light comes on while the engine is
running, you can drive the vehicle. However,
in these cases, have the system checked. It
is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
Shift to Park
This warning illuminates when the ignition
switch is in the OFF position and the shift
lever is not in the P (Park) position. Also, a
chime sounds when the ignition switch is
in the OFF position.
If this warning illuminates, move the shift
lever to the P (Park) position and start the
engine.
Engine start operation (for Continu-
ously Variable Transmission (CVT) mod-
els) (if so equipped)
This indicator appears when the shift lever
is in the P (Park) position.
This indicator means that the engine will
start by pushing the ignition switch with
the brake pedal depressed. You can start
the engine directly in any position of the
ignition switch.
Engine start operation for Intelligent
Key system (if I-Key battery level is low)
This indicator appears when the battery of
the Intelligent Key is low and when the In-
telligent Key system and the vehicle are not
communicating normally.
If this appears, touch the ignition switch
with the Intelligent Key while depressing
the brake pedal. For additional information,
refer to “NISSAN Intelligent Key® battery dis-
charge” in the “Starting and driving” section
of this manual.
Release Parking Brake
This warning illuminates in the message
area of the vehicle information display
when the parking brake is set and the ve-
hicle is driven.
Low Fuel
This warning illuminates when the fuel level
in the fuel tank is getting low. Refuel as
soon as it is convenient, preferably before
the fuel gauge reaches 0 (Empty). There
will be a small reserve of fuel in the tank
when the fuel gauge needle reaches 0
(Empty).
Door/liftgate Open
This warning illuminates when a door or
the liftgate has been opened.
Tire Pressure Low - Add Air (if so
equipped)
This warning appears when the low tire
pressure warning light in the meter illumi-
nates and low tire pressure is detected. The
warning appears each time the ignition
switch is placed in the ON position as long
as the low tire pressure warning light re-
mains illuminated. If this warning appears,
stop the vehicle and adjust the tire pres-
sures of all four tires to the recommended
COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and
Loading Information label. For additional
information, refer to “Tire Pressure Monitor-
ing System (TPMS)” in the “Starting and driv-
ing” section of this manual.
TPMS Error: See Owner’s Manual (if so
equipped)
This warning appears when there is an er-
ror with your TPMS. If this warning comes
Instruments and controls 2-31
on, have the system checked. It is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.
Alarm - Time for a break? (if so
equipped)
This indicator appears when the driver en-
ables the Timer Alert function within the
Driving Assistance settings and the se-
lected set time is expired. The time is based
on ignition on time and can be set up to six
hours.
Power will turn off to save the battery
This message appears in the vehicle infor-
mation display after a period of time if the
ignition switch is in the ON position and if
the vehicle is in P (Park). For additional infor-
mation, refer to “Push-button ignition
switch positions” in the “Starting and driv-
ing” section of this manual.
Power turned off to save the battery
This message appears after the ignition
switch is automatically turned off. For addi-
tional information, refer to “Push-button ig-
nition switch positions” in the “Starting and
driving” section of this manual.
Reminder: Turn OFF Headlights
This warning appears when the headlights
are left in the ON position when exiting the
vehicle. Place the headlight switch in the
OFF or AUTO position. For additional infor-
mation, refer to “Headlight and turn signal
switch” in this section.
Headlight System Error: See Owner’s
Manual
This warning illuminates when there is an
error with the system. For additional infor-
mation, refer to “Headlight and turn signal
switch” in this section.
Cruise control indicator (if so equipped)
This indicator shows the cruise control sys-
tem status.
For additional information, refer to “Cruise
control” in the “Starting and driving” section
of this manual.
Blind Spot Warning (BSW) indicator (if
so equipped)
This indicator shows when the BSW system
is engaged.
For additional information, refer to “Blind
Spot Warning (BSW)” in the “Starting and
driving” section of this manual.
Malfunction (if so equipped)
This warning appears when one or more of
the following systems (if so equipped) is
not functioning properly:
∙ Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB)
∙ Blind Spot Warning (BSW)
∙ Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)
If one or more of these warning appears,
have the system checked. It is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.
Shipping Mode On Push Storage Fuse
This warning may appear if the extended
storage switch is not pushed in. When this
warning appears, push in the extended
storage switch to turn off the warning. For
additional information, refer to “Extended
storage switch” in this section.
CVT Error: See Owner’s Manual (if so
equipped)
This warning illuminates when there is a
problem with the CVT system. If this warn-
ing comes on, have the system checked. It
is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
2-32 Instruments and controls
Steering lock release malfunction indi-
cator (if so equipped)
This indicator appears when the steering
lock cannot be released.
If this indicator appears, push the ignition
switch while lightly turning the steering
wheel right and left.
Illumination indicator
This indicator shows the illumination ad-
justment of the instrument panel. For addi-
tional information, refer to “Instrument
brightness control” in this section.
Transmission Shift Position indicator (if
so equipped)
This indicator shows the transmission shift
position.
High Coolant Temp: See Owner’s Manual
This warning appears when the tempera-
ture of the engine coolant is too high. Stop
the vehicle in a safe location as soon as
possible. Avoid quick starting or abrupt ac-
celeration. When the warning turns off, the
vehicle can be driven.
If the warning appears again soon after it
turns off, have the vehicle checked. It is rec-
ommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
for this service.
Outside Temperature Display
The outside temperature display appears
in the center region of the vehicle informa-
tion display.
Low Outside Temperature
This warning appears if the outside tem-
perature is below 37°F (3°C). The tempera-
ture can be changed to display in Celsius or
Fahrenheit. For additional information, re-
fer to “Settings” in this section.
Oil and Filter
This indicator appears when the customer
set distance comes for changing the en-
gine oil and filter. You can set or reset the
distance for checking or replacing these
items. For scheduled maintenance items
and intervals, refer to the “Maintenance and
schedules” section of this manual.
Tire
This indicator appears when the customer
set distance is reached for replacing tires.
You can set or reset the distance for replac-
ing tires.
WARNING
The tire replacement indicator is not a
substitute for regular tire checks, includ-
ing tire pressure checks. For additional in-
formation, refer to “Changing wheels and
tires” in the “Do-it-yourself” section of
this manual. Many factors including tire
inflation, alignment, driving habits and
road conditions affect tire wear and when
tires should be replaced. Setting the tire
replacement indicator for a certain driv-
ing distance does not mean your tires will
last that long. Use the tire replacement
indicator as a guide only and always per-
form regular tire checks. Failure to per-
form regular tire checks, including tire
pressure checks could result in tire failure.
Serious vehicle damage could occur and
may lead to a collision, which could result
in serious personal injury or death.
Other
This indicator appears when the customer
set distance is reached for checking or re-
placing maintenance items other than the
engine oil, oil filter and tires. Other mainte-
nance items can include such things as air
filter or tire rotation. The distance for
checking or replacing the items can be set
or reset.
Instruments and controls 2-33
Front Radar Obstruction (if so
equipped)
This warning appears when there is a radar
obstruction detected. For additional infor-
mation, refer to “Automatic Emergency
Braking (AEB)” in the “Starting and driving”
section of this manual.
Side Radar Obstruction (if so equipped)
This message appears when the Blind
Spot Warning (BSW) or Rear Cross Traffic
Alert (RCTA) systems become unavailable
because a radar blockage is detected. For
additional information, refer to “Blind Spot
Warning (BSW)” or “Rear Cross Traffic Alert
(RCTA)” in the “Starting and driving” section
of this manual.
Sport mode indicator (if so equipped)
A small “S” appears to the right of the Trans-
mission Shift Position indicator in the ve-
hicle information display when the Sport
mode is engaged.
Activate the Sport mode by pressing the
switch on the shift lever while the shift lever
is in the D (Drive) position.
For additional information, refer to “Driving
the vehicle” in the “Starting and driving” sec-
tion of this manual.
Your vehicle may have three types of secu-
rity systems:
∙ Vehicle security system
∙ NISSAN Anti-Theft System
∙ NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM
The vehicle security system provides visual
and audible alarm signals if someone
opens the doors or liftgate when the sys-
tem is armed. It is not, however, a motion
detection type system that activates when
a vehicle is moved or when a vibration oc-
curs.
The system helps deter vehicle theft but
cannot prevent it, nor can it prevent the
theft of interior or exterior vehicle compo-
nents in all situations. Always secure your
vehicle even if parking for a brief period.
Never leave your keys in the vehicle, and
always lock the vehicle when unattended.
Be aware of your surroundings, and park in
secure, well-lit areas whenever possible.
Many devices offering additional protec-
tion, such as component locks, identifica-
tion markers, and tracking systems, are
available at auto supply stores and spe-
cialty shops. A NISSAN dealer may also offer
such equipment. Check with your insur-
ance company to see if you may be eligible
for discounts for various theft protection
features.
How to arm the vehicle security
system
1. Close all windows. (The system can be
armed even if the windows are open.)
2. Remove the keys from the vehicle.
3. Close all doors and liftgate. Lock all
doors. The doors can be locked with
the key fob (if so equipped), Intelligent
Key (if so equipped), door handle re-
quest switch, or mechanical key.
LIC3633
SECURITY SYSTEMS (if so equipped)
2-34 Instruments and controls
4. Confirm that the security indica-
tor light stays on for about 30 seconds.
The vehicle security system is now pre-
armed. The vehicle security system will
automatically shift into the armed
phase. The
security light begins
to flash once every three seconds. If
during the pre-armed phase one of the
following occurs, the system will not
arm:
∙ Any door is unlocked with the key fob (if
so equipped), the Intelligent Key (if so
equipped), mechanical key, or door re-
quest switch.
∙ Ignition switch is placed in the ON posi-
tion.
∙ Even when the driver and/or passen-
gers are in the vehicle, the system will
activate with all the doors, hood and
liftgate locked with the ignition
switch placed in the LOCK position.
When placing the ignition switch in
the ON position, the system will be
released.
Vehicle security system activation
The vehicle security system will give the
following alarm:
∙ The headlights or turn lamps blink and
the horn sounds intermittently but syn-
chronously.
∙ The alarm automatically turns off after
a period of time. However, the alarm
reactivates if the vehicle is tampered
with again.
The alarm is activated by:
∙ opening any door or the liftgate without
using the key or Intelligent Key (even if
the door is unlocked by releasing the
door inside lock knob).
How to stop an activated alarm
The alarm stops only by unlocking a door
or the liftgate with the key fob (if so
equipped), pressing the
button on
the Intelligent Key (if so equipped), or push-
ing the request switch on the driver’s or
passenger’s door with the Intelligent Key (if
so equipped) in range of the door handle.
NISSAN ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM
(NATS) (if so equipped)
The NISSAN Anti-Theft System will not al-
low the engine to start without the use of a
registered NATS key.
If the engine does not start using the reg-
istered NATS key, it may be due to interfer-
ence caused by:
∙ Another NATS key
∙ Automated toll road device
∙ Automated payment device
∙ Other devices that transmit similar sig-
nals
Start the engine using the following proce-
dure:
1. Remove any items that may be causing
the interference away from the NATS
key.
2. Leave the ignition switch in the ON po-
sition for approximately 5 seconds.
3. Place the ignition switch in the OFF or
LOCK position and wait approximately
10 seconds.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 again.
5. Start the engine.
Instruments and controls 2-35
6. Repeat the steps above until all pos-
sible interferences are eliminated.
If this procedure allows the engine to start,
NISSAN recommends placing the regis-
tered NATS key separate from other de-
vices to avoid interference.
NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER
SYSTEM (if so equipped)
The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System
will not allow the engine to start without
the use of a registered key.
If the engine fails to start using a registered
key (for example, when interference is
caused by another registered key, an auto-
mated toll road device or automatic pay-
ment device on the key ring), restart the
engine using the following procedures:
1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON po-
sition for approximately 5 seconds.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF or
LOCK position, and wait approximately
10 seconds.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2.
4. Restart the engine while holding the
device (which may have caused the in-
terference) separate from the regis-
tered key.
If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN
recommends placing the registered key on
a separate key ring to avoid interference
from other devices.
FCC Notice:
For USA:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-
lowing two conditions; (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interfer-
ence received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation of
the device.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s author-
ity to operate the equipment.
For Canada:
This device complies with Industry
Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must ac-
cept any interference, including interfer-
ence that may cause undesired opera-
tion of the device.
2-36 Instruments and controls
Security indicator light (if so
equipped)
The security indicator light blinks whenever
the ignition switch is placed in the OFF or
LOCK position.
This function indicates the NISSAN Anti-
Theft System (NATS) is operational.
If the NATS is malfunctioning, the light will
remain on while the ignition switch is
placed in the ON position.
If the light still remains on and/or the
engine will not start, seek service for the
NATS as soon as possible. Please bring all
registered keys that you have. It is rec-
ommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
SWITCH OPERATION
WARNING
In freezing temperatures the washer
solution may freeze on the windshield
and obscure your vision which may lead
to an accident. Warm the windshield
with the defroster before you wash the
windshield.
LIC0474 LIC2661
WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH
Instruments and controls 2-37
CAUTION
∙ Do not operate the washer continu-
ously for more than 30 seconds.
∙ Do not operate the washer if the
windshield-washer fluid reservoir is
empty.
∙ Do not fill the windshield-washer fluid
reservoir with windshield-washer
fluid concentrates at full strength.
Some methyl alcohol based
windshield-washer fluid concen-
trates may permanently stain the
grille if spilled while filling the
windshield-washer fluid reservoir.
∙ Pre-mix windshield-washer fluid con-
centrates with water to the manufac-
turer’s recommended levels before
pouring the fluid into the windshield-
washer fluid reservoir. Do not use the
windshield-washer fluid reservoir to
mix the windshield-washer fluid con-
centrate and water.
NOTE:
If the windshield wiper operation is in-
terrupted by snow or ice, the wiper may
stop moving to protect its motor. If this
occurs, turn the wiper switch to the OFF
position and remove the snow or ice that
is on and around the wiper arms. In ap-
proximately 1 minute, turn the switch on
again to operate the wiper.
The windshield wiper and washer operates
when the ignition switch is in the ON posi-
tion.
Push the lever down to operate the wiper
at the following speed:
䊊
1
Intermittent — intermittent operation
can be adjusted by turning the knob
toward
䊊
A
(Faster) or
䊊
B
(Slower). Also,
the intermittent operation speed var-
ies in accordance with the vehicle
speed (if so equipped). (For example,
when the vehicle speed is high, the in-
termittent operation speed will be
faster.)
䊊
2
Low — continuous low speed opera-
tion
䊊
3
High — continuous high speed opera-
tion
Push the lever up
䊊
4
to have one sweep
operation (MIST) of the wiper.
Pull the lever toward you
䊊
5
to operate the
washer. The wiper will also operate several
times.
NOTE:
The Wiper with Speed feature may be
disabled. For additional information, re-
fer to “Vehicle information display” in
this section.
2-38 Instruments and controls
REAR SWITCH OPERATION
WARNING
In freezing temperatures the washer
solution may freeze on the rear window
and obscure your vision which may lead
to an accident. Warm the rear window
with the defroster before you wash the
rear window.
CAUTION
∙ Do not operate the washer continu-
ously for more than 30 seconds.
∙ Do not operate the washer if the
windshield-washer fluid reservoir is
empty.
∙ Do not fill the windshield-washer fluid
reservoir with windshield-washer
fluid concentrates at full strength.
Some methyl alcohol based
windshield-washer fluid concen-
trates may permanently stain the
grille if spilled while filling the
windshield-washer fluid reservoir.
∙ Pre-mix windshield-washer fluid con-
centrates with water to the manufac-
turer’s recommended levels before
pouring the fluid into the windshield-
washer fluid reservoir. Do not use the
windshield-washer fluid reservoir to
mix the windshield-washer fluid con-
centrate and water.
NOTE:
If the rear window wiper operation is in-
terrupted by snow, etc., the wiper may
stop moving to protect its motor. If this
occurs, turn the wiper switch to OFF and
remove the snow, etc. on and around the
wiper arms. After about 1 minute, turn
the switch on again to operate the wiper.
The rear window wiper and washer oper-
ate when the ignition switch is in the ON
position. Turn the switch clockwise from
the OFF position to operate the wiper.
䊊
1
Intermittent — intermittent operation
(not adjustable)
䊊
2
Low — continuous low speed opera-
tion
Push the switch forward
䊊
3
to operate the
washer. The wiper will also operate several
times.
If the windshield wipers are on and the ve-
hicle is placed in R (Reverse) the rear wiper
will automatically turn on while the vehicle
remains in R (Reverse).
LIC2662
Instruments and controls 2-39
NOTE:
The Reverse Link feature may be dis-
abled. For additional information, refer
to “Vehicle information display” in this
section.
To defrost the rear window glass (if so
equipped), start the engine and push the
rear window defroster switch on. The rear
window defroster indicator light on the
switch comes on. Push the switch again to
turn the defroster off.
To defrost the outside mirrors (if so
equipped), start the engine and push the
outside mirror defroster switch on. The
outside mirror defroster indicator light on
the switch comes on. Push the switch
again to turn the defroster off.
The rear window/outside mirror defroster
(if so equipped) automatically turns off af-
ter approximately 15 minutes.
CAUTION
When cleaning the inner side of the rear
window, be careful not to scratch or
damage the rear window defroster.
Type A (if so equipped)
LIC3600
Type B (if so equipped)
LIC3570
REAR WINDOW AND/OR OUTSIDE
MIRROR DEFROSTER SWITCH (if so
equipped)
2-40 Instruments and controls
HEADLIGHT CONTROL SWITCH
Lighting
䊊
1
Rotate the switch to the position,
and the side, tail, license plate, and in-
strument panel lights will come on.
䊊
2
Rotate the switch to the position,
and the headlights will come on and all
the other lights remain on.
CAUTION
Use the headlights with the engine run-
ning to avoid discharging the vehicle
battery.
Type A (if so equipped)
LIC2634
Type B (if so equipped)
LIC4008
Type C (if so equipped)
LIC4007
HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL
SWITCH
Instruments and controls 2-41
Autolight system (if so equipped)
The autolight system allows the headlights
to turn on and off automatically. The auto-
light system can:
∙ Turn on the headlights, front parking,
tail, license plate and instrument panel
lights automatically when it is dark.
∙ Turn off all the lights when it is light.
∙ Keep all the lights on for a period of time
after you place the ignition switch in the
OFF position and all doors are closed.
To turn on the autolight system:
1. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO
position
䊊
1
.
2. Place the ignition switch in the ON po-
sition.
3. The autolight system automatically
turns the headlights on and off.
Initially, if the ignition switch is turned off
and a door is opened and left open, the
headlights remain on for a period of time. If
another door is opened while the head-
lights are on, then the timer is reset.
To turn the autolight system off, turn the
switch to the OFF,
,or position.
NOTE:
Autolight activation sensitivity and the
time delay for autolight shutoff may be
able to be adjusted. For additional infor-
mation, refer to “Vehicle information dis-
play” in this section.
Be sure you do not put anything on top
of the autolight sensor located in the top
side
䊊
1
of the instrument panel. The au-
tolight sensor controls the autolight; if it
is covered, the autolight sensor reacts as
if it is dark out and the headlights will
illuminate. If this occurs while parked
with the engine off and the ignition
switch placed in the ON position, your
vehicle’s battery could become dis-
charged.
LIC2636 LIC4006
2-42 Instruments and controls
Headlight beam select
䊊
1
To select the high beam function, push
the lever forward while the low beams
are on. The high beam lights come on
and the
indicator light illumi-
nates.
䊊
2
Pull the lever back to return to the low
beam.
䊊
3
Pulling and releasing the lever flashes
the headlight high beams on and off.
The low beams do not need to be on
for this to function.
Battery saver system
The battery saver system automatically
turns off the ignition after a period of time
when the ignition switch is left in the ON
position.
The battery saver system automatically
turns off the following lights after a period
of time when the ignition switch is placed in
the OFF position:
∙ Headlights, when the headlight switch
is in the
or position
∙ Interior lights, when left in the ON posi-
tion
CAUTION
Even though the battery saver feature
automatically turns off the headlights
after a period of time, you should turn
the headlight switch to the OFF position
when the engine is not running to avoid
discharging the vehicle battery.
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS (DRL)
SYSTEM (if so equipped)
The Daytime Running Lights (DRL) portion
of the fog light assembly automatically illu-
minates when the engine is started with
the parking brake released. The DRL oper-
ate with the headlight switch in the OFF
position. Turn the headlight switch to
the
position for full illumination when
driving at night. (The DRL will turn off.)
If the parking brake is applied before the
engine is started, the DRL do not illuminate.
The DRL illuminate once the parking brake
is released. The DRL will remain on until the
ignition switch is placed in the OFF position.
It is necessary at dusk to turn the headlight
switch on for interior controls and switches
to illuminate, as those remain off while the
switch is in the OFF position.
WARNING
When the DRL system is active, tail
lights on your vehicle are not on. It is
necessary at dusk to turn on your head-
lights. Failure to do so could cause an
accident injuring yourself and others.
LIC2637
Instruments and controls 2-43
INSTRUMENT BRIGHTNESS
CONTROL
Turn the control knob
䊊
A
to adjust the
brightness of instrument panel lights.
TURN SIGNAL SWITCH
Turn signal
䊊
1
Move the lever up or down to signal the
turning direction. When the turn is
completed, the turn signal cancels au-
tomatically.
Lane change signal
䊊
2
To signal a lane change, move the lever
up or down until the turn signal begins
to flash, but the lever does not latch.
The turn signal will automatically flash
three times.
NOTE:
The 3 flash pass lane change signal may
be able to be disabled. For additional in-
formation, refer to “Vehicle information
display” in this section.
LIC3579 LIC2638
2-44 Instruments and controls
FOG LIGHT SWITCH (if so
equipped)
To turn the fog lights on, turn the headlight
switch to the
or position, then
turn the fog light switch to the
posi-
tion.
To turn the fog lights on with the headlight
switch in the AUTO position, the headlights
must be on, then turn the fog light switch to
the
position.
To turn the fog lights off, turn the fog light
switch to the OFF position.
To sound the horn, push near the horn icon
on the steering wheel.
WARNING
Do not disassemble the horn. Doing so
could affect proper operation of the
supplemental front air bag system.
Tampering with the supplemental front
air bag system may result in serious
personal injury.
WARNING
Do not use or allow occupants to use
the seat heater if you or the occupants
cannot monitor elevated seat tempera-
tures or have an inability to feel pain in
body parts that contact the seat. Use of
the seat heater by such people could
result in serious injury.
LIC2639 LIC3568 LIC3973
HORN HEATED SEAT SWITCHES (if so
equipped)
Instruments and controls 2-45
CAUTION
∙ The battery could run down if the seat
heater is operated while the engine is
not running.
∙ Do not use the seat heater for ex-
tended periods or when no one is us-
ing the seat.
∙ Do not put anything on the seat which
insulates heat, such as a blanket,
cushion, seat cover, etc. Otherwise,
the seat may become overheated.
∙ Do not place anything hard or heavy
on the seat or pierce it with a pin or
similar object. This may result in dam-
age to the heater.
∙ Any liquid spilled on the heated seat
should be removed immediately with
a dry cloth.
∙ When cleaning the seat, never use
gasoline, benzine, thinner, or any
similar materials.
∙ If any malfunctions are found or the
heated seat does not operate, turn
the switch off and have the system
checked. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
The front seats are warmed by built-in
heaters.
1. Place the ignition switch in the ON po-
sition.
2. Push the switch once for the high (2 in-
dicators illuminated) setting. Push the
switch again for the low (1 indicator illu-
minated) setting.
The heater is controlled by a thermo-
stat, automatically turning the heater
on and off. The indicator light(s) will re-
main on as long as the switch is on.
3. Push the switch again to turn it off (no
indicators illuminated).
4. When the seat is warmed or before you
leave the vehicle, be sure to push the
switch to turn it off.
When this switch is illuminated, the follow-
ing system is activated.
∙ Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB)
To turn the systems on, push the AEB
switch. The light will illuminate. To turn the
systems off, push the switch again. The
light will go off, and the Automatic Emer-
gency Braking (AEB) system warning light
will illuminate in the meter.
For additional information, refer to “Auto-
matic Emergency Braking (AEB)” in the
“Starting and driving” section of this
manual.
LIC3983
AUTOMATIC EMERGENCY BRAKING
(AEB) SWITCH (if so equipped)
2-46 Instruments and controls
The vehicle should be driven with the VDC
system on for most driving conditions.
If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the
VDC system reduces the engine output to
reduce wheel spin. The engine speed will
be reduced even if the accelerator is de-
pressed to the floor. If maximum engine
power is needed to free a stuck vehicle,
turn the VDC system off.
To turn off the VDC system, push the VDC
OFF switch. The
indicator and the Au-
tomatic Emergency Braking (AEB) system
warning light will come on.
Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart
the engine to turn on the system. For addi-
tional information, refer to “Vehicle Dy-
namic Control (VDC) system” in the “Start-
ing and driving” section of this manual.
12V OUTLETS
The power outlet is for powering electrical
accessories such as cellular telephones. It
is rated at 12 volt, 120W (10A) maximum.
The front console power outlet is powered
only when the ignition switch is in the ON
position, or while the accessory power is
active.
LIC3344
Instrument Panel
LIC4003
VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)
OFF SWITCH
POWER OUTLETS
Instruments and controls 2-47
NOTE:
∙ When the ignition is in the OFF posi-
tion, the front console power outlet
stops delivering power one minute
after the door is opened and stays
open.
∙ If the door remains closed after the
ignition is placed in the OFF position,
the front console power outlet con-
tinues to deliver power until the ac-
cessory power timer has elapsed.
CAUTION
∙ The outlet and plug may be hot during
or immediately after use.
∙ Only certain power outlets are de-
signed for use with a cigarette lighter
unit. Do not use any other power out-
let for an accessory lighter. It is rec-
ommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for additional information.
∙ Do not use with accessories that ex-
ceed a 12 volt, 120W (10A) power draw.
∙ Do not use double adapters or more
than one electrical accessory.
∙ Use power outlets with the engine
running to avoid discharging the ve-
hicle battery.
∙ Avoid using power outlets when the
air conditioner, headlights or rear win-
dow defroster is on.
∙ Before inserting or disconnecting a
plug, be sure the electrical accessory
being used is turned off.
∙ Push the plug in as far as it will go. If
good contact is not made, the plug
may overheat or the internal tem-
perature fuse may open.
∙ When not in use, be sure to close the
cap. Do not allow water or any other
liquid to contact the outlet.
The extended storage switch is used when
the vehicle is in transit from the factory. It is
located in the fuse panel
䊊
A
which is on the
driver’s side left kick panel, near the floor, on
the inside of the panel. If any electrical
equipment does not operate, ensure the
extended storage switch is pushed fully in
place, as shown.
LIC3581
EXTENDED STORAGE SWITCH
2-48 Instruments and controls
SEATBACK POCKETS
The seatback pockets are located on the
back of the driver’s and passenger’s seats.
The pockets can be used to store maps.
Pulled position
LIC3266
Pushed position
LIC3268
LIC0016
STORAGE
Instruments and controls 2-49
WARNING
To ensure proper operation of the pas-
senger’s NISSAN Advanced Air Bag Sys-
tem, please observe the following
items:
∙ Do not allow a passenger in the rear
seat to push or pull on the seatback
pocket or head restraint/headrest.
∙ Do not place heavy loads heavier than
9.1 lbs. (4 kg) on the seatback, head
restraint/headrest or in the seatback
pocket.
STORAGE TRAYS
WARNING
Do not place sharp objects in the trays
to help prevent injury in an accident or
sudden stop.
Storage compartment
LIC4004
Instrument panel pocket
LIC3558
2-50 Instruments and controls
GLOVE BOX
Open the glove box by pulling the handle.
WARNING
Keep glove box lid closed while driving
to help prevent injury in an accident or a
sudden stop.
CUP HOLDERS
WARNING
∙ Avoid abrupt starting and braking
when the cup holder is being used to
prevent spilling the drink. If the liquid
is hot, it can scald you or your
passenger.
∙ Use only soft cups in the cup holder.
Hard objects can injure you in an
accident.
Center console
LIC3986
LIC3580
Front console
LIC3987
Instruments and controls 2-51
CAUTION
∙ Do not use bottle holder for any other
objects that could be thrown about in
the vehicle and possibly injure people
during sudden braking or an accident.
∙ Do not use bottle holder for open liq-
uid containers.
LUGGAGE HOOKS
The luggage hooks that are located on the
floor should have loads less than 110 lbs.
(490 N) to a single hook.
The luggage hooks can be used to secure
cargo with ropes or other types of straps.
Bottle holder — front
LIC3574
Bottle holder — rear
LIC3575
LIC3577
2-52 Instruments and controls
WARNING
∙ Properly secure all cargo with ropes or
straps to help prevent it from sliding
or shifting. Do not place cargo higher
than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop
or collision, unsecured cargo could
cause personal injury.
∙ Use suitable ropes and hooks to se-
cure cargo.
∙ Never allow anyone to ride in the lug-
gage area. It is extremely dangerous
to ride in a cargo area inside of a ve-
hicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seri-
ously injured or killed.
∙ Do not allow people to ride in any area
of your vehicle that is not equipped
with seats and seat belts.
∙ The child restraint top tether strap
may be damaged by contact with
items in the cargo area. Secure any
items in the cargo area. Your child
could be seriously injured or killed in a
collision if the top tether strap is
damaged.
∙ Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a
seat and using a seat belt properly.
GROCERY HOOKS
The grocery hooks are located in the cargo
area and allow for standard size plastic
grocery bags to hang side by side.
CAUTION
Do not apply a total load of more than
6.6 lbs. (3 kg) to a single grocery hook.
CARGO COVER (if so equipped)
WARNING
∙ Never put anything on the cargo
cover, no matter how small. Any ob-
ject on it could cause an injury in an
accident or sudden stop.
∙ Do not put objects heavier than 44 lbs.
(20 kg) on the cargo cover for long
periods of time.
∙ Do not leave the cargo cover in the
vehicle with it disengaged from the
holder.
∙ Properly secure all cargo with ropes or
straps to help prevent it from sliding
or shifting. Do not place cargo higher
than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop
or collision, unsecured cargo could
cause personal injury.
Left side shown (right similar)
LIC3569
Instruments and controls 2-53
∙ Properly secure cargo and do not al-
low it to contact the top tether strap
when it is attached to the top tether
anchor. Cargo that is not properly se-
cured or cargo that contacts the top
tether strap may damage the top
tether strap during a collision. If the
cargo cover contacts the top tether
strap when it is attached to the top
tether anchor, remove the cargo cover
from the vehicle or secure it on the
cargo floor below its attachment lo-
cation. If the cargo cover is not re-
moved, it may damage the top tether
strap during a collision. Your child
could be seriously injured or killed in a
collision if the child restraint top
tether strap is damaged.
The cargo cover keeps the luggage com-
partment contents hidden from the out-
side.
To remove the cargo cover:
䊊
1
Remove the straps from the rear
hatch.
䊊
2
Remove the cargo cover from the
holders on the rear pillar.
ROOF RACK (if so equipped)
Do not apply any load directly to the roof
side rails. Cross bars must be installed be-
fore applying load/cargo/luggage to the
roof of the vehicle. Genuine NISSAN acces-
sory cross bars are available through a
NISSAN dealer. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for additional informa-
tion.
The service load capacity for the roof side
rails is 165 lbs. (74 kg), however do not ex-
ceed the accessory cross bars load capac-
ity.
LIC3349 LIC2386
2-54 Instruments and controls
Be careful that your vehicle does not ex-
ceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR) or its Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR front and rear). The GVWR and GAWR
are located on the F.M.V.S.S. or C.V.M.S.S. cer-
tification label (located on the driver’s door
pillar). For additional information regarding
GVWR and GAWR, refer to “Vehicle loading
information” in the “Technical and con-
sumer information” section of this manual.
WARNING
∙ Always install the cross bars onto the
roof side rails before loading cargo of
any kind. Loading cargo directly onto
the roof side rails or the vehicle’s roof
may cause vehicle damage.
∙ Drive extra carefully when the vehicle
is loaded at or near the cargo carrying
capacity, especially if the significant
portion of that load is carried on the
cross bars.
∙ Heavy loading of the cross bars has
the potential to affect the vehicle sta-
bility and handling during sudden or
unusual handling maneuvers.
∙ Roof rack cross bars should be evenly
distributed.
∙ Do not exceed maximum roof rack
cross bars load capacity.
∙ Properly secure all cargo with ropes or
straps to help prevent it from sliding
or shifting. In a sudden stop or colli-
sion, unsecured cargo could cause
personal injury.
Installing Crossbars (if so
equipped)
WARNING
∙ It is recommended that you have the
roof rack crossbars installed by a
NISSAN dealer.
∙ Removal and re-installation of cross-
bars requires purchase of new M6
bolts (T99R1 5RL0A-S1) or the re-
application of thread-locking adhe-
sive such as LOCTITE® , 242® , or
equivalent.
∙ Do not attempt to adjust fasteners on
the underside of the end supports.
Fasteners are pre-adjusted to the
proper torque requirement by the
manufacturer.
∙ Protect the painted area on the ve-
hicle roof under the crossbars by plac-
ing a piece of cloth under the cross
bars to prevent scratch damage.
Instruments and controls 2-55
1. Manually remove all 8 protective caps
from the roof rack rails. See Fig. 1.
NOTE:
Please stow these protective covers in
the glove box.
CAUTION
Covers should be re-installed if cross-
bar is removed.
2. Identify the FRONT (A) & REAR (B) cross-
bar assembly in the kit.
NOTE:
REAR Crossbar is shorter in length com-
pared to the FRONT Crossbar
3. Identify markings on bottom side of
crossbar end supports.
NOTE:
∙ FL is FRONT Crossbar Driver Side.
∙ FR is FRONT Crossbar Passenger Side
∙ RL is REAR Crossbar Driver Side.
∙ RR is REAR Crossbar Passenger Side.
When assembled, the Arrow on the bot-
tom side of the crossbar end support
always points towards the front of the
vehicle.
LIC4010 LIC4011 LIC4012
2-56 Instruments and controls
4. Position FRONT crossbar onto left and
right roof rack rail; and adjust right support
in and out until it fits securely into position.
See Fig. 4.
5. Make sure that the FRONT crossbar is in
proper position with respect to the roof
rack rail attachment positions, and loosely
install all 4 bolts on FRONT crossbar using
the T–30 TORX® screwdriver provided.
See Fig. 5.
NOTE:
Start with driver side front bolt. Bolts
should not be fully tightened, only par-
tially tightened.
6. Tighten all 4 bolts to 8–9 N-m torque
using a T–30 TORX® torque wrench.
NOTE:
a. Start with driver side front bolt.
b. T–30 TORX® torque wrench is not pro-
vided with kit.
7. Repeat steps 4 through 6 for the REAR
crossbar installation.
8. After installation, gently wiggle the cross-
bars to check for any loose fit. If loose fit is
noticed, please uninstall and repeat the
steps 4 through 7.
LIC4013 LIC4014 LIC4015
Instruments and controls 2-57
CAUTION
∙ Please locate max load label on cross-
bar end support.
∙ Do not load more that 100 lbs. (45kg).
∙ Be careful that your vehicle does not
exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rat-
ing (GVWR) or its Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR Front and Rear). The
GVWR and GAWR are located on the
Safety Compliance Certification Label.
For more information regarding
GVWR and GAWR, refer to the “Techni-
cal and consumer information” sec-
tion of this manual.
∙ Always evenly distribute the luggage
and appropriate crossbar attachment
on the crossbar.
POWER WINDOWS
WARNING
∙ Make sure that all passengers have
their hands, etc., inside the vehicle
while it is in motion and before closing
the windows. Use the window lock
switch to prevent unexpected use of
the power windows.
∙ To help avoid risk of injury or death
through unintended operation of the
vehicle and/or its systems, including
entrapment in windows or inadver-
tent door lock activation, do not leave
children, people who require the as-
sistance of others or pets unattended
in your vehicle. Additionally, the tem-
perature inside a closed vehicle on a
warm day can quickly become high
enough to cause a significant risk of
injury or death to people and pets.
The power windows operate when the ig-
nition switch is placed in the ON position or
for a period of time after the ignition switch
is placed in the OFF position. If the driver’s
or passenger’s door is opened during this
period of time, the power to the windows is
canceled.
1. Window lock button
2. Power door lock switch
3. Front passenger side automatic
switch
4. Right rear passenger side switch
5. Left rear passenger side switch
6. Driver’s side automatic switch
LIC3238
WINDOWS
2-58 Instruments and controls
Driver’s side power window
switch
The driver’s side control panel is equipped
with switches to open or close all of the
windows.
To open a window, push the switch to the
detent and continue to hold down until the
desired window position is reached. To
close a window, pull the switch to the de-
tent and continue to hold up until the de-
sired window position is reached.
Front passenger’s power window
switch
The passenger’s window switch operates
only the corresponding passenger’s win-
dow.To open the window partially, push the
switch down
䊊
1
lightly until the desired
window position is reached. To close the
window partially, pull the switch up
䊊
2
until
the desired window position is reached.
Rear power window switch
The rear power window switches open or
close only the corresponding windows. To
open the window, push the switch and hold
it down
䊊
1
. To close the window, pull the
switch up
䊊
2
.
Locking passengers’ windows
When the window lock switch is depressed,
only the driver’s side window can be
opened or closed. Push it again to cancel
the window lock function.
LIC3588 LIC2663
Instruments and controls 2-59
Automatic operation
To fully open a window equipped with au-
tomatic operation, press the window
switch down to the second detent and re-
lease it; it need not be held. The window
automatically opens all the way. To stop
the window, lift the switch up while the win-
dow is opening.
If so equipped, it may be possible to fully
close a window equipped with automatic
operation, pull the switch up to the second
detent and release it; it need not be held. To
stop the window, press the switch down
while the window is closing.
Auto-reverse function
The auto-reverse function can be acti-
vated when a window is closed by auto-
matic operation.
Depending on the environment or driv-
ing conditions, the auto-reverse func-
tion may be activated if an impact or
load similar to something being caught
in the window occurs.
WARNING
There are some small distances imme-
diately before the closed position which
cannot be detected. Make sure that all
passengers have their hands, etc., in-
side the vehicle before closing the
window.
If the vehicle’s battery is disconnected, re-
placed, or jump started, the power window
auto-reverse function may not operate
properly. Have the power window auto-
reverse system re-initialized. It is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.
If the control unit detects something
caught in a window equipped with auto-
matic operation as it is closing, the window
will be immediately lowered.
When power window switch does
not operate
If the power window automatic function
(closing only) does not operate properly,
perform the following procedure to initial-
ize the power window system:
1. Place the ignition switch in the ON po-
sition.
2. Open the window more than halfway
by operating the power window switch.
3. Pull the power window switch and hold
it to close the window, and then hold
the switch more than 3 seconds after
the window is closed.
4. Release the power window switch. Op-
erate the window by the automatic
function to confirm the initialization is
complete. The power window auto-
matically opens or closes depending
on if the automatic down or up func-
tion is selected.
5. Perform steps 2 through 4 above for
other windows.
If the power window function does not op-
erate properly after performing the above
procedure have the system checked and
repaired. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.
LIC0410
2-60 Instruments and controls
The interior light has a three-position
switch and operates regardless of ignition
switch position.
When the switch is in the ON position
䊊
3
,
the interior lights illuminate, regardless of
door position. The lights will go off after a
period of time unless the ignition switch is
placed in the ON position.
When the switch is in the
䊊
2
position, the
interior lights will stay on for a period of
time when:
∙ The doors are unlocked by the key or
the power door lock switch while all
doors are closed and the ignition switch
is placed in the OFF position.
∙ The driver’s door is opened and then
closed while the key is removed from
the ignition switch.
∙ The key is removed from the ignition
switch while all doors are closed.
The light will turn off while the timer is acti-
vated when:
∙ The driver’s door is locked by the key, or
the power door lock switch.
∙ The ignition switch is placed in the ON
position.
When the switch is in the OFF position
䊊
1
,
the interior lights do not illuminate, regard-
less of door position.
The lights will turn off automatically after a
period of time while doors are open to pre-
vent the battery from becoming dis-
charged.
CAUTION
Do not use for extended periods of time
with the engine stopped. This could re-
sult in a discharged battery.
LIC3985
INTERIOR LIGHTS
Instruments and controls 2-61
MAP LIGHTS
To turn the map lights on, push the switch
to the
䊊
1
position. To turn them off, push
the switch to the
䊊
2
position.
CAUTION
Do not use for extended periods of time
with the engine stopped. This could re-
sult in a discharged battery.
PERSONAL LIGHT
The personal light has a three-position
switch and operates regardless of ignition
switch position.
When the switch is in the ON position
䊊
1
,
the light illuminates, regardless of door po-
sition.
When the switch is in the DOOR position
䊊
2
,
the light illuminates by opening a door.
The personal light will stay on for about
15 seconds when:
∙ The doors are unlocked while the igni-
tion switch is placed in the OFF position
and all doors are closed.
∙ The driver’s door is opened and then
closed while the ignition switch is
placed in the OFF position.
∙ The ignition switch is placed in the OFF
position while all doors are closed.
The personal light will turn off while the
15 second timer is activated when:
∙ The driver’s door is locked by the key
fob, a key or the lock-unlock switch.
∙ The ignition switch is placed in the ON
position.
When the switch is in the OFF position
䊊
3
,
the light does not illuminate, regardless of
door position.
Some vehicles are equipped with a battery
saver feature that will automatically turn
off the interior lights after approximately
10 minutes if:
∙ doors are open, or
∙ the interior light switch is in the ON po-
sition.
LIC3988
Center personal light
SIC2063A
2-62 Instruments and controls
NOTE:
If the interior lights are turned off auto-
matically by the battery saver feature,
the ignition switch must be placed in the
ON position before the interior lights will
illuminate again.
For information regarding the interior light
bulb replacement, refer to “Exterior and in-
terior lights” in the “Do-it-yourself” section
of this manual.
CAUTION
Do not use for extended periods of time
with the engine stopped. This could re-
sult in a discharged battery.
LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT LIGHT
The light illuminates when the rear hatch is
opened. When the rear hatch is closed, the
light goes off. For additional information,
refer to “Exterior and interior lights” in the
“Do-it-yourself” section of this manual.
Instruments and controls 2-63
MEMO
2-64 Instruments and controls
3 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Keys.............................................3-2
NISSAN Intelligent Key® .......................3-2
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System
keys..........................................3-3
Doors ...........................................3-4
Locking with key..............................3-5
Locking with inside lock knob.................3-5
Locking with power door lock switch .........3-5
Automatic door locks.........................3-6
Child safety rear door lock ....................3-6
NISSAN Intelligent Key® ..........................3-6
Operating range..............................3-8
Door locks/unlocks precaution ...............3-8
NISSAN Intelligent Key® operation.............3-9
How to use the remote keyless entry
function .....................................3-12
Warning signals .............................3-15
Troubleshooting guide ......................3-16
Remote Engine Start (if so equipped) ...........3-18
Remote Engine Start operating range .......3-18
Remote starting the vehicle .................3-19
Extending engine run time ..................3-19
Canceling a Remote Engine Start............3-19
Conditions the Remote Engine Start will
notwork ....................................3-20
Hood ...........................................3-21
Liftgate.........................................3-21
Opening the liftgate .........................3-23
Closing the liftgate ..........................3-23
Secondary liftgate unlock ...................3-23
Fuel-filler door ..................................3-24
Opener operation ...........................3-24
Fuel-filler cap ................................3-25
Steering wheel .................................3-26
Manual operation ...........................3-26
Sun visors ......................................3-26
Vanity mirrors ...............................3-27
Card holder (driver’s side only) ...............3-27
Mirrors .........................................3-28
Manual anti-glare rearview mirror ...........3-28
Outside mirrors .............................3-28
1. Intelligent Keys (two sets)
2. Mechanical key
3. Key number plate (one plate)
NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY®
Your vehicle can only be driven with the
Intelligent Keys which are registered to
your vehicle’s Intelligent Key System com-
ponents.
Never leave the keys in the vehicle.
As many as four Intelligent Keys can be
registered and used with one vehicle. The
new keys must be registered by a NISSAN
dealer prior to use with the Intelligent Key
System of your vehicle. Since the registra-
tion process requires erasing all memory in
the Intelligent Key components when reg-
istering new keys, be sure to take all Intelli-
gent Keys that you have to the NISSAN
dealer.
A key number plate is supplied with your
keys. Record the key number and keep it in
a safe place (such as your wallet), not in the
vehicle. If you lose your keys, it is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
duplicates by using the key number.
NISSAN does not record key numbers so it
is very important to keep track of your key
number plate.
A key number is only necessary when you
have lost all keys and do not have one to
duplicate from. If you still have a key, it can
be duplicated without knowing the key
number.
CAUTION
Listed below are conditions or occur-
rences which will damage the Intelli-
gent Key:
∙ Do not allow the Intelligent Key, which
contains electrical components, to
come into contact with water or salt
water. This could affect the system
function.
∙ Do not drop the Intelligent Key.
∙ Do not strike the Intelligent Key
sharply against another object.
∙ Do not change or modify the Intelli-
gent Key.
∙ Wetting may damage the Intelligent
Key. If the Intelligent Key gets wet, im-
mediately wipe until it is completely
dry.
Type A (if so equipped)
LPD2487
Type B (if so equipped)
LPD2797
KEYS
3-2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
∙ Do not place the Intelligent Key for an
extended period in a place where
temperatures exceed 140°F (60°C).
∙ Do not attach the Intelligent Key with
a key holder that contains a magnet.
∙ Do not place the Intelligent Key near
equipment that produces a magnetic
field, such as a TV, audio equipment
and personal computers.
If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen, NISSAN
recommends erasing the ID code of that
Intelligent Key from the vehicle. This may
prevent the unauthorized use of the Intelli-
gent Key to operate the vehicle. For infor-
mation regarding the erasing procedure, it
is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer.
Mechanical key
The Intelligent Key contains the mechani-
cal key.
To remove the mechanical key, release the
lock knob on the back of the Intelligent Key.
To install the mechanical key, firmly insert it
into the Intelligent Key until the lock knob
returns to the lock position.
Use the mechanical key to lock or unlock
the driver’s door.
CAUTION
Always carry the mechanical key in-
stalled in the Intelligent Key slot.
NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER
SYSTEM KEYS
You can only drive your vehicle using the
Intelligent Keys which are registered to the
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System com-
ponents in your vehicle.
The mechanical key can be used for all the
locks.
Never leave the keys in the vehicle.
Additional or replacement keys:
If you still have a key, the key number is not
necessary when you need extra NISSAN
Vehicle Immobilizer System keys. Your ex-
isting key can be duplicated without know-
ing the key number. As many as four
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys
can be used with one vehicle. You should
bring all NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer Sys-
tem keys that you have to the NISSAN
dealer for registration. This is because the
registration process will erase the memory
of all key codes previously registered into
the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System. Af-
ter the registration process, these compo-
SPA1951
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-3
nents will only recognize keys coded into
the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System
during registration. Any key that is not
given to the dealer at the time of registra-
tion will no longer be able to start your
vehicle.
CAUTION
Do not allow the immobilizer system
key, which contains an electrical tran-
sponder, to come into contact with wa-
ter or salt water. This could affect sys-
tem function.
When the doors are locked using one of the
following methods, the doors cannot be
opened using the inside or outside door
handles. The doors must be unlocked to
open the doors.
WARNING
∙ Always have the doors locked while
driving. Along with the use of seat
belts, this provides greater safety in
the event of an accident by helping to
prevent persons from being thrown
from the vehicle. This also helps keep
children and others from unintention-
ally opening the doors, and will help
keep out intruders.
∙ Before opening any door, always look
for and avoid oncoming traffic.
∙ To help avoid risk of injury or death
through unintended operation of the
vehicle and/or its systems, including
entrapment in windows and/or inad-
vertent door lock activation, do not
leave children, people who require the
assistance of others and/or pets un-
attended in your vehicle. Additionally,
the temperature inside a closed ve-
hicle on a warm day can quickly be-
come high enough to cause a signifi-
cant risk of injury or death to people
and/or pets.
DOORS
3-4 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
LOCKING WITH KEY
To lock or unlock the vehicle, turn the key as
shown.
Manual
To lock a door, turn the key toward the front
of the vehicle
䊊
1
. To unlock a door, turn the
key toward the rear
䊊
2
.
LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK KNOB
To lock the door without the key, move the
inside lock knob to the lock position
䊊
1
,
then close the door.
To unlock the door without the key, move
the inside lock knob to the unlock position
䊊
2
.
LOCKING WITH POWER DOOR
LOCK SWITCH
To lock all the doors without a key, push the
door lock switch (driver’s or front passen-
ger’s side) to the lock position
䊊
1
. When
locking the door this way, be certain not to
leave the key inside the vehicle.
To unlock all the doors without a key, push
the door lock switch (driver’s or front pas-
senger’s side) to the unlock position
䊊
2
.
Driver’s side
LPD2129
Inside lock
LPD2092
LPD2093
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-5
Lockout protection
When the power door lock switch (driver’s
or front passenger’s side) is moved to the
lock position with the Intelligent Key in the
vehicle while any door is open, a warning
chime will sound and all doors unlock au-
tomatically.
AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS
∙ All doors lock automatically when the
vehicle speed reaches 15 mph
(24 km/h).
∙ All doors unlock automatically when the
transmission is placed in the P (Park)
position or when the ignition switch is
placed in the OFF position.
NOTE:
The automatic door unlock function can
be changed using “Vehicle Settings” of
the vehicle information display. For ad-
ditional information, refer to “Vehicle in-
formation display” in the “Instruments
and controls” section of this manual.
CHILD SAFETY REAR DOOR LOCK
Child safety locks help prevent the rear
doors from being opened accidentally, es-
pecially when small children are in the ve-
hicle.
The child safety lock levers are located on
the edge of the rear doors.
When the lever is in the unlock position
䊊
2
,
the door can be opened from the outside
or the inside.
When the lever is in the LOCK position
䊊
1
,
the door can be opened only from the
outside.
WARNING
∙ Radio waves could adversely affect
electric medical equipment. Those
who use a pacemaker should contact
the electric medical equipment
manufacturer for the possible influ-
ences before use.
∙ The Intelligent Key transmits radio
waves when the buttons are pressed.
The FAA advises the radio waves may
affect aircraft navigation and com-
munication systems. Do not operate
the Intelligent Key while on an air-
plane. Make sure the buttons are not
operated unintentionally when the
unit is stored for a flight.
∙ Never leave the Intelligent Key in the
vehicle when you leave the vehicle.
The Intelligent Key system can operate all
the door and liftgate locks using the re-
mote control function or pushing the re-
quest switch (if so equipped) on the vehicle
without taking the key out from a pocket or
purse. The operating environment and/or
conditions may affect the Intelligent Key
system operation.
Be sure to read the following before using
the Intelligent Key system.
SPA2037
NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY®
3-6 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
CAUTION
Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with
you when operating the vehicle.
The Intelligent Key is capable of receiving
and transmitting radio waves. The Intelli-
gent Key system transmits weak radio
waves from various distances. Environ-
mental conditions may interfere with the
operation of the Intelligent Key system un-
der the following operating conditions:
∙ When operating near a location where
strong radio waves are transmitted,
such as a TV tower, power station and
broadcasting station.
∙ When in possession of wireless equip-
ment, such as a cellular telephone,
transceiver, or a CB radio.
∙ When the Intelligent Key is in contact
with or covered by metallic materials.
∙ When any type of radio wave remote
control is used nearby.
∙ When the Intelligent Key is placed near
an electric appliance such as a personal
computer.
∙ When the vehicle is parked near a park-
ing meter.
In such cases, correct the operating condi-
tions before using the Intelligent Key func-
tion or use the mechanical key.
Although the life of the battery varies de-
pending on the operating conditions, the
battery’s life is approximately two years. If
the battery is discharged, replace it with a
new one.
When the Intelligent Key battery is low, a
yellow indicator illuminates with the mes-
sage “Key Battery Low” in the vehicle infor-
mation display. For additional information,
refer to “Vehicle information display warn-
ings and indicators” in the “Instruments
and controls” section of this manual.
Since the Intelligent Key is capable of re-
ceiving radio waves, if the key is left near
equipment which transmits strong radio
waves, such as signals from a TV and per-
sonal computer, the battery life may be-
come shorter.
For additional information, refer to “Battery
replacement” in the “Do-it-yourself” section
of this manual.
As many as four Intelligent Keys can be
registered and used with one vehicle. For
information about the purchase and use of
additional Intelligent Keys, it is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-7
OPERATING RANGE
The Intelligent Key functions can only be
used when the Intelligent Key is within the
specified operating range from the request
switch (if so equipped).
䊊
1
.
When the Intelligent Key battery is dis-
charged or strong radio waves are present
near the operating location, the Intelligent
Key operating range becomes narrower,
and the Intelligent Key may not function
properly.
The operating range is within 31.5 in (80 cm)
from each request switch (if so equipped).
䊊
1
.
If the Intelligent Key is too close to the door
glass, handle or rear bumper, the request
switches (if so equipped) may not function.
When the Intelligent Key is within the oper-
ating range, it is possible for anyone, even
someone who does not carry the Intelli-
gent Key, to push the request switch (if so
equipped) to lock/unlock the doors.
DOOR LOCKS/UNLOCKS
PRECAUTION
∙ Do not push the door handle request
switch (if so equipped) with the Intelli-
gent Key held in your hand as illustrated.
The close distance to the door handle
will cause the Intelligent Key system to
have difficulty recognizing that the In-
telligent Key is outside the vehicle.
∙ After locking with the door handle re-
quest switch (if so equipped), verify the
doors are securely locked by testing
them.
LPD2073
LPD2554
3-8 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
∙ To prevent the Intelligent Key from be-
ing left inside the vehicle, make sure you
carry the Intelligent Key with you and
then lock the doors.
∙ Do not pull the door handle before
pushing the door handle request
switch (if so equipped). The door will be
unlocked but will not open. Release the
door handle once and pull it again to
open the door.
NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY®
OPERATION
You can lock or unlock the doors without
taking the key out of your pocket or bag.
When you carry the Intelligent Key with you,
you can lock or unlock the doors by push-
ing the door handle request switch (if so
equipped) or liftgate request switch (if so
equipped) within the range of operation.
Locking doors
1. Place the ignition switch to the LOCK
position.
2. Close all doors and the liftgate.
3. Push any door handle request switch (if
so equipped)
䊊
1
or the liftgate request
switch (if so equipped)
䊊
2
while carry-
ing the Intelligent Key with you.
4. All doors and the liftgate will lock.
5. The hazard warning lights flash twice
and the outside chime sounds twice.
LPD2445 LPD2798
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-9
NOTE:
∙ Doors are locked by the door handle
request switch (if so equipped) or lift-
gate request switch (if so equipped)
while the vehicle is any power posi-
tion and Intelligent Key is in the oper-
ating range of the vehicle. For addi-
tional information, refer to
“Operating range” in this section.
∙ Doors do not lock with the door
handle request switch (if so
equipped) or the liftgate request
switch (if so equipped) with the Intel-
ligent Key inside the vehicle and a
chime sounds to warn you. However,
when an Intelligent Key is inside the
vehicle, doors can be locked with an-
other Intelligent Key.
CAUTION
∙ After locking the doors using the re-
quest switch (if so equipped), make
sure that the doors have been se-
curely locked by operating the door
handles or the liftgate opener switch.
∙ When locking the doors using the re-
quest switch (if so equipped), make
sure to have the Intelligent Key in your
possession before operating the re-
quest switch (if so equipped) to pre-
vent the Intelligent Key from being
left in the vehicle.
∙ The request switch (if so equipped) is
operational only when the Intelligent
Key has been detected by the Intelli-
gent Key system.
Lockout protection
To prevent the Intelligent Key from being
accidentally locked in the vehicle, lockout
protection is equipped with the Intelligent
Key system.
When any door is open, the doors are
locked, and then the Intelligent Key is put
inside the vehicle and all the doors are
closed, a chime will sound and the lock will
automatically unlock.
LPD2816 LPD2446
3-10 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
NOTE:
The doors may not lock when the Intelli-
gent Key is in the same hand that is op-
erating the request switch (if so
equipped) to lock the door. Put the Intel-
ligent Key in a purse, pocket or your
other hand.
CAUTION
The lockout protection may not func-
tion under the following conditions:
∙ When the Intelligent Key is placed on
top of the instrument panel.
∙ When the Intelligent Key is placed in-
side the glove box or a storage bin.
∙ When the Intelligent Key is placed in-
side the door pockets.
∙ When the Intelligent Key is placed in-
side or near metallic materials.
Unlocking doors
1. Carry the Intelligent Key.
2. Push the door handle request switch (if
so equipped)
䊊
1
or the liftgate request
switch (if so equipped)
䊊
2
.
3. The hazard warning lights flash once
and the outside chime sounds once.
4. Push the door handle request switch (if
so equipped)
䊊
1
again within 30 sec-
onds to unlock all doors and the lift-
gate.
LPD2798 LPD2816
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-11
NOTE:
If “Selective Unlock” is turned off in Ve-
hicle Settings of the vehicle information
display, all doors will unlock upon the
first push of the door handle request
switch (if so equipped). For additional in-
formation, refer to "Vehicle information
display" in the "Instruments and con-
trols" section of this manual.
NOTE:
Request switches (if so equipped) for all
doors can be deactivated when the Intel-
ligent Key Door Lock setting is switched
to OFF in “Vehicle Settings” of the vehicle
information display. For additional infor-
mation, refer to “Vehicle information dis-
play” in the “Instruments and controls”
section of this manual.
If a door handle is pulled while unlocking
the doors, that door may not be unlocked.
Returning the door handle to its original
position will unlock the door. If the door
does not unlock after returning the door
handle, push the door handle request
switch (if so equipped) to unlock the door.
All doors and the liftgate will be locked au-
tomatically unless one of the following op-
erations is performed within 30 seconds
after pushing the request switch (if so
equipped).
∙ Opening any doors or the liftgate.
∙ Engaging the ignition switch from the
locked position.
The interior light illuminates for a period of
time when a door is unlocked and the
room light switch is in the DOOR position.
The interior light can be turned off without
waiting by performing one of the following
operations.
∙ Placing the ignition switch to the ON
position.
∙ Locking the doors with the Intelligent
Key.
∙ Switching the room light switch to the
OFF position.
HOW TO USE THE REMOTE
KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION
The remote keyless entry function can op-
erate all door locks using the remote key-
less function of the Intelligent Key. The re-
mote keyless function can operate at a
distance of 33 ft (10 m) away from the ve-
hicle. The operating distance depends
upon the conditions around the vehicle.
The remote keyless entry function will not
function under the following conditions:
∙ When the Intelligent Key is not within the
operational range.
∙ When the doors or the liftgate are open
or not closed securely.
∙ When the Intelligent Key battery is dis-
charged.
LPD2446
3-12 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
CAUTION
When locking the doors using the Intel-
ligent Key, be sure not to leave the key in
the vehicle.
Locking doors
1. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK
position.
2. Close all doors and the liftgate.
3. Press the
button on the Intelli-
gent Key.
4. The hazard warning lights flash twice
and the vehicle chimes twice.
5. All doors and the liftgate will be locked.
CAUTION
After locking the doors using the Intel-
ligent Key, be sure that the doors have
been securely locked by operating the
door handles.
LPD2799
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-13
Unlocking doors
1. Press the button on the Intelligent
Key.
2. The hazard warning lights flash once.
3. Press the
button again within
30 seconds to unlock all doors and the
liftgate.
NOTE:
If “Selective Unlock” is turned off in Ve-
hicle Settings of the vehicle information
display, all doors will unlock upon the
first
press of the key fob. For addi-
tional information, refer to "Vehicle in-
formation display" in the "Instruments
and controls" section of this manual.
All doors and the liftgate will be locked au-
tomatically unless one of the following op-
erations is performed within 30 seconds
after pressing the
button.
∙ Opening any doors or the liftgate.
∙ Engaging the ignition switch from the
lock position.
The interior light illuminates for a period of
time when a door is unlocked and the
room light switch is in the DOOR position.
The light can be turned off without waiting by
performing one of the following operations.
∙ Placing the ignition switch in the ON po-
sition.
∙ Locking the doors with the remote con-
trol.
∙ Switching the room light switch in the
OFF position.
Using the panic alarm
If you are near your vehicle and feel threat-
ened, you may activate the panic alarm to
call attention by pressing and holding
the
button on the Intelligent Key for
longer than 1 second.
The panic alarm and hi beams will stay on
for a period of time.
LPD2800 WPD0374
3-14 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
The panic alarm stops when:
∙ It has run for a period of time, or
∙ Any button is pressed on the Intelligent
Key.
∙ The request switch (if so equipped) has
been pushed and the Intelligent Key is in
range of the door handle.
Battery indicator light
Battery indicator light illuminates when
you push any button. The number of blink-
ing is different to identify each registered
Intelligent Keys. If the light does not illumi-
nate, the battery is weak or needs replace-
ment. For additional information, refer to
“Battery replacement” in the “Do-it-
yourself” section of this manual.
WARNING SIGNALS
To help prevent the vehicle from moving
unexpectedly by erroneous operation of
the Intelligent Key or to help prevent the
vehicle from being stolen, a chime or
buzzer sounds from inside and outside the
vehicle and a warning is displayed in the
instrument panel.
When a chime or beep sounds or a warning
is displayed, be sure to check the vehicle
and the Intelligent Key.
For additional information, refer to
“Troubleshooting guide” in this section and
“Vehicle information display” in the “Instru-
ments and controls” section of this manual.
LPD2801
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-15
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
Verify the location of all Intelligent Keys that
are programmed for the vehicle. If another
Intelligent Key is in range or inside the ve-
hicle, the vehicle system may respond dif-
ferently than expected.
Symptom Possible Cause Remedy
When pushing the ignition switch to
stop the engine
The Shift to Park warning appears on
the display and the inside warning
chime sounds continuously.
The shift lever is not in the P (Park) po-
sition with the parking brake fully
applied.
Move the shift lever to the P (Park)
position.
When pushing the
button on
the Intelligent Key or the door handle
request switch (if so equipped) to lock
the door
The outside chime sounds for approxi-
mately a few seconds.
The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle. Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key
with you.
A door is not closed securely. Close the door securely.
When opening the driver’s door to get
out of the vehicle
The Door Open warning appears on
the display and the inside warning
chime sounds continuously.
The ignition switch is in the ON
position.
Place the ignition switch in the OFF
position.
When closing the doors
The No Key Detected warning appears
on the display, the outside chime
sounds three times and the inside
warning chime sounds for approxi-
mately 3 seconds.
The ignition switch is in the ACC or ON
position.
Place the ignition switch in the OFF
position.
The Shift to Park warning appears on
the display and the outside chime
sounds continuously.
The ignition switch is in the ACC posi-
tion and the shift lever is not in the P
(Park) position.
Move the shift lever to the P (Park) po-
sition and place the ignition switch in
the OFF position.
The outside chime sounds for approxi-
mately 3 seconds and all doors unlock.
The Intelligent Key is in the vehicle. Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key
with you.
3-16 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Symptom Possible Cause Remedy
When pushing the ignition switch to
start the engine
The Key Battery Low warning appears
on the display.
The battery charge is low. Replace the battery with a new one.
For additional information, refer to
“Battery replacement” in the “Do-it-
yourself” section of this manual.
The No Key Detected warning appears
on the display, the outside chime
sounds three times and the inside
warning chime sounds for approxi-
mately 3 seconds.
The Intelligent Key is not in the vehicle. Carry the Intelligent Key with you.
The I-Key System Error: See Owner’s
Manual warning appears in the vehicle
information display.
It warns of a malfunction with the In-
telligent Key system.
It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-17
The button will be on the NISSAN In-
telligent Key® if the vehicle has Remote En-
gine Start. This feature allows the engine to
start from outside the vehicle.
The following features may be affected
when the Remote Engine Start feature is
used:
∙ Vehicles with a manual climate control
system (if so equipped) will default to
the last used heating or cooling mode.
∙ Vehicles with an automatic climate
control system (if so equipped) will de-
fault to either heating or cooling mode.
For additional information, refer to “Re-
mote Engine Start with Intelligent Cli-
mate Control” in the “Monitor, climate,
audio, phone and voice recognition sys-
tems” section of this manual.
Laws in some local communities may re-
strict the use of remote starters. For ex-
ample, some laws require a person using
Remote Engine Start to have the vehicle in
view. Check local regulations for any re-
quirements.
Other conditions may affect the function of
the Remote Engine Start feature. For addi-
tional information, refer to “Conditions the
Remote Engine Start will not work” in this
section.
Other conditions can affect the perfor-
mance of the Intelligent Key transmitter.
For additional information, refer to “NISSAN
Intelligent Key®” in this section.
REMOTE ENGINE START
OPERATING RANGE
WARNING
To help avoid risk of injury or death
through unintended operation of the ve-
hicle and/or its systems, including entrap-
ment in windows or inadvertent door lock
activation, do not leave children, people
who require the assistance of others or
pets unattended in your vehicle. Addition-
ally, the temperature inside a closed ve-
hicle on a warm day can quickly become
high enough to cause a significant risk of
injury or death to people and pets.
CAUTION
When the Intelligent Key battery is dis-
charged or other strong radio wave
sources are present near the operating
location, the Intelligent Key operating
range becomes narrower, and the Intel-
ligent Key may not function properly.
The Remote Engine Start function can only
be used when the Intelligent Key is within the
specified operating range from the vehicle.
The Remote Engine Start operating range is
approximately 197 ft (60 m) from the vehicle.
LPD2860
REMOTE ENGINE START (if so
equipped)
3-18 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
REMOTE STARTING THE VEHICLE
To use the Remote Engine Start feature
perform the following:
1. Aim the Intelligent Key at the vehicle.
2. Press the
button to lock all
doors.
3. Within 5 seconds press and hold
the
button until the turn signal
lights flash and the tail lamps turn on. If
the vehicle is not within view press and
hold the
button for at least 2 sec-
onds.
The following events will occur when the
engine starts:
∙ The parking lights will turn on and re-
main on as long as the engine is run-
ning.
∙ The doors will be locked and the climate
control system may come on.
∙ The engine will continue to run for
10 minutes. Repeat the steps to extend
the time for an additional 10 minutes.
For additional information, refer to “Ex-
tending engine run time” in this section.
Press and hold the brake pedal while
switching the ignition to the ON position
before driving. For additional information,
refer to “Driving the vehicle” in the “Starting
and driving” section of this manual.
EXTENDING ENGINE RUN TIME
The Remote Engine Start feature can be
extended one time by performing the
steps listed in “Remote starting the vehicle”
in this section. Run time will be calculated
as follows:
∙ The first 10 minute run time will start
when the Remote Engine Start function
is performed.
∙ The second 10 minutes will start imme-
diately when the Remote Engine Start
function is performed again. For ex-
ample, if the engine has been running
for 5 minutes, and 10 minutes are
added, the engine will run for a total of
15 minutes.
∙ Extending engine run time will bring you
to the two Remote Engine Start limit.
A maximum of two Remote Engine Starts,
or a single Remote Engine Start with an
extension, are allowed between ignition
cycles. The ignition switch must be cycled
to the ON position and then back to the
OFF position before the Remote Engine
Start procedure can be used again.
CANCELING A REMOTE ENGINE
START
To cancel a Remote Engine Start, perform
one of the following:
∙ Aim the Intelligent Key at the vehicle
and press
until the parking lights
turn off.
∙ Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
∙ Cycle the ignition switch on and then
off.
∙ The extended engine run time has ex-
pired.
∙ The first 10 minute timer has expired.
∙ Opening the engine hood.
∙ Shifting the vehicle out of P (Park).
∙ The alarm sounds due to illegal entry
into the vehicle.
∙ Pushing the ignition switch without the
Intelligent Key in the vehicle.
∙ Not pressing the brake pedal while
pressing the ignition switch with the In-
telligent Key in the vehicle.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-19
CONDITIONS THE REMOTE ENGINE
START WILL NOT WORK
The Remote Engine Start will not operate if
any of the following conditions are present:
∙ The ignition switch is placed in the ON
position.
∙ The hood is not securely closed.
∙ The hazard indicator lights are on.
∙ The engine is still running. The engine
must be completely stopped. Wait at
least 6 seconds if the engine goes from
running to off. This is not applicable
when extending engine run time.
∙ The
button is not pressed and
held for at least 2 seconds.
∙ The
button is not pressed and
held within 5 seconds of pressing the
lock button.
∙ The brake is pressed.
∙ The doors are not closed and locked.
∙ The liftgate is open.
∙ The I–Key Indicator Light remains solid
is in the vehicle information display.
∙ The alarm sounds due to illegal entry
into the vehicle.
∙ Two Remote Engine Starts, or a single
Remote Engine Start with an extension,
have already been used.
∙ The vehicle is not in P (Park).
∙ There is a detected registered key al-
ready inside of the vehicle.
∙ The Remote Engine Start function has
been switched to the OFF position in
Vehicle Settings of the vehicle informa-
tion display. For additional information,
refer to “Vehicle information display” in
the “Instruments and controls” section
of this manual.
The Remote Engine Start may display a
warning or indicator in the vehicle informa-
tion display. For additional information, re-
fer to “Vehicle information display” in the
“Instruments and controls” section of this
manual.
3-20 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
1. Pull the hood lock release handle
䊊
A
located below the driver side instru-
ment panel. The hood will spring up
slightly.
2. Push the lever
䊊
B
at the front of the
hood to the side as illustrated with your
fingertips and raise the hood
䊊
C
.
3. Remove the support rod and insert it
into the slot
䊊
D
.
4. When closing the hood, reset the sup-
port rod to its original position.
5. When closing the hood, return the sup-
port rod to its original position, lower
the hood slowly and drop the hood
from the height of 8 to 12 in (20 to
30 cm). This allows proper engage-
ment of the hood latch.
WARNING
∙ Make sure the hood is completely
closed and latched before driving.
Failure to do so could cause the hood
to fly open and result in an accident.
∙ If you see steam or smoke coming
from the engine compartment, to
avoid injury do not open the hood.
WARNING
∙ Always be sure the liftgate has been
closed securely to prevent it from
opening while driving.
∙ Do not drive with the liftgate open.
This could allow dangerous exhaust
gases to be drawn into the vehicle. For
additional information, refer to “Ex-
haust gas (carbon monoxide)” in the
“Starting and driving” section of this
manual.
∙ Do not leave children or adults who
would normally require the assis-
tance of others alone in your vehicle.
Pets should also not be left alone.
They could accidently injure them-
selves or others through inadvertent
operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot,
sunny days, temperatures in a closed
vehicle could quickly become high
enough to cause severe or possibly
fatal injuries to people or animals.
∙ Always be sure that hands and feet
are clear of the door frame to avoid
injury while closing the liftgate.
LPD2494
HOOD LIFTGATE
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-21
CAUTION
∙ Before opening the liftgate, be sure to
clear away snow, ice or dust that may
be stuck to the liftgate. If the liftgate
is opened while materials are still
stuck to it, it may suddenly close
again due to the weight of these
materials.
∙ Always be sure to fully open the lift-
gate. If it is not fully opened, it may
suddenly shut.
∙ Be especially careful when opening
the liftgate in strong wind. The door
could be caught by a gust of wind and
may close suddenly.
∙ The liftgate gas stays
䊊
A
are installed in
order to support the weight of the lift-
gate. In order to prevent the gas stays
being damaged or not operating prop-
erly, be sure to observe the following
points.
– Do not insert hands or cords into the
gas stays
䊊
A
or apply any force to
them laterally.
– Do not attach any adhesive foreign
materials such as pieces of plastic or
stickers to the rod
䊊
B
portion.
∙ Do not close the liftgate while holding
the gas stays or hang anything on
them. Doing so may lead to hands or
arms becoming trapped in the liftgate
and could result in an injury.
LPD2475
3-22 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
OPENING THE LIFTGATE
To open the liftgate use the following op-
erations:
∙ Release the mechanical key from the
Intelligent Key and insert the key into
the key cylinder on the liftgate (if so
equipped) to unlock. Then push the lift-
gate opener switch and pull up on the
liftgate.
∙ Push the
button on the Intelligent
Key. Then push the liftgate opener
switch and pull up on the liftgate.
∙ With the Intelligent Key in range, push
the liftgate request switch (if so
equipped) and pull up on the liftgate.
CLOSING THE LIFTGATE
WARNING
∙ Do not shut the liftgate with one hand
and the other hand remaining on the
liftgate or vehicle body. Doing so may
lead to your hand becoming trapped
and could result in an injury.
∙ When closing the liftgate, do not place
your hands near the edge of the lift-
gate. Always be sure to close the lift-
gate from the outside.
∙ After closing the liftgate, be sure to
check that it has been closed securely.
If the liftgate opens while the vehicle
is being driven this could result in a
serious accident.
To close the liftgate, pull down until it se-
curely locks.
SECONDARY LIFTGATE UNLOCK
Follow the following steps to unlock the
liftgate when the battery is discharged.
NOTE:
It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer as soon as possible for
inspection.
Unlocking the liftgate:
LPD2476 LPD2604
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-23
1. Move the cover
䊊
A
by using a screw-
driver or a similar tool available on
hand.
2. Then move the inside lever
䊊
B
by using
a screwdriver or similar tool available
on hand. The liftgate will open.
OPENER OPERATION
The fuel-filler door release is located below
the instrument panel. To open the fuel-filler
door, pull the release. To lock, close the fuel-
filler door securely.
LPD2478 LPD2479 LPD2460
FUEL-FILLER DOOR
3-24 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
FUEL-FILLER CAP
WARNING
∙ Gasoline is extremely flammable and
highly explosive under certain condi-
tions. You could be burned or seri-
ously injured if it is misused or mis-
handled. Always stop the engine and
do not smoke or allow open flames or
sparks near the vehicle when
refueling.
∙ Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank
after the fuel pump nozzle shuts off
automatically. Continued refueling
may cause fuel overflow, resulting in
fuel spray and possibly a fire.
∙ Use only an original equipment type
fuel-filler cap as a replacement. It has
a built-in safety valve needed for
proper operation of the fuel system
and emission control system. An in-
correct cap can result in a serious mal-
function and possible injury. It could
also cause the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) to come on.
∙ Never pour fuel into the throttle body
to attempt to start your vehicle.
∙ Do not fill a portable fuel container in
the vehicle or trailer. Static electricity
can cause an explosion of flammable
liquid, vapor or gas in any vehicle or
trailer. To reduce the risk of serious
injury or death when filling portable
fuel containers:
– Always place the container on the
ground when filling.
– Do not use electronic devices when
filling.
– Keep the pump nozzle in contact
with the container while you are
filling it.
– Use only approved portable fuel
containers for flammable liquid.
CAUTION
∙ Do not use a fuel containing more
than 15% ethanol in your vehicle. For
additional information, refer to “Fuel
recommendation” in the “Technical
and consumer information” section of
this manual.
∙ If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body,
flush it away with water to avoid paint
damage.
To remove the fuel-filler cap:
1. Turn the fuel-filler cap counterclock-
wise to remove.
2. Loop the tether strap around the hook
䊊
1
while refueling.
To install the fuel-filler cap:
1. Insert the fuel-filler cap straight into the
fuel-filler tube.
2. Turn the fuel-filler cap clockwise until a
single click is heard.
LCE2260
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-25
WARNING
∙ Do not adjust the steering wheel while
driving. You could lose control of your
vehicle and cause an accident.
∙ Do not adjust the steering wheel any
closer to you than is necessary for
proper steering operation and com-
fort. The driver’s air bag inflates with
great force. If you are unrestrained,
leaning forward, sitting sideways or
out of position in any way, you are at
greater risk of injury or death in a
crash. You may also receive serious or
fatal injuries from the air bag if you
are up against it when it inflates. Al-
ways sit back against the seatback
and as far away as practical from the
steering wheel. Always use the seat
belts.
MANUAL OPERATION
Tilt and telescopic operation
Pull the lock lever
䊊
1
down:
∙ Adjust the steering wheel up or down in
direction
䊊
2
to the desired position.
∙ Adjust the steering wheel forward or
backward in direction
䊊
3
to the desired
position.
Push the lock lever
䊊
1
up firmly to lock the
steering wheel in place.
1. To block glare from the front, swing
down the sun visor
䊊
1
.
2. To block glare from the side, remove
the sun visor from the center mount
and swing the visor to the side
䊊
2
.
LPD2448
WPD0435
STEERING WHEEL SUN VISORS
3-26 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
3. Slide the sun visor extension
䊊
3
in or
out as needed.
CAUTION
∙ Do not store the sun visor before re-
turning the extension to its original
position.
∙ Do not pull the extension sun visor
forcibly downward.
VANITY MIRRORS
To access the vanity mirror, pull the sun
visor down and flip open the mirror cover.
CARD HOLDER (driver’s side only)
To access the card holder, pull the sun visor
down and slide card in the card holder
䊊
A
.
Do not view information while operating
the vehicle.
LPD2820 LPD2471
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-27
MANUAL ANTI-GLARE REARVIEW
MIRROR
The night position
䊊
1
reduces glare from
the headlights of vehicles behind you at
night.
Use the day position
䊊
2
when driving in
daylight hours.
WARNING
Use the night position only when neces-
sary, because it reduces rearview
clarity.
OUTSIDE MIRRORS
To operate the outside mirror remote con-
trol move the small switch
䊊
1
to select the
right or left mirror. Adjust each mirror to the
desired position using the large switch
䊊
2
.
Move the small switch to the center (neu-
tral) position to prevent accidentally mov-
ing the mirror.
WARNING
∙ Do not adjust the mirrors while driv-
ing. You could lose control of your ve-
hicle and cause an accident.
∙ Objects viewed in the outside mirror
on the passenger side are closer than
they appear. Be careful when moving
to the right. Using only this mirror
could cause an accident. Use the in-
side mirror or glance over your shoul-
der to properly judge distances to
other objects.
WPD0126 LPD2452
MIRRORS
3-28 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Foldable outside mirrors
Pull the outside mirror toward the door to
fold it.
Heated mirrors (if so equipped)
The electric control type outside mirrors
can be heated to defrost, defog, or de-ice
for improved visibility. Push the rear win-
dow defroster switch to activate the heat-
ing function. Push the switch again to de-
activate, or the heating function will
automatically turn off after approximately
15 minutes.
LPD0259
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-29
4 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and
voice recognition systems
NissanConnect® Owner’s Manual
(if so equipped) ..................................4-2
Control panel buttons ...........................4-3
How to use the touch-screen.................4-4
How to use the
MENU button ...........4-6
(brightness control) button .............4-8
How to use the VOL (volume) knob /
PUSH
(power)button...................4-8
Selecting menu from launch bar .............4-8
RearView Monitor (if so equipped) ...............4-9
RearView Monitor system operation .........4-10
How to read the displayed lines..............4-10
Difference between predicted and
actual distances..............................4-11
Adjusting the screen ........................4-13
RearView Monitor system limitations ........4-13
System maintenance........................4-14
Intelligent Around View Monitor
(if so equipped) .................................4-15
Intelligent Around View Monitor system
operation....................................4-16
Difference between predicted and
actual distances.............................4-19
How to park with predicted course
lines .........................................4-21
How to switch the display ...................4-22
Adjusting the screen ........................4-23
Intelligent Around View Monitor system
limitations...................................4-23
System maintenance........................4-25
Moving Object Detection (MOD)
(if so equipped) .................................4-26
MOD system operation ......................4-27
Turning MOD on and off (if so equipped) .....4-28
MOD system limitations .....................4-29
System maintenance........................4-30
Vents...........................................4-30
Heater and air conditioner (manual)
(if so equipped) .................................4-31
Controls .....................................4-32
Heater operation ............................4-33
Air conditioner operation ....................4-34
Air flow charts ...............................4-35
Heater and air conditioner (automatic)
(if so equipped) .................................4-39
Automatic operation ........................4-40
Manual operation ...........................4-41
Operating tips ...............................4-41
Servicing air conditioner........................4-42
Audio system...................................4-42
Radio........................................4-42
FM radio reception ..........................4-43
AM radio reception ..........................4-43
Audio operation precautions ................4-43
FM/AM radio.................................4-48
USB (Universal Serial Bus) Connection
Port.........................................4-53
iPod®* player operation......................4-56
Bluetooth® streaming audio .................4-59
Steering wheel switch for audio control......4-63
USB/iPod® charging ports ...................4-64
Antenna.....................................4-64
Siri® Eyes Free (if so equipped) ..................4-65
Requirements ...............................4-65
Operating Siri® Eyes Free ....................4-65
Troubleshooting guide ......................4-67
Car phone or CB radio ..........................4-68
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System .........4-68
Regulatory information ......................4-70
Using the system............................4-71
Indicators ...................................4-72
Control buttons .............................4-72
Connecting procedure ......................4-73
Voice commands ...........................4-75
Phone display screen........................4-77
Making a call ................................4-78
Receiving a call ..............................4-79
During a call .................................4-79
Ending a call.................................4-80
Text messaging (if so equipped) .............4-80
Bluetooth® connections screen .............4-84
Phone and text message settings ...........4-85
Refer to the NissanConnect® Owner’s
Manual that includes the following infor-
mation.
∙ Audio system
∙ Apple CarPlay
TM
∙ Android Auto
TM
∙ Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone system
∙ Viewing information
∙ Other settings
∙ Voice Recognition (if so equipped)
∙ General system information
WARNING
∙ Positioning of the heating or air con-
ditioning controls and display con-
trols should not be done while driving
in order that full attention may be
given to the driving operation.
∙ Do not disassemble or modify this
system. If you do, it may result in acci-
dents, fire, or electrical shock.
∙ Do not use this system if you notice
any abnormality, such as a frozen
screen or lack of sound. Continued
use of the system may result in acci-
dent, fire or electric shock.
∙ In case you notice any foreign object
in the system hardware, spill liquid on
it, or notice smoke or smell coming
from it, stop using the system imme-
diately. Ignoring such conditions may
lead to accidents, fire or electrical
shock. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for servicing.
NISSANCONNECT® OWNER’S
MANUAL (if so equipped)
4-2 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
1.
MENU button
2. Display screen
3. DISP button
4.
BACK button
5. TUNE•SCROLL knob / PUSH SOUND
button
6. VOL (volume) knob / PUSH
(power) button
7.
(brightness control) button
8.
button*
* For additional information, refer to
“Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System” in
this section regarding the Bluetooth®
Hands-Free Phone System control button.
When you use this system, make sure the
engine is running.
If you use the system with the engine not
running for a long time, it will discharge
the battery, and the engine will not start.
Reference symbols:
“Example” — Words marked in quotes refer
to a key shown only on the display. These
keys can be selected by touching the
screen.
LHA4703
CONTROL PANEL BUTTONS
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-3
HOW TO USE THE TOUCH-SCREEN
CAUTION
∙ The glass display screen may break if
it is hit with a hard or sharp object. If
the glass screen breaks, do not touch
it. Doing so could result in an injury.
∙ To clean the display, never use a rough
cloth, alcohol, benzine, thinner or any
kind of solvent or paper towel with a
chemical cleaning agent. They will
scratch or deteriorate the panel.
∙ Do not splash any liquid such as water
or car fragrance on the display. Con-
tact with liquid will cause the system
to malfunction.
To help ensure safe driving, some functions
cannot be operated while driving.
The on-screen functions that are not avail-
able while driving will be “grayed out” or
muted.
WARNING
∙ ALWAYS give your full attention to
driving.
∙ Avoid using vehicle features that
could distract you. If distracted, you
could lose control of your vehicle and
cause an accident.
LHA4700
4-4 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Touch-screen operation
Menu Item Result
Selecting the item
Touch an item to select. To select the “Phone” key, touch the “Phone” key on the screen. Touch the “
”keyto
return to the previous screen.
Adjusting the item Touch the “+” key or the “⫺” key to adjust the settings of an item. Touch the up arrow to scroll up the page one
item at a time. Touch the down arrow to scroll down the page one item at a time.
Inputting characters Touch the number key. There are some options available when inputting characters.
123 Touch to manually enter numbers.
OK Completes the character input.
Touch-screen maintenance
If you clean the display screen, use a dry,
soft cloth. If additional cleaning is neces-
sary, use a small amount of neutral deter-
gent with a soft cloth. Never spray the
screen with water or detergent. Dampen
the cloth first and then wipe the screen.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-5
HOW TO USE THE MENU
BUTTON
To select and/or adjust several functions,
features and modes that are available for
your vehicle:
1. Press the
MENU button.
2. Touch the “Settings” key.
3. Touch the desired item.
LHA4706 LHA4700
4-6 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Menu item Result
Settings Touch to change the following settings.
Connections Touch this key to select either Bluetooth® phone, Bluetooth® audio or USB audio options. For additional
information, refer to “USB connections screen” and “Bluetooth® connections screen” in this section.
Phone For additional information, refer to “Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System” in this section.
Sound For additional information, refer to “Audio system” in this section.
Volume & Beeps For additional information, refer to “Volume & beeps” in this section.
Clock Touch this key to adjust clock settings.
On-screen Clock Touch to toggle ON or OFF the clock display on the upper right corner of the display screen.
Clock Format Touch to set the clock to 12–hour or 24–hour format.
Daylight Savings Time Touch to adjust the daylight savings time to on or off.
Set Clock Manually Touch to adjust the clock manually; then touch to change between AM and PM, the hour and the
minutes.
System Voice For additional information, refer to “Settings” in this section.
Camera Touch this key to change the camera settings.
Others Touch this key to select and/or adjust various functions of this system. A screen with additional options
will appear.
Display Touch this key to toggle the display off or to adjust the appearance of the display. For additional
information, refer to “Adjusting the screen” in this section.
Language Touch this key to change the language on the display.
OSS Licenses Touch this key to display software licensing information.
Return All Settings To Default Touch this key to return all settings to default and to clear the memory.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-7
(brightness control) BUTTON
To change the display brightness, press
the
button. Pressing the button again
will change the display to the day or the
night display.
Press and hold the
button for more
than 2 seconds to turn the display off. Press
and hold the button again to turn the dis-
play on.
HOW TO USE THE VOL (volume)
KNOB / PUSH
(power)
BUTTON
Press the PUSH (power) button to
turn audio function on and off. Turn the VOL
(volume) knob to adjust audio volume.
SELECTING MENU FROM LAUNCH
BAR
Various system functions can be accessed
by touching the items on the Launch Bar
䊊
1
which is displayed on most of the main
menu screens (the Launch Bar does not
appear on some screens such as keyboard
screens, camera screens, etc.)
Touch the keys on the Launch Bar to dis-
play the corresponding menu screens.
The following menu items are available on
the Launch Bar:
∙AM
∙FM
∙ USB/iPod
∙ Bluetooth
∙AUX
∙ Settings
LHA4707
4-8 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
1. CAMERA button
2. DISP button
WARNING
∙ Failure to follow the warnings and in-
structions for proper use of the Rear-
View Monitor system could result in
serious injury or death.
∙
RearView Monitor is a convenience fea-
ture and is not a substitute for proper
backing. Always turn and look out the
windows and check mirrors to be sure
that it is safe to move before operating
the vehicle. Always back up slowly.
LHA4681
REARVIEW MONITOR (if so
equipped)
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-9
∙ The system is designed as an aid to
the driver in showing large stationary
objects directly behind the vehicle, to
help avoid damaging the vehicle.
∙ The distance guide lines and the ve-
hicle width lines should be used as a
reference only when the vehicle is on a
level paved surface. The distance
viewed on the monitor is for reference
only and may be different than the
actual distance between the vehicle
and displayed objects.
CAUTION
Do not scratch the camera lens when
cleaning dirt or snow from the front of
the camera.
The RearView Monitor system automati-
cally shows a rear view of the vehicle when
the shift lever is shifted into the R (Reverse)
position. The radio can still be heard while
the RearView Monitor is active.
To display the rear view, the RearView Moni-
tor system uses a camera located just
above the vehicle’s license plate
䊊
1
.
REARVIEW MONITOR SYSTEM
OPERATION
With the ignition switch in the ON position,
move the shift lever to the R (Reverse) po-
sition to operate the RearView Monitor.
HOW TO READ THE DISPLAYED
LINES
Guiding lines which indicate the vehicle
width and distances to objects with refer-
ence to the vehicle body line
䊊
A
are dis-
played on the monitor.
Distance guide lines
Indicate distances from the vehicle body.
∙ Red line
䊊
1
: approx. 1.5 ft (0.5 m)
∙ Yellow line
䊊
2
: approx. 3 ft (1 m)
∙ Green line
䊊
3
: approx.7 ft (2 m)
∙ Green line
䊊
4
: approx. 10 ft (3 m) (if so
equipped)
LHA4109 LHA2745
4-10 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Vehicle width guide lines
䊊
5
Indicate the vehicle width when backing
up.
DIFFERENCE BETWEEN PREDICTED
AND ACTUAL DISTANCES
The displayed guidelines and their loca-
tions on the ground are for approximate
reference only. Objects on uphill or downhill
surfaces or projecting objects will be actu-
ally located at distances different from
those displayed in the monitor relative to
the guidelines (refer to illustrations). When
in doubt, turn around and view the objects
as you are backing up, or park and exit the
vehicle to view the positioning of objects
behind the vehicle.
Backing up on a steep uphill
When backing up the vehicle up a hill, the
distance guide lines and the vehicle width
guide lines are shown closer than the actual
distance. Note that any object on the hill is
further than it appears on the monitor.
Backing up on a steep downhill
When backing up the vehicle down a hill, the
distance guide lines and the vehicle width
guide lines are shown farther than the actual
distance. Note that any object on the hill is
closer than it appears on the monitor.
LHA4110 LHA4111
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-11
Backing up near a projecting
object
The vehicle may seem to nearly clear the
object in the display. However, the vehicle
may hit the object if it projects over the
actual backing up course.
Backing up behind a projecting
object
The position
䊊
C
is shown farther than the
position
䊊
B
in the display. However, the po-
sition
䊊
C
is actually at the same distance as
the position
䊊
A
. The vehicle may hit the
object when backing up to the position
䊊
A
if the object projects over the actual back-
ing up course.
LHA2946 LHA4112
4-12 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
ADJUSTING THE SCREEN
1. While on the main menu screen, touch
the “Settings” key.
2. Touch the “Camera” key.
3. Touch the “Brightness”, “Contrast”, Tint”,
“Color”, or “Black Level” key.
4. Adjust the item by touching the “+” or “–”
key on the touch-screen display.
NOTE:
Do not adjust any of the display settings
of the RearView Monitor while the ve-
hicle is moving.
REARVIEW MONITOR SYSTEM
LIMITATIONS
WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations
for RearView Monitor. Failure to operate
the vehicle in accordance with these
system limitations could result in seri-
ous injury or death.
∙ The system cannot completely elimi-
nate blind spots and may not show
every object.
∙ Underneath the bumper and the cor-
ner areas of the bumper cannot be
viewed on the RearView Monitor be-
cause of its monitoring range limita-
tion. The system will not show small
objects below the bumper, and may
not show objects close to the bumper
or on the ground.
∙ Objects viewed in the RearView Moni-
tor differ from actual distance be-
cause a wide-angle lens is used.
∙ Objects in the RearView Monitor will
appear visually opposite compared to
when viewed in the rearview and out-
side mirrors.
∙ Use the displayed lines as a reference.
The lines are highly affected by the
number of occupants, fuel level, ve-
hicle position, road conditions and
road grade.
∙ Make sure that the liftgate is securely
closed when backing up.
∙ Do not put anything on the rearview
camera. The rearview camera is in-
stalled above the license plate.
∙ When washing the vehicle with high
pressure water, be sure not to spray it
around the camera. Otherwise, water
may enter the camera unit causing
water condensation on the lens, a
malfunction, fire or an electric shock.
∙ Do not strike the camera. It is a preci-
sion instrument. Otherwise, it may
malfunction or cause damage result-
ing in a fire or an electric shock.
LHA3522
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-13
The following are operating limitations and
do not represent a system malfunction:
∙ When the temperature is extremely
high or low, the screen may not clearly
display objects.
∙ When strong light directly shines on the
camera, objects may not be displayed
clearly.
∙ Vertical lines may be seen in objects on
the screen. This is due to strong re-
flected light from the bumper.
∙ The screen may flicker under fluores-
cent light.
∙ The colors of objects on the RearView
Monitor may differ somewhat from the
actual color of objects.
∙ Objects on the monitor may not be
clear in a dark environment.
∙ There may be a delay when switching
between views.
∙ If dirt, rain or snow accumulate on the
camera, the RearView Monitor may not
display objects clearly. Clean the cam-
era.
∙ Do not use wax on the camera lens.
Wipe off any wax with a clean cloth
dampened with a diluted mild cleaning
agent, then wipe with a dry cloth.
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
CAUTION
∙ Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner
to clean the camera. This will cause
discoloration.
∙
Do not damage the camera as the moni-
tor screen may be adversely affected.
If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on the
camera
䊊
1
, the RearView Monitor may not
display objects clearly. Clean the camera
by wiping it with a cloth dampened with a
diluted mild cleaning agent and then wip-
ing it with a dry cloth.
LHA4109
4-14 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
1. CAMERA button
LHA4682
INTELLIGENT AROUND VIEW
MONITOR (if so equipped)
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-15
WARNING
∙ Failure to follow the warnings and in-
structions for the proper use of the
Intelligent Around View Monitor sys-
tem could result in serious injury or
death.
∙ The Intelligent Around View Monitor is
a convenience feature and is not a
substitute for proper vehicle opera-
tion because it has areas where ob-
jects cannot be viewed. The four cor-
ners of the vehicle in particular, are
areas where objects do not always
appear in the bird’s-eye, front, or rear
views. Always check your surround-
ings to be sure that it is safe to move
before operating the vehicle. Always
operate the vehicle slowly.
∙ The driver is always responsible for
safety during parking and other
maneuvers.
CAUTION
Do not scratch the camera lens when
cleaning dirt or snow from the front of
the camera.
The Intelligent Around View Monitor sys-
tem is designed as an aid to the driver in
situations such as slot parking or parallel
parking.
The monitor displays various views of the
position of the vehicle in a split screen for-
mat. Not all views are available at all times.
Available views:
∙ Front View
An approximately 150–degree view of
the front of the vehicle.
∙ Rear View
An approximately 150–degree view of
the rear of the vehicle.
∙ Bird’s-Eye View
The surrounding views of the vehicle
from above.
∙ Front-Side View
The view around and ahead of the front
passenger’s side wheel.
To display the multiple views, the Intelligent
Around View Monitor system uses cam-
eras located in the front grille, on the vehi-
cle’s outside mirrors and one just above
the vehicle’s license plate
䊊
1
.
INTELLIGENT AROUND VIEW
MONITOR SYSTEM OPERATION
With the ignition switch in the ON position,
move the shift lever to the R (Reverse) po-
sition or press the CAMERA button to oper-
ate the Intelligent Around View Monitor.
The screen displayed on the Intelligent
Around View Monitor will automatically re-
turn to the previous screen 3 minutes after
LHA4113
4-16 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
the CAMERA button has been pressed with
the shift lever in a position other than R
(Reverse) position.
Available views
WARNING
∙ The distance guide lines and the ve-
hicle width lines should be used as a
reference only when the vehicle is on a
paved, level surface. The apparent
distance viewed on the monitor may
be different than the actual distance
between the vehicle and displayed
objects.
∙ Use the displayed lines and the bird’s-
eye view as a reference. The lines and
the bird’s-eye view are greatly af-
fected by the number of occupants,
cargo, fuel level, vehicle position, road
condition and road grade.
∙ If the tires are replaced with different
sized tires, the predicted course lines
and the bird’s-eye view may be dis-
played incorrectly.
∙ When driving the vehicle up a hill, ob-
jects viewed in the monitor are fur-
ther than they appear. When driving
the vehicle down a hill, objects viewed
in the monitor are closer than they
appear.
∙ Objects in the rear view will appear
visually opposite compared to when
viewed in the monitor and outside
mirrors.
∙ Use the mirrors or actually look to
properly judge distances to other
objects.
∙ On a snow-covered or slippery road,
there may be a difference between
the predicted course lines and the ac-
tual course line.
∙ The vehicle width and predicted
course lines are wider than the actual
width and course.
∙ The displayed lines will appear
slightly off to the right, because the
rearview camera is not installed in the
rear center of the vehicle.
Front and rear view
Guiding lines that indicate the approximate
vehicle width and distance to objects with
reference to the vehicle body line
䊊
A
are
displayed on the monitor.
Distance guide lines:
Indicate distances from the vehicle body:
∙ Red line
䊊
1
: approximately 1.5 ft (0.5 m)
∙ Yellow line
䊊
2
: approximately 3 ft (1 m)
∙ Green line
䊊
3
: approximately 7 ft (2 m)
∙ Green line
䊊
4
: approximately 10 ft (3 m)
(if so equipped)
Front view
SAA1840
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-17
Vehicle width guide lines
䊊
5
:
Indicate the approximate vehicle width
when backing up.
Predicted course lines
䊊
6
:
Indicate the predicted course when oper-
ating the vehicle. The predicted course
lines will be displayed on the monitor when
the steering wheel is turned. The predicted
course lines will move depending on how
much the steering wheel is turned and will
not be displayed while the steering wheel is
in the straight-ahead position.
The front view will not be displayed when
the vehicle speed is above 6 mph (10 km/h).
NOTE:
When the monitor displays the front
view and the steering wheel turns about
90 degrees or less from the straight-
ahead position, both the right and left
predicted course lines
䊊
6
are displayed.
When the steering wheel turns about 90
degrees or more, a line is displayed only
on the opposite side of the turn.
Bird’s-eye view
The bird’s-eye view shows the overhead
view of the vehicle, which helps confirm the
vehicle position and the predicted course
to a parking space.
The vehicle icon
䊊
1
shows the position of
the vehicle. Note that the apparent dis-
tance between objects viewed in the bird’s-
eye view may differ somewhat from the
actual distance to the vehicle.
The areas that the cameras cannot cover
䊊
2
are indicated in black.
Rear view
SAA1896
LHA4264
4-18 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
After the ignition switched is placed in the
ON position, the non-viewable area
䊊
2
is
highlighted in yellow for 3 seconds after the
birds-eye view is displayed.
In addition, the non-viewable corners are
displayed in red (blink for the first 3 seconds
䊊
3
to remind the drivers to be cautious.
WARNING
∙ Objects in the bird’s-eye view will ap-
pear further than the actual distance.
∙ Tall objects, such as a curb or vehicle,
may be misaligned or not displayed at
the seam of the views.
∙ Objects that are above the camera
cannot be displayed.
∙ The view of the bird’s-eye view may be
misaligned when the camera position
alters.
∙ A line on the ground may be mis-
aligned and is not seen as being
straight at the seam of the views. The
misalignment will increase as the line
proceeds away from the vehicle.
Front-side view
Guiding lines
Guiding lines that indicate the approximate
width and the front end of the vehicle are
displayed on the monitor.
The front-of-vehicle line
䊊
1
shows the front
part of the vehicle.
The side-of-vehicle line
䊊
2
shows the ap-
proximate vehicle width including the out-
side mirrors.
The extensions
䊊
3
of both the front
䊊
1
and
side
䊊
2
lines are shown with a green dotted
line.
DIFFERENCE BETWEEN PREDICTED
AND ACTUAL DISTANCES
The displayed guidelines and their loca-
tions on the ground are for approximate
reference only. Objects on uphill or downhill
surfaces or projecting objects will be actu-
ally located at distances different from
those displayed in the monitor relative to
the guidelines (refer to illustrations). When
in doubt, turn around and view the objects
as you are backing up, or park and exit the
vehicle to view the positioning of objects
behind the vehicle.
LHA2652
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-19
Backing up on a steep uphill
When backing up the vehicle up a hill, the
distance guide lines and the vehicle width
guide lines are shown closer than the actual
distance. Note that any object on the hill is
further than it appears on the monitor.
Backing up on a steep downhill
When backing up the vehicle down a hill, the
distance guide lines and the vehicle width
guide lines are shown farther than the actual
distance. Note that any object on the hill is
closer than it appears on the monitor.
Backing up near a projecting
object
The predicted course lines
䊊
A
do not touch
the object in the display. However, the ve-
hicle may hit the object if it projects over
the actual backing up course.
LHA4110 LHA4111 LHA1201
4-20 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Backing up behind a projecting
object
The position
䊊
C
is shown farther than the
position
䊊
B
in the display. However, the po-
sition
䊊
C
is actually at the same distance as
the position
䊊
A
. The vehicle may hit the
object when backing up to the position
䊊
A
if the object projects over the actual back-
ing up course.
HOW TO PARK WITH PREDICTED
COURSE LINES
WARNING
∙ If the tires are replaced with different
sized tires, the predicted course lines
may be displayed incorrectly.
∙ On a snow-covered or slippery road,
there may be a difference between
the predicted course line and the ac-
tual course line.
∙ If the battery is disconnected or be-
comes discharged, the predicted
course lines may be displayed incor-
rectly. If this occurs, please perform
the following procedures:
– Turn the steering wheel from lock
to lock while the engine is running.
– Drive the vehicle on a straight road
for more than 5 minutes.
∙ When the steering wheel is turned
with the ignition switch in the ON po-
sition, the predicted course lines may
be displayed incorrectly.
1. Visually check that the parking space is
safe before parking your vehicle.
2. The rear view of the vehicle is displayed
on the screen
䊊
A
when the shift lever is
moved to the R (Reverse) position.
LHA4116 LHA1197
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-21
3. Slowly back up the vehicle adjusting
the steering wheel so that the pre-
dicted course lines
䊊
B
enter the park-
ing space
䊊
C
.
4. Maneuver the steering wheel to make
the vehicle width guide lines
䊊
D
parallel
to the parking space
䊊
C
while referring
to the predicted course lines.
5. When the vehicle is parked in the space
completely, move the shift lever to the
P (Park) position and apply the parking
brake.
HOW TO SWITCH THE DISPLAY
With the ignition switch in the ON position,
press the CAMERA button or move the shift
lever to the R (Reverse) position to operate
the Intelligent Around View Monitor.
The Intelligent Around View Monitor dis-
plays different split screen views depend-
ing on the position of the shift lever. Press
the CAMERA button to switch between the
available views.
If the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position,
the available views are:
∙ Rear view/bird’s-eye view split screen
∙ Rear view/front-side view split screen
If the shift lever is in the P (Park) position, the
available views are:
∙ Front view/bird’s-eye view split screen
∙ Front view/front-side view split screen
If the shift lever is in the D (Drive) position,
the only available views are front
view/front-side view split screen and front
view/bird’s-eye view split screen.
The display will switch from the Intelligent
Around View Monitor screen when:
∙ The shift lever is in the D (Drive) position
and the vehicle speed increases above
approximately 6 mph (10 km/h).
∙ A different screen is selected.
LHA1198
4-22 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
ADJUSTING THE SCREEN
1. While on the main menu screen, touch
the “Settings” key.
2. Use the arrow to tab to the next screen
and touch the “Camera” key.
3. Touch the “Display Settings” key.
4. Touch the “Brightness”, “Contrast”, Tint”,
“Color”, or “Black Level” key.
5. Adjust the item by touching the “+” or “–”
key on the touch-screen display.
NOTE:
Do not adjust any of the display settings
of the RearView Monitor while the ve-
hicle is moving. Make sure the parking
brake is firmly applied.
INTELLIGENT AROUND VIEW
MONITOR SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
LHA3522
LHA4117
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-23
WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations
for Intelligent Around View Monitor.
Failure to operate the vehicle in accor-
dance with these system limitations
could result in serious injury or death.
∙ Do not use the Intelligent Around View
Monitor with the outside mirrors in
the stored position, and make sure
that the liftgate is securely closed
when operating the vehicle using the
Intelligent Around View Monitor.
∙ The apparent distance between ob-
jects viewed on the Intelligent Around
View Monitor differs from the actual
distance.
∙ The cameras are installed on the front
grille, the outside mirrors and above
the rear license plate. Do not put any-
thing on the vehicle that covers the
cameras.
∙ When washing the vehicle with high
pressure water, be sure not to spray it
around the cameras. Otherwise, wa-
ter may enter the camera unit causing
water condensation on the lens, a
malfunction, fire or an electric shock.
∙ Do not strike the cameras. They are
precision instruments. Doing so could
cause a malfunction or cause damage
resulting in a fire or an electric shock.
There are some areas where the system
will not show objects and the system does
not warn of moving objects. When in the
front or rear view display, an object below
the bumper or on the ground may not be
viewed
䊊
1
. When in the bird’s-eye view, a tall
object near the seam
䊊
2
of the camera
viewing areas will not appear in the moni-
tor.
The following are operating limitations and
do not represent a system malfunction:
∙ There may be a delay when switching
between views.
∙ When the temperature is extremely
high or low, the screen may not display
objects clearly.
∙ When strong light directly shines on the
camera, objects may not be displayed
clearly.
∙ The screen may flicker under fluores-
cent light.
∙ The colors of objects on the Intelligent
Around View Monitor may differ some-
what from the actual color of objects.
∙ Objects on the Intelligent Around View
Monitor may not be clear and the color
of the object may differ in a dark envi-
ronment.
∙ There may be differences in sharpness
between each camera view of the
bird’s-eye view.
∙ Do not use wax on the camera lens.
Wipe off any wax with a clean cloth that
has been dampened with a diluted mild
cleaning agent, then wipe with a dry
cloth.
4-24 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
System temporarily unavailable
When the “!” icon is displayed on the screen,
there are abnormal conditions in the Intel-
ligent Around View Monitor. This will not
hinder normal driving operation but the
system should be inspected. It is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.
When the “[X]” icon is displayed on the
screen, the camera image may be receiv-
ing temporary electronic disturbances
from surrounding devices. This will not hin-
der normal driving operation but the sys-
tem should be inspected if it occurs fre-
quently. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
CAUTION
∙ Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner
to clean the camera. This will cause
discoloration.
∙ Do not damage the cameras as the
monitor screen may be adversely
affected.
If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on any of
the cameras
䊊
1
, the Intelligent AroundView
Monitor may not display objects clearly.
Clean the camera by wiping with a cloth
dampened with a diluted mild cleaning
agent and then wiping with a dry cloth.
LHA3591 LHA3592 LHA4113
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-25
1. CAMERA button
LHA4682
MOVING OBJECT DETECTION (MOD)
(if so equipped)
4-26 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
WARNING
∙ Failure to follow the warnings and in-
structions for proper use of the Mov-
ing Object Detection (MOD) system
could result in serious injury or death.
∙ The MOD system is not a substitute
for proper vehicle operation and is not
designed to prevent contact with ob-
jects surrounding the vehicle. When
maneuvering, always use the outside
mirrors and rearview mirror and turn
and check the surroundings to ensure
it is safe to maneuver.
∙ The system is deactivated at speeds
above 5 mph (8 km/h) . It is reacti-
vated at lower speeds.
∙ The MOD system is not designed to
detect surrounding stationary
objects.
The MOD system can inform the driver of
moving objects near the vehicle when
backing out of garages, maneuvering in
parking lots and in other such instances.
The MOD system detects moving objects
by using image processing technology on
the image shown in the display.
MOD SYSTEM OPERATION
The MOD system will turn on automatically
under the following conditions:
∙ When the shift lever is in the R (Reverse)
position.
∙ When the CAMERA button is pressed to
activate the camera view on the display.
∙ When vehicle speed decreases below
approximately 5 mph (8 km/h) and the
camera screen is displayed.
The MOD system operates in the following
conditions when the camera view is dis-
played:
∙ When the shift lever is in the P (Park) or N
(Neutral) position and the vehicle is
stopped, the MOD system detects mov-
ing objects in the bird’s-eye view. The
MOD system will not operate if the out-
side mirrors are moving in or out, in the
stowed position, or if either front door is
opened.
Front and bird’s-eye views
LHA4190
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-27
∙ When the shift lever is in the D (Drive)
position and the vehicle speed is below
approximately 5 mph (8 km/h), the MOD
system detects moving objects in the
front view.
∙ When the shift lever is in the R (Reverse)
position and the vehicle speed is below
approximately 5 mph (8 km/h), the MOD
system detects moving objects in the
rear view. The MOD system will not op-
erate if the liftgate is open.
The MOD system does not detect moving
objects in the front-side view. The MOD
icon is not displayed on the screen when in
this view.
When the MOD system detects moving ob-
jects near the vehicle, a chime will be heard
when in front or rear view and a yellow
frame will be displayed on the view where
the objects are detected. While the MOD
system continues to detect moving ob-
jects, the yellow frame continues to be dis-
played.
In the bird’s-eye view, the yellow frame
䊊
1
is
displayed on each camera image (front,
rear, right, left) depending on where mov-
ing objects are detected.
The yellow frame
䊊
2
is displayed on each
view in the front view and rear view modes.
A blue MOD icon
䊊
3
is displayed in the view
where the MOD system is operative. A gray
MOD icon is displayed in the view where the
MOD system is not operative.
If the MOD system is turned off, the MOD
icon
䊊
3
is not displayed.
TURNING MOD ON AND OFF (if so
equipped)
Some vehicles include the option to allow
the MOD system to be turned on or off in
the vehicle information display.
To turn the MOD system on or off:
1. Using
buttons on the steer-
ing wheel to select “Settings”.
2. Select “Driver Assistance” and press the
OK button.
3. Select “Parking Aids”.
4. Toggle ON or OFF “Moving Object” us-
ing the OK button.
Rear and bird’s-eye views
LHA4191
Rear and front-side views
LHA4782
4-28 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
MOD SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations
for MOD. Failure to operate the vehicle
in accordance with these system limita-
tions could result in serious injury or
death.
∙ Do not use the MOD system when
towing a trailer. The system may not
function properly.
∙ Excessive noise (for example, audio
system volume or open vehicle win-
dow) will interfere with the chime
sound, and it may not be heard.
∙ The MOD system performance will be
limited according to environmental
conditions and surrounding objects
such as:
– When there is low contrast be-
tween background and the moving
objects.
– When there is a blinking source of
light.
– When strong light such as another
vehicle’s headlight or sunlight is
present.
– When camera orientation is not in
its usual position, such as when a
mirror is folded.
– When there is dirt, water drops or
snow on the camera lens.
– When the position of the moving
objects in the display is not
changed.
∙ The MOD system might detect flowing
water droplets on the camera lens,
white smoke from the muffler, mov-
ing shadows, etc.
∙ The MOD system may not function
properly depending on the speed, di-
rection, distance or shape of the mov-
ing objects.
∙ If your vehicle sustains damage to the
parts where the camera is installed,
leaving it misaligned or bent, the
sensing zone may be altered and the
MOD system may not detect objects
properly.
∙ When the temperature is extremely
high or low, the screen may not dis-
play objects clearly. This is not a
malfunction.
NOTE:
The blue MOD icon will change to orange
if one of the following has occurred
∙ When the system is malfunctioning.
∙ When the component temperature
reaches a high level (icon will blink).
∙ When the RearView camera has de-
tected a blockage (icon will blink).
If the icon light continues to illuminate
orange, have the MOD system checked. It
is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-29
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
CAUTION
∙ Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner
to clean the camera. This will cause
discoloration.
∙ Do not damage the camera as the
monitor screen may be adversely
affected.
If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on any of
the cameras
䊊
1
, the MOD system may not
operate properly. Clean the camera by wip-
ing with a cloth dampened with a diluted
mild cleaning agent and then wiping with a
dry cloth.
Adjust air flow direction of side vents by
opening, closing, or rotating.
LHA4113
Side vents
LHA4123
VENTS
4-30 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Adjust air flow direction of center vent by
moving the vent slides.
WARNING
∙ The air conditioner cooling function
operates only when the engine is
running.
∙ Do not leave children or adults who
would normally require the assis-
tance of others alone in your vehicle.
Pets should also not be left alone.
They could accidentally injure them-
selves or others through inadvertent
operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot,
sunny days, temperatures in a closed
vehicle could quickly become high
enough to cause severe or possibly
fatal injuries to people or animals.
∙ Do not use the recirculation mode for
long periods as it may cause the inte-
rior air to become stale and the win-
dows to fog up.
NOTE:
∙ Odors from inside and outside the ve-
hicle can build up in the air condi-
tioner unit. Odor can enter the pas-
senger compartment through the
vents.
∙ When parking, set the heater and air
conditioner controls to turn off air re-
circulation to allow fresh air into the
passenger compartment. This should
help reduce odors inside the vehicle.
Center vents
LHA4124
HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER
(manual) (if so equipped)
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-31
1. Air flow control dial
2. A/C (air conditioner) button
3.
Fan control dial
4.
Air recirculation button
5. Temperature control dial
6.
Fresh air intake button
7.
Rear window defroster
switch
CONTROLS
Fan control dial
The fan control dial turns the fan on
and off, and controls fan speed.
Air flow control dial
The air flow control dial allows you to select
the air flow outlets.
— Air flows from center and side
vents.
— Air flows from center and side
vents and foot outlets.
— Air flows mainly from the foot
outlets.
— Air flows from defroster outlets
and the foot outlets.
— Air flows mainly from defroster
outlets.
Temperature control dial
The temperature control dial allows you to
adjust the temperature of the outlet air. To
lower the temperature, turn the dial to the
left. To increase the temperature, turn the
dial to the right.
LHA4202
4-32 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Fresh air intake
Press the fresh air intake button to
draw outside air into the passenger com-
partment.
Air recirculation
Press the
air recirculation button to
recirculate interior air inside the vehicle.
The air recirculation cannot be activated
when the air conditioner is in the
front defrosting mode.
A/C (air conditioner) button
Start the engine, turn the fan control
dial to the desired position and press
the
button to turn on the air condi-
tioner. To turn off the air conditioner, press
the
button again.
The air conditioner cooling function op-
erates only when the engine is running.
Rear window defroster switch
For additional information, refer to “Rear
window and/or outside mirror defroster
switch (if so equipped)” in the “Instruments
and controls” section of this manual.
HEATER OPERATION
Heating
This mode is used to direct heated air to
the foot outlets. Some air also flows from
the defrost outlets.
1. Press the
button for normal heat-
ing. The indicator light on the
but-
ton will go off.
2. Turn the airflow control dial to
the
position.
3. Turn the
fan control dial to the
desired position.
4. Turn the temperature control dial to
the desired position between the
middle and the hot position.
Ventilation
This mode directs outside air to the side
and center vents.
1. Press the
button. The indicator
light on the
button will go off.
2. Turn the air flow control dial to
the
position.
3. Turn the
fan control dial to the
desired position.
4. Turn the temperature control dial to
the desired position.
Defrosting or defogging
This mode directs the air to the defrost
outlets to defrost/defog the windows.
1. Turn the air flow control dial to the
position.
2. Turn the
fan control dial to the
desired position.
3. Turn the temperature control dial to
the desired position between the
middle and the hot position.
∙ To quickly remove ice or fog from the
windows, turn the
fan control dial
to the right and the temperature con-
trol to the full HOT position.
Bi-level heating
The bi-level mode directs warmed air to
the side and center vents and to the foot
outlets.
1. Press the
button. The indicator
light on the
button will go off.
2. Turn the airflow control dial to
the
position.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-33
3. Turn the fan control dial to the
desired position.
4. Turn the temperature control dial to
the desired position.
Heating and defogging
This mode heats the interior and defogs
the windshield.
1. Turn the air flow control dial to the
position.
2. Turn the
fan control dial to the de-
sired position.
3. Turn the temperature control dial to
the desired position between the
middle and the hot position.
∙ Ifinthe
mode for more than
1 minute, the air conditioning system
will continue to operate until the vehicle
is shut off. This dehumidifies the air
which helps defog the windshield.
The
mode automatically turns off,
allowing outside air to be drawn into the
passenger compartment to further im-
prove the defogging performance.
Operating tips
Clear snow and ice from the wiper blades
and air inlet in front of the windshield.
This improves heater operation.
AIR CONDITIONER OPERATION
Start the engine, turn the fan control
dial to the desired position, and press
the
button to activate the air condi-
tioner. When the air conditioner is on, cool-
ing and dehumidifying functions are
added to the heater operation.
The air conditioner cooling function op-
erates only when the engine is running.
Cooling
This mode is used to cool and dehumidify
the air.
1. Press the
button.
2. Turn the air flow control dial to
the
position.
3. Turn the
fan control dial to the de-
sired position.
4. Press the
button.
5. Turn the temperature control dial to
the desired position.
∙ For quick cooling when the outside
temperature is high, press the
button. The indicator light on the
button will come on. Press the
button for normal cooling. The indicator
light on the
button will go off.
Dehumidified heating
This mode is used to heat and dehumidify
the air.
1. Press the
button. The indicator
light on the
button will go off.
2. Turn the air flow control dial to
the
position.
3. Turn the
fan control dial to the
desired position.
4. Press the
button on.
5. Turn the temperature control dial to
the desired position.
4-34 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Dehumidified defogging
This mode is used to defog the windows
and dehumidify the air.
1. Turn the air flow control dial to
the
position.
2. Turn the
fan control dial to the
desired position.
3. Press the
button. The indicator
light comes on.
When the
, or positions in be-
tween are selected, the air conditioner au-
tomatically turns on. The air conditioning
system will continue to operate until the
fan control dial is turned to OFF or the ve-
hicle is shut off, even if the air flow control
dial is turned to a position other than
the
position. This dehumidifies the
air which helps defog the windshield.
The
mode automatically turns off, al-
lowing outside air to be drawn into the pas-
senger compartment to further improve
the defogging performance.
4. Turn the temperature control dial to
the desired position.
Operating tips
∙ Keep the windows closed while the air
conditioner is in operation.
∙ After parking in the sun, drive for two or
three minutes with the windows open
to vent hot air from the passenger
compartment. Then, close the win-
dows. This allows the air conditioner to
cool the interior more quickly.
∙ The air conditioning system should
be operated for approximately ten
minutes at least once a month. This
helps prevent damage to the system
due to lack of lubrication.
∙ A visible mist may be seen coming from
the ventilators in hot, humid conditions
as the air is cooled rapidly. This does not
indicate a malfunction.
∙ If the high temperature warning
light
illuminates in red indicating
engine coolant temperature is over
the normal range, turn the air condi-
tioner off. For additional information,
refer to “If your vehicle overheats” in
the “In case of emergency” section of
this manual.
AIR FLOW CHARTS
The following charts show the button and
dial positions for MAXIMUM AND QUICK
heating, cooling or defrosting. The
air
recirculation button should always be in
the OFF position for heating and defrost-
ing.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-35
LHA4674 LHA4675
4-36 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
LHA4676 LHA4677
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-37
LHA4678
4-38 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
1. Temperature control dial /AUTO
button
2. Display screen
3.
Fan control dial/A/C button
4.
Air recirculation button
5.
Rear window and outside mir-
ror (if so equipped) defroster switch
6. MODE (manual air flow control)
button
7.
Front defroster button
8. ON-OFF button
WARNING
∙ The air conditioner cooling function
operates only when the engine is
running.
∙ Do not leave children or adults who
would normally require the assis-
tance of others alone in your vehicle.
Pets should also not be left alone.
They could accidentally injure them-
selves or others through inadvertent
operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot,
sunny days, temperatures in a closed
vehicle could quickly become high
enough to cause severe or possibly
fatal injuries to people or animals.
∙ Do not use the recirculation mode for
long periods as it may cause the inte-
rior air to become stale and the win-
dows to fog up.
LHA4105
HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER
(automatic) (if so equipped)
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-39
NOTE:
∙ Odors from inside and outside the ve-
hicle can build up in the air condi-
tioner unit. Odor can enter the pas-
senger compartment through the
vents.
∙ When parking, set the heater and air
conditioner controls to turn off air re-
circulation to allow fresh air into the
passenger compartment. This should
help reduce odors inside the vehicle.
AUTOMATIC OPERATION
Heating (A/C OFF)
The air conditioner does not activate. When
you need to heat only, use this mode.
1. Press the AUTO button.
2. Turn the temperature control dial to set
the desired temperature.
∙ The temperature of the passenger
compartment will be maintained auto-
matically. Air flow distribution and fan
speed are also controlled automatically.
∙ Do not set the temperature lower than
the outside air temperature. Otherwise,
the system may not work properly.
∙ Not recommended if windows fog up.
Cooling and/or dehumidified
heating (AUTO)
This mode may be used all year round as
the system automatically works to keep a
constant temperature. Air flow distribution
and fan speed are also controlled auto-
matically.
1. Press the AUTO button on.
2. Turn the temperature control dial to
the left or right to set the desired tem-
perature.
∙ The temperature of the passenger
compartment will be maintained auto-
matically. Air flow distribution and fan
speed are also controlled automatically.
∙ A visible mist may be seen coming from
the vents in hot, humid conditions as
the air is cooled rapidly. This does not
indicate a malfunction.
Dehumidified defrosting or
defogging
1. Press the front defroster button
on.
2. Turn the temperature control dial to set
the maximum temperature to aid in
defogging.
∙ To quickly remove ice from the outside
of the windows, use the
fan speed
control dial to set the fan speed to
maximum.
∙ As soon as possible after the wind-
shield is clean, press the AUTO button to
return to the automatic mode.
∙ When the
front defroster button is
pressed, the air conditioner will auto-
matically be turned on.
Remote Engine Start with
Intelligent Climate Control (if so
equipped)
Vehicles equipped with automatic climate
controls and Remote Engine Start function
may go into automatic heating or cooling
mode when Remote Engine Start is acti-
vated depending on outside and cabin
temperatures. During this period, the cli-
mate control display and buttons will be
inoperable until the ignition switch is
turned on. In Remote Engine Start defrost-
ing mode, the rear window defroster may
be activated automatically.
4-40 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
MANUAL OPERATION
Fan speed control
Turn the fan speed control dial to
manually control the fan speed.
Press the AUTO button to return to auto-
matic control of the fan speed.
Temperature control dial
The temperature control dial allows you to
adjust the temperature of the outlet air. To
lower the temperature, turn the dial to the
left. To increase the temperature, turn the
dial to the right.
Air recirculation
Press the air recirculation button to
recirculate interior air inside the vehicle.
A/C (air conditioner) button
Start the engine, turn the
fan control
dial to the desired position and press
the
button to turn on the air condi-
tioner. To turn off the air conditioner, press
the
button again.
The air conditioner cooling function op-
erates only when the engine is running.
Air flow control
Press the MODE button to manually control
air flow and select the air outlet.
— Air flows from center and side
vents.
— Air flows from center and side
vents and foot outlets.
— Air flows mainly from foot
outlets.
— Air flows from defroster and
foot outlets.
To turn system off
To turn off the heater and air conditioner,
press the ON-OFF button. Press the ON-
OFF button again, the system will turn on in
the mode which was used immediately
before the system was turned off.
Rear window and outside mirror
(if so equipped) defroster switch
For additional information, refer to “Rear
window and/or outside mirror defroster
switch (if so equipped)” in the “Instruments
and controls” section of this manual.
OPERATING TIPS
The sunload sensor, located on the driver’s
side of the instrument panel, as shown,
helps the system maintain a constant
temperature. Do not put anything on or
around this sensor.
∙ When the engine coolant temperature
and outside air temperature are low, the
air flow from the foot outlets may not
operate for a maximum of 150 seconds.
However, this is not a malfunction. After
the coolant temperature warms up, air
flow from the foot outlets will operate
normally.
LHA4125
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-41
∙ If you feel that the air flow mode you
have selected and the outlets the air is
coming out do not match, select
the
mode.
∙ When you change the air flow mode,
you may feel air flow from the feet vents
for just a moment. This is not a mal-
function.
The air conditioner system in your NISSAN
vehicle is charged with a refrigerant de-
signed with the environment in mind.
This refrigerant does not harm the
earth’s ozone layer.
Special charging equipment and lubricant
is required when servicing your NISSAN air
conditioner. Using improper refrigerants or
lubricants will cause severe damage to
your air conditioner system. For additional
information, refer to “Air conditioner sys-
tem refrigerant and oil recommendations”
in the “Technical and consumer informa-
tion” section of this manual.
It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer to service your “environmentally
friendly” air conditioner system.
WARNING
The air conditioner system contains re-
frigerant under high pressure. To avoid
personal injury, any air conditioner ser-
vice should be done only by an experi-
enced technician with proper
equipment.
RADIO
When the ignition is placed in the ACC or ON
position, press the PUSH
(power) but-
ton to turn the radio on. If you listen to the
radio with the engine not running, the igni-
tion should be placed in the ACC position.
Radio reception is affected by station sig-
nal strength, distance from radio transmit-
ter, buildings, bridges, mountains and other
external influences. Intermittent changes
in reception quality normally are caused by
these external influences.
Using a cellular phone in or near the ve-
hicle may influence radio reception quality.
Radio reception
Your NISSAN radio system is equipped with
state-of-the-art electronic circuits to en-
hance radio reception. These circuits are
designed to extend reception range, and to
enhance the quality of that reception.
However, there are some general charac-
teristics of both FM and AM radio signals
that can affect radio reception quality in a
moving vehicle, even when the finest
equipment is used. These characteristics
are completely normal in a given reception
area and do not indicate any malfunction
in your NISSAN radio system.
SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER AUDIO SYSTEM
4-42 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Reception conditions will constantly
change because of vehicle movement.
Buildings, terrain, signal distance and inter-
ference from other vehicles can work
against ideal reception. Described below
are some of the factors that can affect your
radio reception.
Some cellular phones or other devices may
cause interference or a buzzing noise to
come from the audio system speakers.
Storing the device in a different location
may reduce or eliminate the noise.
FM RADIO RECEPTION
Range: FM range is normally limited to 25 –
30 mi (40 – 48 km), with monaural (single
channel) FM having slightly more range
than stereo FM. External influences may
sometimes interfere with FM station re-
ception even if the FM station is within 25
mi (40 km). The strength of the FM signal is
directly related to the distance between
the transmitter and receiver. FM signals fol-
low a line-of-sight path, exhibiting many of
the same characteristics as light. For ex-
ample, they will reflect off objects.
Fade and drift: As your vehicle moves away
from a station transmitter, the signals will
tend to fade and/or drift.
Static and flutter: During signal interfer-
ence from buildings, large hills or due to
antenna position (usually in conjunction
with increased distance from the station
transmitter), static or flutter can be heard.
This can be reduced by adjusting the treble
control to reduce treble response.
Multipath reception: Because of the reflec-
tive characteristics of FM signals, direct and
reflected signals reach the receiver at the
same time. The signals may cancel each
other, resulting in momentary flutter or loss
of sound.
AM RADIO RECEPTION
AM signals, because of their low frequency,
can bend around objects and skip along
the ground. In addition, the signals can be
bounced off the ionosphere and bent back
to earth. Because of these characteristics,
AM signals are also subject to interference
as they travel from transmitter to receiver.
Fading: Occurs while the vehicle is passing
through freeway underpasses or in areas
with many tall buildings. It can also occur
for several seconds during ionospheric tur-
bulence even in areas where no obstacles
exist.
Static: Caused by thunderstorms, electrical
power lines, electric signs and even traffic
lights.
AUDIO OPERATION PRECAUTIONS
MP3 or WMA terms
∙ MP3 — MP3 is short for Moving Pictures
Experts Group Audio Layer 3. MP3 is the
most well-known compressed digital
audio file format. This format allows for
near “CD quality” sound, but at a fraction
of the size of normal audio files. MP3
conversion of an audio track from CD-
ROM can reduce the file size by approxi-
mately a 10:1 ratio with virtually no per-
ceptible loss in quality. MP3
compression removes the redundant
and irrelevant parts of a sound signal
that the human ear doesn’t hear.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-43
∙ WMA — Windows Media Audio (WMA)* is
a compressed audio format created by
Microsoft as an alternative to MP3. The
WMA codec offers greater file compres-
sion than the MP3 codec, enabling stor-
age of more digital audio tracks in the
same amount of space when com-
pared to MP3s at the same level of qual-
ity.
∙ Bit rate — Bit rate denotes the number
of bits per second used by a digital mu-
sic file. The size and quality of a com-
pressed digital audio file is determined
by the bit rate used when encoding the
file.
∙ Sampling frequency — Sampling fre-
quency is the rate at which the samples
of a signal are converted from analog to
digital (A/D conversion) per second.
∙ Multisession — Multisession is one of
the methods for writing data to media.
Writing data once to the media is called
a single session, and writing more than
once is called a multisession.
∙ ID3/WMA Tag — The ID3/WMA tag is the
part of the encoded MP3 or WMA file
that contains information about the
digital music file such as song title, art-
ist, encoding bit rate, track time dura-
tion, etc. ID3 tag information is displayed
on the Artist/song title line on the dis-
play.
* Windows® and Windows Media® are reg-
istered trademarks and trademarks in the
United States of America and other coun-
tries of Microsoft Corporation of the USA.
USB (Universal Serial Bus)
Connection Port
WARNING
Do not connect, disconnect or operate
the USB device while driving. Doing so
can be a distraction. If distracted you
could lose control of your vehicle and
cause an accident or serious injury.
CAUTION
∙ Do not force the USB device into the
USB port. Inserting the USB device
tilted or up-side-down into the port
may damage the port. Make sure that
the USB device is connected correctly
into the USB port.
∙ Do not grab the USB port cover (if so
equipped) when pulling the USB de-
vice out of the port. This could dam-
age the port and the cover.
∙ Do not leave the USB cable in a place
where it can be pulled unintentionally.
Pulling the cable may damage the
port.
The vehicle is not equipped with a USB de-
vice. USB devices should be purchased
separately as necessary.
This system cannot be used to format USB
devices. To format a USB device, use a per-
sonal computer.
In some jurisdictions, the USB device for the
front seats plays only sound without im-
ages for regulatory reasons, even when the
vehicle is parked.
4-44 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
This system supports various USB
memory devices, USB hard drives and
iPod® players. Some USB devices may not
be supported by this system.
∙ Partitioned USB devices may not play
correctly.
∙ Some characters used in other lan-
guages (Chinese, Japanese, etc.) may
not appear properly in the display. Using
English language characters with a USB
device is recommended.
General notes for USB use
∙ For additional information, refer to your
device manufacturer’s owner informa-
tion regarding the proper use and care
of the device.
Notes for iPod® use
iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc., regis-
tered in the U.S. and other countries.
∙ Improperly plugging in the iPod® may
cause a checkmark to be displayed on
and off (flickering). Always make sure
that the iPod® is connected properly.
∙ An iPod® nano (1st Generation) may re-
main in fast forward or rewind mode if it
is connected during a seek operation. In
this case, please manually reset the
iPod®.
∙ An iPod® nano (2nd Generation) will
continue to fast-forward or rewind if it is
disconnected during a seek operation.
∙ An incorrect song title may appear
when the Play Mode is changed while
using an iPod® nano (2nd Generation).
∙ Audiobooks may not play in the same
order as they appear on an iPod®.
∙ Large video files cause slow responses
in an iPod®. The vehicle center display
may momentarily black out, but will
soon recover.
∙ If an iPod® automatically selects large
video files while in the shuffle mode, the
vehicle center display may momen-
tarily black out, but will soon recover.
iPod®* player
∙ Some characters used in other lan-
guages (Chinese, Japanese, etc.) are not
displayed properly on the vehicle center
screen. We recommend using English
or Spanish language characters with an
iPod®.
∙ Large video podcast files cause slow
responses in the iPod®. The vehicle cen-
ter display may momentarily black out,
but it will soon recover.
∙ If the iPod® automatically selects large
video podcast files while in the shuffle
mode, the vehicle center display may
momentarily black out, but it will soon
recover.
∙ Improperly plugging in the iPod® may
cause a checkmark to be displayed on
and off (flickering). Always make sure
that the iPod® is connected properly.
∙ The iPod® nano (2nd Generation) will
continue to fast forward or rewind if it is
disconnected during a seek operation.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-45
∙ An incorrect song title may appear
when the Play Mode is changed while
using the iPod® nano (2nd Generation).
∙ Audiobooks may not play in the same
order as they appear on the iPod®.
∙ The iPod® nano (1st Generation) may
remain in fast forward or rewind mode if
it is connected during a seek operation.
In this case, please manually reset the
iPod®.
∙ If you are using an iPod® (3rd Generation
with Dock connector), do not use very
long names for the song title, album
name or artist name to prevent the
iPod® from resetting itself.
∙ Be careful not to do the following, or the
cable could be damaged and a loss of
function may occur:
∙ Bend the cable excessively (1.6 in
(40 mm) radius maximum).
∙ Twist the cable excessively (more
than 180 degrees).
∙ Pull or drop the cable.
∙ Do not force the iPod® cable connec-
tor into the device port.
∙ Close the center console lid on the
cable or connectors.
∙ Store objects with sharp edges in the
storage where the cable is stored.
∙ Spill liquids on the cable and connec-
tors.
∙ Do not connect the cable to the iPod® if
the cable and/or connectors are wet. It
may damage the iPod®.
∙ If the cable and connectors are ex-
posed to water, allow the cable and/or
connectors to dry completely before
connecting the cable to the iPod® (wait
24 hours for it to dry).
∙ If the connector is exposed to fluids
other than water, evaporative residue
may cause a short between the con-
nector pins. In this case, replace the
cable, otherwise damage to the iPod®
and a loss of function may occur.
∙ If the cable is damaged (insulation cut,
connectors cracked, contamination
such as liquids, dust, dirt, etc. in the con-
nectors), do not use the cable. It is rec-
ommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer to replace the cable with a new
one.
∙ When not in use for extended periods of
time, store the cable in a clean, dust free
environment at room temperature and
without direct sun exposure.
∙ Do not use the cable for any other pur-
poses other than its intended use in the
vehicle.
*iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc., regis-
tered in the U.S. and other countries.
4-46 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Bluetooth® streaming audio
∙ Some Bluetooth® audio devices may
not be recognized by the in-vehicle au-
dio system.
∙ It is necessary to set up the wireless
connection between a compatible
Bluetooth® audio device and the in-
vehicle Bluetooth® module before using
the Bluetooth® audio.
∙ Operating procedure of the Bluetooth®
audio will vary depending on the de-
vices. Make sure how to operate your
audio device before using it with this
system.
∙ The Bluetooth® audio may be stopped
under the following conditions:
∙ Receiving a call on the Hands-Free
Phone System.
∙ Checking the connection to the
hands-free phone.
∙ Do not place the Bluetooth® audio de-
vice in an area surrounded by metal or
far away from the in-vehicle Bluetooth®
module to prevent tone quality degra-
dation and wireless connection disrup-
tion.
∙ While an audio device is connected
through the Bluetooth® wireless con-
nection, the battery power of the device
may discharge quicker than usual.
∙ This system supports the Bluetooth®
Audio Distribution Profile (A2DP, AVRCP).
BLUETOOTH® is a
trademark owned
by Bluetooth SIG,
Inc. and licensed
to Visteon.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-47
FM/AM RADIO
For additional information, refer to “Audio
operation precautions” in this section.
1.
MENU button
2. Display screen
3.
SEEK button
4.
TRACK button
5.
BACK button
6. PUSH SOUND button / TUNE• SCROLL
knob
7. VOL (volume) knob/PUSH
(power)
button
8. AUDIO button
Audio main operation
VOL (volume) knob / PUSH (power)
button
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
position and press the PUSH
(power)
button while the system is off to call up the
mode (radio, AUX, Bluetooth® audio, USB or
iPod®) that was playing immediately before
the system was turned off.
To turn the system off, press the
PUSH
(power) button.
Turn the VOL (volume) control knob to ad-
just the volume.
This vehicle may be equipped with Speed
Sensitive Volume. When this feature is ac-
tive, the audio volume changes as the driv-
ing speed changes.
LHA4704
4-48 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
MENU button
Press the
MENU button to show the
Menu screen. Touch the “Settings” key on
the display, then touch the “Sound” key.
Sound
Bass Adjusts the bass to the desired level.
Treble Adjusts the treble to the desired level.
Balance Adjusts the balance to the desired level. Balance adjusts the sound level between the left and
right speakers.
Fade Adjusts the fade to the desired level. Fade adjusts the sound level between the front and rear
speakers.
Speed Sensitive Volume Adjusts the speed sensitive volume function, which increases the volume of the audio system
as the speed of the vehicle increases. Set to “OFF” to disable the feature. The higher the setting,
the more the volume increases in relation to vehicle speed.
Bass, treble, balance, fade, and Speed Sensitive Volume can be adjusted by touching “-” or “+” keys.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-49
BACK button
Press the
BACK button to return to
the previous menu screen.
Audio button
Push to display the audio screen. When this
button is pushed while the audio screen is
not displayed, the last audio source played
will play.
AM/FM radio screen
1. “AM Menu” / “FM Menu” key
Touch to display the radio menu
screen.
2. Direct Tune (if so equipped)
Touch to manually enter a station.
3. Audio source indicator
Indicates the currently selected audio
source.
4. Reception information display
Reception information currently avail-
able such as frequency, station name,
etc. is displayed.
5. Preset list
To listen to a preset station, touch the
corresponding station from the preset
list. If displayed, touch the “<”or“>”keys
to scroll the preset list.
AM radio operation
Press the MENU button and touch the
“AM” key or press the AUDIO button and
select AM on the bottom of the Launch Bar
to bring up the AM display screen.
If another audio source is playing when the
“AM” key is pressed, the audio source play-
ing will automatically be turned off and the
last radio station played will begin playing.
AM Menu
Touch the “AM Menu” key to display the AM
Menu screen options:
∙ SCAN: To scan the stations, touch the
“AM Menu” key on the radio screen and
then touch the “SCAN” key. The stations
will be turned from low to high frequen-
cies and stop at each broadcasting sta-
tion for several seconds. Touching the
“SCAN” key again during this period of
several seconds will stop tuning and the
radio will remain tuned to that station.
LHA4708
4-50 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
∙ Refresh: Touch the “Refresh” key to up-
date the station list displayed on the
right side of the AM Menu screen.
(SEEK/TRACK) buttons
Press the or buttons to tune
from low to high or high to low frequencies
and to stop at the next broadcasting station.
Direct Tune
Touch the “Direct Tune” key to display the
Direct Tune menu and manually enter a
station.
1 to 6 Station memory operations
Up to six stations can be registered in the
preset list.
1. Select the AM radio band.
2. Tune to the station you wish to store.
3. Touch and hold one of the preset num-
bers in the preset list.
The information such as frequency will be
displayed on the preset list.
To select and listen to the preset stations,
push
or on the steering wheel
briefly or touch a preferred station on the
preset list on the radio screen.
FM radio operation
Press the MENU button and touch the
“FM MENU” key or press the AUDIO button
and select FM on the bottom of the Launch
Bar to bring up the FM display screen.
If another audio source is playing when the
“FM” key is pressed, the audio source play-
ing will automatically be turned off and the
last radio station played will begin playing.
The FM stereo indicator (STEREO) is shown
on the screen during FM stereo reception.
When the stereo broadcast signal is weak,
the radio automatically changes from ste-
reo to monaural reception.
FM Menu
Touch the “FM Menu” key to display the FM
Menu screen options:
∙ SCAN: To scan the stations, touch the
“FM Menu” key on the radio screen and
then touch the “SCAN” key. The stations
will be tuned from low to high frequen-
cies and stop at each broadcasting sta-
tions for several seconds. Touching the
“SCAN” key again during this period of
several seconds will stop tuning and the
radio will remain tuned to that station.
∙ Refresh: Touch the “Refresh” key to up-
date the station list displayed on the
right side of the FM Menu screen.
∙ RDS Info: Radio station and song infor-
mation can be displayed on the FM dis-
play screen.
(SEEK/TRACK) buttons
Press the
or buttons to tune
from low to high or high to low frequencies
and to stop at the next broadcasting sta-
tion.
1 to 12 Station memory operations
Up to 12 stations can be registered in the
preset list.
1. Select the FM radio band.
2. Tune to the station you wish to store.
3. Touch and hold one of the preset num-
bers in the preset list.
The information such as frequency will be
displayed on the preset list.
To select and listen to the preset stations,
push
or on the steering wheel
briefly or touch a preferred station on the
preset list on the radio screen.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-51
Auxiliary (AUX) devices operation
Connecting auxiliary devices
Connect an AUX device into the AUX input
jack located on the center console below
the heater and air conditioner controls.
The AUX input jack accepts any standard
analog audio input such as from a portable
cassette player, CD player, MP3 player or
phone.
Insert a 1/8 in (3.5 mm) stereo mini plug in
the audio input jack. If a cable with a mono
plug is used, the audio output may not
function normally.
Activation and playing
Turn on the AUX device. Connect an AUX
cable to the AUX device and the AUX input
jack. Select AUX mode from the audio
source menu screen or by pressing the
Source button on the steering wheel.
AUX screen
∙ Audio source indicator
Indicates that the AUX source is cur-
rently playing.
∙ “Volume Setting” keys
Touch one of the keys to select the
sound output gain from Low, Medium
and High.
∙ AUX from Launch Bar
Touch to change from another source
to AUX.
Additional features
For additional information, refer to “iPod®
player operation” regarding the iPod®
player available with this system in this
section.
For additional information, refer to “USB
(Universal Serial Bus) Connection Port” re-
garding the USB connection port available
with this system in this section.
For additional information, refer to
“Bluetooth® streaming audio” about the
Bluetooth® audio interface available with
this system in this section.
Microsoft (WMA) Obligation of
Labeling
Additional Obligation of Labeling
This product is protected by certain intel-
lectual property rights of Microsoft
Corporation and third parties. Use or distri-
bution of such technology outside of this
product is prohibited without a license
from Microsoft or an authorized Microsoft
subsidiary and third parties.
LHA4709
4-52 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
USB (Universal Serial Bus)
CONNECTION PORT
Connecting a device to the USB
Connection Port
WARNING
Do not connect, disconnect, or operate
the USB device while driving. Doing so
can be a distraction. If distracted you
could lose control of your vehicle and
cause an accident or serious injury.
CAUTION
∙ To avoid damage and loss of function
when using a USB device, note the fol-
lowing precautions.
∙ Do not force the USB device into the
USB port. Inserting the USB device
tilted or up-side-down into the port
may damage the port. Make sure that
the USB device is connected correctly
into the USB port.
∙ Do not grab the USB port cover (if so
equipped) when pulling the USB de-
vice out of the port. This could dam-
age the port and the cover.
∙ Do not leave the USB cable in a place
where it can be pulled unintentionally.
Pulling the cable may damage the
port.
For additional information, refer to your de-
vice manufacturer’s owner information re-
garding the proper use and care of the
device.
The USB port is located on the center con-
sole beneath the heater and air condi-
tioner controls. Insert the USB device into
the connection port.
When a compatible storage device is
plugged into the connection port, compat-
ible audio files on the storage device can be
played through the vehicle’s audio system.
The port is illuminated for better visibility
when the headlight switch is in the ON po-
sition.
LHA4701
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-53
USB connections screen
Press the MENU button and touch the
“Connections” key or press the “Settings”
key and touch the “Connections” key to
change USB settings.
∙ Auto Change Source
Touch ON or OFF to change the audio
source settings for USB memory de-
vices or an iPod® connected through a
USB cable.
USB screen
1. “USB Menu” key
Touch to switch to the USB Menu
screen.
2. Track information
Track information such as the song
name, artist name and album name
are displayed.
3. Audio source indicator
Indicates the currently selected audio
source.
4. USB operation keys
Touch to control USB playback func-
tions
5. Play time and progress bar
The play time of the track is displayed.
The bar indicates the progress in play-
ing a track.
USB operation keys
Touch to control USB playback functions.
Keys Description
Each time “ ” key is touched,
the repeat mode changes.
Touch to return to the beginning of
the current track. Touch again to
select the previous track. Touch and
hold to rewind the current track.
Touch to play the track.
Touch to pause the track.
Touch to select the next track.
Touch and hold to fast-forward the
track.
Each time “ ” key is touched,
the random mode changes.
LHA4711 LHA4710
4-54 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
USB memory device player
operation
Activation and playing
Connecting the USB memory device into
the port will start playing the USB memory.
USB memory device can also be played by
touching the “USB” key on the Menu screen
or by touching USB on the Launch Bar.
To pause playing the USB memory device
touch the “
” key. To resume playing,
touch the “
”key.
Skipping tracks
To skip the tracks, push the
or
buttons on the control panel or touch the
“
”or“ ” keys on the screen repeat-
edly until the preferred track is selected.
NOTE:
Depending on the condition, skipping to
the previous track may require pushing
the button or touching the key twice.
Pushing the button or touching the key
once may only restart the current track
from the beginning.
Fast-forwarding/rewinding
To rewind or fast-forward the track, push
and hold the
or buttons on the
control panel or touch and hold the “
”
or “
” keys on the screen.
Changing play mode
Repeat mode
Touch the “
” key on the USB screen to
change the repeat mode.
The following modes are available:
No text displayed: Repeat off
All: Repeat all
1 Folder: Repeat folder/sub-folder
1 Track: Repeat track
Random mode
Touch the “
” key on the screen to
change the random mode as follows:
No text displayed: Random off
Random: Random play
All: Repeat all
1 Folder: Repeat folder/sub-folder
USB menu
Touch the “USB Menu” key on the USB
screen to display the USB Menu screen.
“Now Playing” key Touch to display the USB
screen.
“Folder List” key Touch to display the folder
list. Touch an item on the list
to select the folder. The sub-
folder or track list will be
displayed. Select a sub-folder
or track from the list.
“Album Artwork” Touch to run on/off the al-
bum artwork display on the
USB screen.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-55
iPod®* PLAYER OPERATION
Connecting iPod®
WARNING
Do not connect, disconnect, or operate
the USB device while driving. Doing so
can be a distraction. If distracted you
could lose control of your vehicle and
cause an accident or serious injury.
CAUTION
∙ Do not force the USB device into the
USB port. Inserting the USB device
tilted or up-side-down into the port
may damage the port. Make sure that
the USB device is connected correctly
into the USB port.
∙ Do not grab the USB port cover (if so
equipped) when pulling the USB de-
vice out of the port. This could dam-
age the port and the cover.
∙ Do not leave the USB cable in a place
where it can be pulled unintentionally.
Pulling the cable may damage the
port.
For additional information, refer to your de-
vice manufacturer’s owner information re-
garding the proper use and care of the
device.
To connect an iPod® to the vehicle so that
the iPod® can be controlled with the audio
system controls and display screen, use
the USB connection port located on the
center console below the heater and air
conditioner controls. Connect the iPod®-
specific end of the cable to the iPod® and
the USB end of the cable to the USB con-
nection port on the vehicle. If your iPod®
supports charging via a USB connection, its
battery will be charged while connected to
the vehicle with the ignition switch in the
ON position. The port is illuminated for bet-
ter visibility when the headlight switch is in
the ON position.
While connected to the vehicle, the iPod®
can only be operated by the vehicle audio
controls.
To disconnect the iPod® from the vehicle,
remove the USB end of the cable from the
USB connection port on the vehicle, then
remove the cable from the iPod®.
* iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc., regis-
tered in the U.S. and other countries.
Compatibility
The following models are compatible:
∙ iPod® Classic 5th generation (firmware
version 1.3.0 or later)
∙ iPod® Classic 6th generation (firmware
version 2.0.1 or later)
∙ iPod® Classic 7th generation (firmware
version 2.0.4 or later)
∙ iPod® Touch 2nd generation (firmware
version 4.2.1 or later)*
LHA4701
4-56 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
∙ iPod® Touch 3rd generation (firmware
version 5.1 or later)
∙ iPod® Touch 4th generation (firmware
version 5.1 or later)
∙ iPod® nano - 1st generation (firmware
version 1.3.1 or later)
∙ iPod® nano - 2nd generation (firmware
version 1.1.3 or later)
∙ iPod® nano - 3rd generation (firmware
version 1.1.3 or later)
∙ iPod® nano - 4th generation (firmware
version 1.0.4 or later)
∙ iPod® nano - 5th generation (firmware
version 1.0.2 or later)
∙ iPod® nano - 6th generation (firmware
version 1.1 or later)
∙ iPhone® 3G (firmware version 4.2.1 or
later)
∙ iPhone® 3GS (firmware version 5.1 or
later)
∙ iPhone® 4 (firmware version 5.1 or later)
∙ iPhone® 4S (firmware version 5.1 or later)
* Some features of this iPod® may not be
fully functional.
Make sure that your iPod® firmware is up-
dated to the version indicated above.
iPod screen
1. “iPod Menu” key
Touch to switch to the iPod Menu
screen.
2. Track information
Track information such as the song
name, artist name and album name
are displayed.
3. Audio source indicator
Indicates the currently selected audio
source.
LHA4724
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-57
4. Album artwork
An image of the album artwork is dis-
played when available if the setting is
turned on.
5. iPod® operation keys
Touch to control iPod® playback func-
tions
6. Play time and progress bar
The play time of the track is displayed.
The bar indicates the progress in play-
ing a track.
iPod® operation keys
Touch to control iPod® playback functions.
Keys Description
Each time “ ” key is touched, the
repeat mode changes.
Touch to return to the beginning of the
current track. Touch again to select
the previous track. Touch and hold to
rewind the current track.
Touch to play the track.
Touch to pause the track.
Touch to select the next track. Touch
and hold to fast-forward the track.
Each time “ ” key is touched, the
random mode changes.
iPod® memory device player
operation
Activation and playing
Connecting the iPod® to the vehicle via USB
cable will activate the iPod® mode.
The iPod® can also be played by touching
the “iPod” key on the Menu screen or by
touching iPod on the Launch Bar.
Skipping tracks
To skip the tracks, push the
or
buttons on the control panel or touch the
“
”or“ ” keys on the screen repeat-
edly until the preferred track is selected.
NOTE:
Depending on the condition, skipping to
the previous track may require pushing
the button or touching the key twice.
Pushing the button or touching the key
once may only restart the current track
from the beginning.
Fast-forwarding/rewinding
To rewind or fast-forward the track, push
and hold the
or buttons on the
control panel or touch and hold the “
”
or “
” keys on the screen,
Changing play mode
Repeat mode
Touch the “
” key on the iPod® screen
to change the repeat mode. The following
modes are available.
No text displayed: Repeat off
All: Repeat all
One: Repeat track
Random mode
Touch the “
” key on the screen to
change the random mode as follows.
No text displayed: Random off
Random: Random play
4-58 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
iPod® Menu
Touch the “iPod Menu” key on the iPod®
screen to display the iPod® Menu screen.
“Now Playing” key Touch to display the USB
screen.
“Folder List” key
(if so equipped)
Touch to display the folder
list. Touch an item on the list
to select the folder. The sub-
folder or track list will be
displayed. Select a sub-folder
or track from the list.
“Album Artwork”
key
Touch to run on/off the al-
bum artwork display on the
USB screen.
“Playlists” key Touch to display the list ac-
cording to the selected item.
“Artists” key
“Albums” key
“Songs” key
“Podcasts” key
“Genres” key
“Composers” key
“Audiobooks” key
“iTunes Radio”
key
BLUETOOTH® STREAMING AUDIO
If you have a compatible Bluetooth® audio
device that is capable of playing audio files,
the device can be connected to the vehi-
cle’s audio system so that the audio files on
the device play through the vehicle’s
speakers. For additional information, refer
to “FM/AM radio” in this section.
NOTE:
For additional information regarding
Bluetooth® Streaming Audio, refer to the
cellular phone owner’s manual.
Connecting procedure
NOTE:
The connecting procedure must be per-
formed when the vehicle is stationary. If
the vehicle starts moving during the pro-
cedure, the procedure will be canceled.
LHA4726
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-59
To connect a phone to the Bluetooth®
Hands-Free Phone System:
Manual Connecting Procedure
1. Press the
MENU button on the
control panel.
2. Touch the “Connections” key on the
screen.
3. In the Bluetooth tab, touch the “Add
New” key to connect a phone.
4. When a compatible phone is found a
message with a PIN appears on the
screen.
5. Verify the PIN is correct and accept the
connection.
Menu Item Result
Bluetooth Allows user to switch Bluetooth® on and off. Bluetooth® must be turned on in order to connect a device.
ON Turns Bluetooth® functionality on. To turn off, touch the “ON” key again. The indicator light will go off.
Favorite (Connection first) Allows user to toggle “Phone” and “Audio” favorite settings on and off.
PIN Allows user to customize the PIN to a four digit number.
4-60 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Automatic Connecting Procedure
If no phone is connected to the system,
press and hold the
button on the
steering wheel for more than 1.5 seconds.
After the prompt, speak “Add Phone”, the
system will announce “transferring to the
add phone settings menu”. The system will
start the pairing procedure. When a com-
patible phone is found, a message with a
PIN appears on the screen. Operate the
Bluetooth® phone to complete the con-
nection process. For additional informa-
tion, refer to “Bluetooth® connections
screen” in this section.
Bluetooth® screen
1. “BT Menu” key
Depending on the Bluetooth® version
supported by the connected device, ei-
ther the “BT Menu” key or “Connections”
key is displayed.
2. Track information
Track information such as the song
name, artist name and album name
are displayed.
3. Audio source indicator
Indicates the currently selected audio
source.
4. Bluetooth® audio operation keys
Touch to control Bluetooth® audio
playback functions
5. Play time and progress bar
The play time of the track is displayed.
The bar indicates the progress in play-
ing a track.
Bluetooth® operation keys
Touch to control Bluetooth® playback
functions.
Keys Description
Each time “ ” key is touched,
the repeat mode changes.
Touch to return to the beginning of
the current track. Touch again to
select the previous track. Touch and
hold to rewind the current track.
Touch to play the track.
Touch to pause the track.
Touch to select the next track.
Touch and hold to fast-forward the
track.
Each time “ ” key is touched,
the random mode changes.
LHA4727
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-61
Bluetooth® audio operation
The ability to pause, change tracks, fast
forward, rewind, randomize and repeat
music may be different between devices.
Some or all of these functions may not be
supported on each device.
NOTE:
Depending on the Bluetooth® audio de-
vice that is connected, it may not be pos-
sible to perform audio operations or a
delay may occur before music is played
back.
Activation and playing
A Bluetooth® audio device can be played by
touching the “Bluetooth” key on the Menu
screen or by touching Bluetooth on the
Launch Bar.
To pause playing the Bluetooth® audio,
touch the “
” key. Touch the “ ”key
to resume playing.
Changing folders
To change folders, touch the “BT Menu” key.
Fast-forwarding/rewinding
To fast-forward or rewind the track, push
and hold the
or buttons on the
control panel or touch the “
”or“ ”
keys on the screen.
Changing play mode
Repeat mode
Touch the “
” key on the screen to
change the repeat mode.
Random mode
Touch the “
” on the screen to change
the random mode.
NOTE:
Available repeat/random modes change
depending on the connected device.
BT Menu
Touch the “BT Menu” key on the Bluetooth®
audio screen to display the Bluetooth® au-
dio menu screen.
The following items are available.
“Now Playing” key Touch to display the
Bluetooth® audio screen.
“Current List” key (if so
equipped)*
A list of track in the cur-
rently selected folder is
displayed.
“Connections” key Touch to display the
connections screen.
“Folder List” key* Touch to display the
folder list. Touch an item
on the list to select the
folder.
*: displayed only when available.
NOTE:
Depending on the connected device, the
“BT Menu” key may not be displayed.
4-62 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
STEERING WHEEL SWITCH FOR
AUDIO CONTROL
1.
SEEK/TRACK buttons
2. SOURCE switch
3. Volume control switch
SOURCE switch
Push the SOURCE switch to change the
mode in the following sequence:
AM → FM→ USB/iPod®*→ Bluetooth® Au-
dio* → AUX* → AM.
* These modes are only available when
compatible media storage is inserted into
the device or connected to the system.
Volume control switch
Push the volume control switch to increase
or decrease the volume.
SEEK/TRACK buttons
AM and FM
∙ Press or hold for less than 1.5 seconds
to increase or decrease the preset sta-
tion and show a list of the preset sta-
tions.
∙ Press or hold for more than 1.5 seconds
to seek up or down to the next station.
iPod®
∙ Press or hold for less than 1.5 seconds
to increase or decrease the track num-
ber.
∙ Press or hold for more than 1.5 seconds
to reverse or fast forward the track be-
ing played.
Bluetooth® Streaming Audio
∙ Press or hold for less than 1.5 seconds
to skip ahead or back to the next song.
USB
∙ Press or hold for less than 1.5 seconds
to increase or decrease the track num-
ber.
∙ Press or hold for more than 1.5 seconds
to reverse or fast forward the track be-
ing played.
LHA4227
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-63
USB/iPod® CHARGING PORTS
There are USB/iPod® charging ports lo-
cated on the center console. These ports
will charge compatible devices.
NOTE:
The USB/iPod® charging ports will not
operate with the display screen. Only the
USB connection port located on the in-
strument panel, below the temperature
controls, will operate USB/iPod® devices
through the audio system.
ANTENNA
The rod antenna cannot be shortened, but
can be removed. When you need to remove
the antenna, turn the antenna rod counter-
clockwise
䊊
B
.
To install the antenna rod, turn the antenna
rod clockwise
䊊
A
and hand tighten.
CAUTION
To avoid damaging or deforming the
antenna, be sure to remove the antenna
under the following conditions.
∙ The vehicle enters an automatic car
wash.
∙ The vehicle enters a garage with a low
ceiling.
∙ The vehicle is covered with a car cover.
∙ Always properly tighten the antenna
rod during installation or the antenna
rod may break during vehicle
operation.
LHA4725 LHA4236
4-64 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Apple Siri® Eyes Free personal assistant
can be accessed from the vehicle. Siri Eyes
Free can be accessed in Siri Eyes Free
mode to reduce user distraction. In this
mode, Siri Eyes Free is available for interac-
tion by voice control. After connecting a
compatible Apple device by using
Bluetooth®, Siri Eyes Free can be activated
from the
button on the steering
wheel.
Siri® is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered
in the U.S. and other countries.
∙ Some Siri Eyes Free functions, such as
displaying pictures or opening apps,
may not be available while driving.
∙ For getting best results, always update
your device to the latest software ver-
sion.
∙ Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet
as possible. Close the windows to elimi-
nate the surrounding noises (traffic
noises, vibration sounds, etc.), which
may prevent the system from recogniz-
ing the voice commands correctly.
∙ For functions that can be used in Siri
Eyes Free, please refer to the Apple
website.
REQUIREMENTS
Siri is only available on the iPhone® 4S or
later. Devices released before iPhone® 4S
are not supported by the Siri Eyes Free sys-
tem. Visit www.apple.com/ios/siri for de-
tails about device compatibility.
Siri must be enabled on the phone. Please
check phone settings.
If the device has a lock screen, Siri must be
accessible from the lock screen. Please
check phone settings.
For best results, always update your device
to the latest software version.
OPERATING SIRI® EYES FREE
1. Push button for less than 1.5 sec-
onds.
2. Speak your command and then listen
to the Siri® Eyes Free reply.
After starting Siri Eyes Free, push the
button again within 5 seconds of the end of
the Siri Eyes Free announcement to extend
the session.
LHA4733
SIRI® EYES FREE (if so equipped)
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-65
Example 1 – Playing music
1. Push
button for less than 1.5 sec-
onds.
2. Say “Play (artist name, song name,
etc.)”.
3. Your vehicle will automatically change
to Bluetooth® Audio or iPod® mode*
when the music starts playing. Mode
selection is determined by the phone.
* If the iPhone® is also connected with the
USB cable.
If the audio track does not start playing
automatically after Siri Eyes Free ends, try
changing the track or audio source to re-
sume playback.
NOTE:
For best results, use the native music
app. Performance of music control func-
tion while using Podcasts, Audiobook or
other 3rd party music apps may vary and
is controlled by the iPhone®.
Example2–Replying to text messages
1. If a compatible iPhone® is connected
and “Show Notifications” of the iPhone®
settings is enabled, the vehicle will dis-
play a notification for new incoming
text messages.
2. After reading the message, push or
push and hold the
button to reply
using Siri Eyes Free.
3. After a beep sounds, say “Text mes-
sage” or a similar command to reply
using Siri Eyes Free.
4-66 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
Symptom Cause and Countermeasure
Cannot access Siri Eyes
Freefromswitchonthe
steering wheel
Check if a Bluetooth® connection is established between the iPhone® and the system.
Check if Siri is enabled on the device. On your phone, go to Siri setting.
Check that Siri can be accessed from the device lock screen. This can be set in the settings menu of your phone.
Audio Source does not
change automatically to
iPod® or Bluetooth® Au-
dio mode
For best results, use the native Music app. Performance of music control function while using Podcasts, Audiobook or other 3rd party
music apps may vary.
For best results, play media already stored on your device. Streaming music or playback from cloud storage may degrade
performance.
Switch the source manually by pressing the AUX or MEDIA button on the vehicle audio system or the SOURCE select switch on the
steering wheel.
Play, pause, next track,
previous track or play
timer does not work
For best results, use the native Music app. Performance of music control function while using Podcasts, Audiobook or other 3rd party
music apps may vary and is controlled by the device.
Cannot hear any music/
audio being played back
from a connected
iPhone®
Check that the audio source is set to Bluetooth® Audio or iPod® mode. A USB connection is required for iPod® mode.
Cannot receive text mes-
sage notifications on the
vehicle audio system
Check if “Send Notifications” is enabled on your phone. On the phone, go to Bluetooth® settings. Find the device name, like “My Car”.
Press the INFO button. Turn on “Show Notifications”.
Cannot reply to text
message notifications by
Siri Eyes Free
After receiving an incoming text message, follow on-screen guidance. Push the
button for 1.5 seconds on the steering wheel
for Siri Eyes Free. After Siri Eyes Free starts, say “Text Message”.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-67
When installing a CB, ham radio or car
phone in your vehicle, be sure to observe
the following precautions; otherwise, the
new equipment may adversely affect the
engine control system and other electronic
parts.
WARNING
∙ A cellular phone should not be used
for any purpose while driving so full
attention may be given to vehicle op-
eration. Some jurisdictions prohibit
the use of cellular phones while
driving.
∙ If you must make a call while your ve-
hicle is in motion, the hands free cellu-
lar phone operational mode (if so
equipped) is highly recommended.
Exercise extreme caution at all times
so full attention may be given to ve-
hicle operation.
∙ If you are unable to devote full atten-
tion to vehicle operation while talking
on the phone, pull off the road to a
safe location and stop your vehicle.
CAUTION
∙ Keep the antenna as far away as pos-
sible from the electronic control
modules.
∙ Keep the antenna wire more than 8 in
(20 cm) away from the electronic con-
trol system harnesses. Do not route
the antenna wire next to any harness.
∙ Adjust the antenna standing-wave
ratio as recommended by the
manufacturer.
∙ Connect the ground wire from the CB
radio chassis to the body.
∙ For additional information, it is rec-
ommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer.
WARNING
∙ Use a phone after stopping your ve-
hicle in a safe location. If you have to
use a phone while driving, exercise ex-
treme caution at all times so full at-
tention may be given to vehicle
operation.
∙ If you are unable to devote full atten-
tion to vehicle operation while talking
on the phone, pull off the road to a
safe location and stop your vehicle.
CAUTION
To avoid discharging the vehicle bat-
tery, use a phone after starting the
engine.
CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO BLUETOOTH® HANDS-FREE PHONE
SYSTEM
4-68 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Your NISSAN is equipped with the
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System. If
you have a compatible Bluetooth® enabled
cellular phone, you can set up the wireless
connection between your cellular phone
and the in-vehicle phone module. With
Bluetooth® wireless technology, you can
make or receive a hands-free telephone
call with your cellular phone in the vehicle.
Once your cellular phone is connected to
the in-vehicle phone module, no other
phone connecting procedure is required.
Your phone is automatically connected
with the in-vehicle phone module when
the ignition switch is placed in the ACC or
ON position with the previously connected
cellular phone turned on and carried in the
vehicle.
NOTE:
Some devices require the user to accept
connections to other Bluetooth® de-
vices. If your phone does not connect au-
tomatically to the system, consult the
phone’s Owner’s Manual for details on
device operation.
You can connect up to six different
Bluetooth® cellular phones to the in-
vehicle phone module. However, you can
talk on only one cellular phone at a time.
Before using the Bluetooth® Hands-Free
Phone System, refer to the following notes.
∙ Set up the wireless connection be-
tween a compatible cellular phone and
the in-vehicle phone module before us-
ing the hands-free phone system.
LHA4699
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-69
∙ Some Bluetooth® enabled cellular
phones may not be recognized or work
properly. Please visit
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth or
www.nissan.ca/bluetooth for a recom-
mended phone list and connecting in-
structions.
∙ You will not be able to use a hands-free
phone under the following conditions:
– Your vehicle is outside of the cellular
service area.
– Your vehicle is in an area where it is
difficult to receive a cellular signal;
such as in a tunnel, in an under-
ground parking garage, near a tall
building or in a mountainous area.
– Your cellular phone is locked to pre-
vent it from being dialed.
∙ When the radio wave condition is not
ideal or ambient sound is too loud, it
may be difficult to hear the other per-
son’s voice during a call.
∙ Do not place the cellular phone in an
area surrounded by metal or far away
from the in-vehicle phone module to
prevent tone quality degradation and
wireless connection disruption.
∙ While a cellular phone is connected
through the Bluetooth® wireless con-
nection, the battery power of the cellu-
lar phone may discharge quicker than
usual. The Bluetooth® Hands-Free
Phone System cannot charge cellular
phones.
∙ Some cellular phones or other devices
may cause interference or a buzzing
noise to come from the audio system
speakers. Storing the device in a differ-
ent location may reduce or eliminate
the noise.
∙ For additional information, refer to the
cellular phone Owner’s Manual regard-
ing the telephone charges, cellular
phone antenna and body, etc.
REGULATORY INFORMATION
FCC Regulatory information
– CAUTION: To maintain compliance with
FCC’s RF exposure guidelines, use only
the supplied antenna. Unauthorized an-
tenna, modification, or attachments
could damage the transmitter and may
violate FCC regulations.
– Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference
and
2. this device must accept any interfer-
ence, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the de-
vice.
IC Regulatory information
– Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must ac-
cept any interference, including interfer-
ence that may cause undesired opera-
tion of the device.
– This Class B digital apparatus meets all
requirements of the Canadian
Interference-Causing Equipment Regu-
lations.
BLUETOOTH® is a
trademark owned
by Bluetooth SIG,
Inc. and licensed
to Visteon.
4-70
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
USING THE SYSTEM
The system allows hands-free operation of
the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.
If the vehicle is in motion, some commands
may not be available so full attention may
be given to vehicle operation.
Initialization
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, NISSAN Voice Recognition is initial-
ized, which takes a few seconds. If
the
button is pressed before the ini-
tialization completes, the system will an-
nounce “There is no phone connected” and
will not react to voice commands.
Operating tips
To get the best performance out of the
NISSAN Voice Recognition System, observe
the following:
∙ Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet
as possible. Keep all vents pointed away
from the microphone and close the
windows to eliminate surrounding
noises (traffic noises, vibration sounds,
etc.), which may prevent the system
from recognizing voice commands cor-
rectly.
∙ Wait until the tone sounds before
speaking a command. Otherwise, the
command will not be received properly.
∙ Start speaking a command within
5 seconds after the tone sounds.
∙ Speak in a natural voice without paus-
ing between words.
∙ For calling contacts by name, please
say both the first and last name of the
contact for better recognition.
Giving voice commands
To operate NISSAN Voice Recognition,
press the
button located on the
steering wheel for more than 1.5 seconds.
After the tone sounds, speak a command.
The command given is picked up by the
microphone, and voice feedback is given
when the command is accepted.
∙ If a command is not recognized, the
system announces, “Please say or se-
lect a command from the displayed list.”
Make sure the command is said exactly
as prompted by the system and repeat
the command in a clear voice.
∙ If you want to go back to the previous
command, you can say “Go back” or
“Correction” any time the system is
waiting for a response.
∙ You can cancel a command when the
system is waiting for a response by say-
ing, “Cancel” or “Quit.” The system an-
nounces “Exit” and ends the Voice Rec-
ognition session. You can also press
and hold the
button on the steer-
ing wheel for 1.5 seconds at any time to
end the Voice Recognition session.
Whenever the Voice Recognition ses-
sion is canceled, a double beep is
played to indicate you have exited the
system.
∙ If you want to adjust the volume of the
voice feedback, push the (+ or -) volume
control switches on the steering wheel
while being provided with feedback. You
can also use the radio volume control
knob.
Voice Prompt Interrupt
In most cases you can interrupt the voice
feedback to speak the next command by
pressing the
button on the steering
wheel. After interrupting the system, wait
for a beep before speaking your command.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-71
INDICATORS
When a cellular phone is connected
through the Bluetooth® wireless connec-
tion, indicators
䊊
1
for the phone and text
messaging are displayed on the top of the
screen.
Indicator Description
Indicates there are un-
read received
messages.
Indicates the
Bluetooth® device that
is currently connected.
Indicates the strength
of the signal the
Bluetooth® device is
receiving.
Indicates the amount
of remaining
Bluetooth® device
battery.
CONTROL BUTTONS
The control buttons for the Bluetooth®
Hands-Free Phone System are located on
the steering wheel.
LHA4723 LHA4684
4-72 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
VOICE COMMAND BUTTON
Press and hold the
but-
ton for more than 1.5 seconds
to initiate the Voice Recogni-
tion session. To exit the Voice
Recognition session press
and hold the
for more
than 1.5 seconds. For addi-
tional information, refer to
“Voice prompt interrupt” in
this section.
You can use the
button
to interrupt the system feed-
back and give a command at
once.
If an iPhone® is connected,
Siri® can be accessed by
pressing the
button for
less than two seconds. For
additional information, refer
to “Siri® Eyes Free” in this
section.
PHONE BUTTON
To answer an incoming call or
to end a call press
the
button.
To reject a call press and hold
the
button.
CONNECTING PROCEDURE
NOTE:
The connecting procedure must be per-
formed when the vehicle is stationary. If
the vehicle starts moving during the pro-
cedure, the procedure will be canceled.
LHA4726
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-73
To connect a phone to the Bluetooth®
Hands-Free Phone System:
Manual Connecting Procedure
1. Press the
MENU button on the
control panel.
2. Touch the “Connections” key on the
screen.
3. In the Bluetooth tab, touch the “Add
New” key to connect a phone.
4. When a compatible phone is found a
message with a PIN appears on the
screen.
5. Verify the PIN is correct and accept the
connection.
6. To access the Bluetooth® settings
menu touch the “
” key on the Con-
nections screen. The following options
are available:
Menu Item Result
Bluetooth Allows user to switch Bluetooth® on and off. Bluetooth® must be turned on in order to connect a device.
ON Turns Bluetooth® functionality on. To turn off, touch the “ON” key again. The indicator light will go off.
Favorite (Connection first) Allows user to toggle “Phone” and “Audio” favorite settings on and off.
PIN Allows user to customize the PIN to a four digit number.
4-74 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
NOTE:
Some cellular phones may require you to
accept certain permissions in order to
enable features on your Bluetooth® sys-
tem. During the Bluetooth® pairing pro-
cess, please check your cellular phone’s
display for a pop-up with the request to
grant phonebook access.
Granting phonebook access permission
will allow your contacts to be down-
loaded to the vehicle’s Bluetooth® sys-
tem. A pop-up may display on your cellu-
lar phone stating that the contacts and
call history. Please select “Allow” or Yes”
to grant this permission.
Automatic Connecting Procedure
If no phone is connected to the system,
press and hold the
button on the
steering wheel for more than 1.5 seconds.
After the prompt, speak “Add Phone”, the
system will announce “transferring to the
add phone settings menu”. The system will
start the pairing procedure. When a com-
patible phone is found, a message with a
PIN appears on the screen. Operate the
Bluetooth® phone to complete the con-
nection process. For additional informa-
tion, refer to “Bluetooth® connections
screen” in this section.
VOICE COMMANDS
Voice commands can be used to operate
the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.
Press and hold the
button for more
than 1.5 seconds to bring up the phone
command menu. The commands avail-
able are:
∙ Call <name>
∙ Dial <number>
∙ Recent Calls
∙ Read/Send Text (if so equipped)
∙ Siri® (if so equipped)
∙ Voice Assistant (if so equipped)
∙ Phonebook
∙ Quick Dial
∙ Redial
∙ Select Phone
∙ Add Phone
∙ Call <name> Mobile
∙ Call <name> Home
∙ Call <name> Office
∙ Call <name> Main
∙ Call <name> Other
∙ Settings
“Call <name>”
Speak this command to make a call to a
contact that is stored in the phonebook.
Say “Call” followed by a phonebook name to
initiate a call. If the system does not recog-
nize the name it will display a list of similar
names. After the prompt, speak or touch
an item number from the displayed list to
place the call.
“Dial <number>”
Speak this command to make a call with a
spoken phone number. After the prompt,
say “Dial” followed by a 7 to 10 digit phone
number. The system will repeat the num-
ber back. Say “Dial” to initiate the call or
“Correction” to re-enter the phone number.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-75
“Recent Calls”
The following commands are available un-
der “Recent Calls”:
∙ Incoming Calls
Speak this command to list the last
20 incoming calls to the vehicle. If the
call is from an entry in the phonebook,
the name will be displayed. Otherwise,
the phone number of the incoming call
will be displayed.
When prompted, speak or touch the
item number on the screen to place the
call. Select the “Next” key to move
through the list of incoming calls.
∙ Outgoing Calls
Speak this command to list the last 20
outgoing calls from the vehicle. If the
call was to an entry in the phonebook,
the name will be displayed. Otherwise,
the phone number of the outgoing call
will be displayed.
When prompted, speak or touch the
item number on the screen to place the
call. Select the “Next” key to move
through the list of outgoing calls.
∙ Missed Calls
Speak this command to list the last 20
missed calls to the vehicle. If the call is
from an entry in the phonebook, the
name will be displayed. Otherwise, the
phone number of the missed call will be
displayed.
When prompted, speak or touch the
item number on the screen to place the
call. Select the “Next” key to move
through the list of missed calls.
“Read Text/Send Text” (if so
equipped)
Speak this command to access text mes-
saging functions. For additional informa-
tion, refer to “Text messaging” in this sec-
tion.
“Phonebook through voice
command”
Speak “Phonebook” to view a list of quick
steps to access entries stored in the
phonebook. Commands are organized by
the phone number type selected in the cel-
lular device. For additional information, re-
fer to the cellular phone’s owner’s manual.
The following commands are available:
∙ <Say a Contact Name>
∙ <Say a Contact Name> Main
∙ <Say a Contact Name> Home
∙ <Say a Contact Name> Mobile
∙ <Say a Contact Name> Office
∙ <Say a Contact Name> Other
For additional information on manually se-
lecting phonebook entries, refer to “Making
a call” in this section.
“Quick dial”
Speak this command to access the Quick
dial menu. After the prompt, speak or se-
lect an item number on the displayed list to
place the call. For additional information,
refer to “Making a call” in this section.
“Redial”
Speak this command to call the last num-
ber dialed. After the prompt, say “Redial” to
dial the number of the last outgoing call.
The system will display “Redialing
<name/number>”. The name of the
phonebook entry will be displayed if it is
available, otherwise the number being re-
dialed will be displayed.
4-76 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
“Select Phone”
Speak this command to access the Con-
nections menu. For additional information,
refer to “Bluetooth® connections screen” in
this section.
“Add Phone”
Speak this command to access the Con-
nections menu. For additional information,
refer to “Bluetooth® connections screen” in
this section.
“Settings”
Speak this command to access the Sys-
tem Voice settings menu. The system will
exit Voice Recognition mode. Touch one of
the following options on the screen to
change the settings.
∙ Beep Only for Opening Prompt
By touching the “ON” key, the indicator
light will illuminate, the system voice will
turn off and only a tone will sound when
the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone Sys-
tem is activated. To turn the system
voice back on, touch the “ON” key again,
the indicator light will turn off.
∙ Best Match List
When the system doesn’t recognize a
phonebook name it will provide a list of
similar sounding names. To turn this off,
touch the “ON” button, the indicator
light will turn off. To turn on, touch the
“ON” key again, the indicator light will
turn on.
PHONE DISPLAY SCREEN
The Phone screen can be displayed by
pressing the
button on the control
panel.
The following options are displayed:
∙ Quick Dial
Displays the Quick Dial screen. For addi-
tional information, refer to “Quick dial” in
this section.
∙ Phonebook
Displays the Phonebook screen. For ad-
ditional information, refer to “Making a
call” in this section.
LHA4705
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-77
∙ Call History
Displays the Call History screen. For ad-
ditional information, refer to “Making a
call” in this section.
∙ Dial Number
Displays the Dial Number screen. For
additional information, refer to “Making
a call” in this section.
∙ Text Message
Displays the received message screen.
For additional information, refer to “Text
messaging” in this section.
∙ Connections
Displays the Connections screen. For
additional information, refer to
“Bluetooth® connections screen” in this
section.
∙ Volume
Displays the volume adjustment
screen. For additional information, refer
to “Volume & beeps” in this section.
MAKING A CALL
To make a call press the button on
the control panel. Touch an option from
menu screen:
∙ Phonebook
Select a person and the phone number
you wish to call from the phonebook.
Depending on the device, the phone-
book will be downloaded from the cel-
lular phone automatically when it is
connected. If the automatic download
does not take place, the phone number
must be transferred to the hands-free
phone system from the cellular phone
prior to using this method. For addi-
tional information, refer to “Phone and
text message settings” in this section.
∙ Call History
Select a phonebook name or phone
number from the recent incoming, out-
going or missed calls tabs. Touch a
phonebook name or phone number
listed to initiate the call.
∙ Dial Number
Enter the phone number manually us-
ing the keypad displayed on the screen.
Press the “OK” key on the screen to initi-
ate the call.
For additional options to make a call, refer
to “Voice commands” in this section.
Quick Dial
Quick Dial entries can be used to quickly
make a call. The system allows up to 20
entries to be stored. To set up a quick dial
press the
button on the control
panel. Touch the “Quick Dial” key to display a
list of quick dial entries. Touch the “Edit” key
to edit current entries or touch the “Add
New” key to make a new entry. Two meth-
ods are given to create a quick dial entry:
∙ Touch the “Copy from Call History” key
to save a phone number from the In-
coming, Outgoing or Missed call history
lists. Select the person or phone num-
ber from the menu to be added. A reg-
istration menu will display the Entry #,
phone number, phone number type
stored in the cellular phone and Voice
Tag. Select the “OK” key.
4-78 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
∙ Touch the “Copy from Phonebook” key
to save a number from the phonebook.
Use the scroll keys on the side to move
up and down through the menu. Select
a person to be added. A menu will dis-
play the Entry #, phone number, phone
number type stored in the cellular
phone and Voice Tag. Select the “OK”
key.
Voice tag
A voice tag can be recorded for each of the
registered Quick Dial numbers and can be
used to dial the number by speaking it. On
the Quick Dial registration screen, touch
the “Voice Tag” key. Select a relationship
from the list or create a new voice tag. To
record a new voice tag touch the “Custom-
ize” key on the screen then touch the “Store”
key. Speak a name after the prompt, the
new tag will be stored. To edit or create a
new voice tag select the “Customize” key
again. Touch the “Play” key to play the re-
corded voice tag, touch the “Restore” key to
edit the voice tag or “Delete” to delete the
current voice tag.
RECEIVING A CALL
When a call is received by the phone con-
nected to the vehicle’s Bluetooth® Hands-
Free Phone System, the call information is
displayed on the control panel display.
Press the
button on the steering
wheel or touch the “
Answer” key on
the screen to accept the call. To reject the
call touch the “
Decline” key on the
screen.
If the user is not able to answer the call
right away, touch the “Hold Call” key dis-
played on the screen. A message will be
played for the caller: “I’m not able to take a
call right now.” The user may then accept
the call when available or reject the call.
To reject a call, press and hold the
button on the steering wheel.
DURING A CALL
While a call is active the following options
will appear on the control panel display:
∙ Mute
Touch this key to mute or unmute the
system.
∙ Dial Number
Touch this key to dial digits during the
phone call.
∙ Use Handset
Touch this key to transfer the call to the
handset. To transfer the call back from
the handset to the Bluetooth® Hands-
Free Phone System, press the
button on the control panel then select
the “Transfer Hands-free” key on the
screen.
∙ Switch Call
This option will only be available when a
second call is active.
If supported by the phone, the
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System
allows for call waiting functionality. If a
call is received while another call is al-
ready active, a message will be dis-
played on the screen. Press the
button on the steering wheel or touch
the “
Answer” key on screen to ac-
cept the incoming call. Touch the
“
Decline” key on the screen to re-
ject the second call.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-79
While a call is active, press the button
on the steering wheel to access additional
options. Speak one of the following com-
mands:
∙ “Send Digits”
Speak this command followed by the
digits to enter digits during the phone
call.
∙ “Switch call”
Speak this command to hold the sec-
ond call and switch back to the original
call.
ENDING A CALL
To end an active call, press the button
on the steering wheel or touch the
“
Hang up” key on the screen.
TEXT MESSAGING (if so equipped)
WARNING
∙ Laws in some jurisdictions may re-
strict the use of “Text-to-Speech”.
Check local regulations before using
this feature.
∙ Laws in some jurisdictions may re-
strict the use of some of the applica-
tions and features, such as social net-
working and texting. Check local
regulations for any requirements.
∙ Use the text messaging feature after
stopping your vehicle in a safe loca-
tion. If you have to use the feature
while driving, exercise extreme cau-
tion at all times so full attention may
be given to vehicle operation.
∙ If you are unable to devote full atten-
tion to vehicle operation while using
the text messaging feature, pull off
the road to a safe location and stop
your vehicle.
NOTE:
This feature is automatically disabled if
the connected device does not support
the Message Access Profile (MAP). For
additional information, refer to the
phone’s Owner’s Manual for details and
instructions.
NOTE:
Many phones may require special per-
mission to enable text messaging. Check
the phone’s screen during Bluetooth®
pairing. For some phones, you may need
to enable ‘Notifications’ in the phone’s
Bluetooth® menu for text messages to
appear on the headunit. For additional
information, refer to your phone’s Own-
er’s manual. Text message integration
requires that the phone support MAP
(Message Access Profile) for both receiv-
ing and sending text messages. Some
phones may not support all text mes-
saging features. Please refer to
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth or
www.nissan.ca/bluetooth for compat-
ibility information, as well as your de-
vice’s Owner’s manual.
The system allows for the sending and re-
ceiving of text messages through the ve-
hicle interface.
The availability of the text message func-
tion may vary depending on the cellular
phone.
When the cellular phone connected to the
vehicle receives a text message, a notifica-
tion will appear on the control panel dis-
play. To check the message, touch the
4-80 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
“Read” key. Touch the “Ignore” key to save
the message to be checked later.
Access text messaging through the ve-
hicles Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone or
through the vehicles control panel.
Text messaging using Bluetooth®
Hands-Free Phone System (if so
equipped)
Sending a text message (if so equipped)
1. Press and hold the
button on the
steering wheel for more than 1.5 sec-
onds.
2. Say “Send Text” after the tone.
3. The system will provide a list of avail-
able commands in order to determine
the recipient of the text message.
Choose from the following:
∙ Phonebook
∙ Quick Dial
∙ Incoming Calls
∙ Outgoing Calls
∙ Missed Calls
∙ Dial
4. Once a recipient is chosen, the system
prompts for which message to send.
Nine predefined messages are avail-
able as well as three custom mes-
sages. To choose one of the predefined
messages, speak one of the following
after the tone:
∙ “Driving, can’t text”
∙ “Call me”
∙ “On my way”
∙ “Running late”
∙ “Okay”
∙ “Yes”
∙ “No”
∙ “Where are you?”
∙ “When?”
To send one of the custom messages,
say “Custom Messages”. If more than
one custom message is stored, the
system will prompt for the number of
the desired custom message. For ad-
ditional information on setting and
managing custom text messages, re-
fer to “Phone and text message set-
tings” in this section.
Reading a received text message
1. Press and hold the
button on the
steering wheel for more than 1.5 sec-
onds.
2. Say “Read Text” after the tone.
The display will show a list of 20 messages
with the sender and delivery time. Touch
the “Next” key on the screen to view all mes-
sages. To view a text message press
the
button on the steering wheel and
speak the number item list on the screen.
The following options will be available:
∙ Play
Speak this command to have the sys-
tem say the message.
∙ Reply
Speak this command to send a text
message response to the sender of the
text message.
∙ Call
Speak this command to call the sender.
∙ Previous
Speak this command to move to the
previous text message (if available).
∙Next
Speak this command to move to the
next text message (if available).
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-81
Siri® Eyes Free (if so equipped)
If a connected phone is equipped with Siri®,
it can also be used to create custom mes-
sages that are sent through the phone. For
additional information, refer to “Siri® Eyes
Free” in this section.
NOTE:
Text messages are only displayed if the
vehicle speed is less than 5 mph
(8 km/h).
NOTE:
For Apple iPhones®, text messages can
only be sent through Siri.
Text messaging using the control
panel
Display received message list
1. Press the
button on the control
panel.
2. Touch the “Text Message” key on the
screen
3. Touch an item on the list to read or
reply to the message.
Up to 100 messages can be stored in the
message list.
Received message screen
Touching the “Read” key on the incoming
message notification screen or selecting a
message from the message list will show
the details of the received message on the
display.
Available actions:
∙Prev.
Touch this key to read the previous
message.
∙Next
Touch this key to read the next mes-
sage.
∙ Play/Stop
Touch the “Play” key to have the hands-
free phone system read out the re-
ceived message. Touch the “Stop” key to
stop reading.
∙ Call
If the sender of the message is regis-
tered in the phonebook, touch the “Call”
key to make a call to the sender.
∙ Reply
A reply message can be selected from
the predefined list or by a custom mes-
sage.
Sending a text message (if so equipped)
This function may not be supported de-
pending on the cellular phone.
1. Press the
button on the control
panel.
2. Touch the “Text Message” key on the
screen.
3. Touch the “Create Message” key on the
screen.
4-82 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
The following items are available:
Available item Action
To Enter Number by Keypad Enter the phone number of the recipient using the keypad. Touch the “OK” key to confirm.
Quick Dial Select a recipient from the quick dial list.
Phonebook Select a recipient from the phonebook.
Call History Select a recipient/phone number from call history.
Select Text Fixed Touch to display a list of predefined text messages.
Customized Touch to display a list of custom text messages. Custom text can be created or edited from the setting
menu. For additional information, refer to “Phone and text message settings” in this section.
Send Touch to send the message.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-83
BLUETOOTH® CONNECTIONS
SCREEN
1.
“
” (back) key
2. Bluetooth tab
3. Connections screen
4. “Add New” key
5.
“
” (settings) key
6.
“
” (info) key
7.
“
” (Bluetooth® Audio connec-
tion) key
8.
“
” (Bluetooth® Hands-Free
Phone System connection) key
Access the Connections screen to change
settings and view Bluetooth® information.
To access the Connections screen press
the
MENU button on the control
panel. Touch the “Connections” key on the
screen then select the Bluetooth tab.
The paired phone will be added to the list
on the Bluetooth® connections screen.
Touching the name of another device on
the list will switch the connected device.
“ ”(back) key
Touch the “ ” key to go back to the
previous screen.
Connecting Bluetooth®
For additional information on connecting a
cellular phone or device to the Bluetooth®
Hands-Free Phone System, refer to “Con-
necting procedure” in this section.
NOTE:
Some cellular phones or other devices
may cause interference or a buzzing
noise to come from the audio system
speakers. Storing the device in a differ-
ent location may reduce or eliminate the
noise.
Bluetooth tab
This tab will display up to 6 Bluetooth® de-
vices. If 6 devices are already connected,
one of the devices must be deleted before
another device can be connected.
“Add New” key
Touch the this key on the screen to con-
nect a new Bluetooth® device. For addi-
tional information, refer to “Connecting
procedure” in this section.
“ ” (Bluetooth® settings) key
Touch the “ ” key on the screen to dis-
play a list of options.
∙ Bluetooth
Touch this key to turn the Bluetooth®
connection on or off
∙ Favorite (Connection first)
Touch this key to change which device
will be connected first when multiple
devices are connected to the vehicle.
Turn the “
” key on or off to make the
device a favorite connection.
Turn the “
” key on or off to make the
device a favorite connection.
LHA4716
4-84 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
∙ Pin
Touch this key to customize the PIN
code. Input a four digit number then
touch the “OK” key. The new PIN will be
set.
“ ” (info) key
Touch the “ ” key on the screen to dis-
play the information of the cellular phone
or to delete the device.
Touch the “Delete” key to remove a paired
device then select “Yes” when a message
appears.
“
” (Bluetooth® Hands-Free
Phone System connection) key
A list of connected devices will be displayed
on the screen. Touch the “
” key next to
the name to connect a device to the
Hands-Free Phone System. If the phone is
listed as a favorite, a star will appear on the
icon. Select the key again to disconnect the
device. The device will not be removed
from the list. For additional information on
removing a device, refer to “Info key” in this
section.
“ ” (Bluetooth® Audio
connection) key
A list of connected devices will be displayed
on the screen. Touch the “
” key next to
the name to connect a device to
Bluetooth® Audio. If the device is listed as a
favorite, a star will appear on the icon. Se-
lect the key again to disconnect the device.
The device will not be removed from the
list. For additional information on removing
a device, refer to “Info key” in this section.
PHONE AND TEXT MESSAGE
SETTINGS
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System set-
tings can be changed according to the us-
er’s preference. To access the “Phone” set-
tings menu press the
MENU button
on the control panel. Touch the “Settings”
key then select the “Phone” key.
LHA4721
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-85
The following options are available:
Menu Item Result
Quick Dial Edit Entries in the Quick Dial can be edited. For additional information, refer to “Quick dial” in this section.
Delete All Deletes all of the stored phone numbers in quick dial.
Phonebook Download Entire Phone-
book
All of the phone numbers that are stored in a phonebook in the cellular phone that is connected to the vehicle
are downloaded at once. For additional information, refer to the cellular phones Owners manual.
Auto Downloaded Turns on/off automatic downloading of the phonebook when a new phone is connected.
Text Message Text Message Turns the text messaging function on/off.
Text Message Ringtone Turn the incoming message sound on/off.
Signature Turns the signature setting for the outgoing text message on/off.
Auto Reply Turns the automatic text message reply function on/off.
Auto Reply Text Message Select the text message to be used for the automatic reply. Choose from a list of predefined messages or cre-
ate a custom message.
Edit Custom Text Create or edits a customized text message reply. To set a custom message, touch the “Add New” key. Select a
message from the recent text log. Touch the “OK” key to set the message or the “Select” key to choose a differ-
ent message. Up to three custom messages can be set. To delete a message select the custom message and
touch the “Delete” key.
Notifications Driver Only When this item is turned on, incoming call notification is displayed only on the handset.
Vehicle Ringtone Turns the vehicle ringtone on/off.
Automatic Hold When this item turns on, an incoming call will be put on hold automatically.
4-86 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Volume & beeps
There are several methods to customize
the volume settings.
Volume & Beeps
The Volume & Beeps screen can be found
by pressing the
MENU button on the
control panel, touching the “Settings” key
on the screen and selecting “Volume &
Beeps”. To adjust the volume of the follow-
ing options, touch the “-” and “+” keys on the
screen.
The available settings are:
∙ Ringtone
Adjust the volume level of the ringtone
of incoming calls.
∙ Outgoing Call
Adjust the volume level of the outgoing
calls.
∙ Voice Prompt Vol.
Adjust the volume level of the system
voice.
∙ Text-to-speech Vol.
Adjust the volume of the replay voice for
text messaging.
∙ Button Beeps
Turns on/off the button beep sounds
and alarm for prohibited operations.
Volume Settings
The Volume settings screen can be found
by pressing the
button on the control
panel then touching the “Volume” key on
the screen. To adjust the volume of the
following options, touch the “-” and “+” keys
on the screen.
The available settings are:
∙ Ringtone
Adjust the volume level of the ringtone
of incoming calls.
∙ Outgoing Call
Adjust the volume level of the outgoing
calls.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-87
5 Starting and driving
Precautions when starting and driving ..........5-2
Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) ..............5-2
Three-way catalyst ...........................5-3
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)........................................5-3
On-pavement and off-road driving
precautions ..................................5-7
Avoiding collision and rollover ................5-7
Off-roadrecovery ............................5-7
Rapid air pressure loss .......................5-8
Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving ...........5-9
Push-button ignition switch .....................5-9
Operating range.............................5-10
Push-button ignition switch positions .......5-10
Emergency engine shut off ...................5-11
NISSAN Intelligent Key® battery
discharge ...................................5-12
NISSAN Anti-Theft System (NATS)
(if so equipped) ..............................5-12
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System
(if so equipped) ..............................5-13
Before starting the engine......................5-13
Starting the engine .............................5-14
Remote Engine Start (if so equipped) ........5-15
Driving the vehicle ..............................5-15
Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT) ........................................5-15
Parking brake ..................................5-21
Blind Spot Warning (BSW) (if so equipped) .......5-22
BSW system operation ......................5-23
How to enable/disable the BSW system .....5-24
BSW system limitations......................5-25
BSW driving situations .......................5-26
System temporarily unavailable .............5-29
System maintenance........................5-30
Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) (if so equipped) . . 5-31
RCTA system operation......................5-32
How to enable/disable the RCTA
system ......................................5-34
RCTA system limitations .....................5-35
System temporarily unavailable .............5-37
System maintenance........................5-38
Cruise control ..................................5-39
Precautions on cruise control................5-39
Cruise
control operations....................5-40
Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB)
(if so equipped) .................................5-41
AEB system operation .......................5-43
Turning the AEB system on/off ..............5-45
AEB system limitations ......................5-45
System temporarily unavailable .............5-47
System malfunction .........................5-48
System maintenance........................5-48
Break-in schedule ..............................5-49
Fuel efficient driving tips ........................5-50
Increasing fuel economy .......................5-51
Parking/parking on hills ........................5-52
Power steering .................................5-53
Brake system...................................5-54
Brake precautions ...........................5-54
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) ..............5-54
Brake Assist .................................5-55
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system .........5-56
Brake force distribution......................5-57
Chassis Control (if so equipped) ................5-59
Intelligent Trace Control (I-TC)................5-59
Intelligent Engine Brake (I-EB) ................5-59
Active Ride Control (ARC) ....................5-60
Hill start assist system..........................5-60
Cold weather driving ...........................5-61
Freeing a frozen door lock ...................5-61
Antifreeze ...................................5-61
Battery......................................5-61
Draining of coolant water....................5-61
Tire equipment ..............................5-61
Special winter equipment ...................5-62
Driving on snow or ice .......................5-62
Parking brake ...............................5-62
WARNING
∙ Do not leave children or adults who
would normally require the assis-
tance of others alone in your vehicle.
Pets should also not be left alone.
They could accidentally injure them-
selves or others through inadvertent
operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot,
sunny days, temperatures in a closed
vehicle could quickly become high
enough to cause severe or possibly
fatal injuries to people or animals.
∙ Properly secure all cargo with ropes or
straps to help prevent it from sliding
or shifting. Do not place cargo higher
than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop
or collision, unsecured cargo could
cause personal injury.
∙ To avoid raising the center of gravity
excessively, do not exceed the rated
capacity of the roof rack (if so
equipped) and evenly distribute the
load.
EXHAUST GAS (carbon monoxide)
WARNING
∙ Do not breathe exhaust gases; they
contain colorless and odorless carbon
monoxide. Carbon monoxide is dan-
gerous. It can cause unconsciousness
or death.
∙ If you suspect that exhaust fumes are
entering the vehicle, drive with all
windows fully open, and have the ve-
hicle inspected immediately.
∙ Do not run the engine in closed spaces
such as a garage.
∙ Do not park the vehicle with the en-
gine running for any extended length
of time.
∙ Keep the rear vent windows, liftgates,
doors and trunk lids (if so equipped)
closed while driving, otherwise ex-
haust gases could be drawn into the
passenger compartment. If you must
drive with one of these open, follow
these precautions:
1. Open all the windows.
2. Set the
air recirculation but-
ton to off and the fan control dial to
high to circulate the air.
∙ If electrical wiring or other cable con-
nections must pass to a trailer
through the seal on the trunk lid or the
body, follow the manufacturer’s rec-
ommendation to prevent carbon
monoxide entry into the vehicle.
∙ The exhaust system and body should
be inspected by a qualified mechanic
whenever:
a. The vehicle is raised for service.
b. You suspect that exhaust fumes
are entering into the passenger
compartment.
c. You notice a change in the sound of
the exhaust system.
d. You have had an accident involving
damage to the exhaust system,
underbody, or rear of the vehicle.
PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING AND
DRIVING
5-2 Starting and driving
THREE-WAY CATALYST
The three-way catalyst is an emission con-
trol device installed in the exhaust system.
Exhaust gases in the three-way catalyst
are burned at high temperatures to help
reduce pollutants.
WARNING
∙ The exhaust gas and the exhaust sys-
tem are very hot. Keep people, ani-
mals or flammable materials away
from the exhaust system
components.
∙ Do not stop or park the vehicle over
flammable materials such as dry
grass, waste paper or rags. They may
ignite and cause a fire.
CAUTION
∙ Do not use leaded gasoline. Deposits
from leaded gasoline will seriously re-
duce the three-way catalyst’s ability
to help reduce exhaust pollutants.
∙ Keep your engine tuned up. Malfunc-
tions in the ignition, fuel injection, or
electrical systems can cause overrich
fuel flow into the three-way catalyst,
causing it to overheat. Do not keep
driving if the engine misfires, or if no-
ticeable loss of performance or other
unusual operating conditions are de-
tected. Have the vehicle inspected
promptly. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
∙ Avoid driving with an extremely low
fuel level. Running out of fuel could
cause the engine to misfire, damag-
ing the three-way catalyst.
∙ Do not race the engine while warming
it up.
∙ Do not push or tow your vehicle to
start the engine.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM (TPMS)
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recom-
mended by the vehicle manufacturer on
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure
label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different
size than the size indicated on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire inflation
pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle
has been equipped with a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) that illuminates
a low tire pressure telltale when one or
more of your tires is significantly under-
inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire
pressure telltale illuminates, you should
stop and check your tires as soon as pos-
sible, and inflate them to the proper pres-
sure. Driving on a significantly under-
inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and
can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life,
and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substi-
tute for proper tire maintenance, and it is
the driver’s responsibility to maintain cor-
rect tire pressure, even if under-inflation
has not reached the level to trigger illumi-
nation of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate
when the system is not operating properly.
The TPMS malfunction indicator is com-
bined with the low tire pressure telltale.
Starting and driving 5-3
When the system detects a malfunction,
the telltale will flash for approximately one
minute and then remain continuously illu-
minated. This sequence will continue upon
subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as
the malfunction exists. When the malfunc-
tion indicator is illuminated, the system
may not be able to detect or signal low tire
pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions
may occur for a variety of reasons, includ-
ing the installation of replacement or alter-
nate tires or wheels on the vehicle that
prevent the TPMS from functioning prop-
erly. Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more tires or
wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels
allow the TPMS to continue to function
properly.
Additional information:
∙ When replacing a wheel without the
TPMS such as a spare tire, the TPMS
does not monitor the tire pressure of
the spare tire.
∙
The TPMS will activate only when the ve-
hicle is driven at speeds above 16 mph
(25 km/h). Also, this system may not de-
tect a sudden drop in tire pressure (for
example, a flat tire while driving).
∙ The low tire pressure warning light does
not automatically turn off when the tire
pressure is adjusted. After the tire is in-
flated to the recommended pressure,
the vehicle must be driven at speeds
above 16 mph (25 km/h) to activate the
TPMS and turn off the low tire pressure
warning light. Use a tire pressure gauge
to check the tire pressure.
∙ The “Tire Pressure Low — Add Air” warn-
ing appears each time the ignition
switch is placed in the ON position as
long as the low tire pressure warning
light remains illuminated.
∙ The “Tire Pressure Low — Add Air” warn-
ing appears in the vehicle information
display when the low tire pressure
warning light is illuminated and low tire
pressure is detected. The “Tire Pressure
Low — Add Air” warning turns off when
the low tire pressure warning light turns
off.
∙ The “Tire Pressure Low — Add Air” warn-
ing does not appear if the low tire pres-
sure warning light illuminates to indi-
cate a TPMS malfunction.
∙ Tire pressure rises and falls depending
on the heat caused by the vehicle’s op-
eration and the outside temperature.
Do not reduce the tire pressure after
driving because the tire pressure rises
after driving. Low outside temperature
can lower the temperature of the air
inside the tire which can cause a lower
tire inflation pressure. This may cause
the low tire pressure warning light to
illuminate. If the warning light illumi-
nates, check the tire pressure for all four
tires.
∙ The Tire and Loading Information label
is located in the driver’s door opening.
∙ You can also check the pressure of all
tires (except the spare tire) on the ve-
hicle information display screen. The or-
der of the tire pressure figures dis-
played on the screen corresponds with
the actual order of the tire position.
For additional information, refer to “Low tire
pressure warning light” in the “Instruments
and controls” section and “Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the “In case of
emergency” section of this manual.
5-4 Starting and driving
WARNING
∙ Radio waves could adversely affect
electric medical equipment. Those
who use a pacemaker should contact
the electric medical equipment
manufacturer for the possible influ-
ences before use.
∙
If the low tire pressure warning light
illuminates while driving, avoid sudden
steering maneuvers or abrupt braking,
reduce vehicle speed, pull off the road
to a safe location and stop the vehicle
as soon as possible. Driving with under-
inflated tires may permanently dam-
age the tires and increase the likeli-
hood of tire failure. Serious vehicle
damage could occur and may lead to
an accident and could result in serious
personal injury. Check the tire pressure
for all four tires. Adjust the tire pressure
to the recommended COLD tire pres-
sure shown on the Tire and Loading In-
formation label to turn the low tire
pressure warning light off. If you have a
flat tire, replace it with a spare tire as
soon as possible. (For additional infor-
mation, refer to “Flat tire” in the “In case
of emergency” section for changing a
flat tire.)
∙ When replacing a wheel without the
TPMS such as the spare tire, when a
spare tire is mounted or a wheel is
replaced, the TPMS will not function
and the low tire pressure warning
light will flash for approximately
1 minute. The light will remain on after
1 minute. Have your tires replaced
and/or TPMS system reset as soon as
possible. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
∙ Replacing tires with those not origi-
nally specified by NISSAN could affect
the proper operation of the TPMS.
∙ Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol
tire sealant into the tires, as this may
cause a malfunction of the tire pres-
sure sensors.
CAUTION
∙
The TPMS may not function properly
when the wheels are equipped with tire
chains or the wheels are buried in snow.
∙ Do not place metalized film or any
metal parts (antenna, etc.) on the win-
dows. This may cause poor reception
of the signals from the tire pressure
sensors, and the TPMS will not func-
tion properly.
Some devices and transmitters may tem-
porarily interfere with the operation of the
TPMS and cause the low tire pressure
warning light to illuminate.
Some examples are:
∙ Facilities or electric devices using simi-
lar radio frequencies are near the ve-
hicle.
∙ If a transmitter set to similar frequen-
cies is being used in or near the vehicle.
∙ If a computer (or similar equipment) or
a DC/AC converter is being used in or
near the vehicle.
The low tire pressure warning light may
illuminate in the following cases:
∙ If the vehicle is equipped with a wheel
and tire without TPMS.
∙ If the TPMS has been replaced and the
ID has not been registered.
∙ If the wheel is not originally specified by
NISSAN.
Starting and driving 5-5
FCC Notice:
For USA:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-
lowing two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interfer-
ence received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s author-
ity to operate the equipment.
For Canada:
This device complies with Industry
Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must ac-
cept any interference, including interfer-
ence that may cause undesired opera-
tion of the device.
TPMS with Easy-Fill Tire Alert
When adding air to an under-inflated tire,
the TPMS with Easy-Fill Tire Alert provides
visual and audible signals outside the ve-
hicle to help you inflate the tires to the rec-
ommended COLD tire pressure.
Vehicle set-up
1. Park the vehicle in a safe and level place.
2. Apply the parking brake and place the
shift lever in the P (Park) position.
3. Place the ignition switch in the ON po-
sition. Do not start the engine.
Operation
1. Add air to the tire.
2. After a few seconds, the hazard indica-
tors will start flashing.
3. When the designated pressure is
reached, the horn beeps once and the
hazard indicators stop flashing.
4. Perform the above steps for each tire.
∙ If the tire is over-inflated more than
approximately 4 psi (30 kPa), the horn
beeps and the hazard indicators
flash three times. To correct the pres-
sure, push the core of the valve stem
on the tire briefly to release pressure.
When the pressure reaches the des-
ignated pressure, the horn beeps
once.
∙ If the hazard indicator does not flash
within approximately 15 seconds af-
ter starting to inflate the tire, it indi-
cates that the Easy-Fill Tire Alert is
not operating.
∙ The TPMS will not activate the Easy-
Fill Tire Alert under the following con-
ditions:
– If there is interference from an exter-
nal device or transmitter.
– The air pressure from the inflation
device is not sufficient to inflate the
tire.
– There is a malfunction in the TPMS
system.
– There is a malfunction in the horn or
hazard indicators.
– The identification code of the tire
pressure sensor is not registered to
the system.
– The battery of the tire pressure sen-
sor is low.
5-6 Starting and driving
∙ If the Easy-Fill Tire Alert does not op-
erate due to TPMS interference, move
the vehicle about 3 ft (1 m) backward
or forward and try again.
If the Easy-Fill Tire Alert is not working, use a
tire pressure gauge.
ON-PAVEMENT AND OFF-ROAD
DRIVING PRECAUTIONS
Utility vehicles have a significantly
higher rollover rate than other types of
vehicles.
They have higher ground clearance than
passenger cars to make them capable of
performing in a variety of on-pavement
and off-road applications. This gives them
a higher center of gravity than ordinary ve-
hicles. An advantage of higher ground
clearance is a better view of the road, allow-
ing you to anticipate problems. However,
they are not designed for cornering at the
same speeds as conventional 2-wheel
drive vehicles any more than low-slung
sports cars are designed to perform satis-
factorily under off-road conditions. If at all
possible, avoid sharp turns at high speeds.
As with other vehicles of this type, failure to
operate this vehicle correctly may result in
loss of control or vehicle rollover. In a roll-
over crash, an unbelted person is signifi-
cantly more likely to die than a person
wearing a seat belt.
AVOIDING COLLISION AND
ROLLOVER
WARNING
Failure to operate this vehicle in a safe
and prudent manner may result in loss
of control or an accident.
Be alert and drive defensively at all times.
Obey all traffic regulations. Avoid excessive
speed, high speed cornering, or sudden
steering maneuvers, because these driving
practices could cause you to lose control of
your vehicle.
As with any vehicle, loss of control could
result in a collision with other vehicles or
objects or cause the vehicle to roll over,
particularly if the loss of control causes
the vehicle to slide sideways.
Be attentive at all times, and avoid driving
when tired. Never drive when under the in-
fluence of alcohol or drugs (including pre-
scription or over-the-counter drugs which
may cause drowsiness). Always wear your
seat belt as outlined in the “Safety – Seats,
seat belts and supplemental restraint sys-
tem” section of this manual, and also in-
struct your passengers to do so.
Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury in
collisions and rollovers. In a rollover crash,
an unbelted or improperly belted person
is significantly more likely to be injured
or killed than a person properly wearing
a seat belt.
OFF-ROAD RECOVERY
While driving, the right side or left side
wheels may unintentionally leave the road
surface. If this occurs, maintain control of
the vehicle by following the procedure be-
low. Please note that this procedure is only
a general guide. The vehicle must be driven
as appropriate based on the conditions of
the vehicle, road and traffic.
1. Remain calm and do not overreact.
2. Do not apply the brakes.
3. Maintain a firm grip on the steering
wheel with both hands and try to hold a
straight course.
4. When appropriate, slowly release the
accelerator pedal to gradually slow the
vehicle.
Starting and driving 5-7
5. If there is nothing in the way, steer the
vehicle to follow the road while vehicle
speed is reduced. Do not attempt to
drive the vehicle back onto the road
surface until vehicle speed is reduced.
6. When it is safe to do so, gradually turn
the steering wheel until both tires re-
turn to the road surface. When all tires
are on the road surface, steer the ve-
hicle to stay in the appropriate driving
lane.
∙ If you decide that it is not safe to re-
turn the vehicle to the road surface
based on vehicle, road or traffic con-
ditions, gradually slow the vehicle to a
stop in a safe place off the road.
RAPID AIR PRESSURE LOSS
Rapid air pressure loss or a “blow-out” can
occur if the tire is punctured or is damaged
due to hitting a curb or pothole. Rapid air
pressure loss can also be caused by driving
on under-inflated tires.
Rapid air pressure loss can affect the han-
dling and stability of the vehicle, especially
at highway speeds.
Help prevent rapid air pressure loss by
maintaining the correct air pressure and
visually inspecting the tires for wear and
damage. For additional information, refer
to “Wheels and tires” in the “Do-it-yourself”
section of this manual. If a tire rapidly loses
air pressure or “blows-out” while driving,
maintain control of the vehicle by following
the procedure below. Please note that this
procedure is only a general guide. The ve-
hicle must be driven as appropriate based
on the conditions of the vehicle, road and
traffic.
WARNING
If there is a sudden loss of tire air pres-
sure, the vehicle will generally move or
pull in the direction of the flat tire. In this
situation, losing control of the vehicle
may cause a collision and result in per-
sonal injury.
To help avoid loss of control:
∙ Do not rapidly apply the brakes.
∙ Do not rapidly release the accelerator
pedal.
∙ Do not rapidly turn the steering wheel.
1. Remain calm and do not overreact.
2. Maintain a firm grip on the steering
wheel with both hands and try to hold a
straight course.
3. When appropriate, slowly release the
accelerator pedal to gradually slow the
vehicle.
4. Gradually steer the vehicle to a safe
location off the road and away from
traffic if possible.
5. Lightly apply the brake pedal to gradu-
ally stop the vehicle.
6. Turn on the hazard warning flashers
and contact a roadside emergency
service to change the tire. For addi-
tional information, refer to “Changing a
flat tire” in the “In case of emergency”
section of this manual.
5-8 Starting and driving
DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS AND
DRIVING
WARNING
Never drive under the influence of alco-
hol or drugs. Alcohol in the bloodstream
reduces coordination, delays reaction
time and impairs judgement. Driving
after drinking alcohol increases the
likelihood of being involved in an acci-
dent injuring yourself and others. Addi-
tionally, if you are injured in an accident,
alcohol can increase the severity of the
injury.
NISSAN is committed to safe driving. How-
ever, you must choose not to drive under the
influence of alcohol. Every year thousands of
people are injured or killed in alcohol-related
collisions. Although the local laws vary on
what is considered to be legally intoxicated,
the fact is that alcohol affects all people dif-
ferently and most people underestimate the
effects of alcohol.
Remember, drinking and driving don’t mix!
That is true for drugs (over-the-counter,
prescription) and illegal drugs, too. Don’t
drive if your ability to operate your vehicle is
impaired by alcohol, drugs, or some other
physical condition.
WARNING
Do not operate the push-button igni-
tion switch while driving the vehicle ex-
cept in an emergency. (The engine will
stop when the ignition switch is pushed
three consecutive times in less than
1.5 seconds or the ignition switch is
pushed and held for more than 2 sec-
onds.) If the engine stops while the ve-
hicle is being driven, this could lead to a
crash and serious injury.
When the ignition switch is pushed without
depressing the brake pedal, the ignition
switch will illuminate.
If the ignition switch is in the LOCK or OFF
position, push the ignition switch center:
∙ Once to change to ON.
∙ Two times to change to OFF.
The shift lever can be moved from the P
(Park) position if the ignition switch is in
the ON position and the brake pedal is
depressed.
LSD2645
PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH
Starting and driving 5-9
If the battery of the vehicle is discharged,
the ignition switch cannot be moved
from the LOCK position.
Some indicators and warnings for opera-
tion are displayed on the vehicle informa-
tion display (if so equipped). For additional
information, refer to “Vehicle information
display” in the “Instruments and controls”
section of this manual.
OPERATING RANGE
The Intelligent Key functions can only be
used when the Intelligent Key is within the
specified operating range.
When the Intelligent Key battery is almost
discharged or strong radio waves are pres-
ent near the operating location, the Intelli-
gent Key system’s operating range be-
comes narrower and may not function
properly.
If the Intelligent Key is within the operating
range, it is possible for anyone, even some-
one who does not carry the Intelligent Key, to
push the ignition switch to start the engine.
The operating range of the engine start
function is inside of the vehicle
䊊
1
.
∙ The luggage area is not included in the
operating range, but the Intelligent Key
may function.
∙ If the Intelligent Key is placed on the
instrument panel, inside the glove box,
storage bin or door pocket, the Intelli-
gent Key may not function.
∙ If the Intelligent Key is placed near the
door or window outside the vehicle, the
Intelligent Key may function.
PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH
POSITIONS
LOCK (Normal parking position)
The ignition switch can only be locked in
this position.
The ignition switch will be unlocked when it
is pushed to the ON position while carrying
the Intelligent Key.
The ignition switch will lock when any door
is opened or closed with the ignition
switched off.
LSD2020
5-10 Starting and driving
ON (Normal operating position)
This position turns on the ignition system
and electrical accessories.
ON has a battery saver feature that will
place the ignition switch in the OFF posi-
tion, if the vehicle is not running, after some
time under the following conditions:
∙ The shift lever is in P (Park).
∙ The hazard lamps are off.
∙ The turn signals are off.
The battery saver feature will be canceled if
any of the following occur:
∙ The shift lever is moved out of the P
(Park) position.
∙ The ignition switch changes position.
∙ The hazard lamps are turned on.
∙ The turn signals are turned on.
CAUTION
Do not leave the vehicle with the igni-
tion switch in the ON or AUTO ACC posi-
tion when the engine is not running for
an extended period. This can discharge
the battery.
OFF
The ignition switch is in the OFF position
when the engine is turned off using the
ignition switch.
AUTO ACC:
With the vehicle in the P (Park) position, the
Intelligent Key with you, and the ignition
switch placed from the ON to the OFF po-
sition, the radio can still be used for a period
of time, or until the driver’s door is opened.
After a period of time, functions such as
radio, navigation, and Bluetooth® Hands-
Free Phone System may be restarted by
pressing the “POWER button/VOLUME con-
trol knob” or the key fob unlock button. For
additional information, refer to “Monitor, cli-
mate, audio, phone and voice recognition
systems” in this manual.
EMERGENCY ENGINE SHUT OFF
To shut off the engine in an emergency
situation while driving, perform the follow-
ing procedure:
∙ Rapidly push the ignition switch three
consecutive times in less than 1.5 sec-
onds, or
∙ Push and hold the ignition switch for
more than 2 seconds.
Starting and driving 5-11
NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY®
BATTERY DISCHARGE
If the battery of the NISSAN Intelligent Key®
is discharged or environmental conditions
interfere with the Intelligent Key operation,
start the engine according to the following
procedure:
1. Place the shift lever in the P (Park) posi-
tion.
2. Firmly apply the foot brake.
3. Touch the ignition switch with the Intel-
ligent Key as illustrated. (A chime will
sound.)
(After step 3 is performed, when the
ignition switch is pushed without de-
pressing the brake pedal, the ignition
switch position will change to ON.)
4. Push the ignition switch while depress-
ing the brake pedal within 10 seconds
after the chime sounds. The engine will
start.
NOTE:
∙ When the ignition switch is pushed to
the ON position or the engine is
started by the above procedure, the
Intelligent Key battery discharge in-
dicator appears in the vehicle infor-
mation display (if so equipped) even
when the Intelligent Key is inside the
vehicle. This is not a malfunction. To
turn off the Intelligent Key battery
discharge indicator, touch the igni-
tion switch with the Intelligent Key
again.
∙ If the Intelligent Key battery dis-
charge indicator appears, replace the
battery as soon as possible. For addi-
tional information, refer to “Battery
replacement” in the “Do-it-yourself”
section of this manual.
NISSAN ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM
(NATS) (if so equipped)
The NISSAN Anti-Theft System (NATS) will
not allow the engine to start without the
use of the registered NATS key.
If the engine does not start by using the
registered NATS key, it may be due to inter-
ference caused by:
∙ Another NATS key.
∙ An automated toll road device.
∙ An automated payment device.
∙ Other devices that transmit similar sig-
nals.
Start the engine using the following proce-
dure:
1. Remove any items that may be causing
the interference away from the NATS
key.
2. Leave the ignition switch in the ON po-
sition for approximately 5 seconds.
3. Place the ignition switch in the OFF or
LOCK position, and wait approximately
10 seconds.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3.
SSD0860
5-12 Starting and driving
5. Start the engine.
6. Repeat the steps above until all pos-
sible interferences are eliminated.
If this procedure allows the engine to start,
NISSAN recommends placing the regis-
tered NATS key separate from other de-
vices to avoid interference.
NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER
SYSTEM (if so equipped)
The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System
will not allow the engine to start without
the use of the registered key.
If the engine fails to start using a registered
key (for example, when interference is
caused by another registered key, an auto-
mated toll road device or automatic pay-
ment device on the key ring), restart the
engine using the following procedures:
1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON po-
sition for approximately 5 seconds.
2. Place the ignition switch in the OFF or
LOCK position, and wait approximately
10 seconds.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2.
4. Restart the engine while holding the
device (which may have caused the in-
terference) separate from the regis-
tered key.
If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN
recommends placing the registered key on
a separate key ring to avoid interference
from other devices.
∙ Make sure the area around the vehicle is
clear.
∙ Check fluid levels such as engine oil,
coolant, brake fluid, and windshield-
washer fluid as frequently as possible,
or at least whenever you refuel.
∙ Check that all windows and lights are
clean.
∙ Visually inspect tires for their appear-
ance and condition. Also check tires for
proper inflation.
∙ Lock all doors.
∙ Position seat and adjust
headrests/head restraints.
∙ Adjust inside and outside mirrors.
∙ Fasten seat belts and ask all passen-
gers to do likewise.
∙ Check the operation of warning lights
when the ignition switch is pushed to
the ON position. For additional informa-
tion, refer to “Warning lights, indicator
lights and audible reminders” in the “In-
struments and controls” section of this
manual.
BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE
Starting and driving 5-13
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Move the shift lever to P (Park) or N
(Neutral). P (Park) is recommended.
The shift lever cannot be moved out
of P (Park) and into any of the other
gear positions if the ignition switch
is placed in the OFF position.
The starter is designed not to oper-
ate if the shift lever is in any of the
driving positions.
3. Push the ignition switch to the ON po-
sition. Depress the brake pedal and
push the ignition switch to start the
engine.
To start the engine immediately, push
and release the ignition switch while
depressing the brake pedal with the
ignition switch in any position.
∙ If the engine is very hard to start in
extremely cold weather or when re-
starting, depress the accelerator
pedal a little (approximately 1/3 to the
floor) and while holding, crank the en-
gine. Release the accelerator pedal
when the engine starts.
∙ If the engine is very hard to start be-
cause it is flooded, depress the accel-
erator pedal all the way to the floor
and hold it. Push the ignition switch
to the ON position to start cranking
the engine. After 5 or 6 seconds, stop
cranking by pushing the ignition
switch to LOCK. After cranking the
engine, release the accelerator pedal.
Crank the engine with your foot off
the accelerator pedal by depressing
the brake pedal and pushing the igni-
tion switch to start the engine. If the
engine starts, but fails to run, repeat
the above procedure.
CAUTION
Do not operate the starter for more
than 15 seconds at a time. If the engine
does not start, push the ignition switch
to the OFF position and wait 10 seconds
before cranking again, otherwise the
starter could be damaged.
4. Warm-up:
Allow the engine to idle for at least
30 seconds after starting. Do not race
the engine while warming it up. Drive at
a moderate speed for a short distance
first, especially in cold weather. In cold
weather, keep the engine running for a
minimum of2-3minutes before shut-
ting it off. Starting and stopping the
engine over a short period of time may
make the vehicle more difficult to start.
5. To stop the engine, move the shift lever
to the P (Park) position and push the
ignition switch to the OFF position.
NOTE:
Care should be taken to avoid situations
that can lead to potential battery discharge
and potential no-start conditions such as:
1. Installation or extended use of elec-
tronic accessories that consume bat-
tery power when the engine is not
running (phone chargers, GPS, DVD
players, etc.).
2. The vehicle is not driven regularly
and/or only driven short distances.
In these cases, the battery may need to
be charged to maintain battery health.
STARTING THE ENGINE
5-14 Starting and driving
REMOTE ENGINE START (if so
equipped)
Vehicles started with the Remote Engine
Start require the ignition switch to be
placed in the ON position before the shift
lever can be moved from the P (Park) posi-
tion. To place the ignition switch in the ON
position, follow these steps:
1. Make sure that the Intelligent Key is on
you.
2. Apply the brake.
3. Push the ignition switch once to the ON
position.
For additional information, refer to “NISSAN
Intelligent Key®” in the “Pre-driving checks
and adjustments” section of this manual.
CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE
TRANSMISSION (CVT)
WARNING
∙ Do not depress the accelerator pedal
while shifting from P (Park) or N (Neu-
tral) to R (Reverse), D (Drive) or L (Low).
Always depress the brake pedal until
shifting is completed. Failure to do so
could cause you to lose control and
have an accident.
∙ Cold engine idle speed is high, so use
caution when shifting into a forward
or reverse gear before the engine has
warmed up.
∙ Do not downshift abruptly on slippery
roads. This may cause a loss of
control.
∙ Never shift to either the P (Park) or R
(Reverse) position while the vehicle is
moving forward and P (Park) or D
(Drive) position while the vehicle is re-
versing. This could cause an accident
or damage the transmission.
CAUTION
∙ Except in an emergency, do not shift
to the N (Neutral) position while driv-
ing. Coasting with the transmission in
the N (Neutral) position may cause se-
rious damage to the transmission.
∙ To avoid possible damage to your ve-
hicle, when stopping the vehicle on an
uphill grade, do not hold the vehicle by
depressing the accelerator pedal. The
foot brake should be used for this
purpose.
The CVT in your vehicle is electronically
controlled to produce maximum power
and smooth operation.
The recommended operating procedures
for this transmission are shown on the fol-
lowing pages. Follow these procedures for
maximum vehicle performance and driv-
ing enjoyment.
NOTE:
Engine power may be automatically re-
duced to protect the CVT if the engine
speed increases quickly when driving on
slippery roads or while being tested on
some dynamometers.
DRIVING THE VEHICLE
Starting and driving 5-15
Starting the vehicle
1. After starting the engine, fully depress
the foot brake pedal before moving the
shift lever out of the P (Park) position.
This Continuously Variable Transmis-
sion is designed so that the foot
brake pedal must be depressed be-
fore shifting from P (Park) to any driv-
ing position while the ignition switch
is in the ON position.
The shift lever cannot be moved out
of the P (Park) position and into any
of the other positions if the ignition
switch is placed in the LOCK or OFF
position.
2. Keep the foot brake pedal depressed
and move the shift lever to a driving
position.
3. Release the parking brake and foot
brake pedal, and then gradually start
the vehicle in motion.
WARNING
∙ Do not depress the accelerator pedal
while shifting from P (Park) or N (Neu-
tral) to R (Reverse), D (Drive) or L (Low)
position. Always depress the brake
pedal until shifting is completed. Fail-
ure to do so could cause you to lose
control and have an accident.
∙ Cold engine idle speed is high, so use
caution when shifting into a forward
or reverse gear before the engine has
warmed up.
∙ Do not downshift abruptly on slippery
roads. This may cause a loss of
control.
∙ Never shift to either the P (Park) or R
(Reverse) position while the vehicle is
moving forward and P (Park) or D
(Drive) position while the vehicle is re-
versing. This could cause an accident
or damage the transmission.
CAUTION
∙ To avoid possible damage to your ve-
hicle, when stopping the vehicle on an
uphill grade, do not hold the vehicle by
depressing the accelerator pedal. The
foot brake should be used for this
purpose.
∙ Except in an emergency, do not shift
to the N (Neutral) position while driv-
ing. Coasting with the transmission in
the N (Neutral) position may cause se-
rious damage to the transmission.
5-16 Starting and driving
To move the shift lever:
Press the button
䊊
A
while depressing
the brake pedal
Press the button
䊊
A
to shift
Shift without pressing the button
䊊
A
Shifting
After starting the engine, fully depress the
brake pedal and move the shift lever from P
(Park) to any of the desired shift positions.
WARNING
Apply the parking brake if the shift lever
is in any position while the engine is not
running. Failure to do so could cause
the vehicle to move unexpectedly or roll
away and result in serious personal in-
jury or property damage.
P (Park)
CAUTION
To prevent transmission damage, use
the P (Park) position only when the ve-
hicle is completely stopped.
Use the P (Park) shift lever position when
the vehicle is parked or when starting the
engine. Make sure the vehicle is completely
stopped.
The brake pedal should be depressed to
move the shift lever from N (Neutral) or
any drive position to P (Park).
Apply the parking brake. When parking on a
hill, apply the parking brake first, then move
the shift lever into the P (Park) position.
R (Reverse)
CAUTION
To prevent transmission damage, use
the R (Reverse) position only when the
vehicle is completely stopped.
Use the R (Reverse) position to back up.
Make sure the vehicle is completely
stopped before selecting the R (Reverse)
position. The brake pedal must be de-
pressed in to move the shift lever from P
(Park) or the shift lever button pressed in
from N (Neutral) or any drive position to R
(Reverse).
N (Neutral)
Neither forward nor reverse gear is en-
gaged. The engine can be started in this
position. You may shift to N (Neutral) and
restart a stalled engine while the vehicle is
moving.
D (Drive)
Use this position for all normal forward
driving.
LSD2643
Starting and driving 5-17
L(Low)
Use this position for engine braking on
steep downhill gradients/climbing steep
slopes and whenever approaching sharp
bends. Do not use the L (Low) position in
any other circumstances.
Shift lock release
If the battery charge is low or discharged,
the shift lever may not be moved from the
P (Park) position even with the brake pedal
depressed and the shift lever button
pressed.
It will be necessary to jump start or have
your battery charged. For additional infor-
mation, refer to “Jump starting” in the “In
case of emergency” section of this manual.
It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer or a professional towing service.
To move the shift lever, complete the fol-
lowing procedure:
1. Push the ignition switch to the LOCK
position.
2. Apply the parking brake.
3. Using a protective cloth on the tip of a
small (1/8 inch or 3 mm) flat-head
screwdriver, remove the shift lock re-
lease cover.
∙ If available, a plastic trim tool can also
be used.
4. Insert the rod from the spare tire tool
kit into the shift lock release slot and
push in at an angle (about 45°). A small
screwdriver or small trim tool may also
be used.
∙ For additional information, refer to
“NISSAN Intelligent Key®” in the “Pre-
driving checks and adjustments”
section of this manual.
5. Move the shift lever to the N (Neutral)
position while holding down the shift
lock release.
6. Push the ignition switch to the ON po-
sition. Now the vehicle may be moved
to the desired location.
LSD2644
5-18 Starting and driving
If the shift lever cannot be moved out of P
(Park), have the transmission checked as
soon as possible. It is recommended that
you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
CAUTION
Make sure to take extra care during the
removal of the shift lock cap as this part
is easily damaged.
WARNING
If the shift lever cannot be moved from
the P (Park) position while the engine is
running and the brake pedal is de-
pressed, the stop lights may not work.
Malfunctioning stop lights could cause
an accident injuring yourself and
others.
Sport mode switch (if so
equipped)
To select the sport mode, push the sport
mode switch with the shift lever in the D
(Drive) position.
The sport mode indicator in the vehicle in-
formation display illuminates next to the
Transmission Shift Position indicator. To
turn off the sport mode, push the sport
mode switch again. The sport mode indi-
cator will turn off. When the shift lever is
shifted to any position other than D (Drive),
the sport mode will be automatically
turned off.
OFF position:
For normal driving and fuel economy, use
the OFF position.
ON position:
For driving up or down long slopes where
engine braking is necessary, or for powerful
acceleration, use the ON position. The
transmission will automatically select a dif-
ferent gear ratio, allowing the engine to
provide high output.
Remember not to drive at high speeds for
extended periods of time with the sport
mode in the ON position. This reduces fuel
economy.
LSD2647
Starting and driving 5-19
Overdrive (O/D) OFF mode switch
(if so equipped)
To select the overdrive OFF mode, push the
O/D OFF switch with the shift lever in the D
(Drive) position.
The overdrive OFF indicator light in the me-
ter panel illuminates. To turn off the over-
drive OFF mode, push the O/D OFF switch
again. The overdrive OFF indicator light will
turn off. When the shift lever is shifted to
any position other than D (Drive), the over-
drive OFF mode will be automatically
turned off.
OFF position:
For normal driving and fuel economy, use
the OFF position.
ON position:
For driving up or down long slopes where
engine braking is necessary, or for powerful
acceleration, use the ON position. The
transmission will automatically select a dif-
ferent gear ratio, allowing the engine to
provide high output.
Remember not to drive at high speeds for
extended periods of time with the over-
drive OFF mode in the ON position. This
reduces fuel economy.
Accelerator downshift
— in D (Drive) position —
For passing or hill climbing, depress the
accelerator pedal to the floor. This shifts
the transmission down into a lower gear,
depending on the vehicle speed.
High fluid temperature protection
mode
This transmission has a high fluid tem-
perature protection mode. If the fluid tem-
perature becomes too high (for example,
when climbing steep grades in high tem-
peratures with heavy loads, such as when
towing a trailer), engine power and, under
some conditions, vehicle speed will be de-
creased automatically to reduce the
chance of transmission damage. Vehicle
speed can be controlled with the accelera-
tor pedal, but the engine and vehicle speed
may be limited.
Fail-safe
If the vehicle is driven under extreme
conditions, such as excessive wheel
spinning and subsequent hard braking,
the fail-safe system may be activated.
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
may come on to indicate the fail-safe
mode is activated. For additional infor-
mation, refer to “Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL)” in the “Instruments and con-
trols” section of this manual. This will oc-
cur even if all electrical circuits are func-
tioning properly. In this case, place the
ignition switch in the OFF position and
wait for 10 seconds. Then push the
switch back to the ON position. The ve-
hicle should return to its normal operat-
ing condition. If it does not return to its
normal operating condition, have the
transmission checked and repaired, if
necessary. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
LSD2647
5-20 Starting and driving
WARNING
When the high fluid temperature pro-
tection mode or fail-safe operation oc-
curs, vehicle speed may be gradually re-
duced.The reduced speed may be lower
than other traffic, which could increase
the chance of a collision. Be especially
careful when driving. If necessary, pull
to the side of the road at a safe place
and allow the transmission to return to
normal operation, or have it repaired if
necessary.
WARNING
∙ Be sure the parking brake is fully re-
leased before driving. Failure to do so
can cause brake failure and lead to an
accident.
∙ Do not release the parking brake from
outside the vehicle.
∙ Do not use the shift lever in place of
the parking brake. When parking, be
sure the parking brake is fully
engaged.
∙ To help avoid risk of injury or death
through unintended operation of the
vehicle and/or its systems, do not
leave children, people who require the
assistance of others or pets unat-
tended in your vehicle. Additionally,
the temperature inside a closed ve-
hicle on a warm day can quickly be-
come high enough to cause a signifi-
cant risk of injury or death to people
and pets.
To engage: Pull the lever up
䊊
A
.
To release:
1. Firmly apply the foot brake.
2. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) po-
sition.
3. While pulling up on the parking brake
lever slightly, press the button and
lower completely
䊊
B
.
4. Before driving, be sure the brake warn-
ing light goes out.
WSD0169
PARKING BRAKE
Starting and driving 5-21
WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and in-
structions for proper use of the BSW
system could result in serious injury or
death.
∙ The BSW system is not a replacement
for proper driving procedures and is
not designed to prevent contact with
vehicles or objects. When changing
lanes, always use the side and rear
mirrors and turn and look in the direc-
tion your vehicle will move to ensure it
is safe to change lanes. Never rely
solely on the BSW system.
The BSW system helps alert the driver of
other vehicles in adjacent lanes when
changing lanes.
The BSW system uses radar sensors
䊊
1
installed near the rear bumper to detect
other vehicles in an adjacent lane.
The radar sensors can detect vehicles on
either side of your vehicle within the detec-
tion zone shown as illustrated. This detec-
tion zone starts from the outside mirror of
your vehicle and extends approximately
10 ft (3.0 m) behind the rear bumper, and
approximately 10 ft (3.0 m) sideways.
LSD3090
Detection zone
SSD1030
BLIND SPOT WARNING (BSW) (if so
equipped)
5-22 Starting and driving
1. Side BSW/RCTA Indicator Light
2. BSW Indicator
BSW SYSTEM OPERATION
The BSW system operates above approxi-
mately 20 mph (32 km/h).
If the radar sensors detect a vehicle in the
detection zone, the side BSW/RCTA indica-
tor light (1) illuminates. If the turn signal is
then activated, the system chimes (twice)
and the side BSW/RCTA indicator light
flashes. The side BSW/RCTA indicator light
continues to flash until the detected ve-
hicle leaves the detection zone.
The side BSW/RCTA indicator light illumi-
nates for a few seconds when the ignition
switch is placed in the ON position.
The brightness of the side BSW/RCTA indi-
cator light is adjusted automatically de-
pending on the brightness of the ambient
light.
If a vehicle comes into the detection zone
after the driver activates the turn signal,
then only the side BSW/RCTA indicator light
flashes and no chime sounds. For addi-
tional information, refer to “BSW driving
situations” in this section.
LSD3204
Starting and driving 5-23
HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE
BSW SYSTEM
Perform the following steps to enable or
disable the BSW system.
1. Press the
button until “Settings”
displays in the vehicle information dis-
play. Use the
button to select
“Driver Assistance.” Then press the OK
button.
2. Select “Blind Spot” and press the OK
button.
3. Select “Blind Spot Warning” and press
the OK button to turn the system on or
off.
NOTE:
∙ When enabling/disabling the system,
the system will retain current set-
tings even if the engine is restarted.
∙ When the BSW system is turned on,
the BSW indicator (white) in the ve-
hicle information display illuminates.
LSD3149
5-24 Starting and driving
BSW SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations
for the BSW system. Failure to operate
the vehicle in accordance with these
system limitations could result in seri-
ous injury or death.
∙ The BSW system cannot detect all ve-
hicles under all conditions.
∙ The radar sensors may not be able to
detect and activate BSW when certain
objects are present such as:
– Pedestrian, bicycles, animals.
– Vehicles such as motorcycles, low
height vehicles, or high ground
clearance vehicles.
– Oncoming vehicles.
– Vehicles remaining in the detec-
tion zone when you accelerate
from a stop.
– A vehicle merging into an adjacent
lane at a speed approximately the
same as your vehicle.
– A vehicle approaching rapidly from
behind.
– A vehicle which your vehicle over-
takes rapidly.
– A vehicle that passes through the
detection zone quickly.
– When overtaking several vehicles
in a row, the vehicles after the first
vehicle may not be detected if they
are traveling close together.
∙ The radar sensors’ detection zone is
designed based on a standard lane
width. When driving in a wider lane,
the radar sensors may not detect ve-
hicles in an adjacent lane. When driv-
ing in a narrow lane, the radar sensors
may detect vehicles driving two lanes
away.
∙ The radar sensors are designed to ig-
nore most stationary objects, how-
ever objects such as guardrails, walls,
foliage and parked vehicles may oc-
casionally be detected. This is a nor-
mal operation condition.
∙ The following conditions may reduce
the ability of the radar to detect other
vehicles:
– Severe weather
– Road spray
– Ice/frost/snow/dirt build-up on
the vehicle
∙ Do not attach stickers (including
transparent material), install accesso-
ries or apply additional paint near the
radar sensors. These conditions may
reduce the ability of the radar to de-
tect other vehicles.
∙ Excessive noise (for example, audio
system volume, open vehicle window)
will interfere with the chime sound,
and it may not be heard.
Starting and driving 5-25
BSW DRIVING SITUATIONS
Indicator
on
Indicator
off
Indicator
flashing
Another vehicle approaching
from behind
Illustration 1: The side BSW/RCTA indicator
light illuminates if a vehicle enters the de-
tection zone from behind in an adjacent
lane.
Illustration 2: If the driver activates the
turn signal when another vehicle is in the
detection zone, then the system chimes
(twice) and the side indicator light flashes.
NOTE:
∙ The radar sensors may not detect ve-
hicles which are approaching rapidly
from behind.
∙ If the driver activates the turn signal
before a vehicle enters the detection
zone, the side indicator light will flash
but no chime will sound when the
other vehicle is detected.
Illustration 1 – Approaching from behind
LSD2299
Illustration 2 – Approaching from behind
LSD2300
5-26 Starting and driving
Overtaking another vehicle
Illustration 3: The side indicator light illu-
minates if you overtake a vehicle and that
vehicle stays in the detection zone for ap-
proximately 2 seconds.
Illustration 4: If the driver activates the
turn signal while another vehicle is in the
detection zone, then the system chimes
(twice) and the side indicator light flashes.
NOTE:
∙ When overtaking several vehicles in a
row, the vehicles after the first vehicle
may not be detected if they are trav-
eling close together.
∙ The radar sensors may not detect
slower moving vehicles if they are
passed quickly.
∙ If the driver activates the turn signal
before a vehicle enters the detection
zone, the side indicator light will flash
but no chime will sound when the
other vehicle is detected.
Illustration3–Overtaking another ve-
hicle
LSD2302
Illustration4–Overtaking another ve-
hicle
LSD2303
Starting and driving 5-27
Entering from the side
Illustration 5: The side indicator light illu-
minates if a vehicle enters the detection
zone from either side.
Illustration 6: If the driver activates the
turn signal while another vehicle is in the
detection zone, then the system chimes
(twice) and the side indicator light flashes.
NOTE:
∙ If the driver activates the turn signal
before a vehicle enters the detection
zone, the side indicator light will flash
but no chime will sound when the
other vehicle is detected.
∙ The radar sensors may not detect a
vehicle which is traveling at about the
same speed as your vehicle when it
enters the detection zone.
Illustration 5 – Entering from the side
LSD2305
Illustration 6 – Entering from the side
LSD2308
5-28 Starting and driving
SYSTEM TEMPORARILY
UNAVAILABLE
When radar blockage is detected, the sys-
tem will be deactivated automatically. The
“Side Radar Obstruction” warning message
will appear in the vehicle information dis-
play.
The system is not available until the condi-
tions no longer exist.
The radar sensors may be blocked by tem-
porary ambient conditions such as splash-
ing water, mist or fog. The blocked condi-
tion may also be caused by objects such as
ice, frost or dirt obstructing the radar sen-
sors.
Action to take:
When the above conditions no longer exist,
the system will resume automatically.
Malfunction
If the BSW system malfunctions, it will turn
off automatically. The system malfunction
warning message with the BSW indicator
(orange) will appear in the vehicle informa-
tion display.
LSD3205
Starting and driving 5-29
Action to take:
Stop the vehicle in a safe location, place the
vehicle in the P (Park) position, turn the en-
gine off and restart the engine. If the mes-
sage continues to appear, have the system
checked. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
The two radar sensors
䊊
1
for the BSW and
RCTA systems are located near the rear
bumper. Always keep the area near the ra-
dar sensors clean.
The radar sensors may be blocked by tem-
porary ambient conditions such as splash-
ing water, mist or fog.
The blocked condition may also be caused
by objects such as ice, frost or dirt ob-
structing the radar sensors.
Check for and remove objects obstructing
the area around the radar sensors.
Do not attach stickers (including transpar-
ent material), install accessories or apply
additional paint near the radar sensors.
Do not strike or damage the area around
the radar sensors. It is recommended that
you visit a NISSAN dealer if the area around
the radar sensors is damaged due to a
collision.
Radio frequency statement
For USA
FCC ID: OAYSRR2B or OAYSRR3B
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful in-
terference, and
2. This device must accept any interfer-
ence received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation.
FCC Warning
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority
to operate the equipment.
LSD3090
5-30 Starting and driving
For Canada
Applicable law: Canada 310
This device complies with Industry Canada
licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation
is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference,
and
2. This device must accept any interfer-
ence, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the de-
vice.
Frequency bands: 24.05 – 24.25GHz
Output power: less than 20 milliwatts
Droit applicable: Canada 310
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d’Industrie Canada applicables aux appar-
eils radio exempts de licence. L’exploitation
est autorisée aux deux conditions suiv-
antes:
1. L’appareil ne doit pas produire de
brouillage, et
2. L’utilisateur de l’appareil doit accepter
tout brouillage radioélectrique subi,
même si le brouillage est susceptible
d’en compromettre le fonctionnement.
Bandes de fréquences: 24.05 - 24.25GHz
Puissance émise: Moins de 20 milliwatts
WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and in-
structions for proper use of the RCTA
could result in serious injury or death.
∙ The RCTA system is not a replacement
for proper driving procedures and is
not designed to prevent contact with
vehicles or objects. When backing out
of a parking space, always use the
side and rear mirrors and turn and
look in the direction your vehicle will
move. Never rely solely on the RCTA
system.
The RCTA system will assist you when
backing out from a parking space. When
the vehicle is in reverse, the system is de-
signed to detect other vehicles approach-
ing from the right or left of the vehicle. If the
system detects cross traffic, it will alert you.
REAR CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT (RCTA)
(if so equipped)
Starting and driving 5-31
1. Side BSW/RCTA Indicator Light
RCTA SYSTEM OPERATION
The RCTA system can help alert the driver
of an approaching vehicle when the driver
is backing out of a parking space.
When the shift position is in R (Reverse) and
the vehicle speed is less than approxi-
mately 5 mph (8 km/h), the RCTA system is
operational.
If the radar detects an approaching vehicle
from either side, the system chimes (once)
and the side BSW/RCTA indicator light
flashes on the side the vehicle is approach-
ing from.
LSD3206
5-32 Starting and driving
The RCTA system uses radar sensors
䊊
1
installed on both sides near the rear bum-
per to detect an approaching vehicle.
The radar sensors
䊊
1
can detect an ap-
proaching vehicle from up to approxi-
mately 66 ft. (20 m) away.
LSD2216 LSD3090
Starting and driving 5-33
HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE
RCTA SYSTEM
Perform the following steps to enable or
disable the RCTA system.
1. Press the
button until “Settings”
displays in the vehicle information dis-
play. Use the
button to select
“Driver Assistance.” Then press the OK
button.
2. Select “Parking Aids” and press the OK
button.
3. Select “Rear Cross Traffic Alert” and
press the OK button to turn the system
on or off.
NOTE:
When enabling/disabling the system,
the system setting will be retained even
if the engine is restarted.
LSD3152
5-34 Starting and driving
RCTA SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations
for the RCTA system. Failure to operate
the vehicle in accordance with these
system limitations could result in seri-
ous injury or death.
∙ Always check surroundings and turn
to check what is behind you before
backing up. The radar sensors detect
approaching (moving) vehicles. The
radar sensors cannot detect every
object such as:
– Pedestrians, bicycles, motorcycles,
animals or child-operated toy
vehicles
– A vehicle that is passing at speeds
greater than approximately
19 mph (30 km/h)
– A vehicle that is passing at speeds
lower than approximately 5 mph
(8 km/h)
∙
The radar sensors may not detect ap-
proaching vehicles in certain
situations:
– Illustration
䊊
A
: When a vehicle
parked next to you obstructs the
beam of the radar sensor.
LSD3195
Starting and driving 5-35
– Illustration
䊊
B
: When the vehicle is
parked in an angled parking space.
– Illustration
䊊
C
: When the vehicle is
parked on inclined ground.
– Illustration
䊊
D
: When an approach-
ing vehicle turns into your vehicle’s
parking lot aisle.
– Illustration
䊊
E
: When the angle
formed by your vehicle and ap-
proaching vehicle is small.
∙ The following conditions may reduce
the ability of the radar to detect other
vehicles:
– Severe weather
– Road spray
– Ice/frost/snow/dirt build-up on
the vehicle
∙ Do not attach stickers (including
transparent material), install accesso-
ries or apply additional paint near the
radar sensors. These conditions may
reduce the ability of the radar to de-
tect other vehicles.
∙ Excessive noise (e.g., audio system
volume, open vehicle window) will in-
terfere with the chime sound, and it
may not be heard.
NOTE:
In the case of several vehicles approach-
ing in a row (Illustration 1) or in the oppo-
site direction (Illustration 2), a chime may
not be sounded by the RCTA system af-
ter the first vehicle passes the sensors.
Illustration 1
LSD2043
Illustration 2
LSD2044
5-36 Starting and driving
SYSTEM TEMPORARILY
UNAVAILABLE
When radar blockage is detected, the sys-
tem will be deactivated automatically. The
“Side Radar Obstruction” warning message
will appear in the vehicle information dis-
play.
The systems are not available until the
conditions no longer exist.
The radar sensors may be blocked by tem-
porary ambient conditions such as splash-
ing water, mist or fog.
The blocked condition may also be caused
by objects such as ice, frost or dirt ob-
structing the radar sensors.
Action to take
When the above conditions no longer exist,
the system will resume automatically.
Malfunction
When the RCTA system malfunctions, it will
turn off automatically. The system mal-
function warning message will appear in
the vehicle information display.
LSD3205
Starting and driving 5-37
Action to take
Stop the vehicle in a safe location, place the
vehicle in the P (Park) position, turn the en-
gine off and restart the engine. If the mes-
sage continues to appear, have the system
checked. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
The two radar sensors
䊊
1
for the BSW and
RCTA systems are located near the rear
bumper. Always keep the area near the ra-
dar sensors clean.
The radar sensors may be blocked by tem-
porary ambient conditions such as splash-
ing water, mist or fog.
The blocked condition may also be caused
by objects such as ice, frost or dirt ob-
structing the radar sensors.
Check for and remove objects obstructing
the area around the radar sensors.
Do not attach stickers (including transpar-
ent material), install accessories or apply
additional paint near the radar sensors.
Do not strike or damage the area around
the radar sensors. It is recommended that
you visit a NISSAN dealer if the area around
the radar sensors is damaged due to a
collision.
Radio frequency statement
For USA
FCC ID: OAYSRR2B or OAYSRR3B
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful in-
terference, and
2. This device must accept any interfer-
ence received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation.
FCC Warning
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority
to operate the equipment.
LSD3090
5-38 Starting and driving
For Canada
Applicable law: Canada 310
This device complies with Industry Canada
licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation
is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference,
and
2. This device must accept any interfer-
ence, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the de-
vice.
Frequency bands: 24.05 – 24.25GHz
Output power: less than 20 milliwatts
Droit applicable: Canada 310
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d’Industrie Canada applicables aux appar-
eils radio exempts de licence. L’exploitation
est autorisée aux deux conditions suiv-
antes:
1. L’appareil ne doit pas produire de
brouillage, et
2. L’utilisateur de l’appareil doit accepter
tout brouillage radioélectrique subi,
même si le brouillage est susceptible
d’en compromettre le fonctionnement.
Bandes de fréquences: 24.05 - 24.25GHz
Puissance émise: Moins de 20 milliwatts
䊊
1
RES+ switch
䊊
2
CANCEL switch
䊊
3
SET- switch
䊊
4
CRUISE ON/OFF switch
PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISE
CONTROL
∙ If the cruise control system malfunc-
tions, it cancels automatically.
∙ To properly set the cruise control sys-
tem, use the following procedures.
LSD3131
CRUISE CONTROL
Starting and driving 5-39
WARNING
Do not use the cruise control when driv-
ing under the following conditions:
∙ When it is not possible to keep the
vehicle at a set speed.
∙ In heavy traffic or in traffic that varies
in speed.
∙ On winding or hilly roads.
∙ On slippery roads (rain, snow, ice, etc.).
∙ In very windy areas.
Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle
control and result in an accident.
CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONS
The cruise control allows driving at a speed
between 25 - 89 mph (40 - 144 km/h) with-
out keeping your foot on the accelerator
pedal.
To turn on the cruise control, push the
CRUISE ON/OFF switch. The CRUISE indica-
tor light or
indicator in the instrument
panel comes on.
To set cruising speed, accelerate the ve-
hicle to the desired speed, push the SET–
switch and release it. The SET indicator
light or
indicator in the instrument
panel comes on. Take your foot off the ac-
celerator pedal. Your vehicle maintains the
set speed.
∙ To pass another vehicle, depress the
accelerator pedal. When you release the
pedal, the vehicle returns to the previ-
ously set speed.
∙ The vehicle may not maintain the set
speed when going up or down steep
hills. If this happens, drive without the
cruise control.
To cancel the preset speed, use one of the
following three methods:
∙ Push the CANCEL switch; the CRUISE
indicator light or
indicator in the
instrument panel goes out.
∙ Tap the brake pedal; the CRUISE indica-
tor light or
indicator goes out.
∙ Push the CRUISE ON/OFF switch. The
CRUISE indicator light or
indicator
in the instrument panel goes out.
The cruise control is automatically can-
celed and the CRUISE indicator light
or
indicator in the instrument panel
goes out if:
∙ You depress the brake pedal while
pushing the RES+ or SET– switch. The
preset speed is deleted from memory.
∙ The vehicle slows down more than
8 mph (13 km/h) below the set speed.
∙ You move the shift lever to N (Neutral).
To reset at a faster cruising speed, use
one of the following three methods:
∙ Depress the accelerator pedal. When
the vehicle attains the desired speed,
push and release the SET– switch.
∙ Push and hold the RES+ switch. When
the vehicle attains the speed you desire,
release the switch.
∙ Push and release the RES+ switch. Each
time you do this, the set speed in-
creases by about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
5-40 Starting and driving
To reset at a slower cruising speed, use
one of the following three methods:
∙ Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the
vehicle attains the desired speed, push
the SET– switch and release it.
∙ Push and hold the SET– switch. Release
the switch when the vehicle slows to
the desired speed.
∙ Push and release the SET– switch. Each
time you do this, the set speed de-
creases by about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
To resume the preset speed, push and
release the RES+ switch. The vehicle re-
turns to the last set cruising speed when
the vehicle speed is over 25 mph (40 km/h).
WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and in-
structions for proper use of the AEB
system could result in serious injury or
death.
∙ The AEB system is a supplemental aid
to the driver. It is not a replacement
for the driver’s attention to traffic
conditions or responsibility to drive
safely. It cannot prevent accidents
due to carelessness or dangerous
driving techniques.
∙ The AEB system does not function in
all driving, traffic, weather and road
conditions.
The AEB system can assist the driver when
there is a risk of a forward collision with the
vehicle ahead in the traveling lane.
The AEB system uses a radar sensor
䊊
A
located on the front of the vehicle to mea-
sure the distance to the vehicle ahead in
the same lane.
LSD2710
AUTOMATIC EMERGENCY BRAKING
(AEB) (if so equipped)
Starting and driving 5-41
LSD3155 LSD3154
5-42 Starting and driving
1. Vehicle ahead detection indicator (if so
equipped)
2. AEB emergency warning indicator (if so
equipped)
3. AEB system warning light
AEB SYSTEM OPERATION
The AEB system will function when your
vehicle is driven at speeds above approxi-
mately 3 mph (5 km/h).
If a risk of a forward collision is detected,
the AEB system will provide an initial warn-
ing to the driver by both a visual (if so
equipped) and audible alert.
If the driver applies the brakes quickly and
forcefully after the warning, and the AEB
system detects that there is still the possi-
bility of a forward collision, the system will
automatically increase the braking force. If
the driver does not take action, the AEB
system issues the second visual warning
(red) (if so equipped) and audible warning
and also applies partial braking.
If the risk of a collision becomes imminent,
the AEB system applies harder braking au-
tomatically.
NOTE:
The vehicle’s brake lights come on when
braking is performed by the AEB system.
Depending on vehicle speed and distance
to the vehicle ahead, as well as driving and
roadway conditions, the system may help
the driver avoid a forward collision or may
help mitigate the consequences of a colli-
sion, should one be unavoidable. If the
driver is handling the steering wheel, accel-
erating or braking, the AEB system will
function later or will not function.
The automatic braking will cease under the
following conditions:
∙ When the steering wheel is turned as far
as necessary to avoid a collision.
∙ When the accelerator pedal is de-
pressed.
∙ When there is no longer a vehicle de-
tected ahead.
If the AEB system has stopped the vehicle,
the vehicle will remain at a standstill for
approximately 2 seconds before the
brakes are released.
Starting and driving 5-43
LSD3146 LSD3147
5-44 Starting and driving
TURNING THE AEB SYSTEM
ON/OFF
Perform the following steps to turn the AEB
system on or off in the vehicle information
display (if so equipped).
1. Press the
button until “Settings”
displays in the vehicle information dis-
play. Use the
button to select
“Driver Assistance.” Then press the OK
button.
2. Select “Emergency Brake” and press
the OK button.
3. Select “System” and press the OK but-
ton.
Perform the following steps to turn the AEB
system on or off using the Automatic
Emergency Braking (AEB) switch (if so
equipped) for models with a trip computer.
1. Push the AEB switch to turn the AEB
system on and the switch illuminates.
2. Push the AEB switch again to turn the
AEB system off.
When the AEB system is turned off, the AEB
system warning light illuminates.
NOTE:
The AEB system will be automatically
turned on when the engine is restarted.
AEB SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations
for the AEB system. Failure to operate
the vehicle in accordance with these
system limitations could result in seri-
ous injury or death.
∙ The AEB system cannot detect all ve-
hicles under all conditions.
∙ The radar sensor does not detect the
following objects:
– Pedestrians, animals or obstacles
in the roadway.
– Oncoming vehicles.
– Crossing vehicles.
∙ The radar sensor has some perfor-
mance limitations. If a stationary ve-
hicle is in the vehicle’s path, the AEB
system will not function when the ve-
hicle is driven at speeds over approxi-
mately 50 mph (80 km/h).
∙ The radar sensor may not detect a ve-
hicle ahead in the following
conditions:
– Dirt, ice, snow or other material
covering the radar sensor.
– Interference by other radar
sources.
– Snow or road spray from traveling
vehicles.
– If the vehicle ahead is narrow (e.g.,
motorcycle).
– When driving on a steep downhill
slope or roads with sharp curves.
∙ In some road or traffic conditions, the
AEB system may unexpectedly apply
partial braking. When acceleration is
necessary, continue to depress the
accelerator pedal to override the
system.
∙ Braking distances increase on slip-
pery surfaces.
Starting and driving 5-45
∙ The system is designed to automati-
cally check the sensor’s functionality,
within certain limitations. The system
may not detect some forms of ob-
structions of the sensor area such as
ice, snow, stickers, etc. In these cases,
the system may not be able to warn
the driver properly. Be sure that you
check, clean and clear the sensor area
regularly.
∙ Excessive noise will interfere with the
warning chime sound, and the chime
may not be heard.
LSD3148
5-46 Starting and driving
SYSTEM TEMPORARILY
UNAVAILABLE
Condition A
When the radar sensor picks up interfer-
ence from another radar source, making it
impossible to detect a vehicle ahead, the
AEB system is automatically turned off.
The AEB system warning light (orange) will
illuminate.
Action to take
When the above conditions no longer exist,
the AEB system will resume automatically.
Condition B
When the sensor area of the front bumper
is covered with dirt or is obstructed, mak-
ing it impossible to detect a vehicle ahead,
the AEB system is automatically turned off.
The AEB system warning light (orange) will
illuminate and the “Front Radar Obstruc-
tion” warning message will appear in the
vehicle information display.
LSD3153
Starting and driving 5-47
Action to take
If the warning light (orange) comes on, stop
the vehicle in a safe place, place the shift
lever in the P (Park) position and turn the
engine off. Clean the radar cover on the
lower grille with a soft cloth, and restart the
engine. If the warning light continues to
illuminate, have the AEB system checked. It
is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
SYSTEM MALFUNCTION
If the AEB system malfunctions, it will be
turned off automatically, a chime will
sound, the AEB warning light (orange) will
illuminate and the warning message [Mal-
function] will appear in the vehicle informa-
tion display.
Action to take
If the warning light (orange) comes on, stop
the vehicle in a safe location, turn the en-
gine off and restart the engine. If the warn-
ing light continues to illuminate, have the
AEB system checked. It is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this ser-
vice.
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
The sensor
䊊
A
is located on the front of the
vehicle.
To keep the system operating properly, be
sure to observe the following:
∙ Always keep the sensor area of the front
bumper clean.
∙ Do not strike or damage the areas
around the sensor.
∙ Do not cover or attach stickers or simi-
lar objects on the front bumper near
the sensor area. This could cause failure
or malfunction.
∙ Do not attach metallic objects near the
sensor area (brush guard, etc.). This
could cause failure or malfunction.
∙ Do not alter, remove or paint the front
bumper. Before customizing or restor-
ing the front bumper, it is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer.
FCC Notice
For USA
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful in-
terference, and
2. This device must accept any interfer-
ence received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation.
FCC Warning
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority
to operate the equipment.
LSD2710
5-48 Starting and driving
This equipment has been tested and found
to comply with the limits for a Class A digi-
tal device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC
Rules. These limits are designed to provide
reasonable protection against harmful in-
terference when the equipment is oper-
ated in a commercial environment. This
equipment generates, uses, and can radi-
ate radio frequency energy and, if not in-
stalled and used in accordance with the
instruction manual, may cause harmful in-
terference to radio communications. Op-
eration of this equipment in a residential
area is likely to cause harmful interference
in which case the user will be required to
correct the interference at his own ex-
pense.
Radio Frequency Radiation Exposure Infor-
mation:
This equipment complies with FCC radia-
tion exposure limits set forth for an uncon-
trolled environment. This equipment
should be installed and operated with
minimum distance of 20 cm between the
radiator and your body.
The transmitter must not be co-located or
operating in conjunction with any other an-
tenna or transmitter.
For Canada
This device complies with Industry Canada
license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation
is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device must not cause interfer-
ence,
2. This device must accept any interfer-
ence, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the de-
vice.
L’exploitation est autorisée aux deux condi-
tions suivantes:
1. l’appareil ne doit pas produire de brouil-
lage,
et
2. l’utilisateur de l’appareil doit accepter
tout brouillage radioélectrique subi,
même si le brouillage est susceptible
d’en compromettre le fonctionnne-
ment.
CAUTION
During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km),
follow these recommendations to ob-
tain maximum engine performance
and ensure the future reliability and
economy of your new vehicle. Failure to
follow these recommendations may re-
sult in shortened engine life and re-
duced engine performance.
∙ Avoid driving for long periods at con-
stant speed, either fast or slow, and do
not run the engine over 4,000 rpm.
∙ Do not accelerate at full throttle in any
gear.
∙ Avoid quick starts.
∙ Avoid hard braking as much as pos-
sible.
BREAK-IN SCHEDULE
Starting and driving 5-49
Follow these easy-to-use Fuel Efficient
Driving Tips to help you achieve the most
fuel economy from your vehicle.
1. Use Smooth Accelerator and Brake
Pedal Application
∙ Avoid rapid starts and stops.
∙ Use smooth, gentle accelerator and
brake application whenever possible.
∙ Maintain constant speed while com-
muting and coast whenever pos-
sible.
2. Maintain Constant Speed
∙ Look ahead to try and anticipate and
minimize stops.
∙ Synchronizing your speed with traffic
lights allows you to reduce your num-
ber of stops.
∙ Maintaining a steady speed can mini-
mize red light stops and improve fuel
efficiency.
3. Use Air Conditioning (A/C) at Higher
Vehicle Speeds
∙ Below 40 mph (64 km/h), it is more
efficient to open windows to cool the
vehicle due to reduced engine load.
∙ Above 40 mph (64 km/h), it is more
efficient to use A/C to cool the vehicle
due to increased aerodynamic drag.
∙ Recirculating the cool air in the cabin
when the A/C is on reduces cooling
load.
4. Drive at Economical Speeds and Dis-
tances
∙ Observing the speed limit and not
exceeding 60 mph (97 km/h) (where
legally allowed) can improve fuel effi-
ciency due to reduced aerodynamic
drag.
∙ Maintaining a safe following distance
behind other vehicles reduces un-
necessary braking.
∙ Safely monitoring traffic to anticipate
changes in speed permits reduced
braking and smooth acceleration
changes.
∙ Select a gear range suitable to road
conditions.
5. Use Cruise Control
∙ Using cruise control during highway
driving helps maintain a steady
speed.
∙ Cruise control is particularly effective
in providing fuel savings when driving
on flat terrains.
6. Plan for the Shortest Route
∙ Utilize a map or navigation system to
determine the best route to save
time.
7. Avoid Idling
∙ Shutting off your engine when safe
for stops exceeding 30–60 seconds
saves fuel and reduces emissions.
8.
Buy an Automated Pass for Toll Roads
∙ Automated passes permit drivers to
use special lanes to maintain cruis-
ing speed through the toll and avoid
stopping and starting.
9. Winter Warm Up
∙ Limit idling time to minimize impact
to fuel economy.
∙ Vehicles typically need no more than
30 seconds of idling at start-up to
effectively circulate the engine oil be-
fore driving.
∙ Your vehicle will reach its ideal oper-
ating temperature more quickly
while driving versus idling.
FUEL EFFICIENT DRIVING TIPS
5-50 Starting and driving
10. Keeping your Vehicle Cool
∙ Park your vehicle in a covered parking
area or in the shade whenever pos-
sible.
∙ When entering a hot vehicle, opening
the windows will help to reduce the
inside temperature faster, resulting in
reduced demand on your A/C sys-
tem.
∙ Keep your engine tuned up.
∙ Follow the recommended scheduled
maintenance.
∙ Keep the tires inflated to the correct
pressure. Low tire pressure increases
tire wear and lowers fuel economy.
∙ Keep the wheels in correct alignment.
Improper alignment increases tire wear
and lowers fuel economy.
∙ Use the recommended viscosity engine
oil. For additional information, refer to
“Engine oil and oil filter recommenda-
tions” in the “Technical and consumer
information” section of this manual.
INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY
Starting and driving 5-51
WARNING
∙ Do not stop or park the vehicle over
flammable materials such as dry
grass, waste paper or rags. They may
ignite and cause a fire.
∙ Safe parking procedures require that
both the parking brake be set and the
transmission placed in P (Park). Fail-
ure to do so could cause the vehicle to
move unexpectedly or roll away and
result in an accident. Make sure the
shift lever has been pushed as far for-
ward as it can go and cannot be
moved without depressing the foot
brake pedal.
∙ Never leave the engine running while
the vehicle is unattended.
∙ To help avoid risk of injury or death
through unintended operation of the
vehicle and/or its systems, do not
leave children, people who require the
assistance of others or pets unat-
tended in your vehicle. Additionally,
the temperature inside a closed ve-
hicle on a warm day can quickly be-
come high enough to cause a signifi-
cant risk of injury or death to people
and pets.
1. Firmly apply the parking brake.
2. Move the shift lever into the P (Park)
position.
3. To help prevent the vehicle from rolling
into traffic when parked on an incline, it
is a good practice to turn the wheels as
illustrated.
∙ HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB
䊊
1
:
Turn the wheels into the curb and
move the vehicle forward until the curb
side wheel gently touches the curb.
∙ HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB
䊊
2
:
Turn the wheels away from the curb
and move the vehicle back until the
curb side wheel gently touches the
curb.
SSD0488
PARKING/PARKING ON HILLS
5-52 Starting and driving
∙ HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL, NO
CURB
䊊
3
:
Turn the wheels toward the side of the
road so the vehicle will move away
from the center of the road if it moves.
4. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK
position and remove the key.
WARNING
∙ If the engine is not running or is
turned off while driving, the power as-
sist for the steering will not work.
Steering will be harder to operate.
∙ When the power steering warning
light illuminates with the engine run-
ning, there will be no power assist for
the steering. You will still have control
of the vehicle but the steering will be
harder to operate. Have the power
steering system checked. It is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
for this service.
The power steering system is designed to
provide power assist while driving to oper-
ate the steering wheel with light force.
When the steering wheel is operated re-
peatedly or continuously while parking or
driving at a very low speed, the power as-
sist for the steering wheel will be reduced.
This is to prevent overheating of the power
steering system and protect it from getting
damaged. While the power assist is re-
duced, steering wheel operation will be-
come heavy. When the temperature of the
power steering system goes down, the
power assist level will return to normal.
Avoid repeating such steering wheel op-
erations that could cause the power steer-
ing system to overheat.
You may hear a sound when the steering
wheel is operated quickly. However, this is
not a malfunction.
If the power steering warning light illumi-
nates while the engine is running, it may
indicate the power steering system is not
functioning properly and may need servic-
ing. Have the power steering system
checked. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.
When the power steering warning light illu-
minates with the engine running, there will
be no power assist for the steering but you
will still have control of the vehicle. At this
time, greater steering effort is required to
operate the steering wheel, especially in
sharp turns and at low speeds.
For additional information, refer to “Power
steering warning light” in the “Instruments
and controls” section of this manual.
POWER STEERING
Starting and driving 5-53
The brake system has two separate hy-
draulic circuits. If one circuit malfunctions,
you will still have braking at two wheels.
BRAKE PRECAUTIONS
Vacuum assisted brakes
The brake booster aids braking by using
engine vacuum. If the engine stops, you
can stop the vehicle by depressing the
brake pedal. However, greater foot pres-
sure on the brake pedal will be required to
stop the vehicle and stopping distance will
be longer.
Using the brakes
Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedal
while driving. This will overheat the brakes,
wear out the brake pads faster, and reduce
gas mileage.
To help reduce brake wear and to prevent
the brakes from overheating, reduce speed
and downshift to a lower gear before going
down a slope or long grade. Overheated
brakes may reduce braking performance
and could result in loss of vehicle control.
WARNING
∙ While driving on a slippery surface, be
careful when braking, accelerating or
downshifting. Abrupt braking or ac-
celerating could cause the wheels to
skid and result in an accident.
∙ If the engine is not running or is
turned off while driving, the power as-
sist for the brakes will not work. Brak-
ing will be harder.
Wet brakes
When the vehicle is washed or driven
through water, the brakes may get wet. As
a result, your braking distance will be lon-
ger and the vehicle may pull to one side
during braking.
To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe
speed while lightly pressing the brake
pedal to heat up the brakes. Do this until
the brakes return to normal. Avoid driving
the vehicle at high speeds until the brakes
function correctly.
Parking brake break-in
Break in the parking brake shoes whenever
the stopping effect of the parking brake is
weakened or whenever the parking brake
shoes and/or drums/rotors are replaced,
in order to assure the best braking perfor-
mance.
This procedure is described in the vehicle
service manual. It is recommended that
you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM (ABS)
WARNING
∙ The ABS is a sophisticated device, but
it cannot prevent accidents resulting
from careless or dangerous driving
techniques. It can help maintain ve-
hicle control during braking on slip-
pery surfaces. Remember that stop-
ping distances on slippery surfaces
will be longer than on normal sur-
faces even with ABS. Stopping dis-
tances may also be longer on rough,
gravel or snow covered roads, or if you
are using tire chains. Always maintain
a safe distance from the vehicle in
front of you. Ultimately, the driver is
responsible for safety.
∙ Tire type and condition may also af-
fect braking effectiveness.
BRAKE SYSTEM
5-54 Starting and driving
– When replacing tires, install the
specified size of tires on all four
wheels.
– When installing a spare tire, make
sure that it is the proper size and
type as specified on the Tire and
Loading Information label. For ad-
ditional information, refer to “Tire
and Loading Information label” in
the “Technical and consumer infor-
mation” section of this manual.
– For additional information, refer to
“Wheels and tires” in the “Do-it-
yourself” section of this manual.
The ABS controls the brakes so the wheels
do not lock during hard braking or when
braking on slippery surfaces. The system
detects the rotation speed at each wheel
and varies the brake fluid pressure to pre-
vent each wheel from locking and sliding.
By preventing each wheel from locking, the
system helps the driver maintain steering
control and helps to minimize swerving
and spinning on slippery surfaces.
Using the system
Depress the brake pedal and hold it down.
Depress the brake pedal with firm steady
pressure, but do not pump the brakes. The
Anti-lock Braking System will operate to
prevent the wheels from locking up. Steer
the vehicle to avoid obstacles.
WARNING
Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing so
may result in increased stopping
distances.
Self-test feature
The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) in-
cludes electronic sensors, electric pumps,
hydraulic solenoids and a computer. The
computer has a built-in diagnostic feature
that tests the system each time you start
the engine and move the vehicle at a low
speed in forward or reverse. When the self-
test occurs, you may hear a “clunk” noise
and/or feel a pulsation in the brake pedal.
This is normal and does not indicate a mal-
function. If the computer senses a mal-
function, it switches the ABS off and illumi-
nates the ABS warning light on the
instrument panel. The brake system then
operates normally but without anti-lock
assistance.
If the ABS warning light illuminates during
the self-test or while driving, have the ve-
hicle checked. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Normal operation
The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) oper-
ates at speeds above3-6mph(5-
10 km/h). The speed varies according to
road conditions.
When the ABS senses that one or more
wheels are close to locking up, the actuator
rapidly applies and releases hydraulic pres-
sure. This action is similar to pumping the
brakes very quickly. You may feel a pulsa-
tion in the brake pedal and hear a noise
from under the hood or feel a vibration
from the actuator when it is operating. This
is normal and indicates that the ABS is op-
erating properly. However, the pulsation
may indicate that road conditions are haz-
ardous and extra care is required while
driving.
BRAKE ASSIST
When the force applied to the brake pedal
exceeds a certain level, the Brake Assist is
activated generating greater braking force
than a conventional brake booster even
with light pedal force.
Starting and driving 5-55
WARNING
The Brake Assist is only an aid to assist
braking operation and is not a collision
warning or avoidance device. It is the
driver’s responsibility to stay alert, drive
safely and be in control of the vehicle at
all times.
The VDC system uses various sensors to
monitor driver inputs and vehicle motion.
Under certain driving conditions, the VDC
system helps to perform the following
functions:
∙ Controls brake pressure to reduce
wheel slip on one slipping drive wheel
so power is transferred to a non-
slipping drive wheel on the same axle.
∙ Controls brake pressure and engine
output to reduce drive wheel slip based
on vehicle speed (traction control func-
tion).
∙ Controls brake pressure at individual
wheels and engine output to help the
driver maintain control of the vehicle in
the following conditions:
– Understeer (vehicle tends to not fol-
low the steered path despite in-
creased steering input)
– Oversteer (vehicle tends to spin due
to certain road or driving conditions)
The VDC system can help the driver to
maintain control of the vehicle, but it can-
not prevent loss of vehicle control in all driv-
ing situations.
When the VDC system operates, the
indicator in the instrument panel flashes
so note the following:
∙ The road may be slippery or the system
may determine some action is required
to help keep the vehicle on the steered
path.
∙ You may feel a pulsation in the brake
pedal and hear a noise or vibration from
under the hood. This is normal and indi-
cates that the VDC system is working
properly.
∙ Adjust your speed and driving to the
road conditions.
For additional information, refer to “Slip in-
dicator light” and ”Vehicle Dynamic Control
(VDC) OFF indicator light” in the ”Instru-
ments and controls” section of this manual.
If a malfunction occurs in the system,
the
indicator light comes on in the
instrument panel. The VDC system auto-
matically turns off when these indicator
lights are on.
The VDC OFF switch is used to turn off the
VDC system. The
indicator and the
Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) sys-
tem warning light illuminate to indicate the
VDC system is off.
VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)
SYSTEM
5-56 Starting and driving
When the VDC switch is used to turn off the
system, the VDC system still operates to
prevent one drive wheel from slipping by
transferring power to a non-slipping drive
wheel. The
indicator flashes if this oc-
curs. All other VDC functions are off and
the
indicator will not flash.
The VDC system is automatically reset to
on when the ignition switch is placed in the
OFF position then back to the ON position.
The computer has a built-in diagnostic fea-
ture that tests the system each time you
start the engine and move the vehicle for-
ward or in reverse at a slow speed. When
the self-test occurs, you may hear a clunk
noise and/or feel a pulsation in the brake
pedal. This is normal and is not an indica-
tion of a malfunction.
WARNING
∙ The VDC system is designed to help
the driver maintain stability but does
not prevent accidents due to abrupt
steering operation at high speeds or
by careless or dangerous driving
techniques. Reduce vehicle speed and
be especially careful when driving and
cornering on slippery surfaces and al-
ways drive carefully.
∙ Do not modify the vehicle’s suspen-
sion. If suspension parts such as
shock absorbers, struts, springs, sta-
bilizer bars, bushings and wheels are
not NISSAN recommended for your
vehicle or are extremely deteriorated,
the VDC system may not operate
properly. This could adversely affect
vehicle handling performance, and
the
indicator light may flash or
illuminate.
∙ If brake related parts such as brake
pads, rotors and calipers are not
NISSAN recommended or are ex-
tremely deteriorated, the VDC system
may not operate properly and
the
indicator light may
illuminate.
∙ If engine control related parts are not
NISSAN recommended or are ex-
tremely deteriorated, the
indi-
cator light may illuminate.
∙ When driving on extremely inclined
surfaces such as higher banked cor-
ners, the VDC system may not operate
properly and the
indicator light
may flash or illuminate. Do not drive
on these types of roads.
∙ When driving on an unstable surface
such as a turntable, ferry, elevator or
ramp, the
indicator light may
flash or illuminate. This is not a mal-
function. Restart the engine after
driving onto a stable surface.
∙ If wheels or tires other than the
NISSAN recommended ones are used,
the VDC system may not operate
properly and the
indicator light
may flash or illuminate.
∙ The VDC system is not a substitute for
winter tires or tire chains on a snow
covered road.
BRAKE FORCE DISTRIBUTION
During braking while driving through turns,
the system optimizes the distribution of
force to each of the front and rear wheels
depending on the radius of the turn.
Starting and driving 5-57
WARNING
∙ The VDC system is designed to help
the driver maintain stability but does
not prevent accidents due to abrupt
steering operation at high speeds or
by careless or dangerous driving
techniques. Reduce vehicle speed and
be especially careful when driving and
cornering on slippery surfaces and al-
ways drive carefully.
∙ Do not modify the vehicle’s suspen-
sion. If suspension parts such as
shock absorbers, struts, springs, sta-
bilizer bars, bushings and wheels are
not NISSAN recommended for your
vehicle or are extremely deteriorated,
the VDC system may not operate
properly. This could adversely affect
vehicle handling performance, and
the
indicator light may flash or
illuminate.
∙ If brake related parts such as brake
pads, rotors and calipers are not
NISSAN recommended or are ex-
tremely deteriorated, the VDC system
may not operate properly and
the
indicator light may
illuminate.
∙ If engine control related parts are not
NISSAN recommended or are ex-
tremely deteriorated, the
indi-
cator light may illuminate.
∙ When driving on extremely inclined
surfaces such as higher banked cor-
ners, the VDC system may not operate
properly and the
indicator light
may flash or illuminate. Do not drive
on these types of roads.
∙ When driving on an unstable surface
such as a turntable, ferry, elevator or
ramp, the
indicator light may
flash or illuminate. This is not a mal-
function. Restart the engine after
driving onto a stable surface.
∙ If wheels or tires other than the
NISSAN recommended ones are used,
the VDC system may not operate
properly and the
indicator light
may flash or illuminate.
∙ The VDC system is not a substitute for
winter tires or tire chains on a snow
covered road.
5-58 Starting and driving
The chassis control is an electric control
module that includes the following func-
tions:
∙ Intelligent Trace Control
∙ Intelligent Engine Brake
∙ Active Ride Control
INTELLIGENT TRACE CONTROL
(I-TC)
This system senses driving based on the
driver’s steering and acceleration/braking
patterns, and controls brake pressure at
individual wheels to aid tracing at corners
and help smooth vehicle response.
The I–TC can be set to ON (enabled) or OFF
(disabled) through the vehicle information
display “Chassis Control” page. For addi-
tional information, refer to “Vehicle infor-
mation display” in the “Instruments and
controls” section of this manual.
When the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)
OFF switch is used to turn off the VDC sys-
tem, the I–TC is also turned off.
When the I–TC is operated and the Chassis
Control mode is selected in the vehicle in-
formation display, the I–TC graphics are
shown in the vehicle information display.
For additional information, refer to “Vehicle
information display” in the “Instruments
and controls” section of this manual.
WARNING
The I–TC may not be effective depend-
ing on the driving condition. Always
drive carefully and attentively.
When the I–TC is operating, you may feel a
pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a
noise. This is normal and indicates that the
I–TC is operating properly.
Even if the I–TC is set to OFF, some func-
tions will remain on to assist the driver (for
example, avoidance scenes).
INTELLIGENT ENGINE BRAKE (I-EB)
The I-EB function adds subtle deceleration
by controlling the Continuously Variable
Transmission gear ratio, depending on the
cornering condition calculated from driv-
er’s steering input and plural sensors. This
benefit is for easier traceability and less
workload of adjusting speed with braking
at corners.
The I-EB also adds subtle deceleration with
gear ratio control according to driver’s
brake pedal operation.
LSD2185
CHASSIS CONTROL (if so equipped)
Starting and driving 5-59
The I-EB can be set to ON (enabled) or OFF
(disabled) through the vehicle information
display “Chassis Control” page. For addi-
tional information, refer to “Vehicle infor-
mation display” in the “Instruments and
controls” section of this manual.
When the I-EB is operated at corners and
the Chassis Control mode is selected in the
vehicle information display, the I-EB graph-
ics are shown in the vehicle information
display. For additional information, refer to
“Vehicle information display” in the “Instru-
ments and controls” section of this manual.
WARNING
The I-EB may not be effective depend-
ing on driving conditions. Always drive
carefully and attentively.
When the I-EB is operating, the needle of
the tachometer will rise up and you may
hear an engine noise. This is normal and
indicates that the I-EB is operating prop-
erly.
ACTIVE RIDE CONTROL (ARC)
This system senses upper body motion
based on wheel speed information and
controls four wheel brake pressure to en-
hance ride comfort in effort to restrain un-
comfortable upper body movement. This
system comes into effect above 25 mph
(40 km/h). When the VDC OFF switch is
used to turn off the VDC system, the ARC is
also turned off.
When the brake control of the ARC is oper-
ated and the Chassis Control mode is se-
lected in the vehicle information display,
the ARC graphics are shown in the vehicle
information display. For additional infor-
mation, refer to “Vehicle information dis-
play” in the “Instruments and controls” sec-
tion of this manual.
When the ARC is operating, you may hear
noise and sense slight deceleration. This is
normal and indicates that the ARC is oper-
ating properly.
WARNING
∙ Never rely solely on the hill start assist
system to prevent the vehicle from
moving backward on a hill. Always
drive carefully and attentively. De-
press the brake pedal when the ve-
hicle is stopped on a steep hill. Be es-
pecially careful when stopped on a hill
on frozen or muddy roads. Failure to
prevent the vehicle from rolling back-
wards may result in a loss of control of
the vehicle and possible serious injury
or death.
∙ The hill start assist system is not de-
signed to hold the vehicle at a stand-
still on a hill. Depress the brake pedal
when the vehicle is stopped on a
steep hill. Failure to do so may cause
the vehicle to roll backwards and may
result in a collision or serious personal
injury.
∙ The hill start assist may not prevent
the vehicle from rolling backwards on
a hill under all load or road conditions.
Always be prepared to depress the
brake pedal to prevent the vehicle
from rolling backwards. Failure to do
so may result in a collision or serious
personal injury.
HILL START ASSIST SYSTEM
5-60 Starting and driving
The hill start assist system automatically
keeps the brakes applied to help prevent
the vehicle from rolling backwards in the
time it takes the driver to release the brake
pedal and apply the accelerator when the
vehicle is stopped on a hill.
The hill start assist system will operate au-
tomatically under the following conditions:
∙ The transmission is shifted to a forward
or reverse gear.
∙ The vehicle is stopped completely on a
hill by applying the brake.
The maximum holding time is 2 seconds.
After 2 seconds the vehicle will begin to roll
back and the hill start assist system will
stop operating completely.
The hill start assist system will not operate
when the transmission is shifted to the N
(Neutral) or P (Park) position or on a flat and
level road.
When the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)
indicator light illuminates in the meter, the
hill start assist system will not operate. For
additional information, refer to “Vehicle Dy-
namic Control (VDC) indicator light” in the
“Instruments and controls” section of this
manual.
FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCK
To prevent a door lock from freezing, apply
de-icer through the key hole. If the lock
becomes frozen, heat the key before in-
serting it into the key hole or use the re-
mote keyless entry function on the Intelli-
gent Key.
ANTIFREEZE
In the winter when it is anticipated that the
temperature will drop below 32°F (0°C),
check the antifreeze to assure proper win-
ter protection. For additional information,
refer to “Engine cooling system” in the “Do-
it-yourself” section of this manual.
BATTERY
If the battery is not fully charged during
extremely cold weather conditions, the
battery fluid may freeze and damage the
battery. To maintain maximum efficiency,
the battery should be checked regularly.
For additional information, refer to “Battery”
in the “Do-it-yourself” section of this
manual.
DRAINING OF COOLANT WATER
If the vehicle is to be left outside without
anti-freeze, drain the cooling system, in-
cluding the engine block. Refill before oper-
ating the vehicle. For additional informa-
tion, refer to “Changing engine coolant” in
the “Do-it-yourself” section of this manual.
TIRE EQUIPMENT
1. SUMMER tires have a tread designed to
provide superior performance on dry
pavement. However, the performance
of these tires will be substantially re-
duced in snowy and icy conditions. If
you operate your vehicle on snowy or
icy roads, NISSAN recommends the use
of MUD & SNOW or ALL SEASON TIRES
on all four wheels. It is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for the tire
type, size, speed rating and availability
information.
2. For additional traction on icy roads,
studded tires may be used. However,
some states, provinces and territories
prohibit their use. Check local laws be-
fore installing studded tires.
COLD WEATHER DRIVING
Starting and driving 5-61
Skid and traction capabilities of studded
snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may be
poorer than that of non-studded snow
tires.
SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT
It is recommended that the following items
be carried in the vehicle during winter:
∙ A scraper and stiff-bristled brush to re-
move ice and snow from the windows
and wiper blades.
∙ A sturdy, flat board to be placed under
the jack to give it firm support.
∙ A shovel to dig the vehicle out of snow-
drifts.
∙ Extra washer fluid to refill the
windshield-washer fluid reservoir.
DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE
WARNING
∙ Wet ice (32°F, 0°C and freezing rain),
very cold snow or ice can be slick and
very hard to drive on. The vehicle will
have much less traction or “grip” un-
der these conditions. Try to avoid driv-
ing on wet ice until the road is salted
or sanded.
∙ Whatever the condition, drive with
caution. Accelerate and slow down
with care. If accelerating or down-
shifting too fast, the drive wheels will
lose even more traction.
∙ Allow more stopping distance under
these conditions. Braking should be
started sooner than on dry pavement.
∙ Allow greater following distances on
slippery roads.
∙ Watch for slippery spots (glare ice).
These may appear on an otherwise
clear road in shaded areas. If a patch
of ice is seen ahead, brake before
reaching it. Try not to brake while on
the ice, and avoid any sudden steering
maneuvers.
∙ Do not use the cruise control on slip-
pery roads.
∙ Snow can trap dangerous exhaust
gases under your vehicle. Keep snow
clear of the exhaust pipe and from
around your vehicle.
PARKING BRAKE
When parking in an area where the outside
temperature is below 32°F (0°C), do not ap-
ply the parking brake to prevent it from
freezing. For safe parking:
∙ Place the shift lever in the P (Park) posi-
tion.
∙ Securely block the wheels.
5-62 Starting and driving
6 In case of emergency
Hazard warning flasher switch ..................6-2
Emergency engine shut off
(push-button ignition models only) ..............6-2
Flat tire ..........................................6-3
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)........................................6-3
Changing a flat tire ...........................6-3
Jump starting ...................................6-9
Push starting ....................................6-11
If your vehicle overheats .........................6-11
Towing your vehicle ............................6-12
Towing recommended by NISSAN ...........6-12
Vehicle recovery
(freeing a stuck vehicle)......................6-13
Push the switch on to warn other drivers
when you must stop or park under emer-
gency conditions. All turn signal lights flash.
WARNING
∙ If stopping for an emergency, be sure
to move the vehicle well off the road.
∙ Do not use the hazard warning flash-
ers while moving on the highway un-
less unusual circumstances force you
to drive so slowly that your vehicle
might become a hazard to other
traffic.
∙ Turn signals do not work when the
hazard warning flasher lights are on.
The flashers will operate with the ignition
switch placed in any position.
Some jurisdictions may prohibit the use
of the hazard warning flasher switch
while driving.
To shut off the engine in an emergency
situation while driving, perform the follow-
ing procedure:
∙ Rapidly push the push-button ignition
switch three consecutive times in less
than 1.5 seconds, or
∙ Push and hold the push-button ignition
switch for more than 2 seconds.
LIC0394
HAZARD WARNING FLASHER SWITCH EMERGENCY ENGINE SHUT OFF
(push-button ignition models only)
6-2 In case of emergency
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM (TPMS)
This vehicle is equipped with the TPMS. It
monitors tire pressure of all tires except the
spare. When the low tire pressure warning
light is lit and the “Tire Pressure Low — Add
Air” warning appears in the vehicle infor-
mation display, one or more of your tires is
significantly under-inflated. If the vehicle is
being driven with low tire pressure, the
TPMS will activate and warn you of it by the
low tire pressure warning light. This system
will activate only when the vehicle is driven
at speeds above 16 mph (25 km/h). For ad-
ditional information, refer to “Warning
lights, indicator lights and audible remind-
ers” in the “Instruments and controls” sec-
tion, and “Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)” in the “Starting and driving” section
of this manual.
WARNING
∙ Radio waves could adversely affect
electric medical equipment. Those
who use a pacemaker should contact
the electric medical equipment
manufacturer for the possible influ-
ences before use.
∙ If the low tire pressure warning light
illuminates while driving, avoid sud-
den steering maneuvers or abrupt
braking, reduce vehicle speed, pull off
the road to a safe location and stop
the vehicle as soon as possible. Driv-
ing with underinflated tires may per-
manently damage the tires and in-
crease the likelihood of tire failure.
Serious vehicle damage could occur
and may lead to an accident and could
result in serious personal injury.
Check the tire pressure for all four
tires. Adjust the tire pressure to the
recommended COLD tire pressure
shown on the Tire and Loading Infor-
mation label to turn the low tire pres-
sure warning light OFF. If you have a
flat tire, replace it with a spare tire as
soon as possible.
∙ When replacing a wheel without the
TPMS such as the spare tire, TPMS will
not function and the low tire pressure
warning light will flash for approxi-
mately 1 minute. The light will remain
on after 1 minute. Have your tires re-
placed and/or TPMS system reset as
soon as possible. It is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
these services.
∙ Replacing tires with those not origi-
nally specified by NISSAN could affect
the proper operation of the TPMS.
∙ Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol
tire sealant into the tires, as this may
cause a malfunction of the tire pres-
sure sensors.
∙ If the light still comes on while driving
after adjusting the tire pressure, a tire
may be flat or the TPMS may be mal-
functioning. If you have a flat tire, re-
place it with a spare tire as soon as
possible. If no tire is flat and all tires
are properly inflated, it is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
for this service.
CHANGING A FLAT TIRE
If you have a flat tire, follow the instructions
below:
Stopping the vehicle
1. Safely move the vehicle off the road and
away from traffic.
2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
3. Park on a level surface and apply the
parking brake. Move the shift lever to P
(Park).
FLAT TIRE
In case of emergency 6-3
4. Turn off the engine.
5. Raise the hood to warn other traffic
and to signal professional road assis-
tance personnel that you need assis-
tance.
6. Have all passengers get out of the ve-
hicle and stand in a safe place, away
from traffic and clear of the vehicle.
WARNING
∙ Make sure the parking brake is se-
curely applied and the Continuously
Variable Transmission (CVT) is shifted
into P (Park).
∙ Never change tires when the vehicle is
on a slope, ice or slippery areas. This is
hazardous.
∙ Never change tires if oncoming traffic
is close to your vehicle. Wait for pro-
fessional road assistance.
A. Blocks
B. Flat tire
Blocking wheels
Place suitable blocks at both the front and
back of the wheel diagonally opposite the
flat tire to prevent the vehicle from moving
when it is jacked up.
WARNING
Be sure to block the wheel as the vehicle
may move and result in personal injury.
Getting the spare tire and tools
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Lift the flaps on the wheel cover to ac-
cess the spare tire.
LCE2142 LCE2428
6-4 In case of emergency
3. Carefully remove the wheel cover to
avoid potential damage to the side
trim.
4. Remove the jacking rod
䊊
A
, the jack
䊊
B
,
and wheel nut wrench
䊊
C
from the
storage cover
䊊
D
.
5. Remove the storage cover
䊊
D
to ac-
cess the spare tire.
6. To loosen the bolt, turn counterclock-
wise.
7. Once loosened remove the bolt, and
remove the spare tire.
LCE2429 LCE2430 SCE0913
In case of emergency 6-5
Removing wheel cover (if so
equipped)
CAUTION
Do not use your hands to pry off wheel
caps or wheel covers. Doing so could
result in personal injury.
To remove the wheel cover, use the jack rod
䊊
1
as illustrated.
Apply cloth
䊊
2
between the wheel and jack
rod to prevent damaging the wheel and
wheel cover.
Use caution not to scratch the wheel cover
or wheel surface.
Jacking up vehicle and removing
the damaged tire
WARNING
∙ Never get under the vehicle while it is
supported only by the jack. If it is nec-
essary to work under the vehicle, sup-
port it with safety stands.
∙ Use only the jack provided with your
vehicle to lift the vehicle. Do not use
the jack provided with your vehicle on
other vehicles. The jack is designed
for lifting only your vehicle during a
tire change.
SCE0630 LPD2451
6-6 In case of emergency
∙ Use the correct jack-up points. Never
use any other part of the vehicle for
jack support.
∙ Never jack up the vehicle more than
necessary.
∙ Never use blocks on or under the jack.
∙ Do not start or run the engine while
vehicle is on the jack. It may cause the
vehicle to move. This is especially true
for vehicles with limited slip
differentials.
∙ Do not allow passengers to stay in the
vehicle while it is on the jack.
∙ Never run the engine with a wheel(s)
off the ground. It may cause the ve-
hicle to move.
Always refer to the proper illustrations for
the correct placement and jack-up points
for your specific vehicle model and jack
type.
Carefully read the caution label attached
to the jack body and the following in-
structions.
1. Loosen each wheel nut 1 or 2 turns by
turning counterclockwise with the
wheel nut wrench. Do not remove the
wheel nuts until the tire is off the
ground.
2. Place the jack directly under the
jack-up point as illustrated so the top
of the jack contacts the vehicle at the
jack-up point. Align the jack head be-
tween the 2 notches in the front or the
rear as shown. Also fit the groove of the
jack head between the notches as
shown.
The jack should be used on firm and
level ground.
3. To lift the vehicle, securely hold the jack
lever and rod with both hands. Carefully
raise the vehicle until the tire clears the
ground. Remove the wheel nuts, and
then remove the tire.
LCE2059
In case of emergency 6-7
Installing the spare tire
1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surface
between the wheel and hub.
2. Carefully put the spare tire on and
tighten the wheel nuts finger tight.
3. With the wheel nut wrench, tighten
wheel nuts alternately and evenly in the
sequence illustrated (
䊊
A
,
䊊
B
,
䊊
C
,
䊊
D
) until
they are tight.
4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire
touches the ground. Then, with the
wheel nut wrench, tighten the wheel
nuts securely in the sequence illus-
trated (
䊊
A
,
䊊
B
,
䊊
C
,
䊊
D
). Lower the vehicle
completely.
WARNING
∙ Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly
tightened wheel nuts can cause the
wheel to become loose or come off.
This could cause an accident.
∙ Do not use oil or grease on the wheel
studs or nuts. This could cause the
nuts to become loose.
∙ Retighten the wheel nuts when the
vehicle has been driven for 600 miles
(1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat
tire,etc.).
As soon as possible, tighten the wheel
nuts to the specified torque with a
torque wrench.
Wheel nut tightening torque:
83 ft-lb (113 N·m)
The wheel nuts must be kept tightened
to specification at all times. It is recom-
mended that wheel nuts be tightened to
specification at each lubrication interval.
Adjust tire pressure to the COLD pres-
sure.
COLD pressure: After vehicle has been
parked for 3 hours or more or driven less
than 1 mile (1.6 km).
COLD tire pressures are shown on the
Tire and Loading Information label.
5. Securely store the jack and the tool kit
in its storage area.
6. Place the spare tire cover and liftgate
floor carpeting over the jack and tool
kit.
7. Securely store the damaged tire in the
vehicle.
8. Close the liftgate.
WARNING
∙ Always make sure that the spare tire
and jacking equipment are properly
secured after use. Such items can be-
come dangerous projectiles in an ac-
cident or sudden stop.
∙ The spare tire is designed for emer-
gency use. For additional information,
refer to “Wheels and tires” in the “Do-
it-yourself” section of this manual.
WCE0048
6-8 In case of emergency
To start your engine with a booster battery,
the instructions and precautions below
must be followed.
WARNING
∙ If done incorrectly, jump starting can
lead to a battery explosion, resulting
in severe injury or death. It could also
damage your vehicle.
∙ Explosive hydrogen gas is always
present in the vicinity of the battery.
Keep all sparks and flames away from
the battery.
∙ Do not allow battery fluid to come into
contact with eyes, skin, clothing or
painted surfaces. Battery fluid is a
corrosive sulfuric acid solution which
can cause severe burns. If the fluid
should come into contact with any-
thing, immediately flush the con-
tacted area with water.
∙ Keep battery out of the reach of
children.
∙ The booster battery must be rated at
12 volts. Use of an improperly rated
battery can damage your vehicle.
∙ Whenever working on or near a bat-
tery, always wear suitable eye protec-
tors (for example, goggles or indus-
trial safety spectacles) and remove
rings, metal bands, or any other jew-
elry. Do not lean over the battery
when jump starting.
∙ Do not attempt to jump start a frozen
battery. It could explode and cause
serious injury.
∙ The automatic engine cooling fan (if
so equipped) may come on at any
time without warning, even if the igni-
tion switch is in the OFF position and
the engine is not running. To avoid in-
jury, keep hands and other objects
away from it.
JUMP STARTING
In case of emergency 6-9
WARNING
Always follow the instructions below.
Failure to do so could result in damage
to the charging system and cause per-
sonal injury.
1. If the booster battery is in another ve-
hicle, position the 2 vehicles to bring
their batteries near each other.
Do not allow the two vehicles to
touch.
2. Apply the parking brake. Move the shift
lever to P (Park). Switch off all unneces-
sary electrical systems (lights, heater,
air conditioner, etc.).
3. Ensure the vent caps are level and
tight.
4. Connect the jumper cables in the se-
quence illustrated (
䊊
A
,
䊊
B
,
䊊
C
,
䊊
D
).
CAUTION
∙ Always connect positive (⫹) to posi-
tive (⫹) and negative (⫺) to body
ground (for example, strut mounting
bolt, engine lift bracket, etc.) — not to
the battery.
∙ Make sure the jumper cables do not
touch moving parts in the engine
compartment and that the cable
clamps do not contact any other
metal.
5. Start the engine of the booster vehicle
and let it run for a few minutes.
6. Keep the engine speed of the booster
vehicle at about 2,000 rpm and start
the engine of the vehicle being jump
started.
CAUTION
Do not keep the starter motor engaged
for more than 10 seconds. If the engine
does not start right away, place the ig-
nition switch in the OFF position and
wait 3 to 4 seconds before trying again.
7. After starting the engine, carefully dis-
connect the negative cable and then
the positive cable.
LCE2223
6-10 In case of emergency
CAUTION
∙ Do not push start this vehicle. The
three-way catalyst may be damaged.
∙ Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT) models cannot be push-started
or tow-started. Attempting to do so
may cause transmission damage.
If your vehicle is overheating (indicated by a
red high temperature warning light
),
or if you feel a lack of engine power, detect
abnormal noise, etc., take the following
steps.
WARNING
∙ Do not continue to drive if your vehicle
overheats. Doing so could cause en-
gine damage or a vehicle fire.
∙ To avoid the danger of being scalded,
never remove the radiator cap while
the engine is still hot. When the radia-
tor cap is removed, pressurized hot
water will spurt out, possibly causing
serious injury.
∙ Do not open the hood if steam is com-
ing out.
1. Move the vehicle safely off the road, ap-
ply the parking brake and move the
shift lever to P (Park).
Do not stop the engine.
2. Turn off the air conditioner.. Open all the
windows, move the heater or air condi-
tioner temperature control to maxi-
mum hot and fan control to high
speed.
3. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listen
for steam or coolant escaping from the
radiator before opening the hood. (If
steam or coolant is escaping, turn off
the engine.) Do not open the hood fur-
ther until no steam or coolant can be
seen.
4. Open the engine hood.
WARNING
If steam or water is coming from the
engine, stand clear to prevent getting
burned.
5. Visually check drive belts for damage
or looseness. Also check if the cooling
fan is running. The radiator hoses and
radiator should not leak water. If cool-
ant is leaking, the water pump belt is
missing or loose, or the cooling fan
does not run, stop the engine.
WARNING
Be careful not to allow your hands, hair,
jewelry or clothing to come into contact
with, or get caught in, engine belts or
the engine cooling fan. The engine cool-
ing fan can start at any time.
PUSH STARTING IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS
In case of emergency 6-11
6. After the engine cools down, check the
coolant level in the engine coolant res-
ervoir with the engine running. Add
coolant to the engine coolant reservoir,
if necessary. Have your vehicle re-
paired. It is recommended that you visit
a NISSAN dealer for this service.
When towing your vehicle, all State (Provin-
cial in Canada) and local regulations for
towing must be followed. Incorrect towing
equipment could damage your vehicle.
Towing instructions are available from a
NISSAN dealer. Local service operators are
generally familiar with the applicable laws
and procedures for towing. To assure
proper towing and to prevent accidental
damage to your vehicle, NISSAN recom-
mends having a service operator tow your
vehicle. It is advisable to have the service
operator carefully read the following pre-
cautions:
WARNING
∙ Never ride in a vehicle that is being
towed.
∙ Never get under your vehicle after it
has been lifted by a tow truck.
CAUTION
∙ When towing, make sure that the
transmission, axles, steering system
and powertrain are in working condi-
tion. If any of these conditions apply,
dollies or a flatbed tow truck must be
used.
∙ Always attach safety chains before
towing.
For additional information, refer to “Flat
towing” in the “Technical and consumer in-
formation” section of this manual.
TOWING RECOMMENDED BY
NISSAN
NISSAN recommends towing your vehicle
based upon the type of drivetrain. For addi-
tional information, refer to the diagrams in
this section to ensure that your vehicle is
properly towed.
TOWING YOUR VEHICLE
6-12 In case of emergency
Front-Wheel Drive (FWD) models
with Continuously Variable
Transmission (CVT)
NISSAN recommends that your vehicle be
towed with the driving (front) wheels off the
ground or place the vehicle on a flatbed
truck as illustrated.
CAUTION
∙ Never tow CVT models with the front
wheels on the ground or four wheels
on the ground (forward or backward),
as this may cause serious and expen-
sive damage to the transmission. If it
is necessary to tow the vehicle with
the rear wheels raised always use
towing dollies under the front wheels.
∙ When towing CVT models with the
rear wheels on the ground or on tow-
ing dollies:
– Place the ignition switch in the OFF
position, and secure the steering
wheel in a straight-ahead position
with a rope or similar device. Never
secure the steering wheel by plac-
ing the ignition switch in the LOCK
position. This may damage the
steering lock mechanism (for
models with a steering lock
mechanism).
VEHICLE RECOVERY (freeing a
stuck vehicle)
WARNING
To avoid vehicle damage, serious per-
sonal injury or death when recovering a
stuck vehicle:
∙ Contact a professional towing service
to recover the vehicle if you have any
questions regarding the recovery
procedure.
∙ Tow chains or cables must be at-
tached only to main structural mem-
bers of the vehicle.
∙ Do not use the vehicle tie-downs to
tow or free a stuck vehicle.
LCE2343
In case of emergency 6-13
∙ Only use devices specifically designed
for vehicle recovery and follow the
manufacturer’s instructions.
∙ Always pull the recovery device
straight out from the front of the ve-
hicle. Never pull at an angle.
∙ Route recovery devices so they do not
touch any part of the vehicle except
the attachment point.
If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud,
etc., use a tow strap or other device de-
signed specifically for vehicle recovery. Al-
ways follow the manufacturer’s instruc-
tions for the recovery device.
Rocking a stuck vehicle
WARNING
∙ Stand clear of a stuck vehicle.
∙ Do not spin your tires at high speed.
This could cause them to explode and
result in serious injury. Parts of your
vehicle could also overheat and be
damaged.
If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud,
etc., use the following procedure:
1. Turn off the Vehicle Dynamic Control
(VDC) system .
2. Make sure the area in front and behind
the vehicle is clear of obstructions.
3. Turn the steering wheel right and left to
clear an area around the front tires.
4. Slowly rock the vehicle forward and
backward.
∙ Shift back and forth between R (Re-
verse) and D (Drive).
∙ Apply the accelerator as little as pos-
sible to maintain the rocking motion.
∙ Release the accelerator pedal before
shifting between R (Reverse) and D
(Drive).
∙ Do not spin the tires above 34 mph
(55 km/h).
5. If the vehicle cannot be freed after a
few tries, contact a professional towing
service to remove the vehicle.
6-14 In case of emergency
7 Appearance and care
Cleaning exterior ................................7-2
Washing......................................7-2
Waxing .......................................7-2
Removing spots ..............................7-3
Underbody ...................................7-3
Glass ......................................... 7-3
Aluminum alloy wheels (if so equipped) .......7-3
Chromeparts................................7-3
Tire dressings ................................7-3
Cleaning interior.................................7-4
Air fresheners ................................7-5
Floor mats (if so equipped) ...................7-5
Seatbelts....................................7-6
Corrosion protection ............................ 7-7
Most common factors contributing to
vehicle corrosion ............................. 7-7
Environmental factors influence the
rate of corrosion.............................. 7-7
Protect your vehicle from corrosion .......... 7-7
In order to maintain the appearance of
your vehicle, it is important to take proper
care of it.
To protect the paint surfaces, wash your
vehicle as soon as you can:
∙ After a rainfall to prevent possible dam-
age from acid rain.
∙ After driving on coastal roads.
∙ When contaminants such as soot, bird
droppings, tree sap, metal particles or
bugs get on the paint surface.
∙ When dust or mud builds up on the sur-
face.
Whenever possible, store or park your ve-
hicle inside a garage or in a covered area.
When it is necessary to park outside, park in
a shady area or protect the vehicle with a
body cover.
Be careful not to scratch the paint sur-
face when putting on or removing the
body cover.
WASHING
Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty
of water. Clean the vehicle thoroughly us-
ing a mild soap, a special vehicle soap or
general purpose dishwashing liquid mixed
with clean, lukewarm (never hot) water.
CAUTION
∙ Do not use car washes that use acid in
the detergent. Some car washes, es-
pecially brushless ones, use some
acid for cleaning. The acid may react
with some plastic vehicle compo-
nents, causing them to crack. This
could affect their appearance, and
also could cause them not to function
properly. Always check with your car
wash to confirm that acid is not used.
∙ Do not wash the vehicle with strong
household soap, strong chemical de-
tergents, gasoline or solvents.
∙ Do not wash the vehicle in direct sun-
light or while the vehicle body is hot,
as the surface may become
water-spotted.
∙ Avoid using tight-napped or rough
cloths, such as washing mitts. Care
must be taken when removing
caked-on dirt or other foreign sub-
stances so the paint surface is not
scratched or damaged.
Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with plenty of
clean water.
Inside edges, seams and folds on the
doors, hatches and hood are particularly
vulnerable to the effects of road salt. There-
fore, these areas must be cleaned regularly.
Take care that the drain holes in the lower
edge of the door are open. Spray water
under the body and in the wheel wells to
loosen the dirt and wash away road salt.
A damp chamois can be used to dry the
vehicle to avoid water spots.
WAXING
Regular waxing protects the paint surface
and helps retain new vehicle appearance.
Polishing is recommended to remove
built-up wax residue and to avoid a weath-
ered appearance before re-applying wax.
A NISSAN dealer can assist you in choosing
the proper product.
CLEANING EXTERIOR
7-2 Appearance and care
∙ Wax your vehicle only after a thorough
washing. Follow the instructions sup-
plied with the wax.
∙ Do not use a wax containing any abra-
sives, cutting compounds or cleaners
that may damage the vehicle finish.
Machine compounding or aggressive pol-
ishing on a base coat/clear coat paint fin-
ish may dull the finish or leave swirl marks.
REMOVING SPOTS
Remove tar and oil spots, industrial dust,
insects, and tree sap as quickly as possible
from the surface of the paint to avoid last-
ing damage or staining. Special cleaning
products are available at a NISSAN dealer
or any automotive accessory store. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for these products.
UNDERBODY
In areas where road salt is used in winter, it
is necessary to clean the underbody regu-
larly in order to prevent dirt and salt from
building up and causing the acceleration of
corrosion on the underbody and suspen-
sion. Before the winter period and again in
the spring, the underseal must be checked
and, if necessary, re-treated.
GLASS
Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and
dust film from the glass surfaces. It is nor-
mal for glass to become coated with a film
after the vehicle is parked in the hot sun.
Glass cleaner and a soft cloth will easily
remove this film.
CAUTION
When cleaning the inside of the win-
dows, do not use sharp-edged tools,
abrasive cleaners or chlorine-based
disinfectant cleaners. They could dam-
age the electrical conductors, radio an-
tenna elements or rear window de-
froster elements.
ALUMINUM ALLOY WHEELS (if so
equipped)
Wash the wheels regularly with a sponge
dampened in a mild soap solution, espe-
cially during winter months in areas where
road salt is used. If not removed, road salt
can discolor the wheels.
CAUTION
Follow the directions below to avoid
staining or discoloring the wheels:
∙ Do not use a cleaner that uses strong
acid or alkali contents to clean the
wheels.
∙ Do not apply wheel cleaners to the
wheels when they are hot. The wheel
temperature should be the same as
ambient temperature.
∙ Rinse the wheel to completely remove
the cleaner within 15 minutes after
the cleaner is applied.
CHROME PARTS
Clean all chrome parts regularly with a
non-abrasive chrome polish to maintain
the finish.
TIRE DRESSINGS
NISSAN does not recommend the use of
tire dressings. Tire manufacturers apply a
coating to the tires to help reduce discolor-
ation of the rubber. If a tire dressing is ap-
plied to the tires, it may react with the coat-
ing and form a compound. This compound
may come off the tire while driving and
stain the vehicle paint.
Appearance and care 7-3
If you choose to use a tire dressing, take the
following precautions:
∙ Use a water-based tire dressing. The
coating on the tire dissolves more easily
than with an oil-based tire dressing.
∙ Apply a light coat of tire dressing to help
prevent it from entering the tire
tread/grooves (where it would be diffi-
cult to remove).
∙ Wipe off excess tire dressing using a dry
towel. Make sure the tire dressing is
completely removed from the tire
tread/grooves.
∙ Allow the tire dressing to dry as recom-
mended by the tire dressing manufac-
turer.
Occasionally remove loose dust from the
interior trim, plastic parts and seats using a
vacuum cleaner or soft bristled brush. Wipe
the vinyl and leather (if so equipped) sur-
faces with a clean, soft cloth dampened in
mild soap solution, then wipe clean with a
dry, soft cloth.
Regular care and cleaning is required in
order to maintain the appearance of the
leather (if so equipped).
Before using any fabric protector, read the
manufacturer’s recommendations. Some
fabric protectors contain chemicals that
may stain or bleach the seat material.
Use a cloth dampened only with water to
clean the meter and gauge lens.
WARNING
Do not use water or acidic cleaners (hot
steam cleaners) on the seat. This can
damage the seat or occupant classifi-
cation sensor. This can also affect the
operation of the air bag system and re-
sult in serious personal injury.
CAUTION
∙ Never use benzine, thinner or any
similar material.
∙ Small dirt particles can be abrasive
and damaging to leather (if so
equipped) surfaces and should be re-
moved promptly. Do not use saddle
soap, car waxes, polishes, oils, clean-
ing fluids, solvents, detergents or
ammonia-based cleaners as they
may damage the leather’s natural
finish.
∙ Never use fabric protectors unless
recommended by the manufacturer.
∙ Do not use glass or plastic cleaner on
meter or gauge lens covers. It may
damage the lens cover.
CLEANING INTERIOR
7-4 Appearance and care
AIR FRESHENERS
Most air fresheners use a solvent that
could affect the vehicle interior. If you use
an air freshener, take the following precau-
tions:
∙ Hanging-type air fresheners can cause
permanent discoloration when they
contact vehicle interior surfaces. Place
the air freshener in a location that al-
lows it to hang free and not contact an
interior surface.
∙ Liquid-type air fresheners typically clip
on the vents. These products can cause
immediate damage and discoloration
when spilled on interior surfaces.
Carefully read and follow the manufactur-
er’s instructions before using the air fresh-
eners.
FLOOR MATS (if so equipped)
WARNING
To avoid potential pedal interference
that may result in a collision, injury or
death:
∙ NEVER place a floor mat on top of an-
other floor mat in the driver front po-
sition or install them upside down or
backwards.
∙ Use only Genuine NISSAN floor mats,
or equivalent floor mats, that are spe-
cifically designed for use in your ve-
hicle model and model year.
∙ Properly position the mats in the
floorwell using the floor mat position-
ing hook. For additional information,
refer to "Floor mat installation" in this
section.
∙ Make sure the floor mat does not in-
terfere with pedal operation.
∙ Periodically check the floor mats to
make sure they are properly installed.
∙ After cleaning the vehicle interior,
check the floor mats to make sure
they are properly installed.
The use of Genuine NISSAN floor mats can
extend the life of your vehicle carpet and
make it easier to clean the interior. Mats
should be maintained with regular clean-
ing and replaced if they become exces-
sively worn.
Floor mat installation
Your vehicle is equipped with floor mat po-
sitioning hook(s). The number and shape of
the floor mat positioning hooks for each
seating position varies depending on the
vehicle.
LAI2105
Appearance and care 7-5
When installing Genuine NISSAN floor mats,
follow the installation instructions provided
with the mat and the following:
1. With the ignition in the OFF position, the
shift lever in P (Park) position and with
the parking brake fully applied, position
the floor mat in the floorwell so that the
floor mat grommet holes are aligned
with the hook(s).
2. Secure the grommet holes into the
hook(s) and ensure that the floor mat is
properly positioned.
3. Make sure the floor mat does not inter-
fere with pedal operation. With the igni-
tion still in the OFF position, the shift
lever in the P (Park) position and with
the parking brake applied, fully apply
and release all pedals. The floor mat
must not interfere with pedal opera-
tion or prevent the pedal from return-
ing to its normal position.
It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for details about installing the floor
mats in your vehicle.
The illustration shows the location of the
floor mat positioning hooks.
SEAT BELTS
The seat belts can be cleaned by wiping
them with a sponge dampened in a mild
soap solution. Allow the belts to dry com-
pletely in the shade before using them. For
additional information, refer to “Seat belt
maintenance” in the “Safety—Seats, seat
belts and supplemental restraint system”
section of this manual.
WARNING
Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up in
the retractor. NEVER use bleach, dye or
chemical solvents to clean the seat
belts, since these materials may se-
verely weaken the seat belt webbing.
Positioning hooks
LAI2106
7-6 Appearance and care
MOST COMMON FACTORS
CONTRIBUTING TO VEHICLE
CORROSION
Most vehicle corrosion is caused by:
∙ The accumulation of moisture-
retaining dirt and debris in body panel
sections, cavities, and other areas.
∙ Damage to paint and other protective
coatings caused by gravel and stone
chips or minor traffic collisions.
ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS
INFLUENCE THE RATE OF
CORROSION
Moisture
Accumulation of sand, dirt and water on
the vehicle body underside can accelerate
corrosion. Wet floor coverings will not dry
completely inside the vehicle and should
be removed for drying to avoid floor panel
corrosion.
Relative humidity
Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of
high relative humidity, especially those ar-
eas where the temperatures stay above
freezing and where atmospheric pollution
exists and road salt is used.
Temperature
High temperatures accelerate the rate of
corrosion to those parts which are not well
ventilated.
Air pollution
Industrial pollution, the presence of salt in
the air in coastal areas, or heavy road salt
use accelerates the corrosion process.
Road salt also accelerates the disintegra-
tion of paint surfaces.
PROTECT YOUR VEHICLE FROM
CORROSION
∙ Wash and wax your vehicle often to
keep the vehicle clean.
∙ Always check for minor damage to the
paint and repair it as soon as possible.
∙ Keep drain holes at the bottom of the
doors open to avoid water accumula-
tion.
∙ Check the underbody for accumulation
of sand, dirt or salt. If present, wash with
water as soon as possible.
CAUTION
∙ NEVER remove dirt, sand or other de-
bris from the passenger compart-
ment by washing it out with a hose.
Remove dirt with a vacuum cleaner or
broom.
∙ Never allow water or other liquids to
come in contact with electronic com-
ponents inside the vehicle as this may
damage them.
Chemicals used for road surface de-icing
are extremely corrosive. They accelerate
corrosion and deterioration of underbody
components such as the exhaust system,
fuel and brake lines, brake cables, floor pan
and fenders.
In winter, the underbody must be
cleaned periodically.
For additional protection against rust and
corrosion, which may be required in some
areas, it is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer.
CORROSION PROTECTION
Appearance and care 7-7
MEMO
7-8 Appearance and care
8 Do-it-yourself
Maintenance precautions .......................8-2
Engine compartment check locations ...........8-3
Engine cooling system ..........................8-4
Checking engine coolant level ................8-5
Changing engine coolant.....................8-5
Engine oil........................................8-5
Checking engine oil level .....................8-5
Changing engine oil ..........................8-6
Changing engine oil filter .....................8-8
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)
fluid .............................................8-9
Brake fluid .......................................8-9
Windshield-washer fluid ........................8-10
Windshield-washer fluid reservoir............8-10
Battery..........................................8-11
Jump starting ...............................8-12
Variable voltage control system ................8-13
Drive belt .......................................8-13
Spark plugs ....................................8-14
Replacing spark plugs .......................8-14
Air cleaner......................................8-15
In-cabin microfilter ..........................8-15
Windshield wiper blades ........................8-16
Cleaning ....................................8-16
Replacing ...................................8-16
Brakes..........................................8-17
Fuses...........................................8-18
Engine compartment .......................8-18
Passenger compartment....................8-20
Battery replacement ...........................8-21
NISSAN Intelligent Key® ......................8-21
Lights ..........................................8-23
Headlights...................................8-23
Fog lights (if so equipped) ...................8-23
Exterior and interior lights ...................8-25
Wheels and tires................................8-27
Tire pressure ................................8-27
Tire labeling .................................8-30
Types of tires ................................8-33
Tir
e chains ..................................8-34
Changing wheels and tires ..................8-35
When performing any inspection or main-
tenance work on your vehicle, always take
care to prevent serious accidental injury to
yourself or damage to the vehicle. The fol-
lowing are general precautions which
should be closely observed.
WARNING
∙ Park the vehicle on a level surface, ap-
ply the parking brake securely and
block the wheels to prevent the ve-
hicle from moving. Move the shift le-
ver to P (Park).
∙ Be sure the ignition switch is in the
OFF or LOCK position when perform-
ing any parts replacement or repairs.
∙ If you must work with the engine run-
ning, keep your hands, clothing, hair
and tools away from moving fans,
belts and any other moving parts.
∙ It is advisable to secure or remove any
loose clothing and remove any jew-
elry, such as rings, watches, etc. be-
fore working on your vehicle.
∙ Always wear eye protection whenever
you work on your vehicle.
∙ Your vehicle is equipped with an auto-
matic engine cooling fan. It may come
on at any time without warning, even
if the ignition switch is in the OFF po-
sition and the engine is not running.
To avoid injury, always disconnect the
negative battery cable before work-
ing near the fan.
∙ If you must run the engine in an en-
closed space such as a garage, be sure
there is proper ventilation for exhaust
gases to escape.
∙ Never get under the vehicle while it is
supported only by a jack. If it is neces-
sary to work under the vehicle, sup-
port it with safety stands.
∙ Keep smoking materials, flame and
sparks away from the fuel tank and
battery.
∙
Because the fuel lines on gasoline en-
gine models are under high pressure
even when the engine is off, it is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
for service of the fuel filter or fuel lines.
CAUTION
∙ Do not work under the hood while the
engine is hot. Turn the engine off and
wait until it cools down.
∙
Avoid contact with used engine oil and
coolant. Improperly disposed engine
oil, engine coolant and/or other vehicle
fluids can damage the environment. Al-
ways conform to local regulations for
disposal of vehicle fluid.
∙ Never leave the engine or Continu-
ously Variable Transmission (CVT) re-
lated component harnesses discon-
nected while the ignition switch is in
the ON position.
∙
Never connect or disconnect the battery
or any transistorized component while
the ignition switch is in the ON position.
This “Do-it-yourself” section gives instruc-
tions regarding only those items which are
relatively easy for an owner to perform.
A Genuine NISSAN service manual is also
available. For additional information, refer
to “Owner’s Manual/Service Manual order
information” in the “Technical and con-
sumer information” section of this manual.
You should be aware that incomplete or
improper servicing may result in operating
difficulties or excessive emissions, and
could affect warranty coverage. If in doubt
about any servicing, it is recommended
that you have it done by a NISSAN dealer.
MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS
8-2 Do-it-yourself
HR16DE engine
1. Engine coolant reservoir
2. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir
3. Engine oil filler cap
4. Engine oil dipstick
5. Brake fluid reservoir
6. Fuse box
7. Battery
8. Air cleaner
9. Engine drive belt location
LDI3247
ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK
LOCATIONS
Do-it-yourself 8-3
The engine cooling system is filled at the
factory with a pre-diluted mixture of 50%
Genuine NISSAN Long Life
Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) and 50% water to
provide year-round antifreeze and coolant
protection. The antifreeze solution con-
tains rust and corrosion inhibitors. Addi-
tional engine cooling system additives are
not necessary.
WARNING
∙ Never remove the radiator or coolant
reservoir cap when the engine is hot.
Wait until the engine and radiator cool
down. Serious burns could be caused
by high pressure fluid escaping from
the radiator. For additional informa-
tion on precautions, refer to “If your
vehicle overheats” found in the “In
case of emergency” section of this
manual.
∙ The radiator is equipped with a pres-
sure type radiator cap. To prevent en-
gine damage, use only a Genuine
NISSAN radiator cap.
CAUTION
∙ Never use any cooling system addi-
tives such as radiator sealer. Additives
may clog the cooling system and
cause damage to the engine, trans-
mission and/or cooling system.
∙ When adding or replacing coolant, be
sure to use only Genuine NISSAN Long
Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or
equivalent. Genuine NISSAN Long Life
Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) is pre-
diluted to provide antifreeze protec-
tion to -34° F (-37° C). If additional
freeze protection is needed due to
weather where you operate your ve-
hicle, add Genuine NISSAN Long Life
Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) concen-
trate following the directions on the
container. If an equivalent coolant
other than Genuine NISSAN Long Life
Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) is used, fol-
low the coolant manufacturer’s in-
structions to maintain minimum anti-
freeze protection to -34° F (-37° C). The
use of other types of coolant solu-
tions other than Genuine NISSAN Long
Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or
equivalent may damage the engine
cooling system.
∙ The life expectancy of the factory-fill
coolant is 105,000 miles (168,000 km)
or 7 years. Mixing any other type of
coolant other than Genuine NISSAN
Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue),
including Genuine NISSAN Long Life
Antifreeze/Coolant (green), or the use
of non-distilled water will reduce the
life expectancy of the factory-fill cool-
ant. For additional information, refer
to the “Maintenance and schedules”
section of this manual.
ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM
8-4 Do-it-yourself
CHECKING ENGINE COOLANT
LEVEL
Check the coolant level in the reservoir
when the engine is cold. If the coolant
level is below the MIN level
䊊
B
, add coolant
up to the MAX level
䊊
A
.
If the cooling system frequently requires
coolant, have it checked. It is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
for this service.
For additional information on the location
of the engine coolant reservoir, refer to “En-
gine compartment check locations” in this
section.
CHANGING ENGINE COOLANT
A NISSAN dealer can change the engine
coolant. The service procedure can be
found in the NISSAN Service Manual.
Improper servicing can result in reduced
heater performance and engine over-
heating.
WARNING
∙ To avoid the danger of being scalded,
never change the coolant when the
engine is hot.
∙ Never remove the radiator cap when
the engine is hot. Serious burns could
be caused by high pressure fluid es-
caping from the radiator.
∙ Avoid direct skin contact with used
coolant. If skin contact is made, wash
thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner
as soon as possible.
∙ Keep coolant out of the reach of chil-
dren and pets.
Engine coolant must be disposed of prop-
erly. Check your local regulations.
CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and
apply the parking brake.
2. Start the engine and warm it up until
the engine temperature reaches the
normal operating temperature (ap-
proximately 5 minutes).
3. Stop the engine.
4. Wait at least 10 minutes for the engine
oil to drain back to the oil pan.
5. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean.
6. Reinsert the dipstick all the way.
LDI3221 LDI3222
ENGINE OIL
Do-it-yourself 8-5
7. Remove the dipstick and check the oil
level. It should be within the range
䊊
B
.
8. If the oil level is below
䊊
A
, remove the oil
filler cap and pour recommended oil
into the opening. Do not overfill
䊊
C
.
When filling the engine oil, do not re-
move the dipstick.
9. Recheck the oil level with the dipstick.
It is normal to add some oil between oil
maintenance intervals or during the
break-in period, depending on the sever-
ity of operating conditions or depending
on the property of the engine oil used.
More engine oil is consumed by frequent
acceleration/deceleration especially
when engine rpm is high. Consumption
is likely to be higher when the engine is
new. if the rate of oil consumption, after
driving for 3,000 miles (5,000 km), is
more than 0.5 liter per 600 miles
(1,000 km), consult a NISSAN dealer.
CAUTION
Oil level should be checked regularly.
Operating the engine with an insuffi-
cient amount of oil can damage the en-
gine, and such damage is not covered
by warranty.
CHANGING ENGINE OIL
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and
apply the parking brake.
LDI0371
LDI3026
8-6 Do-it-yourself
2. Start the engine and let it idle until it
reaches operating temperature, then
turn it off.
3. Remove the oil filler cap
䊊
A
by turning it
counterclockwise.
4. Place a large drain pan under the drain
plug
䊊
B
.
5. Remove the drain plug
䊊
B
with a
wrench by turning it counterclockwise
and completely drain the oil.
If the oil filter is to be changed, remove
and replace it at this time. For addi-
tional information, refer to “Changing
engine oil filter” in this section.
WARNING
∙ Prolonged and repeated contact with
used engine oil may cause skin
cancer.
∙ Try to avoid direct skin contact with
used oil. If skin contact is made, wash
thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner
as soon as possible.
∙ Keep used engine oil out of reach of
children.
CAUTION
∙ Be careful not to burn yourself. The
engine oil may be hot.
∙ Waste oil must be disposed of
properly.
∙ Check your local regulations.
6. Clean and reinstall the drain plug
䊊
B
and a new washer. Securely tighten the
drain plug
䊊
B
with a wrench. Do not use
excessive force.
Drain plug tightening torque:
25 ft-lb (34 N·m)
7. Refill engine with recommended oil
through the oil filler opening, then install
the oil filler cap
䊊
A
securely.
For additional information on drain
and refill capacity, refer to “Recom-
mended fluids/lubricants and capaci-
ties” in the “Technical and consumer
information” section of this manual.
The drain and refill capacity depends
on the oil temperature and drain time.
Use these specifications for reference
only. Always use the dipstick to deter-
mine when the proper amount of oil is
in the engine.
8. Start the engine. Check for leakage
around the drain plug
䊊
B
and oil filter.
Correct as required.
9. Turn the engine off and wait more than
10 minutes. Check the oil level with the
dipstick. Add engine oil if necessary.
Do-it-yourself 8-7
CHANGING ENGINE OIL FILTER
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and
apply the parking brake.
2. Turn the engine off.
3. Place a large drain pan under the oil
filter
䊊
B
.
4. Loosen the oil filter with an oil filter
wrench by turning it counterclockwise.
Then remove the oil filter by turning it
by hand.
CAUTION
Be careful not to burn yourself. The en-
gine oil may be hot.
5. Wipe the engine oil filter sealing surface
with a clean rag.
CAUTION
Be sure to remove any old gasket mate-
rial remaining on the sealing surface of
the engine. Failure to do so could lead to
engine damage.
6. Coat the gasket on the new filter with
clean engine oil .
7. Screw on the oil filter until a slight resis-
tance is felt, then tighten an additional
2/3 turn.
Oil filter tightening torque:
13 ft-lbs (18 N·m)
8. Start the engine and check for leakage
around the oil filter. Correct as required.
9. Turn the engine off and wait more than
10 minutes. Check the oil level. Add en-
gine oil by removing the oil filler cap
䊊
A
if necessary.
LDI3027
8-8 Do-it-yourself
CAUTION
∙ NISSAN recommends using Genuine
NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 (or equivalent)
ONLY in NISSAN CVTs. Do not mix with
other fluids.
∙ Do not use Automatic Transmission
Fluid (ATF) or manual transmission
fluid in a NISSAN CVT, as it may dam-
age the CVT. Damage caused by the
use of fluids other than as recom-
mended is not covered under
NISSAN’s New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
∙ Using fluids that are not equivalent to
Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 may
also damage the CVT. Damage caused
by the use of fluids other than as rec-
ommended is not covered under
NISSAN’s New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
When checking or replacement of CVT fluid
is required, it is recommended that you visit
a NISSAN dealer for this service.
For additional information on brake fluid
specification, refer to “Recommended
fluids/lubricants and capacities” in the
“Technical and consumer information” sec-
tion of this manual.
WARNING
∙ Use only new fluid from a sealed con-
tainer. Old, inferior or contaminated
fluid may damage the brake system.
The use of improper fluids can dam-
age the brake system and affect the
vehicle’s stopping ability.
∙ Clean the filler cap before removing.
∙ Brake fluid is poisonous and should
be stored carefully in marked contain-
ers out of reach of children.
CAUTION
Do not spill the fluid on any painted sur-
faces. This will damage the paint. If fluid
is spilled, immediately wash the surface
with water.
Check the fluid level in the reservoir. If the
brake fluid is below the MIN line
䊊
B
, the
brake warning light will illuminate. Add
brake fluid up to the MAX line
䊊
A
. For addi-
tional information on recommended type
of brake fluid, refer to “Recommended
fluids/lubricants and capacities" in the “
Technical and consumer information” sec-
tion of this manual.
If the brake fluid must be added frequently,
the brake system should be thoroughly
checked. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.
LDI2790
CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE
TRANSMISSION (CVT) FLUID
BRAKE FLUID
Do-it-yourself 8-9
WINDSHIELD-WASHER FLUID
RESERVOIR
Fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir
periodically. Add windshield-washer fluid
when the low windshield-washer fluid
warning light (if so equipped) comes on.
To fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir,
lift the cap off the reservoir and pour the
windshield-washer fluid into the reservoir
opening.
Add a washer solvent to the washer for
better cleaning. In the winter season, add a
windshield-washer antifreeze. Follow the
manufacturer’s instructions for the mix-
ture ratio.
Refill the reservoir more frequently when
driving conditions require an increased
amount of windshield-washer fluid.
Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN
Windshield-Washer Concentrate Cleaner &
Antifreeze or equivalent.
CAUTION
∙ Do not substitute engine antifreeze
coolant for windshield-washer solu-
tion. This may result in damage to the
paint.
∙ Do not fill the windshield-washer res-
ervoir with washer fluid concentrates
at full strength. Some methyl alcohol
based washer fluid concentrates may
permanently stain the grille if spilled
while filling the windshield-washer
reservoir.
∙ Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates
with water to the manufacturer’s rec-
ommended levels before pouring the
fluid into the windshield-washer res-
ervoir. Do not use the windshield-
washer reservoir to mix the washer
fluid concentrate and water.
LDI3223
WINDSHIELD-WASHER FLUID
8-10 Do-it-yourself
∙ Keep the battery surface clean and dry.
Clean the battery with a solution of bak-
ing soda and water.
∙ Make certain the terminal connections
are clean and securely tightened.
∙ If the vehicle is not to be used for
30 days or longer, disconnect the nega-
tive (-) battery terminal cable to prevent
discharge.
NOTE:
Care should be taken to avoid situations
that can lead to potential battery dis-
charge and potential no-start conditions
such as:
1. Installation or extended use of elec-
tronic accessories that consume bat-
tery power when the engine is not
running (Phone chargers, GPS, DVD
players, etc.).
2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/or
only driven short distances.
In these cases, the battery may need to
be charged to maintain battery health.
WARNING
∙ Do not expose the battery to flames,
an electrical spark or a cigarette. Hy-
drogen gas generated by the battery
is explosive. Explosive gases can
cause blindness or injury. Do not allow
battery fluid to contact your skin,
eyes, fabrics or painted surfaces. Sul-
furic acid can cause blindness or in-
jury. After touching a battery or bat-
tery cap, do not touch or rub your
eyes. Thoroughly wash your hands. If
the acid contacts your eyes, skin or
clothing, immediately flush with wa-
ter for at least 15 minutes and seek
medical attention.
∙ Do not operate the vehicle if the fluid
in the battery is low. Low battery fluid
can cause a higher load on the battery
which can generate heat, reduce bat-
tery life, and in some cases lead to an
explosion.
∙ When working on or near a battery,
always wear suitable eye protection
and remove all jewelry.
∙ Battery posts, terminals and related
accessories contain lead and lead
compounds. Wash hands after
handling.
∙ Keep battery out of the reach of
children.
∙ Do not tip the battery. Keep the vent
caps tight and the battery level.
BATTERY
Do-it-yourself 8-11
1. Remove the vent lid
䊊
A
with a screw-
driver as shown.
2. Check the fluid level in each cell. If it is
necessary to add fluid, add only dis-
tilled water to bring the level up to the
bottom of the filler opening. Do not
overfill. Reinstall the vent caps.
Vehicles operated in high temperatures or
under severe conditions require frequent
checks of the battery fluid level.
JUMP STARTING
If jump starting is necessary, refer to “Jump
starting” in the “In case of emergency” sec-
tion of this manual. If the engine does not
start by jump starting, the battery may
have to be replaced. It is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this ser-
vice.
LDI3224
WDI0529
8-12 Do-it-yourself
CAUTION
∙ Do not ground accessories directly to
the battery terminal. Doing so will by-
pass the variable voltage control sys-
tem and the vehicle battery may not
charge completely.
∙ Use electrical accessories with the en-
gine running to avoid discharging the
vehicle battery.
Your vehicle is equipped with a variable
voltage control system
䊊
A
. This system
measures the amount of electrical dis-
charge from the battery and controls volt-
age generated by the generator.
The current sensor is located near the bat-
tery along the negative battery cable. If you
add electrical accessories to your vehicle,
be sure to ground them to a suitable body
ground such as the frame or engine block
area.
1. Automatic tensioner pulley
2. Generator pulley
3. Water pump pulley
4. Air conditioner compressor pulley
5. Crankshaft pulley
WARNING
Be sure the ignition switch is placed in
the OFF or LOCK position before servic-
ing drive belt. The engine could rotate
unexpectedly.
LDI3246 LDI3028
VARIABLE VOLTAGE CONTROL
SYSTEM
DRIVE BELT
Do-it-yourself 8-13
1. Visually inspect the belt for signs of un-
usual wear, cuts, or fraying. If the belt is
in poor condition, have it replaced or
adjusted. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
2. Have the belt checked regularly for
condition.
REPLACING SPARK PLUGS
Iridium-tipped spark plugs
It is not necessary to replace iridium-
tipped
䊊
A
spark plugs as frequently as con-
ventional type spark plugs because they
last much longer. Follow the maintenance
log shown in the “Maintenance and sched-
ules” section of this manual. Do not service
iridium-tipped spark plugs by cleaning or
regapping.
∙ Always replace spark plugs with rec-
ommended or equivalent ones.
WARNING
Be sure the engine and ignition switch
are off and that the parking brake is
engaged securely.
CAUTION
Be sure to use the correct socket to re-
move the spark plugs. An incorrect
socket can damage the spark plugs.
If replacement is required, it is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.
SDI1895
SPARK PLUGS
8-14 Do-it-yourself
WARNING
∙
Operating the engine with the air
cleaner filter off can cause you or oth-
ers to be burned. The air cleaner filter
not only cleans the intake air, it also
stops the flame if the engine backfires.
If the air cleaner is not installed and the
engine backfires, you could be burned.
Never drive with the air cleaner filter off.
Be cautious working on the engine
when the air cleaner is off.
∙ Never pour fuel into the throttle body
or attempt to start the engine with
the air cleaner removed. Doing so
could result in serious injury.
To remove the filter from the air cleaner,
release the retaining clips
䊊
A
, then release
the holders at the back of the unit. Pull the
unit upward
䊊
B
.
The viscous paper type filter element
should not be cleaned and reused. Replace
the air filter according to the maintenance
log shown in the “Maintenance and sched-
ules” section of this manual.
When replacing the air filter, wipe the inside
of the air cleaner housing and the cover
with a damp cloth.
NOTE:
After installing a new air cleaner filter,
make sure the air cleaner cover is seated
in the housing and latch the clips
䊊
A
.
IN-CABIN MICROFILTER
The in-cabin microfilter restricts the entry
of airborne dust and pollen particles and
reduces some objectionable outside
odors. The filter is located behind the glove
box. For additional information, refer to the
“Maintenance and schedules” section of
this manual for change intervals.
If replacement is required, it is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.
LDI2991
AIR CLEANER
Do-it-yourself 8-15
CLEANING
If your windshield is not clear after using
the windshield–washer or if a wiper blade
chatters when running, wax or other mate-
rial may be on the blade or windshield.
Clean the outside of the windshield with a
washer fluid or a mild detergent.Your wind-
shield is clean if beads do not form when
rinsing with clear water.
Clean each blade by wiping it with a cloth
soaked in a washer fluid or a mild deter-
gent. Then rinse the blades with clear wa-
ter. If your windshield is still not clear after
cleaning the blades and using the wiper,
install new windshield wiper blades.
CAUTION
Worn windshield wiper blades can
damage the windshield and impair
driver vision.
REPLACING
Replace the wiper blades if they are worn.
To replace the windshield wiper blades, fol-
low the procedure below:
1. Lift the wiper arm away from the wind-
shield.
2. Lift the release tab
䊊
A
.
3. Move the wiper blade
䊊
B
down and re-
move.
4. Insert the new wiper blade onto the
wiper arm.
5. Push the release tab down until it clicks.
6. Push wiper on to windshield.
CAUTION
∙ After wiper blade replacement, return
the wiper arm to its original position;
otherwise it may be damaged when
the hood is opened.
∙ Make sure the wiper blades contact
the glass; otherwise the arms may be
damaged from wind pressure.
LDI2584
WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES
8-16 Do-it-yourself
If you wax the surface of the hood, be care-
ful not to let wax get into the washer nozzle
䊊
D
. This may cause clogging or improper
windshield-washer operation. If wax gets
into the nozzle, remove it with a needle or
small pin
䊊
C
.
Rear window wiper blade
If checking or replacement is required, it is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
If the brakes do not operate properly, have
the brakes checked. It is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this ser-
vice.
Self-adjusting brakes
Your vehicle is equipped with self-adjusting
brakes.
The front disc-type brakes self-adjust ev-
ery time the brake pedal is applied. The rear
drum-type brakes self-adjust every time
the parking brake is applied.
WARNING
Have your brake system checked if the
brake pedal height does not return to
normal. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Brake pad wear indicators
The disc brake pads on your vehicle have
audible wear indicators. When a brake pad
requires replacement, a high pitched
scraping or screeching sound will be heard
when the vehicle is in motion. The noise will
be heard whether or not the brake pedal is
depressed. Have the brakes checked as
soon as possible if the wear indicator
sound is heard.
LDI2710
BRAKES
Do-it-yourself 8-17
Under some driving or climate conditions,
occasional brake squeak, squeal or other
noise may be heard. Occasional brake
noise during light to moderate stops is nor-
mal and does not affect the function or
performance of the brake system.
Proper brake inspection intervals should
be followed. For additional information re-
garding brake inspections, refer to the ap-
propriate maintenance schedule informa-
tion in the "Maintenance and schedules"
section of this manual.
If any electrical equipment does not oper-
ate, check for an open fuse.
Fuses are used in the passenger compart-
ment and engine compartment. Spare
fuses are provided and can be found in the
passenger compartment fuse box.
When installing a fuse make sure the fuse is
installed in the fuse box securely.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may not be equipped with
all fuses listed on the fuse label.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
CAUTION
Never use a fuse of higher or lower am-
perage rating than that specified on the
fuse box cover. This could damage the
electrical system or electronic control
units or cause a fire.
If any electrical equipment does not come
on, check for an open fuse.
1. Be sure the ignition switch and the
headlight switch are OFF.
2. Open the engine hood.
LDI2997 LDI3242
FUSES
8-18 Do-it-yourself
3. Remove the fuse box cover by pushing
the tab and lifting the cover up.
4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller.
The fuse puller is located in the center
of the fuse block in the passenger
compartment.
5. If the fuse is open
䊊
A
, replace it with a
new fuse
䊊
B
.
6. If a new fuse also opens, have the elec-
trical system checked and repaired. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
Fusible links
If any electrical equipment does not oper-
ate and the fuses are in good condition,
check the fusible links in the holder. If any of
the fusible links are melted, replace only
with Genuine NISSAN parts.
For checking and replacing the fusible links,
it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
LDI3232
Do-it-yourself 8-19
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
CAUTION
Never use a fuse of a higher or lower
amperage rating than that specified on
the fuse box cover. This could damage
the electrical system or electronic con-
trol units or cause a fire.
If any electrical equipment does not oper-
ate, check for an open fuse.
NOTE:
The fuse box is located on the driver’s
side of the instrument panel.
1. Be sure the ignition switch and the
headlight switch are OFF.
2. Remove the fuse box cover
䊊
A
with a
suitable tool. Use a cloth to avoid dam-
aging the trim.
3. Locate the fuse that needs to be re-
placed.
4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller
䊊
B
.
5. If the fuse is open
䊊
C
, replace it with an
equivalent good fuse
䊊
D
.
6. Push the fuse box cover to install.
If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical
system checked and repaired. It is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may not be equipped with
all fuses listed on the fuse label.
LDI3087 LDI2998
8-20 Do-it-yourself
CAUTION
Be careful not to allow children to swal-
low the battery or removed parts.
∙ An improperly disposed battery can
harm the environment. Always con-
firm local regulations for battery
disposal.
∙ When changing batteries, do not let
dust or oil get on the components.
∙ There is danger of explosion if the
lithium battery is incorrectly replaced.
Replace only with the same or equiva-
lent type.
NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY®
Replace the battery in the Intelligent Key as
follows:
1. Remove the mechanical key from the
Intelligent Key.
2. Insert a small flathead screwdriver
䊊
A
into the slit
䊊
B
of the corner and twist it
to separate the upper part from the
lower part. Place a cloth over the
screwdriver to protect the casing.
CAUTION
To prevent damage of the Intelligent
Key, do not compress the screwdriver
too hard when you insert the screw-
driver into the slit.
LDI2001
BATTERY REPLACEMENT
Do-it-yourself 8-21
3. Replace the battery with a new one.
Recommended battery: CR2032 or
equivalent.
∙ Do not touch the internal circuit and
electric terminals as doing so could
cause a malfunction.
∙ Hold the battery by the edges. Hold-
ing the battery across the contact
points will seriously deplete the stor-
age capacity.
∙ Make sure that the + side faces the
bottom of the lower part.
4. Close the lid securely as illustrated with
䊊
C
and
䊊
D
.
5. Operate the buttons to check the op-
eration.
If you need assistance for replacement, it is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
FCC Notice:
For USA:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-
lowing two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interfer-
ence received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation.
Note:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s author-
ity to operate the equipment.
For Canada:
This device complies with Industry
Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must ac-
cept any interference, including interfer-
ence that may cause undesired opera-
tion of the device.
LDI2637
8-22 Do-it-yourself
HEADLIGHTS
For additional information on headlight
bulb replacement, refer to the instructions
outlined in this section.
Replacing the halogen headlight
bulb (if so equipped)
The headlight is a semi-sealed beam type
which uses a replaceable headlight (halo-
gen) bulb. They can be replaced from inside
the engine compartment without remov-
ing the headlight assembly.
If headlight bulb replacement is required, It
is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
CAUTION
∙ Aiming is not necessary after replac-
ing the bulb. When aiming adjustment
is necessary, it is recommended that
you visit a NISSAN dealer for this
service.
∙ Do not leave the headlight assembly
open without a bulb installed for a
long period of time. Dust, moisture,
smoke, etc. entering the headlight
body may affect bulb performance.
Remove the bulb from the headlight
assembly just before a replacement
bulb is installed.
∙ Only touch the base when handling
the bulb. Never touch the glass enve-
lope. Touching the glass could signifi-
cantly affect bulb life and/or head-
light performance.
∙ High pressure halogen gas is sealed
inside the halogen bulb. The bulb may
break if the glass envelope is
scratched or the bulb is dropped.
∙ Use the same number and wattage as
shown in the chart.
Fog may temporarily form inside the lens
of the exterior lights in the rain or in a car
wash. A temperature difference between
the inside and the outside of the lens
causes the fog. This is not a malfunction. If
large drops of water collect inside the lens,
it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
Replacing the LED headlight bulb
(if so equipped)
If LED headlight bulb replacement is re-
quired, it is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service.
FOG LIGHTS (if so equipped)
For additional information on fog light bulb
replacement, refer to the instructions out-
lined in this section.
LIGHTS
Do-it-yourself 8-23
Replacing the fog light bulb (if so
equipped)
CAUTION
∙ High pressure halogen gas is sealed
inside the halogen bulb. The bulb may
break if the glass envelope is
scratched or the bulb is dropped.
∙ When handling the bulb, do not touch
the glass envelope.
∙ Use the same number and wattage as
originally installed as shown in the
chart.
∙ Do not leave the bulb out of the fog
light for a long period of time as dust,
moisture and smoke may enter the
fog light body and affect the perfor-
mance of the fog light.
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
2. Access to the fog light is in front of and
behind the front tire and the fascia.
3. Remove the fasteners; carefully pull
back the front fender protector.
4. Rotate the bulb counterclockwise and
pull out to remove.
5. Remove by pulling straight off the fog
light. Do not shake or rotate the bulb
when removing it.
6. Install the new bulb in the reverse order
of removal.
LDI3036
8-24 Do-it-yourself
EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS
Item Wattage (W) Bulb No.*
1
Headlight assembly (Type A) (if so equipped)*
High 65 H9
Low 55 H11
Turn/Park 27/7 3457NAK
Side marker 5 W5W
Headlight assembly (Type B) (if so equipped)*
High 65 H9
Low — —
Turn signal 27/7 3457NAK
Park — —
Side marker 5 W5W
Fog light (Type A) (if so equipped) 35 H8
Daytime Running Light (DRL) 21 W21W
Fog light (Type B) (if so equipped) 35 H8
Door mirror turn signal light (if so equipped)* — —
Map light* 10 —
Room light* 8 —
Glove box light* 1.4 —
Cargo light* 5 W5W
High-mounted stop light* — —
Rear combination light*
Turn signal 21 WY21W
Stop/Tail 21/5 W21/5W
Tail 5 W5W
Backup (reversing) 16 W16W
License plate light 5 W5W
Always check with the Parts Department at a NISSAN dealer for the latest parts informa-
tion.
* If replacement is required, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this
service.
Do-it-yourself 8-25
1. Map light
2. Room light
3. Door mirror turn signal light (if so
equipped)
4. Headlight assembly
5. Fog light (if so equipped)
6. Daytime Running Light (DRL) (if so
equipped)
7. License plate light
8. High-mounted stop light
9. Rear combination light
Replacement procedures
All other lights are either type A, B, C or D.
When replacing a bulb, first remove the
lens, lamp and/or cover.
Indicates bulb removal
Indicates bulb installation
LDI3233 SDI1805
8-26 Do-it-yourself
If you have a flat tire, refer to “Flat tire” in
the “In case of emergency” section of
this manual.
TIRE PRESSURE
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)
WARNING
Radio waves could adversely af-
fect electric medical equipment.
Those who use a pacemaker
should contact the electric medi-
cal equipment manufacturer for
the possible influences before
use.
This vehicle is equipped with the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS).
It monitors tire pressure of all tires
except the spare. When the low tire
pressure warning light is lit and the
“Tire Pressure Low – Add Air” warning
appears in the vehicle information
display, one or more of your tires is
significantly under-inflated. If
equipped, the system also displays
pressure of all tires (except the spare
tire) on the display screen by send-
ing a signal from a sensor that is
installed in each wheel.
The TPMS will activate only when the
vehicle is driven at speeds above
16 mph (25 km/h). Also, this system
may not detect a sudden drop in tire
pressure (for example a flat tire while
driving).
For additional information, refer to
“Low tire pressure warning light” in
the “Instruments and controls” sec-
tion, “Tire Pressure Monitoring Sys-
tem (TPMS)” in the “Starting and driv-
ing” section and “Flat tire” in the “In
case of emergency” section of this
manual.
Tire inflation pressure
Check the tire pressures (including
the spare) often and always prior to
long distance trips. The recom-
mended tire pressure specifications
are shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.
certification label or the Tire and
Loading Information label under the
License plate light
JVC0014X
WHEELS AND TIRES
Do-it-yourself 8-27
“Cold Tire Pressure” heading. The Tire
and Loading Information label is af-
fixed to the driver side center pillar.
Tire pressures should be checked
regularly because:
∙ Most tires naturally lose air over
time.
∙ Tires can lose air suddenly when
driven over potholes or other ob-
jects or if the vehicle strikes a
curb while parking.
The tire pressures should be
checked when the tires are cold. The
tires are considered COLD after the
vehicle has been parked for 3 or
more hours, or driven less than 1 mile
(1.6 km) at moderate speeds.
The TPMS with Easy-Fill Tire Alert
provides visual and audible signals
outside the vehicle for inflating tires
to the recommended COLD tire
pressure. For additional information,
refer to “TPMS with Easy-Fill Tire
Alert” in the “Starting and driving”
section of this manual.
Incorrect tire pressure, including
under inflation, may adversely af-
fect tire life and vehicle handling.
WARNING
∙ Improperly inflated tires can fail
suddenly and cause an
accident.
∙ The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR) is located on the
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certifica-
tion label. The vehicle weight
capacity is indicated on the Tire
and Loading Information label.
Do not load your vehicle beyond
this capacity. Overloading your
vehicle may result in reduced
tire life, unsafe operating condi-
tions due to premature tire fail-
ure, or unfavorable handling
characteristics and could also
lead to a serious accident. Load-
ing beyond the specified capac-
ity may also result in failure of
other vehicle components.
∙ Before taking a long trip, or
whenever you heavily load your
vehicle, use a tire pressure
gauge to ensure that the tire
pressures are at the specified
level.
∙ For additional information re-
garding tires, refer to “Impor-
tant Tire Safety Information”
(US) or “Tire Safety Information”
(Canada) in the Warranty Infor-
mation Booklet.
8-28
Do-it-yourself
Tire and Loading Information
label
䊊
1
Seating capacity: The maximum
number of occupants that can
be seated in the vehicle.
䊊
2
Vehicle load limit: For additional
information, refer to “Vehicle
loading information” in the
“Technical and consumer infor-
mation” section of this manual.
䊊
3
Original tire size: The size of the
tires originally installed on the
vehicle at the factory.
䊊
4
Cold tire pressure: Inflate the
tires to this pressure when the
tires are cold. Tires are consid-
ered COLD after the vehicle has
been parked for 3 or more hours,
or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km)
at moderate speeds. The rec-
ommended cold tire inflation is
set by the manufacturer to pro-
vide the best balance of tire
wear, vehicle handling, driveabil-
ity, tire noise, etc., up to the vehi-
cle’s GVWR.
䊊
5
Tire size - For additional infor-
mation, refer to “Tire labeling” in
this section.
䊊
6
Spare tire size.
LDI2007
Do-it-yourself 8-29
Checking tire pressure
1. Remove the valve stem cap from
the tire.
2.
Press the pressure gauge squarely
onto the valve stem. Do not press
too hard or force the valve stem
sideways, or air will escape. If the
hissing sound of air escaping from
the tire is heard while checking the
pressure, reposition the gauge to
eliminate this leakage.
3. Remove the gauge.
4. Read the tire pressure on the
gauge stem and compare to the
specification shown on the Tire
and Loading Information label.
5. Add air to the tire as needed. If
too much air is added, press the
core of the valve stem briefly
with the tip of the gauge stem to
release pressure. Recheck the
pressure and add or release air
as needed.
6. Install the valve stem cap.
7. Check the pressure of all other
tires, including the spare.
Size Cold Tire Infla-
tion Pressure
Front and Rear
Original Tire:
P205/55R17 91V
P205/60R16 92H
32 PSI, 220 kPa
Spare Tire:
(Temporary)
T125/90D15
60 PSI, 420 kPa
TIRE LABELING
Federal law requires tire manufac-
turers to place standardized infor-
mation on the sidewall of all tires.
This information identifies and de-
scribes the fundamental character-
istics of the tire and also provides the
Tire Identification Number (TIN) for
safety standard certification. The TIN
can be used to identify the tire in
case of a recall.
LDI0393
Example
WDI0394
8-30 Do-it-yourself
䊊
1
Tire size (example: P215/65R15
95H)
1. P: The “P” indicates the tire is de-
signed for passenger vehicles
(not all tires have this informa-
tion).
2. Three-digit number (215): This
number gives the width in milli-
meters of the tire from sidewall
edge to sidewall edge.
3. Two-digit number (65): This
number, known as the aspect
ratio, gives the tire’s ratio of
height to width.
4. R: The “R” stands for radial.
5. Two-digit number (15): This num-
ber is the wheel or rim diameter
in inches.
6. Two- or three-digit number (95):
This number is the tire’s load in-
dex. It is a measurement of how
much weight each tire can sup-
port. You may not find this infor-
mation on all tires because it is
not required by law.
7. H: Tire speed rating. You should
not drive the vehicle faster than
the tire speed rating.
Example
WDI0395
Do-it-yourself 8-31
䊊
2
TIN (Tire Identification Number)
for a new tire (example: DOT XX XX
XXX XXXX)
1. DOT: Abbreviation for the “De-
partment Of Transportation”.
The symbol can be placed
above, below or to the left or
right of the Tire Identification
Number.
2. Two-digit code: Manufacturer’s
identification mark.
3. Two-digit code: Tire size.
4. Three-digit code: Tire type code
(Optional).
5. Four numbers represent the
week and year the tire was built.
For example, the numbers 3103
means the 31st week of 2003. If
these numbers are missing then
look on the other sidewall of the
tire.
䊊
3
Tire ply composition and material
The number of layers or plies of
rubber-coated fabric in the tire. Tire
manufacturers also must indicate
the materials in the tire, which include
steel, nylon, polyester and others.
䊊
4
Maximum permissible inflation
pressure
This number is the greatest amount
of air pressure that should be put in
the tire. Do not exceed the maximum
permissible inflation pressure.
䊊
5
Maximum load rating
This number indicates the maxi-
mum load in kilograms and pounds
that can be carried by the tire. When
replacing the tires on the vehicle, al-
ways use a tire that has the same
load rating as the factory installed
tire.
䊊
6
Term of “tubeless” or “tube type”
Indicates whether the tire requires
an inner tube (“tube type”) or not
(“tubeless”).
Example
LDI2786
8-32 Do-it-yourself
䊊
7
The word “radial”
The word “radial” is shown if the tire
has radial structure.
䊊
8
Manufacturer or brand name
Manufacturer or brand name is
shown.
Other Tire-related Terminology
In addition to the many terms that
are defined throughout this section,
Intended Outboard Sidewall is (1) the
sidewall that contains a whitewall,
bears white lettering or bears
manufacturer, brand, and/or model
name molding that is higher or
deeper than the same molding on
the other sidewall of the tire, or (2)
the outward facing sidewall of an
asymmetrical tire that has a particu-
lar side that must always face out-
ward when mounted on a vehicle.
TYPES OF TIRES
WARNING
∙ When changing or replacing tires, be
sure all four tires are of the same type
(i.e., Summer, All Season or Snow) and
construction. A NISSAN dealer may be
able to help you with information
about tire type, size, speed rating and
availability.
∙ Replacement tires may have a lower
speed rating than the factory
equipped tires, and may not match
the potential maximum vehicle
speed. Never exceed the maximum
speed rating of the tire.
∙ Replacing tires with those not origi-
nally specified by NISSAN could affect
the proper operation of the low tire
pressure warning system.
∙ Always use tires of the same type,
size, brand, construction and tread
pattern on all four wheels. Failure to
do so may result in a circumference
difference between tires on the front
and rear axles which can cause the
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system
to malfunction resulting in personal
injury or death, excessive tire wear
and may damage the transmission
and differential gears.
∙ For additional information regarding
tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety
Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Infor-
mation” (Canada) in the Warranty In-
formation Booklet.
All season tires
NISSAN specifies All Season tires on some
models to provide good performance all
year, including snowy and icy road condi-
tions. All Season tires are identified by ALL
SEASON and/or M&S on the tire sidewall.
Snow tires have better snow traction than
All Season tires and may be more appropri-
ate in some areas.
Do-it-yourself 8-33
Summer tires
NISSAN specifies summer tires on some
models to provide superior performance
on dry roads. Summer tire performance is
substantially reduced in snow and ice.
Summer tires do not have the tire traction
rating “M&S” on the tire sidewall.
If you plan to operate your vehicle in snowy
or icy conditions, NISSAN recommends the
use of SNOW tires or ALL SEASON tires on all
four wheels.
Snow tires
If snow tires are needed, it is necessary to
select tires equivalent in size and load rat-
ing to the original equipment tires. If you do
not, it can adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle.
Generally, snow tires have lower speed rat-
ings than factory equipped tires and may
not match the potential maximum vehicle
speed. Never exceed the maximum speed
rating of the tire.
If you install snow tires, they must be the
same size, brand, construction and tread
pattern on all four wheels.
For additional traction on icy roads, stud-
ded tires may be used. However, some
states, provinces and territories prohibit
their use. Check local laws before installing
studded tires. Skid and traction capabilities
of studded snow tires on wet or dry sur-
faces may be poorer than that of non-
studded snow tires.
TIRE CHAINS
Use of tire chains may be prohibited ac-
cording to location. Check the local laws
before installing tire chains. When installing
tire chains, make sure they are the proper
size for the tires on your vehicle and are
installed according to the chain manufac-
turer’s suggestions. Use only SAE class “S”
chains. Class “S” chains are used on ve-
hicles with restricted tire to vehicle clear-
ance. Vehicles that can use Class “S” chains
are designed to meet the minimum clear-
ances between the tire and the closest ve-
hicle suspension or body component re-
quired to accommodate the use of a
winter traction device (tire chains or
cables). The minimum clearances are de-
termined using the factory equipped tires.
Other types may damage your vehicle. Use
chain tensioners when recommended by
the tire chain manufacturer to ensure a
tight fit. Loose end links of the tire chain
must be secured or removed to prevent
the possibility of whipping action damage
to the fenders or underbody. If possible,
avoid fully loading your vehicle when using
tire chains. In addition, drive at a reduced
speed. Otherwise, your vehicle may be
damaged and/or vehicle handling and
performance may be adversely affected.
Tire chains must be installed only on the
front wheels and not on the rear wheels.
Never install tire chains on a TEMPORARY
USE ONLY spare tire.
Do not use tire chains on dry roads. Driving
with chains in such conditions can cause
damage to the various mechanisms of the
vehicle due to some overstress.
8-34 Do-it-yourself
CHANGING WHEELS AND TIRES
Tire rotation
NISSAN recommends rotating the
tires every 5,000 miles (8,000 km).
For additional information on the tire
replacing procedures, refer to “Flat
tire” in the “In case of emergency”
section of this manual.
As soon as possible, tighten the
wheel nuts to the specified torque
with a torque wrench.
Wheel nut tightening torque:
83 ft-lb (113 N·m)
The wheel nuts must be kept tight-
ened to specifications at all times.
It is recommended that wheel nuts
be tightened to specification at
each tire rotation interval.
WARNING
∙ After rotating the tires, check
and adjust the tire pressure.
∙ Retighten the wheel nuts when
the vehicle has been driven for
600 miles (1,000 km) (also in
cases of a flat tire, etc.).
∙ Do not include the spare tire in
the tire rotation.
∙ For additional information re-
garding tires, refer to “Impor-
tant Tire Safety Information”
(US) or “Tire Safety Information”
(Canada) in the Warranty Infor-
mation Booklet.
Tire wear and damage
1. Wear indicator
2. Location mark
WARNING
∙ Tires should be periodically in-
spected for wear, cracking,
bulging or objects caught in the
tread. If excessive wear, cracks,
bulging or deep cuts are found,
the tire(s) should be replaced.
WDI0258 WDI0259
Do-it-yourself 8-35
∙ The original tires have built-in
tread wear indicators. When the
wear indicators are visible, the
tire(s) should be replaced.
∙ Tires degrade with age and use.
Have tires, including the spare,
over 6 years old checked by a
qualified technician because
some tire damage may not be
obvious. Replace the tires as
necessary to prevent tire failure
and possible personal injury.
∙ Improper service of the spare
tire may result in serious per-
sonal injury. If it is necessary to
repair the spare tire, it is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service.
∙ For additional information re-
garding tires, refer to “Impor-
tant Tire Safety Information”
(US) or “Tire Safety Information”
(Canada) in the Warranty Infor-
mation Booklet.
Replacing wheels and tires
When replacing a tire, use the same size,
tread design, speed rating and load carry-
ing capacity as originally equipped. For ad-
ditional information, refer to “Wheels and
tires” in the “Technical and consumer infor-
mation” section of this manual.
WARNING
∙ The use of tires other than those rec-
ommended or the mixed use of tires
of different brands, construction
(bias, bias-belted or radial), or tread
patterns can adversely affect the ride,
braking, handling, Vehicle Dynamic
Control (VDC) system, ground clear-
ance, body-to-tire clearance, tire
chain clearance, speedometer cali-
bration, headlight aim and bumper
height. Some of these effects may
lead to accidents and could result in
serious personal injury.
∙ If your vehicle was originally
equipped with four tires that were the
same size and you are only replacing
two of the four tires, install the new
tires on the rear axle. Placing new tires
on the front axle may cause loss of
vehicle control in some driving condi-
tions and cause an accident and per-
sonal injury.
∙ If the wheels are changed for any rea-
son, always replace with wheels
which have the same off-set dimen-
sion. Wheels of a different off-set
could cause premature tire wear, de-
grade vehicle handling characteris-
tics, affect the VDC system and/or in-
terference with the brake
discs/drums. Such interference can
lead to decreased braking efficiency
and/or early brake pad wear. For ad-
ditional information on wheel off-set
dimensions, refer to “Wheels and
tires” in the “Technical and consumer
information” section of this manual.
∙ When replacing a wheel without the
TPMS such as the spare tire, the TPMS
will not function and the low tire pres-
sure warning light will flash for ap-
proximately 1 minute. The light will re-
main on after 1 minute. Have your
tires replaced and/or TPMS system
reset as soon as possible. It is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer
for this service.
∙ Replacing tires with those not origi-
nally specified by NISSAN could affect
the proper operation of the TPMS.
8-36 Do-it-yourself
∙ The TPMS sensor may be damaged if
it is not handled correctly. Be careful
when handling the TPMS sensor.
∙ When replacing the TPMS sensor, the
ID registration may be required. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for ID registration.
∙ Do not use a valve stem cap that is not
specified by NISSAN. The valve stem
cap may become stuck.
∙ Be sure that the valve stem caps are
correctly fitted. Otherwise the valve
may be clogged up with dirt and
cause a malfunction or loss of
pressure.
∙ Do not install a damaged or deformed
wheel or tire even if it has been re-
paired. Such wheels or tires could
have structural damage and could fail
without warning.
∙ The use of retread tires is not
recommended.
∙ For additional information regarding
tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety
Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Infor-
mation” (Canada) in the Warranty In-
formation Booklet.
Wheel balance
Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle
handling and tire life. Even with regular use,
wheels can get out of balance. Therefore,
they should be balanced as required.
Wheel balance service should be per-
formed with the wheels off the vehicle.
Spin balancing the wheels on the vehicle
could lead to mechanical damage.
Care of wheels
∙ Wash the wheels when washing the ve-
hicle to maintain their appearance.
∙ Clean the inner side of the wheels when
the wheel is changed or the underside
of the vehicle is washed.
∙ Do not use abrasive cleaners when
washing the wheels.
∙ Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents
or corrosion. Such damage may cause
loss of pressure or poor seal at the tire
bead.
∙ NISSAN recommends waxing the road
wheels to protect against road salt in
areas where it is used during winter.
Spare tire (TEMPORARY USE ONLY
spare tire)
When replacing a wheel without the TPMS
such as the spare tire, the TPMS will not
function.
Observe the following precautions if the
TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire must be
used. Otherwise, your vehicle could be
damaged or involved in an accident:
WARNING
∙ The spare tire should be used for
emergency use only. It should be re-
placed with the standard tire at the
first opportunity to avoid possible tire
or differential damage.
∙ Drive carefully while the TEMPORARY
USE ONLY spare tire is installed. Avoid
sharp turns and abrupt braking while
driving.
∙ Periodically check spare tire inflation
pressure. Always keep the pressure of
the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire
at 420 kPa, 4.2 bar (60 psi).
Do-it-yourself 8-37
∙ With the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare
tire installed do not drive the vehicle
at speeds faster than 50 mph
(80 km/h).
∙ When driving on roads covered with
snow or ice, the TEMPORARY USE
ONLY spare tire should be used on the
rear wheels and the original tire used
on the front wheels (drive wheels).
∙ Tire tread of the TEMPORARY USE
ONLY spare tire will wear at a faster
rate than the standard tire. Replace
the spare tire as soon as the tread
wear indicators appear.
∙ Do not use the spare tire on other
vehicles.
∙ Do not use more than one spare tire at
the same time.
∙ Do not tow a trailer when the TEMPO-
RARY USE ONLY spare tire is installed.
CAUTION
∙ Do not use tire chains on a TEMPO-
RARY USE ONLY spare tire. Tire chains
will not fit properly and may cause
damage to the vehicle.
∙ Because the TEMPORARY USE ONLY
spare tire is smaller than the original
tire, ground clearance is reduced. To
avoid damage to the vehicle, do not
drive over obstacles. Also, do not drive
the vehicle through an automatic car
wash since it may get caught.
8-38 Do-it-yourself
9 Maintenance and schedules
Maintenance requirements......................9-2
General maintenance ........................9-2
Scheduled maintenance .....................9-2
Where to go for service .......................9-2
General maintenance ...........................9-2
Explanation of general maintenance
items.........................................9-2
Explanation of scheduled maintenance items . . . 9-5
Emission control system maintenance:.......9-5
Chassis and body maintenance:..............9-6
Maintenance schedules .........................9-7
Additional maintenance items for
severe operating conditions ..................9-7
Standard maintenance..........................9-8
Emission control system maintenance .......9-8
Chassis & body maintenance................9-10
Maintenance under severe operating
conditions......................................9-12
Severe driving conditions ....................9-12
Maintenance log ...............................9-13
Some day-to-day and regular mainte-
nance is essential to maintain your vehicle
good mechanical condition, as well as its
emissions and engine performance.
It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure
that the scheduled maintenance, as well as
general maintenance, is performed.
As the vehicle owner, you are the only one
who can ensure that your vehicle receives
proper maintenance. You are a vital link in
the maintenance chain.
GENERAL MAINTENANCE
General maintenance includes those items
which should be checked during normal
day-to-day operation. They are essential
for proper vehicle operation. It is your re-
sponsibility to perform these procedures
regularly as prescribed.
Performing general maintenance checks
requires minimal mechanical skill and only
a few general automotive tools.
These checks or inspections can be done
by yourself, a qualified technician or, if you
prefer, a NISSAN dealer.
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE
The maintenance items listed in this sec-
tion are required to be serviced at regular
intervals. However under severe driving
conditions, additional or more frequent
maintenance will be required.
WHERE TO GO FOR SERVICE
If maintenance service is required or your
vehicle appears to malfunction, have the
systems checked and serviced. It is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.
NISSAN technicians are well-trained spe-
cialists and are kept up-to-date with the
latest service information through techni-
cal bulletins, service tips and training pro-
grams. They are completely qualified to
work on NISSAN vehicles before work be-
gins.
You can be confident that a NISSAN deal-
er’s service department can perform the
service needed to meet the maintenance
requirements on your vehicle.
During the normal day-to-day operation of
the vehicle, general maintenance should
be performed regularly as prescribed in
this section. If you detect any unusual
sounds, vibrations or smells, be sure to
check for the cause or have it checked
promptly. In addition, it is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer if you think
that repairs are required.
When performing any checks or mainte-
nance work, closely observe the “Mainte-
nance precautions” in the “Do-it-yourself”
section of this manual.
EXPLANATION OF GENERAL
MAINTENANCE ITEMS
Additional information on the following
items with“*”isfound in the “Do-it-
yourself” section of this manual.
Outside the vehicle
The maintenance items listed here should
be performed from time to time, unless
otherwise specified.
Doors and engine hood: Check that the
doors and engine hood operate properly.
Also ensure that all latches lock securely.
Lubricate hinges, latches, latch pins, rollers
and links if necessary. Make sure that the
MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS GENERAL MAINTENANCE
9-2 Maintenance and schedules
secondary latch keeps the hood from
opening when the primary latch is re-
leased.
When driving in areas using road salt or
other corrosive materials, check lubrica-
tion frequently.
Lights*: Clean the headlights on a regular
basis. Make sure that the headlights, stop
lights, tail lights, turn signal lights, and other
lights are all operating properly and in-
stalled securely. Also check headlight aim.
Road wheel nuts (lug nuts)*: When check-
ing the tires, make sure no wheel nuts are
missing, and check for any loose wheel
nuts. Tighten if necessary.
Tire rotation*: Tires should be rotated ev-
ery 5,000 miles (8,000 km).
Tires*: Check the pressure with a gauge
often and always prior to long distance
trips. If necessary, adjust the pressure in all
tires, including the spare, to the pressure
specified. Check carefully for damage, cuts
or excessive wear.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
transmitter components: Replace the
TPMS transmitter grommet seal, valve core
and cap when the tires are replaced due to
wear or age.
Wheel alignment and balance: If the ve-
hicle should pull to either side while driving
on a straight and level road, or if you detect
uneven or abnormal tire wear, there may
be a need for wheel alignment. If the steer-
ing wheel or seat vibrates at normal high-
way speeds, wheel balancing may be
needed.
For additional information regarding tires,
refer to “Important Tire Safety Information”
(US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in
the Warranty Information Booklet.
Windshield: Clean the windshield on a
regular basis. Check the windshield at least
every six months for cracks or other dam-
age. Have a damaged windshield repaired
by a qualified repair facility.
Windshield wiper blades*: Check for
cracks or wear if they do not wipe properly.
Inside the vehicle
The maintenance items listed here should
be checked on a regular basis, such as
when performing scheduled maintenance,
cleaning the vehicle, etc.
Accelerator pedal: Check the pedal for
smooth operation and make sure the
pedal does not catch or require uneven
effort. Keep the floor mat away from the
pedal.
Brake pedal: Check the pedal for smooth
operation. If the brake pedal suddenly goes
down further than normal, the pedal feels
spongy or the vehicle seems to take longer
to stop, have your vehicle checked imme-
diately. It is recommended that you visit a
NISSAN dealer for this service. Keep the
floor mat away from the pedal.
Brakes: Check that the brakes do not pull
the vehicle to one side when applied.
Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT) P (Park) position mechanism: On a
fairly steep hill check that the vehicle is held
securely with the shift lever in the P (Park)
position without applying any brakes.
Parking brake: Check the parking brake
operation regularly. The vehicle should be
securely held on a fairly steep hill with only
the parking brake applied. If the parking
brake needs adjustment, it is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.
Maintenance and schedules 9-3
Seats: Check seat position controls such
as seat adjusters, seatback recliner, etc., to
ensure they operate smoothly and all
latches lock securely in every position.
Check that the head restraints/headrests
move up and down smoothly and the locks
(if so equipped) hold securely in all latched
positions.
Seat belts: Check that all parts of the seat
belt system (for example, buckles, anchors,
adjusters and retractors) operate properly
and smoothly, and are installed securely.
Check the belt webbing for cuts, fraying,
wear or damage.
Steering wheel: Check for changes in the
steering system, such as excessive free
play, hard steering or strange noises.
Warning lights and chimes: Make sure all
warning lights and chimes are operating
properly.
Windshield defroster: Check that the air
comes out of the defroster outlets properly
and in sufficient quantity when operating
the heater or air conditioner.
Windshield wiper and washer*: Check
that the wipers and washer operate prop-
erly and that the wipers do not streak.
Under the hood and vehicle
The maintenance items listed here should
be checked periodically (for example, each
time you check the engine oil or refuel).
Battery*: Check the fluid level in each cell.
The fluid should be at the bottom of the
filler opening. Vehicles operated in high
temperatures or under severe conditions
require frequent checks of the battery fluid
level.
NOTE:
Care should be taken to avoid situations
that can lead to potential battery dis-
charge and potential no-start conditions
such as:
1. Installation or extended use of elec-
tronic accessories that consume bat-
tery power when the engine is not
running (Phone chargers, GPS, DVD
players, etc.).
2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/or
only driven short distances.
In these cases, the battery may need to
be charged to maintain battery health.
Brake fluid level*: Make sure that the brake
fluid level is between the MIN and MAX lines
on the reservoir.
Engine coolant level*: Check the coolant
level when the engine is cold.
Engine drive belt*: Make sure the drive belt
is not frayed, worn, cracked or oily.
Engine oil level*: Check the level after
parking the vehicle on a level surface with
the engine off. Wait more than 15 minutes
for the oil to drain back into the oil pan.
Exhaust system: Make sure there are no
loose supports, cracks or holes. If the
sound of the exhaust seems unusual or
there is a smell of exhaust fumes, immedi-
ately have the exhaust system inspected. It
is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer for this service. For additional infor-
mation, refer to “Exhaust gas (carbon mon-
oxide)” in the “Starting and driving” section
of this manual.
Fluid leaks: Check under the vehicle for
fuel, oil, water or other fluid leaks after the
vehicle has been parked for a while. Water
dripping from the air conditioner after use
is normal. If you should notice any leaks or if
fuel fumes are evident, check for the cause
and have it corrected immediately.
9-4 Maintenance and schedules
Radiator and hoses: Check the front of the
radiator and clean off any dirt, insects,
leaves, etc., that may have accumulated.
Make sure the hoses have no cracks, defor-
mation, rot or loose connections.
Underbody: The underbody is frequently
exposed to corrosive substances such as
those used on icy roads or to control dust. It
is very important to remove these sub-
stances from the underbody, otherwise
rust may form on the floor pan, frame, fuel
lines and exhaust system. At the end of
winter, the underbody should be thor-
oughly flushed with plain water, in those
areas where mud and dirt may have accu-
mulated. For additional information, refer
to the “Appearance and care” section of this
manual.
Windshield-washer fluid*: Check that
there is adequate fluid in the reservoir.
The following descriptions are provided to
give you a better understanding of the
scheduled maintenance items that should
be regularly checked or replaced. The
maintenance schedule indicates at which
mileage/time intervals each item requires
service.
In addition to scheduled maintenance,
your vehicle requires that some items be
checked during normal day-to-day opera-
tion. For additional information, refer to
“General maintenance” in this section.
Items marked with “*” are recommended
by NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation.
You are not required to perform mainte-
nance on these items in order to maintain
the warranties which come with your
NISSAN. Other maintenance items and in-
tervals are required.
When applicable, additional information
can be found in the “Do-it-yourself” section
of this manual.
NOTE:
NISSAN does not advocate the use of
non-OEM approved aftermarket flush-
ing systems and strongly advises
against performing these services on a
NISSAN product. Many of the aftermar-
ket flushing systems use non-OEM ap-
proved chemicals or solvents, the use of
which has not been validated by NISSAN.
For recommended fuel, lubricants, fluids,
grease, and refrigerant, refer to “Recom-
mended fluids/lubricants and capaci-
ties” in the “Technical and consumer in-
formation” section of this manual.
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
MAINTENANCE:
Drive belt*: Check engine drive belt for
wear, fraying or cracking and for proper
tension. Replace any damaged drive belt.
Engine air filter: Replace at specified inter-
vals. When driving for prolonged periods in
dusty conditions, check/replace the filter
more frequently.
EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULED
MAINTENANCE ITEMS
Maintenance and schedules 9-5
Engine coolant*: Replace coolant at the
specified interval. When adding or replac-
ing coolant, be sure to use only Genuine
NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue)
or equivalent with the proper mixture. (For
additional information on the proper mix-
ture for your area, refer to “Engine cooling
system” in the “Do-it-yourself” section of
this manual.)
NOTE: Mixing any other type of coolant
or the use of non-distilled water may re-
duce the recommended service interval
of the coolant.
Engine oil and oil filter: Replace engine oil
and oil filter at the specified intervals. For
recommended oil grade and viscosity refer
to “Recommended fluids/lubricants and
capacities” in the “Technical and consumer
information” section of this manual.
Fuel lines*: Check the fuel hoses, piping
and connections for leaks, looseness, or
deterioration. Tighten connections or re-
place parts as necessary.
Spark plugs: Replace at specified intervals.
Install new plugs of the type as originally
equipped.
CHASSIS AND BODY
MAINTENANCE:
Brake lines and cables: Visually inspect for
proper installation. Check for chafing,
cracks, deterioration, and signs of leaking.
Replace any deteriorated or damaged
parts immediately.
Brake pads, rotors, drums and linings:
Check for wear, deterioration and fluid
leaks. Replace any deteriorated or dam-
aged parts immediately.
Exhaust system: Visually inspect the ex-
haust pipes, muffler and hangers for leaks,
cracks, deterioration, and damage. Tighten
connections or replace parts as necessary.
Steering gear and linkage, axle and sus-
pension parts, drive shaft boots: Check
for damage, looseness, and leakage of oil
or grease. Under severe driving conditions,
inspect more frequently.
Tire rotation: Tires should be rotated every
5,000 miles (8,000 km) according to the in-
structions under “General maintenance” in
this section. When rotating tires, check for
damage and uneven wear. Replace if nec-
essary.
Transmission fluid/oil: Visually inspect for
signs of leakage at specified intervals.
If using a car-top carrier, or driving on
rough or muddy roads, replace the CVT
fluid every 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or re-
quest the dealer to inspect the fluid dete-
rioration data using a CONSULT. If the dete-
rioration data is more than 210000, replace
the CVT fluid.
9-6 Maintenance and schedules
To help ensure smooth, safe and economi-
cal driving, NISSAN provides two mainte-
nance schedules that may be used, de-
pending upon the conditions in which you
usually drive. These schedules contain
both distance and time intervals, up to
120,000 miles (192,000 km)/144 months. For
most people, the odometer reading will in-
dicate when service is needed. However, if
you drive very little, your vehicle should be
serviced at the regular time intervals
shown in the schedule.
After 120,000 miles
(192,000 km)/144 months, continue
maintenance at the same mileage/time
intervals.
ADDITIONAL MAINTENANCE ITEMS
FOR SEVERE OPERATING
CONDITIONS
Additional maintenance items for severe
operating conditions should be per-
formed on vehicles that are driven under
especially demanding conditions. Addi-
tional maintenance items should be per-
formed if you primarily operate your vehicle
under the following conditions:
∙ Repeated short trips of less than 5 miles
(8 km).
∙ Repeated short trips of less than
10 miles (16 km) with outside tempera-
tures remaining below freezing.
∙ Operating in hot weather in stop-
and-go “rush hour” traffic.
∙ Extensive idling and/or low speed driv-
ing for long distances, such as police,
taxi or door-to-door delivery use.
∙ Driving in dusty conditions.
∙ Driving on rough, muddy or salt spread
roads.
∙ Using a car-top carrier.
NOTE:
For vehicles operated in Canada, both
standard and severe maintenance items
should be performed at every interval.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Maintenance and schedules 9-7
The following tables show the standard
maintenance schedule. Depending upon
weather and atmospheric conditions,
varying road surfaces, individual driving
habits and vehicle usage, additional or
more frequent maintenance may be re-
quired. After 120,000 miles
(192,000 km)/144 months, continue
maintenance at the same mileage/time
interval.
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
Abbreviations: I = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary, R = Replace
MAINTENANCE OPERATION
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or
months, whichever comes first.
miles x 1,000
(km x 1,000)
Months
MAINTENANCE INTERVAL
5
(8)
6
10
(16)
12
15
(24)
18
20
(32)
24
25
(40)
30
30
(48)
36
35
(56)
42
40
(64)
48
45
(72)
54
50
(80)
60
55
(88)
66
60
(96)
72
Drive belt See NOTE (1) I* I* I*
Air cleaner filter See NOTE (2) R R
EVAP vapor lines I* I* I*
Fuel lines I* I* I*
Fuel filter See NOTE (3)
Engine coolant* See NOTE (4)(5)
Engine oil RRRRRRRRRRRR
Engine oil filter RRRRRRRRRRRR
Spark plugs Replace every 105,000 miles (168,000 km)
Intake and exhaust valve clearances* See NOTE (6)
STANDARD MAINTENANCE
9-8 Maintenance and schedules
MAINTENANCE OPERATION
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or
months, whichever comes first.
miles x 1,000
(km x 1,000)
Months
MAINTENANCE INTERVAL
65
(104)
78
70
(112)
84
75
(120)
90
80
(128)
96
85
(136)
102
90
(144)
108
95
(152)
114
100
(160)
120
105
(168)
126
110
(176)
132
115
(184)
138
120
(192)
144
Drive belt See NOTE (1) I* I* I* I* I* I*
Air cleaner filter See NOTE (2) R R
EVAP vapor lines I* I* I*
Fuel lines I* I* I*
Fuel filter See NOTE (3)
Engine coolant* See NOTE (4)(5)
Engine oil RRRRRRRRRRRR
Engine oil filter RRRRRRRRRRRR
Spark plugs See NOTE (6) Replace every 105,000 miles (168,000 km)
Intake and exhaust valve clearances* See NOTE (7)
NOTE:
(1) After 40,000 miles (64,000 km) or 48 months, inspect every 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or 12 months. Replace the drive belt if
found damaged.
(2) If operating mainly in dusty conditions, more frequent maintenance may be required.
(3) Maintenance-free item.
(4) First replacement interval is 105,000 miles (168,000 km) or 84 months. After first replacement, replace every 75,000 miles
(120,000 km) or 60 months.
(5) Use only Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent with proper mixture ratio of 50% antifreeze and 50%
demineralized or distilled water. Mixing any other type of coolant or the use of non-distilled water may reduce the life expectancy
of the factory fill coolant.
(6) Replace spark plug when the plug exceeds 1.35 mm (0.053 in) even if within specified periodic replacement mileage.
(7) Periodic maintenance is not required. However, if valve noise increased, inspect valve clearance.
*: Maintenance items and intervals with “*” are recommended by NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation. The owner need not
perform such maintenance in order to maintain the emission warranty or manufacturer recall liability. Other maintenance items
and intervals are required.
Maintenance and schedules 9-9
CHASSIS & BODY MAINTENANCE
Abbreviations: I = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary, R = Replace,
MAINTENANCE OPERATION
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months,
whichever comes first.
miles x 1,000
(km x 1,000)
Months
MAINTENANCE INTERVAL
5
(8)
6
10
(16)
12
15
(24)
18
20
(32)
24
25
(40)
30
30
(48)
36
35
(56)
42
40
(64)
48
45
(72)
54
50
(80)
60
55
(88)
66
60
(96)
72
Brake lines & cables I I I I I I
Brake pads, rotors, drums and linings夝 II I II I
Brake fluid夝 RRR
CVT fluid See NOTE (1) I I I I I I
Steering gear and linkage, axle and suspension
parts夝
III
Tire rotation See NOTE (2)
Drive shaft boots夝 II I II I
Exhaust system夝 III
In-cabin microfilter RRRR
NISSAN Intelligent Key® battery I R R R
9-10 Maintenance and schedules
MAINTENANCE OPERATION
Perform at number of miles, kilometers or
months, whichever comes first.
miles x 1,000
(km x 1,000)
Months
MAINTENANCE INTERVAL
65
(104)
78
70
(112)
84
75
(120)
90
80
(128)
96
85
(136)
102
90
(144)
108
95
(152)
114
100
(160)
120
105
(168)
126
110
(176)
132
115
(184)
138
120
(192)
144
Brakelines&cables IIIIII
Brake pads, rotors, drums & linings夝 IIIIII
Brake fluid夝 RRR
CVTfluid SeeNOTE(1)IIIIII
Steering gear & linkage, axle & suspension
parts夝
III
Tire rotation See NOTE (2)
Drive shaft boots夝 IIIIII
Exhaust system夝 III
In-cabin microfilter RRRR
NISSAN Intelligent Key® battery R R R R
NOTE:
Maintenance items with “夝” should be performed more frequently according to “Maintenance under severe driving conditions”.
(1) If using a car-top carrier or driving on rough or muddy roads, inspect CVT fluid deterioration at NISSAN dealers every
60,000 miles (96,000 km), then change CVT fluid if necessary. And if the inspection is not performed, change (not just inspect) CVT
fluid every 60,000 miles (96,000 km).
(2) For additional information on tire rotation, refer to “General maintenance” in this section.
Maintenance and schedules 9-11
The maintenance intervals shown on the preceding pages are for normal operating conditions. If the vehicle is mainly operated under
severe driving conditions as shown below, more frequent maintenance must be performed on the following items as shown in the table.
SEVERE DRIVING CONDITIONS
∙ Repeated short trips of less than 5 miles
(8 km).
∙ Repeated short trips of less than
10 miles (16 km) with outside tempera-
tures remaining below freezing.
∙ Operating in hot weather in stop-
and-go “rush hour” traffic.
∙ Extensive idling and/or low speed driv-
ing for long distance, such as police, taxi
or door-to-door delivery use.
∙ Driving in dusty conditions.
∙ Driving on rough, muddy or salt spread
roads.
∙ Using a car-top carrier.
Maintenance operation: Inspect = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary.
Maintenance item Maintenance operation Maintenance interval
Brake fluid Replace Every 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or 12 months
Brake pads, rotors, drums and linings Inspect Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months
Steering gear & linkage, axle & suspension parts Inspect Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months
Drive shaft boots Inspect Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months
Exhaust system Inspect Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months
MAINTENANCE UNDER SEVERE
OPERATING CONDITIONS
9-12 Maintenance and schedules
5,000 Miles (8,000 km) or 6
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:
10,000 Miles (16,000 km) or 12
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:
15,000 Miles (24,000 km) or 18
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:
20,000 Miles (32,000 km) or 24
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:
25,000 Miles (40,000 km) or 30
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:
30,000 Miles (48,000 km) or 36
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:
35,000 Miles (56,000 km) or 42
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:
40,000 Miles (64,000 km) or 48
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:
45,000 Miles (72,000 km) or 54
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:
MAINTENANCE LOG
Maintenance and schedules 9-13
50,000 Miles (80,000 km) or 60
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:
55,000 Miles (88,000 km) or 66
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:
60,000 Miles (96,000 km) or 72
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:
65,000 Miles (104,000 km) or 78
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:
70,000 Miles (112,000 km) or 84
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:
75,000 Miles (120,000 km) or 90
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:
80,000 Miles (128,000 km) or 96
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:
85,000 Miles (136,000 km) or 102
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:
90,000 Miles (144,000 km) or 108
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:
9-14
Maintenance and schedules
95,000 Miles (152,000 km) or 114
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:
100,000 Miles (160,000 km) or
120 Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:
105,000 Miles (168,000 km) or 126
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:
110,000 Miles (176,000 km) or 132
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:
115,000 Miles (184,000 km) or 138
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:
120,000 Miles (192,000 km) or 144
Months
Dealer Name:
Date:
Mileage:
Dealer
Stamp:
Maintenance and schedules 9-15
MEMO
9-16 Maintenance and schedules
10 Technical and consumer information
Recommended fluids/lubricants and
capacities ......................................10-2
Fuel recommendation.......................10-3
Engine oil and oil filter
recommendations ..........................10-6
Air conditioner system refrigerant and
oil recommendations .......................10-7
Specifications ..................................10-8
Engine ......................................10-8
Wheels and tires.............................10-9
Dimensions and weights ....................10-9
When traveling or registering in another
country........................................10-10
Vehicle identification ..........................10-10
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
plate .......................................10-10
Vehicle identification number
(chassis number) ...........................10-10
Engine serial number........................10-11
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label .........10-11
Emission control information label ..........10-11
Tire and Loading Information label .........10-12
Air conditioner specification label........... 10-12
Installing front license plate....................10-12
Vehicle loading information ................... 10-13
Terms ...................................... 10-13
Vehicle load capacity .......................10-14
Securing the load...........................10-15
Loading tips ................................10-16
Measurement of weights ...................10-16
Towing a trailer ................................ 10-17
Flat towing ................................. 10-17
Uniform tire quality grading.................... 10-17
Emission control system warranty.............10-18
Reporting safety defects ......................10-19
Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M)
test............................................10-20
Event Data Recorders (EDR)....................10-20
Owner’s Manual/Service Manual order
information ...................................10-21
The following are approximate capacities. The actual refill capacities may be a little different. When refilling, follow the procedure
described in the “Do-it-yourself” section to determine the proper refill capacity.
Fluid type Capacity (approximate) Recommended Fluids/Lubricants
Metric
Measure
US
Measure
Imperial
Measure
Fuel 41 L 10-7/8 gal 9 gal
• For additional information, refer to “Fuel recommendation” in
this section.
Engine oil*1
Drain and refill
1*: For additional
information, refer to “Engine
oil” in the “Do-it-yourself”
section of this manual.
With oil filter
change
4.1 L 4-3/8 qt 3-5/8 qt
• Genuine “Nissan Motor Oil 0W-20 SN” is recommended.
• If the above motor oil is not available, use an equivalent motor
oil that matches the above grade and viscosity. For additional
information, refer to “Engine oil and oil filter recommendations”
in this section.
• As an alternative to this recommended oil, SAE 10W-30 conven-
tional petroleum based oil may be used and meet all specifica-
tions and requirements necessary to maintain the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty
Without oil filter
change
3.8 L 4 qt 3-3/8 qt
Engine coolant
with reservoir
6.95 L 1-7/8 gal 1-1/2 gal
• Pre-diluted Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue)
or equivalent
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) fluid
For additional information, refer to the
“Do-it-yourself” section of this manual.
• Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3
• NISSAN recommends using Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 (or
equivalent) ONLY in NISSAN CVTs. Do not mix with other fluids.
Using fluids that are not equivalent to Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid
NS-3 may damage the CVT. Damage caused by the use of fluids
other than as recommended is not covered under NISSAN’s New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Brake fluid
Refill to the proper level according to the
instructions in the “Do-it-yourself” section
of this manual.
• Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid, available in
mainland U.S.A. through a NISSAN dealer, or equivalent DOT 3.
Multi-purpose grease — — — • NLGI No. 2 (Lithium soap base)
RECOMMENDED FLUIDS/
LUBRICANTS AND CAPACITIES
10-2 Technical and consumer information
Fluid type Capacity (approximate) Recommended Fluids/Lubricants
Metric
Measure
US
Measure
Imperial
Measure
Air conditioning system refrigerant — — —
• HFO-1234yf (R-1234yf)
• For additional information, refer to “Air conditioner system re-
frigerant and oil recommendations” in this section.
Air conditioning system oil — — —
• Genuine NISSAN A/C System Oil Type PAG or equivalent
• For additional information, refer to “Air conditioner system re-
frigerant and oil recommendations” in this section.
Windshield-washer fluid — — —
• Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & An-
tifreeze or equivalent
FUEL RECOMMENDATION
Use unleaded regular gasoline with an oc-
tane rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock
Index) number (Research octane number
91).
CAUTION
∙ Only vehicles with the E-85 filler door
label can operate on E-85.Fuel system
or other damage can occur if E-85 is
used in vehicles that are not designed
to run on E-85.
∙ Using a fuel other than that specified
could adversely affect the emission
control system, and may also affect
the warranty coverage.
∙ Under no circumstances should a
leaded gasoline be used, because this
will damage the three-way catalyst.
∙ Do not use a fuel containing more
than 15% ethanol in your vehicle. Your
vehicle is not designed to run on a fuel
containing more than 15% ethanol.
Using a fuel containing more than 15%
ethanol in a vehicle not specifically
designed for a fuel containing more
than 15% ethanol can adversely affect
the emission control devices and sys-
tems of the vehicle. Damage caused
by such fuel is not covered by the
NISSAN New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
∙ Do not use fuel that contains the oc-
tane booster methylcyclopentadienyl
manganese tricarbonyl (MMT). Using
fuel containing MMT may adversely
affect vehicle performance and ve-
hicle emissions. Not all fuel dispens-
ers are labeled to indicate MMT con-
tent, so you may have to consult your
gasoline retailer for more details.
Note that Federal and California laws
prohibit the use of MMT in reformu-
lated gasoline.
∙ U.S. government regulations require
ethanol dispensing pumps to be iden-
tified by a small, square, orange and
black label with the common abbre-
viation or the appropriate percentage
for that region.
Technical and consumer information 10-3
Gasoline specifications
NISSAN recommends using gasoline that
meets the World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC)
specifications where it is available. Many of
the automobile manufacturers developed
this specification to improve emission con-
trol system and vehicle performance. Ask
your service station manager if the gaso-
line meets the WWFC specifications.
Reformulated gasoline
Some fuel suppliers are now producing re-
formulated gasolines. These gasolines are
specially designed to reduce vehicle emis-
sions. NISSAN supports efforts towards
cleaner air and suggests that you use re-
formulated gasoline when available.
Gasoline containing oxygenates
Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline contain-
ing oxygenates such as ethanol, Methyl
Tert-butyl Ether (MTBE) and methanol with
or without advertising their presence.
NISSAN does not recommend the use of
fuels of which the oxygenate content and
the fuel compatibility for your NISSAN can-
not be readily determined. If in doubt, ask
your service station manager.
If you use oxygenate-blend gasoline,
please take the following precautions as
the usage of such fuels may cause vehicle
performance problems and/or fuel system
damage.
∙ The fuel should be unleaded and have
an octane rating no lower than that
recommended for unleaded gasoline.
∙ If an oxygenate-blend other than
methanol blend is used, it should
contain no more than 15% oxygenate.
∙ If a methanol blend is used, it should
contain no more than 5% methanol
(methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). It
should also contain a suitable
amount of appropriate cosolvents
and corrosion inhibitors. If not prop-
erly formulated with appropriate co-
solvents and corrosion inhibitors,
such methanol blends may cause fuel
system damage and/or vehicle per-
formance problems. At this time, suf-
ficient data is not available to ensure
that all methanol blends are suitable
for use in NISSAN vehicles.
If any driveability problems such as engine
stalling and difficult hot-starting are expe-
rienced after using oxygenate-blend fuels,
immediately change to a non-oxygenate
fuel or a fuel with a low blend of MTBE.
Take care not to spill gasoline during re-
fueling. Gasoline containing oxygenates
can cause paint damage.
E–15 fuel
E-15 fuel is a mixture of approximately 15%
fuel ethanol and 85% unleaded gasoline.
E-15 can only be used in vehicles designed
to run on E-15 fuel. U.S. government regula-
tions require fuel ethanol dispensing
pumps to be identified with small, square,
orange and black label with the common
abbreviation or the appropriate percent-
age for that region.
E–85 fuel
E-85 fuel is a mixture of approximately 85%
fuel ethanol and 15% unleaded gasoline.
E-85 can only be used in a Flexible Fuel
Vehicle (FFV). Do not use E-85 in your ve-
hicle. U.S. government regulations require
fuel ethanol dispensing pumps to be iden-
tified by a small, square, orange and black
label with the common abbreviation or the
appropriate percentage for that region.
10-4 Technical and consumer information
Fuel containing MMT
MMT, or methylcyclopentadienyl manga-
nese tricarbonyl, is an octane boosting ad-
ditive. NISSAN does not recommend the
use of fuel containing MMT. Such fuel may
adversely affect vehicle performance, in-
cluding the emissions control system. Note
that while some fuel pumps label MMT
content, not all do, so you may have to
consult your gasoline retailer for more de-
tails.
Aftermarket fuel additives
NISSAN does not recommend the use of
any aftermarket fuel additives (for ex-
ample, fuel injector cleaner, octane
booster, intake valve deposit removers,
etc.) which are sold commercially. Many of
these additives intended for gum, varnish
or deposit removal may contain active sol-
vents or similar ingredients that can be
harmful to the fuel system and engine.
Octane rating tips
Using unleaded gasoline with an octane
rating lower than recommended can
cause persistent, heavy “spark knock.”
(“Spark knock” is a metallic rapping
noise.) If severe, this can lead to engine
damage. If you detect a persistent heavy
spark knock even when using gasoline
of the stated octane rating, or if you hear
steady spark knock while holding a
steady speed on level roads, it is recom-
mended that you have a NISSAN dealer
correct the condition. Failure to correct
the condition is misuse of the vehicle, for
which NISSAN is not responsible.
Incorrect ignition timing may result in
spark knock, after-run and/or overheating,
which may cause excessive fuel consump-
tion or engine damage. If any of the above
symptoms are encountered, have your ve-
hicle checked. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer for servicing.
However, now and then you may notice
light spark knock for a short time while
accelerating or driving up hills. This is not
a cause for concern, because you get the
greatest fuel benefit when there is light
spark knock for a short time under heavy
engine load.
Technical and consumer information 10-5
ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER
RECOMMENDATIONS
Selecting the correct oil
It is essential to choose the correct grade,
quality and viscosity engine oil to ensure
satisfactory engine life and performance.
For additional information, refer to “Recom-
mended fluids/lubricants and capacities”
in this section. NISSAN recommends the
use of an energy conserving oil in order to
improve fuel economy.
Select only engine oils that meet the
American Petroleum Institute (API) certifi-
cation or International Lubricant Standard-
ization and Approval Committee (ILSAC)
certification and SAE viscosity standard.
These oils have the API certification mark
on the front of the container. Oils which do
not have the specified quality label should
not be used as they could cause engine
damage.
Oil additives
NISSAN does not recommend the use of oil
additives. The use of an oil additive is not
necessary when the proper oil type is used
and maintenance intervals are followed.
Oil which may contain foreign matter or
has been previously used should not be
used.
Oil viscosity
The engine oil viscosity or thickness
changes with temperature. Because of
this, it is important to select the engine oil
viscosity based on the temperatures at
which the vehicle will be operated before
the next oil change. Choosing an oil viscos-
ity other than that recommended could
cause serious engine damage.
Selecting the correct oil filter
Your new NISSAN vehicle is equipped with a
high-quality Genuine NISSAN oil filter. When
replacing, use a Genuine NISSAN oil filter or
its equivalent for the reason described in
“Change intervals.”
LTI2051
10-6 Technical and consumer information
Change intervals
The oil and oil filter change intervals for
your engine are based on the use of the
specified quality oils and filters. Using en-
gine oil and filters that are not of the speci-
fied quality, or exceeding recommended oil
and filter change intervals could reduce
engine life. Damage to the engine caused
by improper maintenance or use of incor-
rect oil and filter quality and/or viscosity is
not covered by the NISSAN New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
Your engine was filled with a high-quality
engine oil when it was built. You do not have
to change the oil before the first recom-
mended change interval. Oil and filter
change intervals depend upon how you
use your vehicle.
Operation under the following conditions
may require more frequent oil and filter
changes:
∙ repeated short distance driving at cold
outside temperatures
∙ driving in dusty conditions
∙ extensive idling
∙ stop and go commuting
For additional information, refer to the
“Maintenance and schedules” section of
this manual.
AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM
REFRIGERANT AND OIL
RECOMMENDATIONS
The air conditioner system in your
NISSAN vehicle must be charged with the
refrigerant HFO-1234yf (R-1234yf) and
NISSAN A/C system oil Type PAG or the
exact equivalents.
CAUTION
The use of any other refrigerant or oil
will cause severe damage to the air con-
ditioning system and will require the re-
placement of all air conditioner system
components.
The refrigerant HFO-1234yf (R-1234yf) in
your NISSAN vehicle does not harm the
earth’s ozone layer. Although this refriger-
ant does not affect the earth’s atmo-
sphere, certain government regulations re-
quire the recovery and recycling of any
refrigerant during automotive air condi-
tioner system service. A NISSAN dealer has
the trained technicians and equipment
needed to recover and recycle your air con-
ditioner system refrigerant.
It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
dealer when servicing your air conditioner
system.
Technical and consumer information 10-7
ENGINE
Model HR16DE
Type Gasoline, 4-cycle, DOHC
Cylinder arrangement 4-cylinder, inline
Bore x Stroke in (mm) 3.071 x 3.291 (78.0 x 83.6)
Displacement cu in (cm
3
) 97.51 (1,598)
Firing order 1–3–4–2
Idle speed
No adjustment is necessary.
CVT in N (Neutral) position
Ignition timing (degree B.T.D.C. at idle speed)
CO%atidle
Spark plug DILKAR6K-11
Spark plug gap (Nominal) in (mm) 0.043 (1.1)
Camshaft operation Timing chain
This spark ignition system complies with the Canadian standard ICES-002.
SPECIFICATIONS
10-8 Technical and consumer information
WHEELS AND TIRES
Wheel type Size Offset in (mm)
Aluminum 17 x 6.5J 1.77 (45)
Steel 16 x 6J 1.77 (45)
Tire size P205/60R16
P205/55R17
Spare tire T125/90D15
DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS
Overall length in (mm) 169.1 (4,295)
Overall width in (mm) 69.3 (1,760)
Overall height
Without Roof rack in (mm) 62.2 (1,580)
With Roof rack in (mm) 62.4 (1,586)
Track width
Front in (mm) 59.8 (1,520)
Rear in (mm) 60.4 (1,535)
Wheelbase in (mm) 103.1 (2,620)
Gross vehicle weight rating
lbs. (kg)
For additional information,
refer to the “F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.
S.S. certification label” on the
center pillar between the
driver’s side front and rear
doors.
Gross axle weight rating
Front lbs. (kg)
Rear lbs. (kg)
Technical and consumer information 10-9
When planning to drive your NISSAN ve-
hicle in another country, you should first
find out if the fuel available is suitable for
your vehicle's engine.
Using fuel with an octane rating that is too
low may cause engine damage. All gaso-
line vehicles must be operated with un-
leaded gasoline. Therefore, avoid taking
your vehicle to areas where appropriate
fuel is not available.
When transferring the registration of
your vehicle to another country, state,
province or district, it may be necessary
to modify the vehicle to meet local laws
and regulations.
The laws and regulations for motor vehicle
emission control and safety standards
vary according to the country, state, prov-
ince or district; therefore, vehicle specifica-
tions may differ.
When any vehicle is to be taken into an-
other country, state, province or district
and registered, its modifications, trans-
portation and registration are the re-
sponsibility of the user. NISSAN is not re-
sponsible for any inconvenience that
may result.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
(VIN) PLATE
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
plate is attached as shown. This number is
the identification for your vehicle and is
used in the vehicle registration.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
(chassis number)
The vehicle identification number is lo-
cated as shown.
LTI2050 LTI2258
WHEN TRAVELING OR REGISTERING
IN ANOTHER COUNTRY
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
10-10 Technical and consumer information
ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER
The number is stamped on the engine as
shown.
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. CERTIFICATION
LABEL
The Federal/Canadian Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard (F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.) certifi-
cation label is affixed as shown. This label
contains valuable vehicle information, such
as: Gross Vehicle Weight Ratings (GVWR),
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR), month
and year of manufacture, Vehicle Identifi-
cation Number (VIN), etc. Review it carefully.
EMISSION CONTROL
INFORMATION LABEL
The emission control information label is
attached to the underside of the hood as
shown.
HR16DE engine
LTI2260
WTI0172 LTI2268
Technical and consumer information 10-11
TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION
LABEL
The cold tire pressure is shown on the Tire
and Loading Information label. The label is
located as shown.
AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICATION
LABEL
The air conditioner specification label is af-
fixed as shown.
For alignment purposes, there are two
marks on the bumper fascia to indicate the
correct position for each screw.
To install the front license plate:
Use two 6 mm self-tapping screws to at-
tach front license plate to bumper fascia.
NOTE:
Self-tapping screws are not supplied
with vehicle.
LTI2251 LTI2233 LTI2235
INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE PLATE
10-12 Technical and consumer information
WARNING
∙ It is extremely dangerous to
ride in a cargo area inside a ve-
hicle. In a collision, people riding
in these areas are more likely to
be seriously injured or killed.
∙ Do not allow people to ride in
any area of your vehicle that is
not equipped with seats and
seat belts.
∙ Be sure everyone in your vehicle
is in a seat and using a seat belt
properly.
TERMS
It is important to familiarize yourself
with the following terms before
loading your vehicle:
∙ Curb Weight (actual weight of
your vehicle) - vehicle weight in-
cluding: standard and optional
equipment, fluids, emergency
tools, and spare tire assembly.
This weight does not include
passengers and cargo.
∙ GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) - curb
weight plus the combined weight
of passengers and cargo.
∙ GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rat-
ing) - maximum total combined
weight of the unloaded vehicle,
passengers, luggage, hitch, trailer
tongue load and any other op-
tional equipment. This informa-
tion is located on the F.M.V.S.S.
certification label.
∙ GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) -
maximum weight (load) limit
specified for the front or rear axle.
This information is located on the
F.M.V.S.S. certification label.
∙ GCWR (Gross Combined Weight
rating) - The maximum total
weight rating of the vehicle, pas-
sengers, cargo, and trailer.
∙ Vehicle Capacity Weight, Load
limit, Total load capacity - maxi-
mum total weight limit specified
of the load (passengers and
cargo) for the vehicle. This is the
maximum combined weight of
occupants and cargo that can be
loaded into the vehicle. If the ve-
hicle is used to tow a trailer, the
trailer tongue weight must be in-
cluded as part of the cargo load.
This information is located on the
Tire and Loading Information la-
bel.
∙ Cargo capacity - permissible
weight of cargo, the subtracted
weight of occupants from the
load limit.
VEHICLE LOADING INFORMATION
Technical and consumer information 10-13
VEHICLE LOAD CAPACITY
Do not exceed the load limit of your
vehicle shown as “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo” on
the Tire and Loading Information la-
bel. Do not exceed the number of
occupants shown as “Seating Ca-
pacity” on the Tire and Loading Infor-
mation label.
To get “the combined weight of oc-
cupants and cargo”, add the weight
of all occupants, then add the total
luggage weight. Examples are
shown in the following illustration.
Example
LTI2335
10-14 Technical and consumer information
Steps for determining correct
load limit
1. Locate the statement “The com-
bined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX
lbs. or XXX kg” on your vehicle’s
Tire and Loading Information la-
bel.
2. Determine the combined weight
of the driver and passengers
that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight
of the driver and passengers
from XXX lbs. or XXX kg.
4. The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity. For ex-
ample, if the XXX amount equals
1,400 lbs. and there will be five
150 lbs. passengers in your ve-
hicle, the amount of available
cargo and luggage load capac-
ity is 650 lbs. (1,400-750 (5 X 150) =
650 lbs.) or (640-340 (5 X 70) =
300 kg.)
5. Determine the combined weight
of luggage and cargo being
loaded on the vehicle. That
weight may not safely exceed
the available cargo and luggage
load capacity calculated in
step 4.
Before driving a loaded vehicle, con-
firm that you do not exceed the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
or the Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR) for your vehicle. For addi-
tional information, refer to “Measure-
ment of weights” in this section.
Also check tires for proper inflation
pressures. For additional informa-
tion, refer to “Tire and Loading Infor-
mation label” in this section.
SECURING THE LOAD
There are luggage hooks (if so equipped)
located in the cargo area as shown. The
hooks can be used to secure cargo with
ropes or other types of straps.
When securing items using luggage
hooks, do not apply a load over more
than 110 lbs. (490 N) to a single hook.
Cargo area luggage hooks
LIC3577
Technical and consumer information 10-15
WARNING
∙ Properly secure all cargo with ropes or
straps to help prevent it from sliding
or shifting. Do not place cargo higher
than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop
or collision, unsecured cargo could
cause personal injury.
∙ The child restraint top tether strap
may be damaged by contact with
items in the cargo area. Secure any
items in the cargo area. Your child
could be seriously injured or killed in a
collision if the top tether strap is
damaged.
∙ Do not load your vehicle any heavier
than the GVWR or the maximum front
and rear GAWRs. If you do, parts of
your vehicle can break, tire damage
could occur, or it can change the way
your vehicle handles. This could result
in loss of control and cause personal
injury.
LOADING TIPS
∙ The GVW must not exceed GVWR
or GAWR as specified on the F.M-
.V.S.S. certification label.
∙ Do not load the front and rear
axle to the GAWR. Doing so will
exceed the GVWR.
WARNING
∙ Properly secure all cargo with
ropes or straps to help prevent
it from sliding or shifting. Do not
place cargo higher than the
seatbacks. In a sudden stop or
collision, unsecured cargo could
cause personal injury.
∙ Do not load your vehicle any
heavier than the GVWR or the
maximum front and rear
GAWRs. If you do, parts of your
vehicle can break, tire damage
could occur, or it can change the
way your vehicle handles. This
could result in loss of control
and cause personal injury.
∙
Overloading and improper load-
ing not only can shorten the life
of your vehicle and the tire, but
can also cause unsafe vehicle
handling and longer braking dis-
tances. This may cause a prema-
ture tire failure which could re-
sult in a serious accident and
personal injury. Failures caused
by overloading are not covered
by the vehicle’s warranty.
MEASUREMENT OF WEIGHTS
Secure loose items to prevent
weight shifts that could affect the
balance of your vehicle.When the ve-
hicle is loaded, drive to a scale and
weigh the front and the rear wheels
separately to determine axle loads.
Individual axle loads should not ex-
ceed either of the Gross Axle Weight
Ratings (GAWR). The total of the axle
loads should not exceed the Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). These
ratings are given on the vehicle cer-
tification label. If weight ratings are
exceeded, move or remove items to
bring all weights below the ratings.
10-16
Technical and consumer information
Do not tow a trailer with your vehicle.
FLAT TOWING
Towing your vehicle with all four wheels on
the ground is sometimes called flat towing.
This method is sometimes used when
towing a vehicle behind a recreational ve-
hicle, such as a motor home.
CAUTION
∙ Failure to follow these guidelines can
result in severe transmission damage.
∙ Whenever flat towing your vehicle, al-
ways tow forward, never backward.
∙ Never tow your front wheel drive ve-
hicle with the front tires on the
ground. Doing so may cause serious
and expensive damage to the
powertrain.
∙ DO NOT tow any continuously variable
transmission vehicle with all four
wheels on the ground (flat towing).
Doing so WILL DAMAGE internal trans-
mission parts due to lack of transmis-
sion lubrication.
∙ For emergency towing procedures re-
fer to “Towing recommended by
NISSAN” in the “In case of emergency”
section of this manual.
Continuously Variable
Transmission
To tow a vehicle equipped with a continu-
ously variable transmission, an appropriate
vehicle dolly MUST be placed under the
towed vehicle’s drive wheels. Always follow
the dolly manufacturer’s recommenda-
tions when using their product.
DOT (Department of Transportation) Qual-
ity Grades: All passenger car tires must
conform to federal safety requirements in
addition to these grades.
Quality grades can be found where appli-
cable on the tire sidewall between tread
shoulder and maximum section width. For
example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature
A
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rat-
ing based on the wear rate of the tire when
tested under controlled conditions on a
specified government test course. For ex-
ample, a tire graded 150 would wear one
and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the
government course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from
the norm due to variations in driving habits,
service practices and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
TOWING A TRAILER UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING
Technical and consumer information 10-17
Traction AA, A, B and C
The traction grades, from highest to low-
est, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades repre-
sent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pave-
ment as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction perfor-
mance.
WARNING
The traction grade assigned to this tire
is based on straight-ahead braking
traction tests, and does not include ac-
celeration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
Temperature A, B and C
The temperature grades are A (the high-
est), B, and C, representing the tire’s resis-
tance to the generation of heat, and its
ability to dissipate heat when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high tem-
perature can cause the material of the tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and ex-
cessive temperature can lead to sudden
tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance which all passenger
car tires must meet under the Federal Mo-
tor Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance on
the laboratory test wheel than the mini-
mum required by law.
WARNING
The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly in-
flated and not overloaded. Excessive
speed, under-inflation, or excessive
loading, either separately or in combi-
nation, can cause heat build-up and
possible tire failure.
Your NISSAN vehicle is covered by the fol-
lowing emission warranties:
For USA
1. Emission Defects Warranty
2. Emissions Performance Warranty
Details of this warranty may be found with
other vehicle warranties in your Warranty
Information Booklet which comes with
your NISSAN vehicle. If you did not receive a
Warranty Information Booklet, or it is lost,
you may obtain a replacement by writing
to:
∙ Nissan North America, Inc.
Consumer Affairs Department
P.O. Box 685003
Franklin, TN 37068-5003
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
WARRANTY
10-18 Technical and consumer information
For Canada
Emission Control System Warranty
Details of this warranty may be found with
other vehicle warranties in your Warranty
Information Booklet which comes with
your NISSAN vehicle. If you did not receive a
Warranty Information Booklet, or it is lost,
you may obtain a replacement by writing
to:
∙ Nissan Canada Inc.
5290 Orbitor Drive
Mississauga, Ontario, L4W 4Z5
For USA
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect which could cause a crash or
could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the Na-
tional Highway Traffic Safety Admin-
istration (NHTSA) in addition to noti-
fying NISSAN.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints,
it may open an investigation, and if it
finds that a safety defect exists in a
group of vehicles, it may order a re-
call and remedy campaign. However,
NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you,
your dealer, or NISSAN.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at
1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-
9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov;
or write to: Administrator, NHTSA,
400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington,
D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other
information about motor vehicle
safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
You may notify NISSAN by contact-
ing our Consumer Affairs Depart-
ment, toll-free, at 1-800-NISSAN-1.
For Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect which could cause a crash or
could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform Trans-
port Canada in addition to notifying
NISSAN.
If Transport Canada receives com-
plaints, it may open an investigation,
and if it finds that a safety defect
exists in a group of vehicles, it may
request that NISSAN conduct a recall
campaign. However, Transport
Canada cannot become involved in
individual problems between you,
your dealer, or NISSAN.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
Technical and consumer information 10-19
You may contact Transport Canada’s
Defect Investigations and Recalls Divi-
sion toll free at 1-800-333-0510. You
may also report safety defects online
at: https://wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-
Sec-Sur/7/PCDB-BDPP/fc-
cp.aspx?lang=eng (English speakers)
or https://wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-
Sec-Sur/7/PCDB-BDPP/fc-
cp.aspx?lang=fra (French speakers)
Additional information concerning
motor vehicle safety may be ob-
tained from Transport Canada’s
Road Safety Information Centre at
1-800-333-0371 or online at
www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety (English
speakers) or
www.tc.gc.ca/securiteroutiere
(French speakers).
To notify NISSAN of any safety con-
cerns please contact our Consumer
Information Centre toll free at 1-800-
387-0122.
Due to legal requirements in some states
and Canadian Provinces, your vehicle may
be required to be in what is called the
“ready condition” for an
Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test of the
emission control system.
The vehicle is set to the “ready condition”
when it is driven through certain driving
patterns. Usually, the ready condition can
be obtained by ordinary usage of the ve-
hicle.
If a powertrain system component is re-
paired or the battery is disconnected, the
vehicle may be reset to a “not ready” condi-
tion. Before taking the I/M test, check the
vehicle’s inspection/maintenance test
readiness condition. Place the ignition
switch in the ON position without starting
the engine. If the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) comes on steady for 20 seconds
and then blinks for 10 seconds , the I/M test
condition is “not ready”. If the MIL does not
blink after 20 seconds, the I/M test condi-
tion is “ready”. It is recommended that you
visit a NISSAN dealer to set the “ready con-
dition” or to prepare the vehicle for testing.
This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data
Recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an
EDR is to record, in certain crash or near
crash-like situations, such as an air bag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data
that will assist in understanding how a ve-
hicle’s systems performed. The EDR is de-
signed to record data related to vehicle dy-
namics and safety systems for a short
period of time, typically 30 seconds or less.
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to re-
cord such data as:
∙ How various systems in your vehicle
were operating;
∙ Whether or not the driver and passen-
ger safety belts were buckled/fastened;
∙ How far (if at all) the driver was depress-
ing the accelerator and/or brake pedal;
and,
∙ How fast the vehicle was traveling.
∙ Sounds are not recorded.
READINESS FOR INSPECTION/
MAINTENANCE (I/M) TEST
EVENT DATA RECORDERS (EDR)
10-20 Technical and consumer information
These data can help provide a better un-
derstanding of the circumstances in which
crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data
are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-
trivial crash situation occurs; no data are
recorded by the EDR under normal driving
conditions and no personal data (e.g.
name, gender, age and crash location) are
recorded. However, other parties, such as
law enforcement, could combine the EDR
data with the type of personally identifying
data routinely acquired during a crash in-
vestigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special
equipment is required and access to the
vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to
the vehicle manufacturer and NISSAN
dealer, other parties, such as law enforce-
ment, that have the special equipment, can
read the information if they have access to
the vehicle or the EDR. EDR data will only be
accessed with the consent of the vehicle
owner or lessee or as otherwise required or
permitted by law.
Genuine NISSAN Service Manuals for this
model year and prior can be purchased. A
Genuine NISSAN Service Manual is the best
source of service and repair information for
your vehicle. This manual is the same one
used by the factory-trained technicians
working at NISSAN dealerships. Genuine
NISSAN Owner’s Manuals can also be pur-
chased.
For USA
For current pricing and availability of Genu-
ine NISSAN Service Manuals, contact:
www.nissan-techinfo.com
For current pricing and availability of Genu-
ine NISSAN Owner’s Manuals, contact:
1-800-247-5321
For Canada
To purchase a copy of a Genuine NISSAN
Service Manual or Owner’s Manual, for this
model year and prior, please contact your
nearest NISSAN dealer. For the phone num-
ber and location of a NISSAN dealer in your
area, call the NISSAN Information Center at
1-800-387-0122 and a bilingual NISSAN rep-
resentative will assist you.
OWNER’S MANUAL/SERVICE
MANUAL ORDER INFORMATION
Technical and consumer information 10-21
MEMO
10-22 Technical and consumer information
11 Index
A
ActiveRideControl(ARC)..........5-60
Air bag (See supplemental restraint
system) .....................1-42
Air bag system
Front (See supplemental front impact
airbagsystem)..............1-53
Air bag warning labels ............1-63
Airbagwarninglight..........1-63, 2-17
Air bag warning light,
supplemental ..............1-63, 2-17
Air cleaner housing filter ..........8-15
Air conditioner
Air conditioner operation ....4-34,4-40
Air conditioner specification label . .10-12
Air conditioner system refrigerant and
oil recommendations ..........10-7
Air conditioner system refrigerant
recommendations ............10-7
Heater and air conditioner .......4-39
Heater and air conditioner
(manual) ..................4-31
Servicing air conditioner ........4-42
Air flow charts.................4-35
Alarm system (See vehicle
security system) ...............2-34
Anchor point locations ...........1-25
Antenna ....................4-64
Antifreeze....................5-61
Anti-lock brake warning light ........2-11
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) ......5-54
Audible reminders ..............2-20
Audiosystem.................4-42
AM/FMradio............4-48,4-50
AM radio operation ...........4-50
AMradioreception............4-43
Auxliliary (AUX) devices operation . . .4-52
Bluetooth® audio.............4-59
FM radio operation ............4-51
FMradioreception............4-43
iPod®Player................4-56
iPod® player operation .........4-56
Radio ....................4-42
Steering wheel audio control
switch....................4-63
USB Connections.............4-54
USBinterface...............4-53
Autolightswitch...............2-42
Automatic
Automatic power window switch. . .2-60
Automatic door locks .............3-6
Automatic Emergency Braking
(AEB) ....................2-11, 5-41
B
Battery..................5-61,8-11
Charge warning light...........2-12
Battery replacement.............8-21
Keyfob...................8-21
NISSAN Intelligent Key® .........8-21
Before starting the engine .........5-13
Belt(Seedrivebelt)..............8-13
Blind Spot Warning (BSW) ..........5-22
Bluetooth® audio...............4-59
Bluetooth® hands-free phone
system .....................4-68
Bluetooth® connections ........4-84
Connecting procedure .........4-73
Phone indicators .............4-72
Text messaging .............4-80
Booster seats .................1-39
Brake
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) ....5-54
Brakefluid..................8-9
Brakelight(Seestoplight).......8-25
B
rakesystem...............5-54
Brakewarninglight............2-11
Brakewearindicators.......2-20,8-17
Parking brake operation.........5-21
Self-adjustingbrakes ..........8-17
Brakeassist..................5-55
Brakefluid....................8-9
Brakes......................8-17
Brakesystem.................5-54
Break-in schedule ..............5-49
Brightness/contrast button .........4-8
Brightness control
Instrument panel.............2-44
Bulb check/instrument panel .......2-11
Bulb replacement ..............8-25
C
Capacities and recommended fuel/
lubricants....................10-2
Cargocover...................2-53
Cargo (See vehicle loading
information)..................10-13
Car phone or CB radio ............4-68
Check tire pressure ..............2-31
Childrestraints........1-18, 1-19, 1-21, 1-23
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers
forCHildren)System ...........1-23
Precautions on child
restraints.........1-21, 1-28, 1-34, 1-39
Top tether strap anchor point
locations...................1-25
Child restraint with top tether strap . . . .1-25
Child safety rear door lock ..........3-6
Chimes, audible reminders .........2-20
Cleaningexteriorandinterior......7-2,7-4
Clockset.....................4-6
Coldweatherdriving.............5-61
Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT) .......................5-15
Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT) fluid...................8-9
Driving with Continuously Variable
Transmission (CVT) ............5-15
Transmission shift selector
lockrelease.................5-18
Control panel buttons .............4-3
Brightness/contrast button .......4-8
Controls
Audio controls (steering wheel).....4-63
Heater and air conditioner controls
(automatic).................4-39
Heater and air conditioner controls
(manual) ...................4-31
Coolant
Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants...............10-2
Changing engine coolant .........8-5
Checking engine coolant level ......8-5
Corrosionprotection..............7-7
Cruisecontrol.................5-39
Cupholders...................2-51
Curtain side-impact and rollover
airbag......................1-59
D
Daytime Running Light System.......2-43
Defroster switch
Rear window and outside mirror
defrosterswitch...........2-40,4-41
Rear window defroster switch . .2-40, 4-33
Dimensions and weights...........10-9
Dimmer switch for instrument panel . . .2-44
Display......................2-21
Display controls (see
control panel buttons) .............4-3
Door locks ..................3-4,3-5
Door open warning light ...........2-13
Drivebelt.....................8-13
Driving
Cold weather driving ...........5-61
Driving with Continuously Variable
Transmission (CVT) ............5-15
Precautions when starting
anddriving..................5-2
Drivingthevehicle...............5-15
E
Economy - fuel .................5-51
Emergency engine shutoff ..........5-11
Emission control information label . . . .10-11
Emission control system warranty . . . .10-18
Engine
Before starting the engine ........5-13
Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants...............10-2
Changing engine coolant .........8-5
Changing engine oil ............8-6
Changing engine oil filter .........8-8
Checking engine coolant level ......8-5
Checking engine oil level .........8-5
Engine compartment check
locations...................8-3
Engine cooling system ..........8-4
Engine oil ...................8-5
Engine oil and oil filter
recommendation .............10-6
Engine oil pressure warning light ....2-13
Engine oil viscosity.............10-6
Engine serial number...........10-11
Engine specifications ...........10-8
Starting the engine ............5-14
EventDatarecorders............10-20
Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide).......
5-2
Explanation of maintenance items .....9-2
Explanation of scheduled maintenance
items.......................9-5
Extended storage switch ..........2-48
11-2
F
Flashers (See hazard
warning flasher switch) ............6-2
Flattire....................6-3,6-3
Floormatpositioningaid...........7-5
Fluid
Brakefluid..................8-9
Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants...............10-2
Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT) fluid...................8-9
Engine coolant ...............8-4
Engine oil ...................8-5
F.M.V.S.S. certification label..........10-11
Foglightswitch................2-45
Front air bag system (See
supplemental restraint system) ......1-53
Frontseats....................1-2
Fuel
Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants...............10-2
Fuel economy ...............5-51
Fuel-filler door lock opener lever ....3-24
Fuel gauge ..................2-8
Fueloctanerating.............10-5
Fuel recommendation ..........10-3
Fuelefficientdrivingtips...........5-50
Fuel-filler door .................3-24
Fuel gauge ....................2-8
Fuses .......................8-18
Fusiblelinks...................8-19
G
Gauge
Fuel gauge ..................2-8
Odometer ..................2-6
Speedometer..............2-5,2-6
Tachometer .................2-7
Trip odometer .............2-5,2-6
General maintenance .............9-2
Glovebox....................2-51
Grocery hooks .................2-53
H
Hands-free phone system,
Bluetooth®...................4-68
Hazard warning flasher switch........6-2
Headlight and turn signal switch ......2-41
Headlightcontrolswitch...........2-41
Headlights ...................8-23
Headrestraints .................1-5
Heated seat switches ............2-45
Heater
Heater and air conditioner .......4-39
Heater and air conditioner
(manual) ...................4-31
Heater operation ..........4-33,4-41
Hill start assist system ............5-60
Hood .......................3-21
Hook
Luggage hook ...............2-52
Horn.......................2-45
I
Ignition switch
Push-button ignition switch .......5-9
Immobilizer system...........2-36,5-13
Important vehicle information label. . . .10-11
In-cabinmicrofilter..............8-15
Increasing fuel economy ...........5-51
Indicator
NISSAN Intelligent Key® battery
discharge indicator ............5-12
Indicator lights and audible reminders
(See warning/indicator lights and audible
reminders)....................2-17
Informationdisplay..............2-21
Instrument brightness control .......2-44
Instrument panel .............0-6,2-2
Instrument panel dimmer switch .....2-44
Integr
ated Dynamics-control Module. . .5-59
Intelligent Around View Monitor ......4-15
Intelligent Engine Brake (I-EB)........5-59
Intelligent Key system
Key operating range ............3-8
Mechanical key ...............3-3
Remote keyless entry operation ....3-12
Troubleshooting guide ..........3-16
Warning signals ..............3-16
Intelligent Trace Control (I-TC)........5-59
Interiorlight...................2-61
iPod®Player ..................4-56
ISOFIX child restraints .............1-23
J
Jumpstarting...............6-9,8-12
11-3
K
Key.........................3-2
Key fob battery replacement ........8-21
Keyless entry
With Intelligent Key system
(See Intelligent Key system) .......3-12
Keys
NISSAN Intelligent Key® ..........3-6
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer
Systemkeys.................3-3
L
Labels
Air conditioner specification label . . .10-12
Emission control information label . .10-11
Engine serial number...........10-11
F.M.V.S.S. certification label........10-11
Tire and Loading Information label . .10-12
Vehicle identification number (VIN) . .10-10
Vehicle identification number (VIN)
plate.....................10-10
Warning labels (for SRS)..........1-63
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers
forCHildren)System .............1-23
Launch bar menu................4-8
License plate
Installing the license plate .......10-12
Liftgate......................3-21
Light
Airbagwarninglight........1-63, 2-17
Brakelight(Seestoplight)........8-25
Bulb check/instrument panel ......2-11
Bulb replacement .............8-25
Charge warning light ...........2-12
ExteriorandInteriorlights........8-25
Foglights..................8-23
Foglightswitch..............2-45
Headlight and turn signal switch ....2-41
Headlightcontrolswitch.........2-41
Headlights .................8-23
Interiorlight.................2-61
Lightbulbs.................8-23
Low tire pressure warning light .....2-13
Low windshield-washer fluid
warninglight................2-15
Passenger air bag and status light. . .1-53
Personal lights ...............2-62
Security indicator light ..........2-19
Trunklight..................2-63
Warning/indicator lights and
audible reminders .............2-17
Lights......................8-23
Maplights..................2-62
Lock
Child safety rear door lock ........3-6
Door locks ................3-4,3-5
Fuel-filler door lock opener lever . . . .3-24
Power door locks ..............3-5
Lowfuelwarninglight......2-13,2-15,2-31
Low tire pressure warning light .......2-13
Low windshield-washer fluid
warninglight..................2-15
Luggage hook .................2-52
Luggage rack (see roof rack) .....2-54,2-55
Luggage (See vehicle loading
information)..................10-13
M
Maintenance
General maintenance ...........9-2
Insidethevehicle..............9-3
Maintenance precautions.........8-2
Outsidethevehicle.............9-2
Seat belt maintenance ..........1-17
Under the hood and vehicle .......9-4
Maintenance log ................9-13
Maintenance requirements..........9-2
Maintenance schedules ............9-7
Maintenance under severe operation
conditions....................9-12
Malfunctionindicatorlight..........2-18
Manual front seat adjustment ........1-3
Maplights....................2-62
Menu button ...................4-6
Meters and gauges...............2-4
Instrument brightness control .....2-44
Mirror
Outsidemirrors..............3-28
Rearview ..................3-28
Vanitymirror................3-27
Mirrors......................3-28
Moving Object Detection (MOD) ......4-26
N
NISSAN Anti-Theft System .......2-35,5-12
NissanConnect® Owner's Manual ......
4-2
NISSAN Intelligent Key® ............3-6
NISSAN Intelligent Key® battery
discharge indicator ..............5-12
11-4
NISSAN Intelligent Key™ ............3-2
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer
System ..................2-36,5-13
O
Octane rating (See fuel octane rating). . .10-5
Odometer ....................2-6
Oil
Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants...............10-2
Changing engine oil ............8-6
Changing engine oil filter .........8-8
Checking engine oil level .........8-5
Engine oil ...................8-5
Engine oil and oil filter
recommendation .............10-6
Engine oil viscosity.............10-6
Outsidemirrors................3-28
Overheat
Ifyourvehicleoverheats.........6-11
Owner's manual order form ........10-21
Owner's manual/service manual
orderinformation...............10-21
P
Parking
Parking brake operation .........5-21
Parking/parkingonhills.........5-52
Personal lights .................2-62
Phone, Bluetooth® hands-free system . .4-68
Power
Power door locks ..............3-5
Poweroutlet................2-47
Powerrearwindows...........2-59
Power steering system..........5-53
Powerwindows..............2-58
Rearpowerwindows...........2-59
Poweroutlet..................2-47
Powersteering.................5-53
Precautions
Maintenance precautions.........8-2
On-pavement and off-road
drivingprecautions.............5-7
Precautions on booster
seats............1-21, 1-28, 1-34, 1-39
Precautions on child
restraints.........1-21, 1-28, 1-34, 1-39
Precautions on seat belt usage .....1-10
Precautions on supplemental
restraint system ..............1-42
Precautions when starting
and driving ..................5-2
Programmable features............4-6
Push starting ..................6-11
R
Radio
Car phone or CB radio ..........4-68
FM/AMradio................4-48
Steering wheel audio control
switch....................4-63
Radio frequency remote control
Key operation ................3-9
Readiness for inspection maintenance
(I/M) test ....................10-20
RearCrossTrafficAlert(RCTA)........5-31
Rearpowerwindows.............2-59
Rearseat.....................1-4
Rearviewmirror................3-28
RearViewMonitor................4-9
Rear window and outside mirror
defrosterswitch.............2-40,4-41
Rearwindowdefrosterswitch....2-40,4-33
Rear window wiper and
washer switches................2-39
Recommended Fluids ............10-2
Recorders
EventData.................10-20
Refrigerant recommendation ........10-7
Registering a vehicle in another
country .....................10-10
Remote Engine Start ..........3-18,5-15
Reporting safety defects (US only) . . . .10-19
Roofrack.................2-54,2-55
S
Safety
Child safety rear door lock ........3-6
Childseatbelts......1-21, 1-28, 1-34, 1-39
Reporting safety defects (US only) . .10-19
Seat adjustment
Front manual seat adjustment ......1-3
Rear seat adjustment ...........1-4
Seatback pockets ...............
2-49
Seat belt
Childsafety.................1-18
Infants and small children ........1-19
InjuredPerson................1-13
Largerchildren...............1-19
Precautionsonseatbeltusage.....1-10
11-5
Pregnant women..............1-13
Seat belt extenders ............1-17
Seat belt maintenance ..........1-17
Seatbelts................1-10, 7-6
Shoulder belt height adjustment . . . .1-16
Three-pointtypewithretractor.....1-13
Seat belt extenders ..............1-17
Seatbeltwarninglight.........1-13, 2-16
Seats
Adjustment ..................1-2
Frontseats..................1-2
Manual front seat adjustment ......1-3
Rearseat...................1-4
Security indicator light ............2-19
Security system (NISSAN Anti-Theft
System), engine start ..........2-35,5-12
Security system (NISSAN Vehicle
Immobilizer System), engine start . .2-36, 5-13
Security systems
Vehicle security system .........2-34
Self-adjustingbrakes.............8-17
Service manual order form .........10-21
Servicing air conditioner ...........4-42
Shifting
Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT) .....................5-17
Shoulder belt height adjustment ......1-16
Side air bag system (See supplemental
side air bag, curtain and rollover air bag
systems) .....................1-59
Siri® Eyes-Free .................4-65
Spark plug replacement ...........8-14
Spark plugs ...................8-14
Specifications .................10-8
Speedometer................2-5,2-6
SRS warning label ...............1-63
Stability control ................5-56
Standard maintenance ............9-8
Starting
Before starting the engine ........5-13
Jumpstarting.............6-9,8-12
Precautions when starting
anddriving..................5-2
Push starting ................6-11
Starting the engine ............5-14
Starting the engine ..............5-14
Steering
Powersteeringsystem..........5-53
Steering wheel .................3-26
Steering wheel audio control switch . . .4-63
Stoplight....................8-25
Storage.....................2-49
Storagetray..................2-50
Sunvisors....................3-26
Supplemental air bag warning labels . . .1-63
Supplemental air bag warning
light.....................1-63, 2-17
Supplemental front impact
airbagsystem.................1-53
Supplemental restraint system
Information and warning labels . . . .1-63
Precautions on supplemental
restraintsystem..............1-42
Supplemental restraint system
(Supplemental air bag system) .......1-42
Switch
Autolightswitch..............2-42
Automatic power window switch . . .2-60
Foglightswitch..............2-45
Hazard warning flasher switch......6-2
Headlight and turn signal switch ....2-41
Headlightcontrolswitch.........2-41
Instrument brightness control .....2-44
Power door lock switch ..........3-5
R
ear window and outside mirror
defrosterswitch...........2-40,4-41
Rear window defroster switch . .2-40, 4-33
Rear window wiper and
washer switches..............2-39
Turn signal switch .............2-44
T
Tachometer ...................2-7
Theft (NISSAN Anti-Theft System),
engine start ...............2-35,5-12
Theft (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer
System), engine start ..........2-36,5-13
Three-waycatalyst...............5-3
Tire
Flattire..................6-3,6-3
Spare tire................6-4,8-37
Tire and Loading Information
label .....................10-12
Tire chains .................8-34
Tire pressure ................8-27
Tirerotation ................8-35
Types of tires ................8-33
Uniform tire quality grading.......10-17
Wheels and tires ...........8-27,10-9
Wheel/tire size ...............10-9
Tire pressure
Low tire pressure warning light .....2-13
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS).......................5-3
Toptetherstrapchildrestraint.......1-25
11-6
Towing
4-wheel drive models ...........6-13
Flattowing.................10-17
Trailertowing...............10-17
Towingatrailer................10-17
Towingyourvehicle..............6-12
Transmission
Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT) fluid...................8-9
Driving with Continuously Variable
Transmission (CVT) ............5-15
Travel (See registering a vehicle in
another country) ...............10-10
Trip odometer ...............2-5,2-6
Trunklight....................2-63
Turn signal switch ...............2-44
U
Uniform tire quality grading.........10-17
USB/iPod® Charging Ports .........4-64
USB (Universal Serial Bus) Connection Port
(models without Navigation System) . . .4-53
V
Vanitymirror..................3-27
Variable voltage control system ......8-13
Vehicle dimensions and weights ......10-9
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)
OFFswitch...................2-47
Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) system . .5-56
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system. .5-56
Vehicle identification .............10-10
Vehicle identification number (VIN) . . . .10-10
Vehicle identification number (VIN)
(Chassis number) ...............10-10
Vehicle identification number (VIN)
plate.......................10-10
Vehicle immobilizer system ......2-36,5-13
VehicleInformationDisplay.........2-21
Vehicle loading information ........10-13
Vehiclerecovery................6-13
Vehicle security system ...........2-34
Vehicle security system (NISSAN
Anti-Theft System), engine start . . .2-35, 5-12
Vehicle security system (NISSAN Vehicle
Immobilizer System), engine start . .2-36, 5-13
Vents.......................4-30
Visors......................3-26
Voice Prompt Interrupt ............4-71
W
Warning
Airbagwarninglight........1-63, 2-17
Anti-lock brake warning light ......2-11
Battery charge warning light ......2-12
Brakewarninglight............2-11
Door open warning light .........2-13
Engine oil pressure warning light ....2-13
Hazard warning flasher switch......6-2
Lowfuelwarninglight....2-13,2-15,2-31
Lowtirepressurewarninglight.....2-13
Low windshield-washer fluid
warninglight................2-15
Passenger air bag and status light. . .1-53
Seatbeltwarninglight.......1-13, 2-16
Supplemental air bag
warninglight.............1-63, 2-17
Vehicle security system .........2-34
Warning/indicator lights and
audible reminders .............2-17
Warning labels (for SRS)..........1-63
Warning/indicator lights and audible
reminders ....................2-17
Audible reminders .............2-17
Indicatorlights...............2-17
Warninglights................2-17
Warninglights..................2-17
Warning lights, indicator lights and
audible reminders ............0-9,2-10
Warningsystemsswitch...........2-46
Washer switch
Rear window wiper and washer
switches...................2-39
Weights (See dimensions and
weights).....................10-9
Wheels and tires .............8-27,10-9
Wheel/tire size .................10-9
When traveling or registering in
another country ...............10-10
Windows ....................2-58
Locking passengers' windows .....2-59
Powerrearwindows...........2-59
Powerwindows..............2-58
Rearpowerwindows...........2-59
Windshield-washer fluid ...........8-10
Windshield wiper blades ...........8-16
Wiper
Rear window wiper and washer
switches...................2-39
Wiper blades ................8-16
Wiper and washer switch ..........2-37
11-7
FUEL RECOMMENDATION:
Use unleaded regular gasoline with an oc-
tane rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock In-
dex) number (Research octane number 91).
CAUTION
∙ Only vehicles with the E-85 filler door
label can operate on E-85.Fuel system
or other damage can occur if E-85 is
used in vehicles that are not designed
to run on E-85.
∙ Using a fuel other than that specified
could adversely affect the emission
control system, and may also affect
the warranty coverage.
∙ Under no circumstances should a
leaded gasoline be used, because this
will damage the three-way catalyst.
∙ Do not use a fuel containing more
than 15% ethanol in your vehicle. Your
vehicle is not designed to run on a fuel
containing more than 15% ethanol.
Using a fuel containing more than 15%
ethanol in a vehicle not specifically
designed for a fuel containing more
than 15% ethanol can adversely affect
the emission control devices and sys-
tems of the vehicle. Damage caused
by such fuel is not covered by the
NISSAN New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
∙ Do not use fuel that contains the oc-
tane booster methylcyclopentadienyl
manganese tricarbonyl (MMT). Using
fuel containing MMT may adversely
affect vehicle performance and ve-
hicle emissions. Not all fuel dispens-
ers are labeled to indicate MMT con-
tent, so you may have to consult your
gasoline retailer for more details.
Note that Federal and California laws
prohibit the use of MMT in reformu-
lated gasoline.
∙ U.S. government regulations require
ethanol dispensing pumps to be iden-
tified by a small, square, orange and
black label with the common abbre-
viation or the appropriate percentage
for that region.
For additional information, refer to “Recom-
mended fluids/lubricants and capacities”
in the “Technical and consumer informa-
tion” section of this manual.
ENGINE OIL RECOMMENDATION:
• Genuine “Nissan Motor Oil 0W-20 SN” is
recommended.
• If the above motor is not available, use an
equivalent motor oil that matches the
above grade and viscosity. For additional
information, refer to “Engine oil and oil filter
recommendations” in the “Technical and
consumer information” section of this
manual.
COLD TIRE PRESSURE:
Refer to the Tire and Loading Information
label.
The label is typically located on the driver
side center pillar or on the driver’s door. For
additional information, refer to “Wheels and
tires” in the “Do-it-yourself” section of this
manual.
RECOMMENDED NEW VEHICLE
BREAK-IN PROCEDURE:
During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km) of
vehicle use, follow the break-in procedure
recommendations for the future reliability
and economy of your new vehicle. For ad-
ditional information, refer to “Break-in
schedule” in the “Starting and driving” sec-
tion of this manual. Failure to follow these
recommendations may result in vehicle
damage or shortened engine life.
GAS STATION INFORMATION
2018 KICKS
OWNER’S MANUAL
and MAINTENANCE INFORMATION
For your safety, read carefully and keep in this vehicle.
2018 NISSAN KICKS Owner’s Manual and Maintenance Information
P15-D
P15-D
Printing : April 2018
Publication No.:
Printed in the U.S.A.
OM18EM 0P15U0
‘18
2018 KICKS
OWNER’S MANUAL
and MAINTENANCE INFORMATION
For your safety, read carefully and keep in this vehicle.
2018 NISSAN KICKS Owner’s Manual and Maintenance Information
P15-D
P15-D
Printing : April 2018
Publication No.:
Printed in the U.S.A.
OM18EM 0P15U0
‘18
